A78282	----	The case of William Gutteridge, and other glass-makers, against passing a pattent for incorporating Sir Joseph Herne, and others, by the name of the glass-makers in the cities of London and Westminster, and ten miles compass of the same Gutteridge, William, fl. 1680. 1680 Approx. 5 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 2 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images. Text Creation Partnership, Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) : 2009-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1). A78282 Wing C1195A ESTC R213589 99899329 99899329 153091 This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission. Early English books online. (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A78282) Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 153091) Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 2346:20) The case of William Gutteridge, and other glass-makers, against passing a pattent for incorporating Sir Joseph Herne, and others, by the name of the glass-makers in the cities of London and Westminster, and ten miles compass of the same Gutteridge, William, fl. 1680. 1 sheet ([1] p.) s.n., [London : 1680?] Imprint from Wing. Reproduction of original in the Henry E. Huntington Library. Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford. Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors. EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO. EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org). The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source. Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data. Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so. Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor. The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines. Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements). Keying and markup guidelines are available at the Text Creation Partnership web site . eng Herne, Joseph, -- Sir -- Early works to 1800. Glass manufacture -- England -- Early works to 1800. Glassworkers -- England -- Early works to 1800. Broadsides -- England 2007-11 TCP Assigned for keying and markup 2008-01 SPi Global Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images 2008-02 Mona Logarbo Sampled and proofread 2008-02 Mona Logarbo Text and markup reviewed and edited 2008-09 pfs Batch review (QC) and XML conversion THE CASE OF WILLIAM GVTTERIDGE , and other Glass-makers , against Passing a Pattent for Incorporating Sir Joseph Herne , and Others , by the Name of the Glass-makers in the Cities of London and Westminster , and Ten Miles Compass of the same . THE Allegations upon which they desire their Incorporations are false ; Namely , 1st . They suggest , That by their continued Pains , Industry , long Experience in the Trade of making of Glass , and at their great Cost and Charges , they have attained to greater Knowledge in the said Manufacture than any others , and make better Glass than any heretofore made , and some never before made . Respons . Supposing this were true ; then indeed where they proper to have a Patent for their New Invention , but not to have a Corporation . Besides in the Corporation of all the Persons therein named , not above two are Glass-Makers , all the rest are Persons to whom the Trade doth not of right belong . Besides , The very Artists that now mix their Mettal , and Work their Glass , oppose their being Incorporated . 2dly . They say , if the said Manufacture were well Managed , great Quantities might be Exported , and none Imported ; whereas now great Quantities are Imported . Respons . There were indeed some years since , great Quantities Imported , but now there is little or none , because the Petitioner make better and cheaper Glass , than any heretofore Imported , and do daily Export great Quantities of Glass , and could do more , were there a Market for the same ; and many of the Petitioner Glass-Houses now stand unimployed , there being more Glass by them than they can sell . 3dly . They pretend that Joynt-Stocks are necessary for carrying on the said Manufacture . Respons . That cannot be true ; for the said Manufacture is at present managed by separate Stocks , and so managed that more is made of all sorts , than can be sold at Home or Abroad . 4thly . They say many Artist have been forced for what of Imployment here , to go beyond the Seas for Work. Respons . This they ought to prove ; but admit they should , yet if more Glass of all sorts are here made than can be vended , what can a Joynt-Stock do more ? It is true ; two Artists indeed were forced to go beyond the Seas , but it was Mr. Bowles , one of the Glass-Makers named in the intended Corporation , forced them to go , having by Promising them greater Wages than Mr. Bellingham gave , drawn them into Covenants to serve them for a time , and then not performing their promise , not releasing their Covenants , they were forced to go . 5thly . They pretend that they had agreed with most of the Proprietors Interessed in the Glass-Houses in London and Westminster , and 10 Miles distance of the same . Respons . There are but about two and twenty Glass-Houses in London and Westminster , and ten Miles distance of the same , of which , those named in the intended Corporation have but five , and the Petitioners , have twelve ; the rest may be presumed to stand Neuters . Besides most of the Glass-makers at New-Castle and Sturbridge , oppose the said Corporation ; and though their Glass-houses are fair remote , yet there Market is here in London , and they have Agents here . And so if their Allegations and Pretensions , upon which they desire to become Incorporated are false , then the Corporation or Substructure on such a false Foundation should certainly be destroyed . But further ; they have not mentioned one Inconvenience that will attend the said Incorporation , so it must be done for them and 1st . It is plain , the Corporation , if passed , will destroy Mr. Bellingham's Patents and others , which have already been granted , to some Ingenious Artists , that have travelled , and spent much Money , and mightily improved the said Manufacture in England , and to whom the pretended Incorporators are beholden for the very Engine they now Work withall ; for they are in General called Glass-makers , without any Restriction , ad no restraining Words after , can prevent their overthrowing a less powerfull than themselves . 2dly . They are not obliged to take into their Corpo-ration all Glass-makers that shall be willing to come into them . 3dly . None must come in , without great Stocks , or if they doe , those of the Corporation , who bring in Money only , will have as great a share of the Profits , as any of the said Artists , who bring in Money and Art too . 4thly . The Thing plainly speaks it self to be a Corporation of Rich Men to oppress the Artists in the said Manufacture , and will in Effect be a Monopoly , and engross that Commodity into a few Hands , and so raise the price of it , and frighten the Artists away . 
A89497	----	The true state of the businesse of glasse of all kindes, as it now standeth both in the price of glasse and materialls, how sold these fifteen yeers last past, and how formerly, the price of materialls as they are now bought, and what hath been formerly paid, with a report of the condition of all kindes of glasses. Mansell, Robert, Sir, 1568 or 9-1656. This text is an enriched version of the TCP digital transcription A89497 of text R209917 in the English Short Title Catalog (Thomason 669.f.4[7]). Textual changes and metadata enrichments aim at making the text more computationally tractable, easier to read, and suitable for network-based collaborative curation by amateur and professional end users from many walks of life. The text has been tokenized and linguistically annotated with MorphAdorner. The annotation includes standard spellings that support the display of a text in a standardized format that preserves archaic forms ('loveth', 'seekest'). Textual changes aim at restoring the text the author or stationer meant to publish. This text has not been fully proofread Approx. 6 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 1 1-bit group-IV TIFF page image. EarlyPrint Project Evanston,IL, Notre Dame, IN, St. Louis, MO 2017 A89497 Wing M513A Thomason 669.f.4[7] ESTC R209917 99868762 99868762 160629 This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission. Early English books online. (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A89497) Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 160629) Images scanned from microfilm: (Thomason Tracts ; 245:669f4[7]) The true state of the businesse of glasse of all kindes, as it now standeth both in the price of glasse and materialls, how sold these fifteen yeers last past, and how formerly, the price of materialls as they are now bought, and what hath been formerly paid, with a report of the condition of all kindes of glasses. Mansell, Robert, Sir, 1568 or 9-1656. 1 sheet ([1] p.) s.n., [London : 1641] Reproduction of the original in the British Library. Imprint from Wing. eng Glass -- Early works to 1800. Great Britain -- Commerce -- Early works to 1800. A89497 R209917 (Thomason 669.f.4[7]). civilwar no The true state of the businesse of glasse of all kindes, as it now standeth both in the price of glasse and materialls, how sold these fifte Mansell, Robert, Sir 1641 1049 1 0 0 0 0 0 10 C The rate of 10 defects per 10,000 words puts this text in the C category of texts with between 10 and 35 defects per 10,000 words. 2007-07 TCP Assigned for keying and markup 2007-08 Aptara Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images 2007-09 Mona Logarbo Sampled and proofread 2007-09 Mona Logarbo Text and markup reviewed and edited 2008-02 pfs Batch review (QC) and XML conversion The true State of the businesse of Glasse of all kindes , as it now standeth both in the price of Glasse and Materialls , how sold these fifteen yeers last past , and how formerly , The price of Materialls as they are now bought , and what hath been formerly paid , with a report of the condition of all kinds of Glasses . Ordinary Drinking-Glasses — FOr Beer , sold formerly for 7s , 4d . and never under 6s . per dozen are now , and have been for 15. yeers past sold by me , for 4s . per dozen . Ordinary Drinking-Glasses — For Wine , formerly sold for 4s . per dozen , have been , and are now constantly sold by me for 2s . 6d . per dozen . Mortar-Glasses — Formerly sold for 2s . per dozen , and are now sold by me , for 1s . 4d . per dozen . The Materialls for the making of these severall kindes of Glasses formerly bought by me for 20l. per Tun , and many times under , do now , and have for divers yeers past cost , 25. 26. 27. and 30l. per Tun. Cristall Beer-Glasses — FOrmerly brought from Venice have anciently been sold for 20. and 24s . per dozen without Covers , and are now sold by my Merchant for 10s . per dozen , and 11s . of extraordinary fashions . Cristall Wine-Glasses — Formerly made and imported from Venice , were sold for 18s . per dozen , and are now sold by my Merchant for 7s and 8s . per dozen . Cristall Beer-Glasses — Made by me ( which never were before in this Kingdome ) and of all fashions that are desired and bespoken , were heretofore sold for 18s the dozen , and are now sold for 9s the dearest . Cristall Wine-Glasses — Made by me , were formerly sold for 16s . per dozen , and are now sold for 5s 6d per dozen , and the dearest being of extraordinary fashions for 7s per dozen . Looking-Glasses and Spectacle — Glasse Plates are likewise made by me here in England , being undertaken and perfected by me with great charge and hazzard , and the expence of twenty yeers time , which work I did the rather undergo in that I understood , the State of Venice had restrained the transportation of that Commoditie rough and unpollished upon pain of confiscation , and other heavy punishments , in respect the grinding , graving , pollishing , and foyling thereof doth imploy great numbers of poor people , and afford them maintenance , which benefit doth hereby redound to the Natives of this Kingdome . Window-Glasse — Is made of English Materialls , as Ashes , &c. And though the price of Ashes , is of late yeers raised from 6. 7. and 8d . the Bushell to 9. 10. and 11d . the Bushell : And although the measure of this sort of Glasse heretofore was ever uncertain , And that the number of feet formerly contained in each Case of Glasse , did greatly differ , As sometimes the Case contained 120 feet , sometimes 140 feet , and never above 160 feet ; Now each Case in the measure is reduced to a certainty , always containing 180 feet , And the price also certain at 22s . 6d . per Case , at the Furnace doore , which containing as before , amounteth but to threehalfpence the foot at the most . All Window Glasse in this Kingdome is sold for the price aforesaid except a small quantity made by me at Woolwich , which work I erected to prevent any scarsety of Glasse that might happen in the Winter time , And notwithstanding I ever sold the Glasse made there to my great losse and hinderance . Green-Glasses — Of all sorts are made likewise of English Materialls , which works after I had sustained great losse , and undergone great vexation ▪ ( in the disposing of them ) I let to a Gentleman of known honesty , and of experience in Glasse , and a man every way responseable for any errour that can be laid to his Charge , And though I know his Materialls , and Fewell are dearer then in former times , yet I did never hear of any complaint of his carriage , nor of any price raised by him of his Glasse either in the Citie or Country , But that he sold his Glasse at the rates which were many yeers since set down by the agreement of all the Glasse-sellers , and Glasse-makers . THe whole Manufacture of Glasse with Sea-coale , and Pit-coale hath been perfected and preserved in this Kingdome by me , with the expence of above 30000l . of my Fortune , whereby the great consumption of Tymber and Wood is prevented , Many thousands of the Natives of this Realm are imployed and maintained , who ( if liberty of importation of forraign Glasse should be permitted ) must of necessity be deprived of their means of livelihood , And many others of the Natives are brought up and instructed in the Mystery of Glasse-making , besides the great summes of money paid for wages in the severall branches of the Manufacture , are retained in the Kingdome . There are also many other great benefits that accrew to the Common-Wealth from these branches of His Majesties grants to me , All which particulars , received a full and deliberate hearing , and examination in the Parliament held in Anno 21o . Jacobi Regis . And His Majesties said grant was then priviledged by a speciall Proviso in the Act of Parliament then made , with the generall approbation of both Houses , As by the said Act may appear . From the consideration of all which reasons I have taken humble boldnesse to tender my suite by way of Petition for a speedy hearing and examination of the Premisses which I beseech you , to further , when it shall be presented . 
A28779	----	A book of dravving, limning, vvashing or colouring of maps and prints: and the art of painting, with the names and mixtures of colours used by the picture-drawers. Or, The young-mans time well spent. In which, he hath the ground-work to make him fit for doing anything by hand, when he is able to draw well. By the use of this work, you may draw all parts of a man, leggs, armes, hands and feet, severally, and together. And directions for birds, beasts, landskips, ships, and the like. Moreover, you may learn by this tract, to make all sorts of colours; and to grinde and lay them: and to make colours out of colours: and to make gold and silver to write with. How also to diaper and shadow things, and to heighthen them, to stand off: to deepen them, and make them glitter. In this book you have the necessary instruments for drawing, and the use of them, and how to make artificiall pastels to draw withall. Very usefull for all handicrafts, and ingenuous gentlemen and youths. By hammer and hand all arts doe stand. This text is an enriched version of the TCP digital transcription A28779 of text R17980 in the English Short Title Catalog (Wing B3705AB). Textual changes and metadata enrichments aim at making the text more computationally tractable, easier to read, and suitable for network-based collaborative curation by amateur and professional end users from many walks of life. The text has been tokenized and linguistically annotated with MorphAdorner. The annotation includes standard spellings that support the display of a text in a standardized format that preserves archaic forms ('loveth', 'seekest'). Textual changes aim at restoring the text the author or stationer meant to publish. This text has not been fully proofread Approx. 93 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 22 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images. EarlyPrint Project Evanston,IL, Notre Dame, IN, St. Louis, MO 2017 A28779 Wing B3705AB ESTC R17980 99825051 99825051 29421 This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission. Early English books online. (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A28779) Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 29421) Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 423:2 or 1754:1) A book of dravving, limning, vvashing or colouring of maps and prints: and the art of painting, with the names and mixtures of colours used by the picture-drawers. Or, The young-mans time well spent. In which, he hath the ground-work to make him fit for doing anything by hand, when he is able to draw well. By the use of this work, you may draw all parts of a man, leggs, armes, hands and feet, severally, and together. And directions for birds, beasts, landskips, ships, and the like. Moreover, you may learn by this tract, to make all sorts of colours; and to grinde and lay them: and to make colours out of colours: and to make gold and silver to write with. How also to diaper and shadow things, and to heighthen them, to stand off: to deepen them, and make them glitter. In this book you have the necessary instruments for drawing, and the use of them, and how to make artificiall pastels to draw withall. Very usefull for all handicrafts, and ingenuous gentlemen and youths. By hammer and hand all arts doe stand. Dürer, Albrecht, 1471-1528. Jenner, Thomas, fl. 1631-1656. [2], 40 p. : ill. (plates) printed by M. Simmons, for Thomas Jenner; and are to be sold at his shop, at the south entrance of the Royal Exchange, London : 1652. Recto of titlepage has a portrait of Dürer engraved by Francis Delarame, and the title: A booke of the art of drawing according to ye order of Albert Durer, Jean Cozijn, etc. Compiled by Thomas Jenner. Later editions under title: Albert Dürer revived, or, A book of drawing. Item at reel 1754:1 incorrectly identified as Wing A875A. Reproduction of the original in the Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. eng Drawing -- Study and teaching -- 17th century. Painting -- Technique -- Early works to 1800. Glass painting and staining -- Early works to 1800. A28779 R17980 (Wing B3705AB). civilwar no A book of dravving, limning, vvashing or colouring of maps and prints: and the art of painting, with the names and mixtures of colours used [no entry] 1652 16423 11 0 0 0 0 0 7 B The rate of 7 defects per 10,000 words puts this text in the B category of texts with fewer than 10 defects per 10,000 words. 2000-00 TCP Assigned for keying and markup 2001-09 Apex CoVantage Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images 2002-06 Mona Logarbo Sampled and proofread 2002-06 Mona Logarbo Text and markup reviewed and edited 2002-07 pfs Batch review (QC) and XML conversion A BOOK OF Dravving , Limning , Washing Or Colouring of MAPS and PRINTS : AND THE Art of Painting , with the Names and Mixtures of Colours used by the Picture-Drawers . OR , The Young-mans Time well Spent . In which , He hath the Ground-work to make him fit for doing any thing by hand , when he is able to draw well . By the Use of this work , you may Draw all parts of a Man , Leggs , Armes , Hands and Feet , severally , and together . And Directions for Birds , Beasts , Landskips , Ships , and the like . Moreover You may learn by this Tract , to make all sorts of Colours ; and to Grinde and Lay them : and to make Colours out of Colours : and to make Gold and Silver to write with . How also To Diaper and Shadow things , and to heighthen them , to stand off : to Deepen them , and make them Glister . In this BOOK You have the necessary Instruments for Drawing , and the use of them , and how to make Artificiall Pastels to draw withall . Very Usefull for all Handicrafts , and Ingenuous Gentlemen and Youths . By Hammer and Hand all Arts doe stand . Infoelix qui Pauca Sapit , spernit que Doceri . LONDON . Printed by M. Simmons , for Thomas Ienner ; and are to be sold at his Shop , at the South Enterance of the Royal Exchange . 1652. THE TRVE PORTRAITVRE OF ALBERTVS DVRER ▪ THE VERIE PRIME PAINTER AND GRAVER OF GERMANY 〈…〉 〈…〉 R 〈…〉 mer ▪ pinxit ▪ Francis 〈…〉 DeLa 〈…〉 sculpsit A Book of the Art of Drawing according to ye order of Albert Durer ▪ Iean CoziIn and ▪ other Excellent Picture-makers describing ye true proportions of Men , women & Children . Are to bee sould by Thoma 〈…〉 Of necessary Instruments for Drawing . FOr Implements these are the onely necessary ones ; Pens made of Ravens quils because they are the best to draw faire , and shadow fine , and smal Charcoals , black-lead , white-lead , red-lead , a feather , and a pair of Compasses . The use of these Instruments . FOr your Charcoals , They must be slit into small 〈◊〉 peeces , and then sharpned at the point : You may chuse your Charcoals thus , they are finer grain'd then others , and smooth when they are broken , and soft , and they have a pith in the middle of them , which is the best token to know them by : The use of them is to draw over your drafts first withall , because if you should draw it false at first , you may easily wipe it out , which you cannot so well doe with any other thing . Your black-lead is to draw over that againe which you drew before in Char-coal , because this will not wipe out under your hands when you come to draw it with your pen ; and if you shall draw it with your pen before this , you Charcoal would furry your pen that you could not write with it , and besides you cannot so well mend your faults with a pen as with a black-lead , for what you doe with your pen you cannot alter , but wherein you erre with your black-lead , you mend it with your pen . The pen is the finisher of your work , with which you must be most exact , knowing it is unalterable , therefore you must be sure your worke is right before you draw it with your pen . Black-chalk is to draw on blew-paper with , which is not to be used till you be pretty perfect in drawing . White lead is to doe the lightest parts of that you draw before with black Chalk . Your Compasses are not to be used constantly , for they will spoyle you that you cannot draw without them , but onely when you have 〈◊〉 your drawing with Char-coal , you may measure if it be every 〈◊〉 right , before you draw it with your black-lead . The Fether is to wipe out the Char-coal where it is drawne false , before you draw it again , and this you must be sure to doe , or else you will be confounded with variety of stroakes , so that you shall not know which is the right stroake . Having these Implements in readinesse , The 〈◊〉 practise of a Drawer must be readily to Draw Circles , Ovals , Squares , Piramids , &c. And the reason of exercising you first in these , is , because in these you will be fitted for the performance of other bodies ; as for example , your Circle will teach you to draw Sphericall bodies , as the Sun , Moon and Stars , and the most Flowers , as the Rose , Dazy , &c. the most Vessels , as Cups , Basons , Boles , Bottles , &c. the Square will fit you for all manner of comportliments , plots , buildings , &c. your Piramids for sharpe Steeples and Turrets , &c. your Ovall for Faces , Shields , &c. for it is impossible to draw the body of a Picture before you can draw the Abstract . When you can do these , practise to draw Pots , Bals , Candlesticks , Pillars , a Cherry with a leafe , &c. but be sure you be perfect in the out-stroake , before you goe to draw the shadows within . How to make Artificiall Pastiles to draw withall . TAke a great Chalk-stone , and make deep furrows , or holes in them , two of three inches long , and so wide that you may lay in each a quill , then take white Chalk ground very fine , temper it with oyl or wort , and a little new milk , and to make pap thereof , then poure it into the furrows of Chalk , and in a short time you may take them out and roul them up , or let them lye in them till they are quite dry , and then take them and scrape them into a handsom form ; you may temper lake with burnt Alablaster for a red , and so for others ; having regard to some colours that will binde over-hard , which must have a little water put to them in their grinding . Directions in Drawing of a Face . FOr the better assisting you in the drawing of a face , you may make use of this direction ; when you have drawn the circle of the Face ( which you must doe at first with a plain 〈◊〉 line , without making any bendings in or out , till you come towards the finishing of it ) you may make a stroak downe from that place of the forehead which is even with the chin , coming down where you should place the middle of the Nose , and the middle of the mouth ; observe that this stroak must be struck that way which the Face should turne , either to one side , or strait right , and then this stroak will exceedingly helpe you to place the features rightly , that they may not stand all awry , but directly one under another ; when you have made this stroak , you may make another stroake acrosse to guide you for the even placing of the eyes ; that one be not higher then another . Now if the face turne downwards , the stroake must be so struck that the eyes may turne answerable with the face downward , when you have done that make anòther stroake for the length of the Nose , where the end of the Nose should come , and another stroak for the mouth , that it be not made crooked , still observing to make all the stroakes to turne one way , either up or downe , according as the face turns ; for if the face turne up or downe , the Eyes , Nose , and Mouth must turne with it : when you have made these stroakes rightly , proceed to the placing of the features as in the rules before . There is this three-fold equall proportion usually observed in a Face ; 1 From the top of the fore-head to the eye-brows ; 2 From the 〈◊〉 - brows to the bottome of the nose ; 3 From thence to the bottom of the chin : but this proportion is not constant , for sometimes the fore-head is lower then at other times , and some 〈◊〉 noses longer , other shorter , and therefore this rule is not alwayes to be observed , but onely in a well proportioned Face . The distance between the two eyes is Iust the length of one eye , if it be a full face , but if it turne any thing aside then that distance is lesned accordingly ; the nostrill ought not to come out further then the 〈◊〉 of the eye in any face , and the mouth must be placed alwayes between the eyes and the chin , Iust under the mouth . Further Directions about a Face . BEcause the greatest difficulty , and principall part of this Art lies in the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of a Face , I thought good to adde these further Directions to make 〈◊〉 the more perfect in the drawing of it . 1 If you would rightly draw a Face , that it may resemble the patterne you draw 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 : you must in the first place take notice of the Visiognomy or 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 , 〈◊〉 it be long or round , fat , or lean , big , or little , that so you may be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 , to draw the right visiognomy , or bignesse of the Face , which 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 face you shall perceive the cheeks to make the side of the face to swell out , 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 make the face look as if it were square ; if a lean face the Iaw bones will 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in , and the face will look long and 〈◊〉 ; if it be neither 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 , nor too 〈◊〉 , the face will be round for the most part . 〈◊〉 you draw the utmost Circumference of a face , you must take in the head and all with 〈◊〉 , otherwise you may be deceived in drawing the true bignesse of a face . Generall Rules for the Practise of Drawing . 1. HAving your charcoal neatly sharpned , you must at the first in drawing of a face , lightly draw the out-stroak , or circumference of the face Iust according to the bignes of your pattern , making it to stand fore-right , or to turn upvvards or dovvnvvards according to your patterne , then make some little touches vvhere the features as the Eyes , Nose , Mouth , Chinne , should be placed , not drawing them exactly at the 〈◊〉 , and having thus exactly pointed out the places where the features should bee : begin to draw them more exactly , and so proceed , till the face be finished , and then make the hair , beard , and other things about it ; In making of a side face you need not at first exactly draw the nose , mouth and chin that stand in the outmost line , but onely make it at first but a bare circumference , turning this way , or that way , according as the pattern doth , and then make the mouth , nose and chin to come out afterwards , in the right places and Iust proportion . 2 The Circles , Squares and Triangles that are made in the Print , about a face , are to guide your apprehensions the more readily to the framing of one , that being as it were led by a line , you may the more easily know where abouts to place the features , as eyes , nose , mouth , &c. which when you are able to doe without them ; these are of no use at all , but onely to guide you at the first to the placing of them . 3 In the third place you must be sure to place the musles in their right and proper places ; by the musles I meane all the shadows that are caused by some dents , or swellings in the face , and be able to find out the reason of every musle , that so you may proceed to work with the more Iudgement ; you shall perceive the musles most in an old and withered face , and you must first draw the principall of them , and then you may the more easily draw the lesser within ; you must be very exact in the right placing of them , or else you spoyle your draft be it never so good . 4 Observe to make the shadows rightly , and be sure not to make them to darke , where they should be faint , for if you doe you can never recover it to make it light again , and 〈◊〉 the whole face will be mar'd , and appear unhandsome ; the shadows are generally fainter and lighter in a faire face then in a swarthy complexion : when you have finisht your draft , you will do very well to give here and there some hard touches with your pen where the shadows are darkest , which will adde a great life and grace to your drawing . When you have finisht the face , then come to the ears and haire , wherein you must observe this rule , having drawne the out-line of it , you must first draw the principal Curles , or master-strokes in the haire , which will guide you with ease to doe the 〈◊〉 curls which have their dependance on them ; always make your curle to bend , and 〈◊〉 exactly according to the patterne , that they may lye loose and safte , and not look as if they were stiffe , stubborne and unplyable : When you have drawne the curls rightly you must in the last place strike in the loose haires which hang carelesly out of the curls . When you can draw a face ( which is the principall thing in the Art ) then goe to hands and arms , legs and feet , and so to full bodies of men and women , which are the most difficult things , which if you can attaine to performe , with a well grounded 〈◊〉 , nothing then will be difficult to you , but will be most easie as flowers , birds , beasts , 〈◊〉 , or any other thing that is to be drawne by hand . Of Drawing Hands and Feet . To foreshorten the Hands . You must draw the perpendicular lynes from the Hands seene slopewise or a syde marked with their proportions and measures 1. 2. 3. 4. upon which the shining would so cast them downe vnto the Dyagonall marked at the ende with O. and then carry the reflexion of them levelly from the intersections of those perpendicular lynes in the Dyagonall aforesaid untill you come vnder the place of the foreshortened Hands therby to gett the shaddowe from which shaddow you must perpendicularly rayse perpendicular lines vntill then may meete or intersect levell lines drawne also from the first hand seene asyde , so will the intersections of the said lase named levell lines and raysed perpendiculars give the foreshortened Hands A. B. C. D. E. Even as the Eye would see the Sydewise or sloping Hande , So shall the workman see the Hand foreshortened by meanes of the said shaddow . The actions and postures of the hand are so various , that I can give you no certain rule for the drawing of them , onely take this for a generall , when you first draw it with charcoal , you must not draw it exactly , that is to say , to make all the Ioynts or 〈◊〉 , or other things , to appear but onely lightly and faintly ; to touch out the bignes of the hand , and the manner of the turning of it with faint touches , and 〈◊〉 with hard stroakes ; then if you have done that right , part the fingers asunder , or close , according to your pattern , with the like faint stroake ; then marke that place where any of the fingers do stand out from the others , and make a faint resemblance of it : having so done , if you perceive your draft to be 〈◊〉 , proceed to draw it more perfectly , and make the bending of the Ioynts , the rist-bone , and other principal things , somewhat exactly . And lastly goe over it again , and draw every small bending or swelling of the fingers , and make the nails , knuckles and veins , so many of them as appear , and every thing else that you can discerne . Observe this rule in all your drawings , that before you come to draw your draft with Black-lead , or other thing , you must blow off the loose dust of the coal off from your drawing , or faintly to whiske over your drawing with a fether , that so you may leave it faint , so that you must but Iust perceive your stroakes , and by this means you will the better see how to draw it againe with your black-lead , otherwise you would not be able to discern your stroaks . For the proportions of a hand , you have it sufficiently set downe in the print , by lines and figures , which shews the equalities of proportion in a hand , and how many equall measures there are in it , which you should endeavour to be acquainted with , that so you might know when a hand is well proportioned , with Iust and equall distances ; but I would you should take notice of this rule , or exception , according as the hand turns one way or other , the proportions must be shortned , according as they appear to the eye , as you shall see in the fore-shortning of the hand in the print ; so much as the hand turns away from our sight , so much it looses of its ordinary proportion , and is made to shorten unto that proportion that the eye Iudges of it , nay sometimes a whole finger , sometimes two or three , or more , is lost to our sight , by the turning of the hand another way from us , and so they must be holy left out , and not made . For feet there is not so much difficulty in the making of them , as in hands ; and in drawing of them , you must proceed to the same way that was shewed for the making of hands . When you can draw hands and feet pretty well , then goe to arms and legs , wherein is little difficulty ; when you can draw the hands and feet , afterwards proceed to whole bodies . Of Drawing the whole body rules to be observed . 1 IN all your drawings you must draw it at first with your coal , but very lightly and faintly , for then you may the easier mend it if you draw amisse . 2 In the drawing of a body , you must begin with the head , and be sure to give a Iust proportion and bignesse to that , because all the body must be proportioned according to the head . 3 At the first drawing of the body with your coal , you must draw nothing perfect or exact before you see that the whole draft is good , and then you may finish one thing after another as curiously as you can . The proportion of a Man to be seene standing forward . In this figure is to be observed that from the top of the head to the sole of the feete , is 8. measures of the head , and the head 4 lengthes of the nose , the which measures are upon a perpendicular line . 〈◊〉 the head figured with 1. the second to the breasts . 2. the 3d. to the navel 3. the 4th . to the privities . 4. the 5th . to the midle of that thigh 5. the 6th . to the lower part of the knee 6. the 7th . to the small of the leg. 7. the eight reaching to the heele & sole of the feet . 8. Likewise the same 8. measures are to be observed from the end of the fingers of the right hand , to the end of the left hand fingers : the breadth of the shoulders containeth 2 measures of the head , & the breadth of the hips 2 measures of the face as appeareth in the vnshadowed figure . 5 In your drawing be sure you place the paralel Ioynts , sinews and musles , directly opposite in a strait even line one against the other , as the shoulders , the arme-pits , the wast , the hips , the knees , and so every thing else , that one may not be higher or lower then the other , that the body may not seem crooked or deformed , but every paralel Ioynt bend &c. may directly answer the other that is opposite thereunto ; and to this end you may strike a strait stroak directly crosse the shoulders to direct you to place them even and strait one against the other , so also you may do in other places , as the arm-pits , wast , hips , thighes , or any other place , where you should place one thing even with the other ; for you must have the same care in all parts of the body , as you have in one place where any bendings or members of the body have , or do require a direct opposition one against the other , you may make use of this help and direction . 6 Observe that if the body turne one way or other , then this stroake must be so struck , so that it may answer the bowing of the body , as if the body stoop a little downwards , the stroak must be struck sloaping or sideways , and so you must then make the shoulders and other things which should stand strait against one another , to be somewhat higher then one another , so that that side that the body turns upon the shoulders and other things that otherwise should be placed even one against the other must be made somewhat lower the other side , more or lesse , according as the body stoops more or lesse . 7 As you are to be carefull in the right placing of all level or paralel Ioynts , bendings , sinews and 〈◊〉 , so you must look exactly to all perpendicular Ioynts , musles , &c. that is when you have drawn the outmost draft , and are come to draw the Ioynts and musles that are contained within the body , you must be as exact in placing them , that are directly Iust under one another , as you are in placing them even , that are opposite one to the other ; and to this end that you may place things exactly perpendicular , that is in a strait line under one another ; you may strike a strait perpendicular line from the throat pit downe to the privities , Iust in the middle or seam of the body , where you may discerne the parting of the ribs , and so from thence strait downe to the feet , as you shall see in the print of the man , the line will direct you to place things evenly perpendicular , that the body may stand strait upright , and not appear crooked and awry . 8 Take notice of the bowings and bendings that are in the body , to make that part that is opposite to that which bends to answer to it in bending with it , as if one side of the body bend in , the other side must stand out answerable to the bending in of the other side , if the back bend out the belly must bend in , if the belly come in , the back must stick out , if the breech stick out , the thigh that answers to it in opposition , must come in : so also , in any other part of the body ; as if the knee bend out , the hams that answer to it must come in , and so for any other Ioynts in the body this rule must be exactly observed , otherwise the body will be made grosly and absurdly , and will be very gowty without any proportion . 9 Indeavour to make all things of an equall proportion and bignes , not to make one arme bigger then the other , or one leg bigger then the other , or one breast bigger then the other , or any one part of the body in an unIust proportion , but as every thing must answer to the bignes of the face , so one member must answer to another in bignes , that so there may be a sweet harmony in the parts of the body , that it may not have broad shoulders , and a thin slender waste , a raw-bone arme , and a thick gowty leg , or any part disproportionable from the other , unlesse it be so that any part of the body doth turne awry from our eye , as if the one arme should be seen side-wayes , and the other fore-right then the one arme must be made so much less then the other by how much it turns away from our sight , and appears lesse to our eyes , and so if one legg be seen full or fore-right , and the other legg be seen side-wayes , then it must be made so much lesse then the other , by how much it turnes away from your sight . The proportion of a woman to be seene afore . The Proportion & measure of a woman to be seene afore , is like the 〈◊〉 , excepting that that measure of the breadth betwene the shoulders of the woman 〈◊〉 but 2 lengths of thē face , as appeares by that pricked line athwart the breasts and from that Hippes to the 〈◊〉 . 2 lengths of the head , marked with an other crosse pricked line ; which maketh the difference betwene the man & that Woman and you must make the Armes Thighes & Legges fatter and plumper then that mans , euen to that wrists & 〈◊〉 Allso you must not make that muscles as of that man . The Whole figure of Mans body foreshortened a litle & seene by the Sole of the Foot , the Back upwards . Having 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 at length by the Syde , the back upwards You must also observe the measures as 〈◊〉 in the levell 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 . 23. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. and 〈◊〉 up the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and proportions by the 〈◊〉 lynes vpon the perpendicular which 〈◊〉 the 〈◊〉 figure and the Shadow , of the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 . 〈◊〉 to make the figure of the Shadow you 〈◊〉 draw a Lyne 〈◊〉 in 〈◊〉 midse of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 therin 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 & measures marked 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the second 2 for 〈◊〉 Shoulders and so consequently of the rest unto 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 measure . And to make 〈◊〉 shadow as 〈◊〉 Sonne 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 upon the Back . And to make the 〈◊〉 you must 〈◊〉 perpendicular lynes . proceeding from the figure stretched at length . & seene a syde by the coresponding 〈◊〉 of which and 〈◊〉 levell 〈◊〉 me for shortened lynes and 〈◊〉 of the same seene by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the feet , the back upwards is described as appeareth in the 〈◊〉 of this present 〈◊〉 . 11 Observe the exact distance of one thing from another , how far distant they are , that you may be exact in your draft , and perfectly imitate your patterne . 12 Observe how much one part of the body sticks out beyond the other , or falls in within the other , or whether it stands even with the other , and to this end you may strike a small stroake downe from the top of the shoulder along by the out-side of the body strait down to the feet , and this will direct you how farre one part of the body should stand out beyond the other , and how far other parts should come in ; let nothing be done without a rule and Iudgement . 13 Let nothing be done hard , sharpe or cutty , that is , let not the bendings that are either in the body , or in the Ioynts be made as if they were 〈◊〉 or cuts in the flesh , with sharpe corner stroakes , but finely round and sloaping , like bendings , and not like cuts in the body : this is a common fault among learners which they cannot chuse but commit & 〈◊〉 you should be the more careful of it by imitating your patterne exactly , in the 〈◊〉 manner of making every stroake and touch , and indeavour to find out the ground and reason of every small stroak and touch that is given , for nothing must be done without Iudgement . Now I have given you directions for the drawing of the body ; I would in the next place give some instructions , wherby you might have some Iudgement in a good draft . Of Perspective Proportion . PErspective Proportion differeth much from the former , for according to the 〈◊〉 of the eye from a thing it Iudgeth what proportion it hath , as if one part 〈◊〉 the body come neerer to the eye , then the other , it is made so much begger then the other part of the body , which turns away from the eye , as if one legg stand behind another ; the formost legg that comes first to the eye must be made somewhat bigger , and longer 〈◊〉 the other , because the eye Iudgeth so of it ; and so it is for any other part of the body , the 〈◊〉 must be lessened , according to the distance that it is from the eye . The second thing in good drafts , is gracefull posture , and proper action , that is , that the true naturall motion of every thing be exprest in the life and spirit of it , that is , to quicken the life by art , as in a King to expresse the greatest 〈◊〉 , by putting him in such a gracefull posture , as may move the spectators with reverence to behold him ; and so to make a Souldier , to draw him in such a posture , as may betoken the greatest courage , boldnes and valour ; and so to make a Clowne in the most detestable and clownish posture ; and so for every thing , that the inward affection and disposition of the mind be most lively exprest in the outward action and gesture of the body . Now that you might attaine to a skill herein ; I would counsell you diligently to observe the works of famous Masters , who doe use to delight themselves in seeing those that fight at cuffs , to observe the eyes of privy murtherers , the courage of 〈◊〉 , the actions of Stage-players , the intising allurements of Courtesans , and those who are led to execution , to mark the contracting of their brows , the motions of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 , and the carriage of their whole body , to the end they might 〈◊〉 them to the life in their drawings and works . The third thing in good drast is , loosnesse , that is , that the body be not made 〈◊〉 in any part , but that every Ioynt may have its proper and naturall bending , so as it may with greatest life express your intention , that the figure may not seem lame , and the Ioynts stiffe , as if they were not plyable or capable of bending , but every Ioynt and limbe may have its proper and natural moisture , according as it may best suite with , and become the posture in which the figure is sett The fourth thing in drawing is fore . shortning , which is to take things as they appeare to our eye , and not to draw the full length and proportion of every part , but to make it shorter , by reason the full length and bignes is hid from our fight ; as if I would draw a ship standing fore-right , there can appear but onely her fore-part , the rest is hid from our sight , and therefore cannot be exprest ; or if I would draw a horse standing fore-right , looking full in my face , I must of necessity foreshorten him behind , because his sides and flanks appear not unto me , wherefore observe this rule ; That you ought rather to imitate the visible proportion of things , then the proper and naturall proportion of them , for the eye and the understanding together being directed by the perspective art , ought to be the guide , measure and Iudge of drawing and painting . The fifth thing in good drawing is , That every thing be done by the guidance of nature , that is , that nothing be exprest , but what doth accord and agree with nature in every point ; as if I would make a man turning his head over his shoulder , I must not make him to turne more then nature will permit , not any thing must be foarst beyond the limits of nature , neither must any thing be made to come short of nature , but nature though it is not to be strained beyond its centure , yet it must be quickned to the highest pitch of it , as if I would expresse a King , I must expresse him in the most MaIestick posture that I can invent ; and if I would draw a Clown , I must draw him in the most clownish action that can be , yet must neither the one nor the other be drawne in such a posture as will not agree with the motion of nature , that is , to draw such a posture which a man cannot imitate with his naturall body , and so for any thing else whatsoever nature must be the patterne of all kind of drafts . Of Drawing Garments . WHen you are able to draw naked drafts well , you will finde a matter of no great difficulty to doe bodies with garments upon them , yet neverthelesse it will not be amiste to give you some directions about the same . 1 First , you must draw the outmost lines of your garments lightly , and in this you must be very carefull , for the whole grace of a picture lies in the outmost draft , and not in the curious work within . Now that you might performe this exactly , you must suite your garments to the body , and make them bend with the body , and not to make them strait there where the body should bend ; if you would rightly fit the garments to the body , you must observe which part of the body bends in or out , that the garment may answer to the body upon the least turning one way or oother the garment may turne with it ; you must also observe where the body should come if it were naked , and there draw your garments in the right place , making it bend according as the Ioynts and limbs of the body should bend : Excellent workmen doe make the body appeare plainly thorow the garments , especially where the garment lyes close and flat upon the body , and indeed where ever the body bends in or sticks 〈◊〉 in any one part more then other , it should be showne in a plaine and vifible manner through the garments , which thing you must take notice of in your drawing , either by a patterne , or by the life . The proportion and measure of a Childe standing forward containeth but fine measures of the head , to 〈◊〉 3 from the 〈◊〉 of the head to the priuities , 〈◊〉 two more in the 〈◊〉 and legges , as 〈◊〉 in this figure , and the breadtis 〈◊〉 the 〈◊〉 is the lonath of a head and a halfe , as apeares by a 〈◊〉 pricked line marked 〈◊〉 and the 〈◊〉 of the body aboue the 〈◊〉 marked also with a crosse pricked line is the 〈◊〉 of one head . the breadth of the vpper part of the 〈◊〉 marked with a priked line oposite to the 〈◊〉 , is the third part of two lengths of the head . the knee marked with a small 〈◊〉 pricked line and a little † at both ends is of the Iust length as betweene the eye and chin , the small of that leg and the brawne of the arme are of the thicknes of the 〈◊〉 . 2 You must draw the greatest folds first , and so stroake your greater folds into lesse , and be sure you let one fold crosse another . Directions for the bestowing of your lights . 1 LEt all your lights be placed one way in the whole work , as if the light fals side-wayes on your picture , you must make the other side which is furthest from the light , darkest , and so let your lights be placed altogether , on one side , and not confusedly to make both sides alike lightned , as if it stood in the midst of many lights , for the body 〈◊〉 otherwise be lightned equall in all places . 1 Because the light doth not with all its brightnesse illuminate any more then that part that is directly opposite unto it . 2 The second reason is taken from the nature of our eye , for the first part of the body coming unto the eye with a bigger angle is seen more distinctly ; but the second part 〈◊〉 further off comes to the eye in a lesser angle , and being lesser lightned 〈◊〉 not so plainly seen as the first . By this rule if you are to draw two or three men standing together , one behind another , though all of them receive equally the light , yet the second being further from the eye must be made darker , and the third more darke . 2 That part of the body must be made lightest , which hath the light most directly opposite to it , as if the light be placed above the head , then the top of the head must be made lightest , the shoulders next lightest , and so it must loose by degrees . 3 That part of the body that stands furthest out , must be made lightest , because it comes neerer to the light , and the light looseth so 〈◊〉 of its brightnesse , by how much any part of the body bends inward , because those parts that 〈◊〉 out doe hinder the lustre and sull brightness of the light from those parts that fall any thing more inward , therefore by how much one part of the body sticks out beyond the other it must 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 so much lighter then the other , or if it fal more inward , it must be made 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 . Sattins and Silks , and all other bright-shining stuffs , have certain bright 〈◊〉 , exceeding light with sudden bright glances , especially where the light falls brightest , and so the reflections are lesse bright , by how much the garment fals more inward from the light . The like is seen in armour , 〈◊〉 pots , or any glittering mettals , you shall see a sudden brightnesse in the middle or centure of the light , which discovers the shining nature of such things . Of Landskips . LAndskip is expressing of land by hils , woods , castels , seas , valleys , ruines , rocks , Cities , towns , &c. and there is not so much difficulty in 〈◊〉 , as in drawing figures therefore take onely these rules for it . 1 The best way of making Landskips is to make them shoot away one 〈◊〉 lower then another , which hath been practised by our best workmen of 〈◊〉 , but 〈◊〉 have run into a contrary error , by making the Landskip mount up higher and 〈◊〉 , till it reach up a great heigth , that it appears to touch the clouds , as if they had stood at the bottome of a 〈◊〉 , when they took the Landskip which is altogether improper , for we can discerne no prospect at the bottom of an hill , but the most proper way of making a Landskip , is to make the neerest hill highest , and so to make the rest that are further off , to shoot away under that , that the Landskip may appear to be taken from the top of an hill . 2 You must be very carefull to lessen every thing proportionable to their distance , expressing them bigger or lesse according to the distance they are from the eye . 3 You must make all your lights fal one way , both upon the ground and trees , and all things else , and all the 〈◊〉 must be cast one way . So likewise you must observe the motions of the Sea , by representing the 〈◊〉 agitations of the waters , as likewise in rivers , the flashings of the waters upon boats and ships floating up and downe the waters , you must also represent the motions of waters falling downe from an high place , but especially when they fall upon some rock or stones , where you shall see them spiriting up in the aire and sprinkling all about . Also clouds in the aire require to have their motions now gathered together with the winds , now violently condensated into haile , thunder-bolts , lightning , rain , and such like ; finally , you can make nothing which requireth not his proper motions , according unto which it ought to be represented : observe this rule that all your motions which are caused by the wind must be made to move one way , because the wind can blow but one way at once . Thus much for directions to those who are contented to take some pains to attain so noble a science ; Now there follow certain directions for those that are unskilful , and have not spare time sufficient to spend in the practise of those directions , yet are desirous upon occasions , & for certain ends to take the copies of some lesser prints or pictures which they oftentimes may meet withall , the which are very facile and easie to be performed . How to take the perfect Draft of any picture . TAke a sheet of the finest white paper you can get , Venice paper is the best , 〈◊〉 it all over with cleane linsed oyle on one side of the paper , then wipe the oyle off from the paper as clean as you can , then let the paper stand and dry , otherwise it will spoyl a printed picture , by the soaking thorow of the oyle ; having thus prepared your paper , lay it on any printed or painted picture , and you may see perfectly thorow and so with black lead pen , you may draw it over with ease : after you have thus drawne the picture on the oyled paper , put it upon a sheet of cleane white paper , and with a little sticke pointed , or which is better 〈◊〉 a feather , taken out of a Swallows wing , draw over your stroakes which you drew upon the oyled paper , and so you shall have the same very prettily and neatly , and exactly drawne upon the white paper which you may set out with colours at your own pleasure . Another way . HAving drawn the Picture , take the oyled paper , and put it upon a sheet of clean white paper , and 〈◊〉 over the drawing with a pen , then from the clean sheet that was pricked , pownse 〈◊〉 upon another , that it take some small coal , powder it fine , and wrap it in a 〈◊〉 of some fine linnen , and binde it up therein loosly , and clap it lightly over all the 〈◊〉 line by little and little , and afterwards draw it over againe by little and little , and afterwards draw it over againe with a pen or pensell , or what you please . Another way . TAke a sheet of fine white paper , and rub it all over on one side with black-lead , or else with vermilion tempered with a little fresh butter , then lay this coloured side upon a sheet of white paper , then lay the picture you would copy out upon the other side of the coloured paper , and with a small pointed sticke , or with a Swallows quill goe over all the 〈◊〉 of your picture , and then you shall have your stroakes very prettily drawn on the white paper . Another way . TAke a piece of white Lanthorne horne , and lay it upon your picture , then with a hard nipt pen made with a Ravens quill draw the stroake of your picture upon the horne , and when it is dry , breath upon the horne twice or thrice , and presse it hard upon a peice of white paper a little wetted , and the picture you drew upon the horn , will stick fast upon the paper . Another way . TAke 〈◊〉 sheet of white paper , rub it all over with fresh butter , and dry it in by 〈◊〉 fire ; then rub one side of it all over with lamp-black or lake , or any other colour finely ground : lay this paper upon a sheet of 〈◊〉 paper with the coloured sid downwards , and upon it lay the picture you would copy out , and trace the stroak over with a fether of a Swallows wing , and you shall have your desire . Another way . TAke some lake , and grinde it fine , and temper it with lin-seed oyle , and afterwards with a pen draw with this mixture , instead of inke , all the out-stroake of any paper picture , also the musles , then wet the contrary side of the picture , and presse it hard upon a sheet of cleane white paper , and it will leave behind it all 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the said picture that you drew over it . Another way . TAke Printers blacke , grinde it fine , and temper it with faire water , and with a pen dipt therein draw over the master stroakes , and out-lines of the musles , wet then a faire paper with a spunge , or other thing , and clap the paper upon it , pressing it very hard thereupon , and you shall finde the stroakes you drew left upon the faire paper . Another most easie way . LAy a paper print upon a bright glasse window , or paper window that is oyled with the back-side of the print upon the window , then lay a clean paper upon the print , and draw the out-stroaks upon the paper , which may visibly see you , it being sett up against the light , and if you wil shadow it siner you may . An easie way to lessen any Picture that is to draw a picture from another in a lesser Compasse . 〈◊〉 take a ruler and a black-lead plummet made an even square ; now , you must divide 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 into divers equal parts with a pair of compasses , and draw lines with a 〈◊〉 and black lead plummet quite over the picture , make also other lines acrosse , so that 〈◊〉 picture may be divided into equall squares , then take a faire paper and make 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 upon it as there is in the picture ; you may make them as little as 〈◊〉 will , but be sure they are equall in number with those in the Picture , having 〈◊〉 drawne 〈◊〉 the picture and paper into squares ; take a black-lead pen and draw the picture by little and little , passing from square to square , and in what part of the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 picture lies , in that same square put the drawing , and in the same place of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 upon the paper untill you have finished the whole , then draw it over with a pen , in which second drawing of it over you may easily mend any fault ; when it is 〈◊〉 it over with the crumme of white bread , and it will take off all the black - 〈◊〉 stroakes , and your draft onely will remaine faire upon the paper . An easie way to take the naturall and lively shape of the leafe , of any hearbe or tree , which thing passeth the art of man to imitate with Pen or Pensell . FIrst take the leafe that you would have , and gently bruise the ribs and veines on the back-side of it , afterwards wet that side with linsed oyle , and then presse it hard upon a peice of cleane white paper , and so you shall have the perfect figure of the said leafe with every veine thereof so exactly exprest , as being lively colored , it would seem to be truly naturall . Of Washing Maps or Prints . WAshing Pictures is nothing else but the setting them out with colours , and for the effecting hereof you must be provided with store of pensels , some smaller The 3. whole Anatomique figures Before Behind & Sydewise . In these three whole Anatomiques are represented the Muscles aswell Before and Behynde as Sydewyse . And the sayd Figures are made by such observations and measures as is before herein declared . And you may note that the draught of the Figure for before serueth also for the Figure 〈◊〉 So as in such 〈◊〉 that in the makeing of the one you also 〈◊〉 made the other taking the opposyte of the 〈◊〉 and the 〈◊〉 spaces which are betweene the 〈◊〉 are the 〈◊〉 measures and 〈◊〉 of the Head which are to be obserued in Humane 〈◊〉 . 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 , Allum-water , Gum-water , Water made of Sope ashes , size , varnish , 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of good colours well prepared . How to make Allum Water , and the 〈◊〉 of it . TAke a quart of faire water , and boyle it in a quarter of a pound of Allum , seeth it untill the Allum be desolved , then let it stand a day , and so make use of it . With this water you must wet over your pictures that you intend to colour , for it will keep the colours from sinking into the paper , also it will adde a lustre unto the colours , and make them shew fairer , and it will also make them continue the longer without fading ; you must let the paper dry of it selfe after you have once wetted it , before you either lay on your colours , or before you wet it againe , for some paper will need to be wet foure or five times . If you intend to varnish your pictures , after you have coloured them you must first size them , that is , rub them over with white starch with a brush , instead of doing them with Allum water , but be sure you size it in every place , or else the varnish will sinke thorow : Note , if your varnish be too thick you must put into it so much Turpentine oyle as will make it thinner . How to make Gum-water . TAke cleane water a pint , and put it into three ounces of the clearest and whitest Gum araback , and let it stand untill the gum be desolved , and so mix all your colours with it ; if the gum water be very thick it will make your colours shine , but then your colours will not work so easily , therefore the best is , that the water be not 〈◊〉 too thick nor too thin . How to make Lime water . TAke unsack't lime , and cover it with water , an inch thick , let it stand so one night , in the 〈◊〉 power off the clear water and reserve it in a cleane thing for your use ; with this water you must temper your sap green when you would have a blew colour of it . How to make water of Soap-Ashes . STeep Soap-ashes a night in rain-water , in the morning powre off the clearest . This water is to temper you Brazil withall . How to make Size TAke a quantity of blew , and let it steep a night in water , to make it the readier to melt in the morning , then set it on a coal of fire to melt , which done , to try whether it be neither too stiffe nor too weak , for the meanest is best , take a spoonfull thereof and set it in the aire to cool , or fill a musle shell with it , and let it swim in cold water , to cool the sooner if it be too stiffe when it is cold put more water to it , if too weake then put more glew into it , and when you would use it , make it lukewarme , and so use it . This is to wet your cloaths in if you intend to paist your maps or pictures upon cloath , or you may take white starch and wet your sheet , and wring it out , and so straine it upon a frame , or nail it stretched upon a wall or 〈◊〉 , and so paist your maps or pictures thereon . The Names of all the Colours Pertaining to Washing . Blews . Blew-bice . Indico . Blew-verditer . Reds . Vermillion . Lake . Red-lead . Whites . Ceruse . White-lead . pickt . Blacks . Printers Black . Ivory Burnt . Greens . Verdigreece . Varditer-green . Sap-green . Copper-green . Yellows . Yellow-berries . Saffron . Light-Masticote . Browns . Spanish Brown . Umber or Haire Colour . Of the tempering your Colours . SOme colours must be grownd , and some washt : such colours as are to be grownd you must first grind very fine , in faire water , and so let them stand and dry , and afterwards grind them again in Gum-water . Those that are to be washt must be thus used . TAke a quantity of the colour you would have washt , and put it into a shell , or earthen dish , then cover it all over with pure faire water , and so stir up and downe for a while together with your hand , or a wooden spoon till the water be all coloured , then let the colour sinke a little to the bottome , and before it be quite setled , pour out the top into another dish , and so fling the bottome away , and let the other stand till it be quite setled , and then powre off the water , and mixe it with gum-water , and so use it . What Colours must be Grownd , and what washt . Grownd . Indico . Lake . Ceruse . White-lead . Spanish-Browne . Vmber . Printers Black . Ivory Burnt . Washt . Blew-Bice . Blew-Verditer . Green-Verditer . Red-lead . Light-Masticoat . Steept . These must be steept only till the water be sufficiently coloured . Verdigreece in Vineger . Sap-green in Vineger . Yellow-berries in Allum water . Saffron in faire water . Copper-green is made of Copper . How to make Copper-Green . TAke Copper plates , or any shreds of Copper , and put distilled Vineger to them , set them in a warme place untill the Vinegar become blew , then powre that 〈◊〉 into another pot , well leaded , and poure more Vineger upon the Copper plates againe , letting that also stand untill it be of a blew colour , then poure it unto the former liquor , this may you doe so often untill you have liquor enough , then let that liquor stand in the Sun , or upon a slow fire till it be thick enough , and it will be an excellent green . The use and nature of every particular Colour . 1 BLew-Bice is the most excellent Blew next to Ultermarine , which is too good to wash withall , and therefore I leave it out here , and put in Blew-bice , which will very well 〈◊〉 in the steed of it , and indeed you may leave out both and use Smelt in the 〈◊〉 of them , but that it will not worke so well as Bise ; no Bise is too good to use upon all occasions , but onely when you intend to bestow some cost and pains upon a piece , otherwise you may use no other blew in your worke then blew Verditer , with which you may make a pretty good shift without any other blew , I meane in ordinary worke . 2 Indico is a dark blew , and is used principally to shadow with upon your other blew Indico , and yellow berries mixed together make a dark green to shadow other greens with in the darkest places . 3 Blew Verditer is a very bright pleasant blew , and the easiest to worke with in water : it is somewhat inclining to a green , and being mixed with yellow-berries it makes a good green : this blew is most used . 4 Verdigreece is a good green , but subIect to decay : when it is 〈◊〉 upon the paper it wil be of a lighter colour then it is when you lay it 〈◊〉 on , therefore to preserve it from that fault , put some sap green amongst it to dissolve in it , and it will make it keep its colour ; this colour is of a poysonous nature , and therefore you must be carefull how you use it , that it come not neer your mouth . There is distilled Verdigreece to be bought at the Coller-shops , that is a far better green then the other , but it is somewhat dear , and the other will serve insteed of it . 5 Verditer-Green is a light green , seldome used in any thing but in colouring of I andskips , those places that should show a far off , and it is good for such a purpose , because it is somewhat inclining to a blew , but you may make a shift to doe any thing well enough without it ; for a little blew Verditer mixt with Copper green and 〈◊〉 little white , will make Iust such another colour . 6 Sap-green is a darke durty green , and never used but to shadow other greens in the darkest places , or else to lay upon some darke ground , behind a picture , which requires to be coloured with a darke green , but you may make shift well enough without this green , for Indico and Yellow-berries make Iust such another Colour . 7 Copper-green , it is an excellent transparent green , of a shining nature if it be thickned in the Sun , or upon a softly fire , and it is most used of any green in washing of 〈◊〉 , especially in colouring of the grasse ground or trees , for it is a most perfect grasse-green . 8 Vermillion it is the perfectest Scarlet colour , you need not grinde it , no nor wash it , it is fine enough of it selfe , onely temper it with your finger in a gally pot or oyster shell , with gum-water , and it will be ready for your use , if you put a little yellow-berries amongst it , it vvill make it the brighter colour , this is principally used for garments . 9 Lake , It is an excellent Crimson colour , vvith it you may shadovv Vermilion , or your yellovv garments in the darkest places ; vvith it you make a skie colour , being mixed onely vvith vvhite ; vvith it you make flesh colour , sometimes mixed together vvith vvhite and a little red-lead , it is an excellent colour of it selfe to colour garments , or the like Indian lake is the best lake , but too good to be used to wash prints with , unlesse you intend to bestow great curiosity upon your worke ; but the 〈◊〉 sort of ordinary lake will serve well enough for ordinary uses , but that also will be somewhat costly . Therefore instead thereof you may use Red-Inke thickned upon the fire , and it will 〈◊〉 very well for your purpose , and better then Lake , unlesse it be very good . Note if you would make a light skie colour of your red-inke , you must not thicken it , or if you would mix it among your 〈◊〉 - colour you must not thicken it , you should rather chuse to shadow your Vermillion with Spanish browne then thick red Inke , which will serve well for that purpose , and is much cheaper , but it is not altogether so bright a colour and cleare . 10 Red - 〈◊〉 is the nearest to an Orange colour , and putting a little yellow 〈◊〉 into some of it , will make it a perfect Orange colour , but if you mean to make flesh-colour of it , you must put no yellow , but onely then when you would make 〈◊〉 Orange colour . This colour is used for the colouring of buildings or high-wayes in Landskip , being mixed with a little white . Also it is the onely bright colour to shadow yellow garments with , to make them show like changeable 〈◊〉 ; it is good also to colour any light ground in a picture , taking only the thin water of it , and so for severall other uses as you shall see occasion for it . To foreshorten feete seene forwards , you must make the foote 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 his proportions and measures seene on the insyde of the foote marked A. and from those prepertions and measures marked 1234. drawe downe 〈◊〉 vntill they cutt the Diagonall , and conuey thence lines Paralell , to make the 〈◊〉 foote vnder the place of the foreshortned foote and from the said shadowed you must rayse perpendiculars vnto the place of the saide foote to be shortened which there meeting with the 〈◊〉 lines that proceede from the first foote by intersections of them there , giueth vs the said foote Gēometrically 〈◊〉 as 〈◊〉 heere represented wherein the toes of the feete are marked A , B , C , D , E , and the lyke is to be observed for the foote seene by the heele marked B , and also for the foote marked with C. seene on the foreparte , and lastly in like 〈◊〉 for the foote marked D 〈◊〉 are foreshortned by the same rules as the former . 11 Yellow berries , it is most used in washing of all other yellows , it is bright , and transparent , fit for all uses , and is sufficient without the use of any other yellow , 12 Saffron is a deep yellow if you let it stand a pretty while ; it is good principally to shadow yellow-berries with , instead of Red-lead : and it is somewhat a brighter shadow , but you may make shift well enough without this colour , for red-lead , and yellow-berries make Iust such another colour . 13 Light Masticote ; It is a light yellow , Iust like yellow berries and white , 〈◊〉 therefore you may shift well enough without it , only for the saving you a 〈◊〉 to mixe your yellow berries with white when you have occasion for a light yellow , which you may sometimes make use of to colour a light ground in a picture , and then shadow it with the water of burnt umber , or red-lead , that is the 〈◊〉 part of the colour . 14. 15. Ceruse , It is the best white , if it be good and finely ground ready to your hand , as you may have it at some colour shops , or for want of it buy white-lead pickt to your hand , either of them will serve well enough ; any of these being minled with another colour , they make it lighter , and the more you put the lighter they will be , as you shall finde in the using of them . 16 Spanish Browne is a dirty browne colour , yet of great use , not to colour any garment with , unlesse it be an old mans gowne , but to shadow Vermillion , or to lay upon any darke ground behind a Picture , or to shadow yellow berries in the darkest places , when you want Lake , or thick red 〈◊〉 . 17 It is the best and brightest colour whrn it is burnt in the fire till it be red-hot , but if you would colour any hare , horse , dog , or the like , you must not burne it , but for other uses it is best when it is burnt ; as to colour any wooden post , bodies of trees , or any thing else of wood , or any darke ground in a picture ; it is not to be used about any garments , unlesse you would colour many old mens 〈◊〉 , or caps standing together , because they must not be all of one colour of black , therefore for distinction and varieties sake you may use Umber un-burnt for some of them . 18 Printers blacke is most used , because it is easiest to be had , and serves very well in washing : Note , You must never put any black amongst your colours to make them dark , for it will make them dirty , neither should you shadow any colour with black , unlesse it be Spanish browne , when you would colour an old mans gowne , that requires to be 〈◊〉 of a sad colour ; for whatsoever is shadowed with black will look dirtily , and not bright faire and beautifull . 19 Ivory burnt or want of that bone burnt , it is the blackest black that is , and it is thus made ; Take 〈◊〉 , or for want of it some white bone , and put it into the fire till it be thorowly burned , then take it out and let it cool , and so slit it in the middle , and take out the lackest of it in the middle and grinde it for your use . Directions for the mixing of your colours . IN mixing of any colour , you must be very carefull you make it not too sad ; if one colour be sadder then the other that you mixe with it , put in but a little and a little of the sad colour , till you see it be sad enough for your purpose , 〈◊〉 if you make your colour too sad , you will very hardly recover it in mixing , and if you lay it so on your picture , you can never recover , but if it be too light you may make it darker at your pleasure . 2 In mixing your colours you must be very carefull that you put not your pensell out of one colour into another , for that will spoyle and dirty all your colours unlesse you wash your pensell cleane and then wipe the water out of them . 3 Black is not to be mingled with any colour but white , for it will dirty all other colours , and make them look unpleasant . Particular Directions for the compounding of Colours or mingling one Colour with another How to make a Purple Colour . TAke Logg-wood , and seeth it in Vinegar and small beer , in an earthen pot , and put a little Allum therein , untill you taste it to be strong on your tongue , and when it is boyled , straine the Log-wood through a clout , cleane from the water , and so let the water stand and cool for your use . OR , YOu may make purple colour with mixing bise and lake together , or if you want bise , you may use blew Verditer , but it will not serve your purpose so well as blew bise , but thick red-Inke will serve at all times as wel as lake in washing . How to make Red Inke . BOyle Brazill as you doe the Log-wood , and straine the brazill through a clout as before . A Flesh Colour . IT is made of white and a little lake , and a little red-lead mixed , a very small quantity of each ; you may make it as light , or as red as you please , by putting more or lesse white in it shadow in the cheeks and other places , by putting in a little more lake and red-lead into it , if you would have it a swarthy complexion to distinguish the mans flesh from the womans , put a little yellow Oker among your flesh , and for your shadow put a little more lake , and a smal quantity of burnt umber . An Ash colour is compounded of black and white . You may make your greens lighter by mingling it well with yellow berries or white . Colours for Buildings . IN washing we doe not observe the natural colours of every thinh , as to expresse variety of colours and pleasantnesse to the sight , that the things coloured may appear beautiful to the eye , yet so as they may not be contrary to reason , and be accounted 〈◊〉 ; but that we doe somewhat imitate natural things , and here and there adde some beauty by pleasant colours , more then doth usually and commonly appeare in the natural things themselves , so that although the naturall things themselves doe very rarely appear in such beauty or with such kind of colours , yet it may be imagined that it is possible that at some times they doe or may be made ( without derogating from the rule of nature and reason ) to appear in such colours as you have exprest them in , by this rule , you may guide yur selfe in colouring of any thing , and principally in buildings , and in Landskips , therefore when you would colour any buildings , you must do it with as much variety of pleasant colours as the utmost extent of nature and reason will permit , yet not without reason , or beyond the limits of nature . In colouring buildings you may sometimes use black and white for the wals , conduits or other things , where you think fit sometimes , you may use red-lead and white for brick houses or others , when many houses stand together you must colour them with as many various colours as you can well use about buildings ; sometimes you may use umber and white , and sometimes lake and white , or red-inke and white , for varieties sake , and if you want more variety , you may put here and there in some places Varditer and white , all these you must shadow after you have laid them on . Colours for Landskips . FOr the neerest and darkest saddest hils lay burnt Umber , and for the light places you must put some yellow to your burnt Umber , for the next hils lay Copper The Whole figure of Mans body 〈◊〉 a 〈◊〉 on the Syde and 〈◊〉 by the 〈◊〉 of the head the back 〈◊〉 The 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall 〈◊〉 vs in this figure 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by the 〈◊〉 of the head , 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of any 〈◊〉 for the 〈◊〉 that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the figure of the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the first figure 〈◊〉 A their 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 our figure 〈◊〉 , 〈◊〉 by the 〈◊〉 of the Head , green well thickned with the fire , or in the Sun ; in the next hils further off , 〈◊〉 some yellow berries with your copper green , and let the fourth degree be done with green verditer , and the furthest and faintest places with blew Bice , or for want of that with blew verditer mingled with white for the lightest places , and shadowed with blew verditer in the shadows , somewhat thick : the high-wayes must be done commonly with red-lead and white , and for variety you may use sometimes yellow Oker , and shadow it with burnt Umber , which colour you may use also for sandy rocks and hils ; the rocks must be done with various colours , in some places with black and white , in some , places with red-lead and white , and some must be done with umber and white , and some with blew and white , and other colours , such as you think do neerest resemble rocks , but alwayes endeavour to do them with pleasant colors as much as you can ; the water must be done wth black varditer and white , sometimes shadowed with copper green , a little verditer blew , when the banks cast a green shade upon the water , at other times it must be shadowed with blew verditer alone , and where the water is very darke in the shadows , it must be shadowed with a little 〈◊〉 , some copper green thickned , and some blew verditer : the bodies of trees must be done with burnt umber , and the leaves must be done with such greens as the ground is , and the whole Landskip must be shadowed after you have laid on the first colours , the darker greens must shadow the lighter , Spanish brown then must shadow red lead and white , and so the others as before . Colours for the skie . LIght Masticote , or yellow berries and white , for the lowest and lightest places , red-inke not thickned , and white for the next degree , blew bice and white for the next degree and blew bice alone for the highest of all : insteed of bice you may use verditer , all these must be so laid on and wrought one into another , that you may not receive any sharpnesse in the edge of your colour , but that they may be so layd on , that you cannot perceive where you began to lay them on , they must be so drownded one into another . For Cloud-colours , you may use sometimes blew verditer , and white shadowed with blew verditer , sometimes light Masticote shadowed with blew verditer , and sometimes Lake and white or red inke , and white shadowed with blew varditer . What Shadows must be used for every colour in Garments . TAke this generall rule , That every colour is made to shadow it self , either if you mingle it with white , for the light and so shadow it with the same colour , unmingled with white , or else take off the thinnest water of the colour for the light , and so shadow it with the thickest bottome of the colour ; but if you would have your shadow of a darker colour , then the colour it self is to shadow the deepest places with , then follow these directions . 1 Blew bice is shadowed with Indico in the darkest shadows . 2 Indico is darke enough to make the darkest shadow , therefore needs no other colour to shadow it withal . 3 Blew verditer is shadowed with thin Indico . 4 Verdigreece with sap-green . Verditer with copper green , and in the darkest places of all with sap-green . 5 Sap-green is used only to shadow other greens , and not to lay for a ground in any garment . 6 Copper green is shadowed either with sapgreen or Indico and yellow berries . 7 〈◊〉 million with lake , or thick red inke , or Spanish browne . 8 Lake must not be shadowed with any other colour , for it is the darkest red of it 〈◊〉 , but for variety you may shadow it sometimes with bice , or blew verditer , which 〈◊〉 it shew like a changeable Taffity . 9 Red-lead is shadowed with Spanish browne in the darkest places . 11 Saffron is shadovved vvith thick red Inke or Lake . 12 Light Masticote , vvith the thin vvater of Red-lead . 13 , 14. White Ceruse , and vvhite lead vvith a little black amongst some of it 〈◊〉 . 15 Spanish brovvn vvith black , but that is not used in any bright garment . 16 Umber vvith black mingled vvith some of it . 17 Black cannot be shadovved vvith any colour darker then it selfe . Directions for the laying on of your Colours . 1 YOu must lay your colours on of such a thicknesse , I meane your body'd colours that you may see how to shadow them to perceive where the shadows are , and not lay on your colours so thick that you cannot perteive the print , nor how and where to shadow it , 2 You must always lay on your lightest colours first , and then shadow them afterwards 3 You must lay on your colours very smooth with your pensel , that the colour may not lye thicker in some places then in others , and to that end you should take your pensell pretty 〈◊〉 of colour when you should cover a garment all over ( otherwise not ) that so you may lay the colour smooth before it dry , for you cannot well smooth them afterwards when they are once dry ; therefore when you lay them on be as quick as you can in covering the garment , that you may have covered it all over before your colour be dry in any part , for by this means you shall be the better able to lay it smooth ; some colours are harder to lay then others ; those that are the most sandy colours , as varditer , bice , red-lead , &c. are hardest to lay smooth on , and therefore you must be the more carefull in them . What Colours set off best together . 1 BLews set off well enough with red , yellows , whites , browns and blacks . They set of best with reds , whites and browns . They set not off well with greens and purples . 2 Greens set off well with purples , reds yellows or browns . They set off best with purples and reds . They 〈◊〉 not off well with blews or blacks , nor whites , unlesse it be a sad green . 3 Reds set off well with yellows , blews , greens and whites . They set off best with yellows and blews . 〈◊〉 set not off with purples browns or blacks . 4 Yellows set off well with reds , sad blews , greens , browns purples . 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 off best with reds and blews . They set not off well with light greens or blacks or whites . 5 Whites set off with all colours . They set off best with black and blew . 6 Browns set off very well with no colour , but are used sometimes upon necessity , they set off worst of all with black , because they are so neer alike . 7 Blacks are not used but upon necessary occasions in some things that doe needfully require ; it and so it 〈◊〉 off well enough with almost any colour , because it is not like any , but differs somewhat from all . How to write Gold with Pen or Pensell . TAke a shell of Gold , and put a little Gum-water into it , and so stir it about with 〈◊〉 pensel , but you must put very little Gum-water , and then you may use it as you doe other colours . ' The proportion of the Hand 〈◊〉 of 3 measures of the Nose , of 〈◊〉 : you are to make the three equall pricked squares , marked perpendicularly 1. 3. 2. the lowest of which 〈◊〉 is 〈◊〉 into 2 〈◊〉 parts therby to adIoyne a halfe making a third part unto that base marked also 〈◊〉 . which we give 〈◊〉 the Balle of the Thumb and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 neare unto 〈◊〉 . 〈◊〉 , 〈◊〉 a pricked line perpendicularly vp unto the topp of the right hand angle of the square marked above with 1 making a pricked quill , within the which the said Forefinger is 〈◊〉 , the length and toppe therof exceeding the vpper 〈◊〉 of the Middle finger : That being divided into 3 equall partes the two equall Ioynts 〈◊〉 the two upper parts shallbe of equall hight vnto the vpper Ioynt of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 finger . as appeareth in the figure of 〈◊〉 Hand represented at B And the Thumbe shall not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 second or midle 〈◊〉 of the 〈◊〉 . ' Then 〈◊〉 a 4th 〈◊〉 for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which is the measure of 〈◊〉 Nose the base or lower part of which is divided into 4 parts , which shall serve us for Hands 〈◊〉 on the syde The same measures are observed aswell in the hand 〈◊〉 without or on the back 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seene or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 & 〈◊〉 marked 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 & C but that that 〈◊〉 seene sydewise 〈◊〉 but 3 measures of that base of that Wrist Appeareth 〈◊〉 that figures of that said 〈◊〉 marked in that 〈◊〉 page in that 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 lines marked in the ovall formes marked 1. 2. 3. 4. under that wrists 〈◊〉 make that 〈◊〉 plane of that said Wrist . Thus by a little practise you may become perfect in this Art , and learne the full perfection 〈◊〉 it . How to lay Gold or Silver on Gum-water . TAke five or six leaves of Gold or Silver , and grinde them with a stiffe gum-water ; and a pretty quantity of Salt , as fine as possibly you can , then put them into a 〈◊〉 glasse , and fill the glasse almost ful of faire water , to the end the stiffe water may dissolve , and so the Gold goe to the bottom , let it stand three or foure houres , then 〈◊〉 away the liquor from the gold , and put in more cleane water , and stir it about , and let it settle again , and then poure the same water to this so often untill you see your gold or silver clean washed : then take a clean water , and put thereto a little 〈◊〉 of Sal Almoniack , and great Salt , and let it stand the space of three days in a box made of wax , or in some close space : then take a piece of Glovers leather , and pick away the skin-side and put the gold and the water therein , tye it up , then hang it on a pin , and the salt will fret through , and the Gold will remain , which you shall temper with the glayr of an egge , and so use it with pen or pensel . You 〈◊〉 diaper on gold with lake and yellow Oker , but on silver with Cerese . Let your Gum-water be made good and stiffe , and lay it on with your pensel where you would guild , then take a Cushion that hath a smooth Leather , and turn the bottom 〈◊〉 , upon that cut your gold with a sharpe knife , in what quantity you will , and to take it up draw the edge of your knife finely upon your tongue , that it may be onely wet , with which do but touch the edge of your gold , and it will come up , and you may 〈◊〉 it as you list , but before you lay it on let your Gum be almost dry , and being 〈◊〉 presse it down , hard with the scut of an hair , afterwards burnish it with a dogs tooth . Of Limming . LImming consisteth not only in the true proportioning of a picture , but also in the 〈◊〉 and lively colouring of the same , whereby the worke is exceedingly graced , and most lively set out in proper colours , most neerly resembling the life . How to chuse your Pensels . LEt them be clean and sharpe pointed , not cleaving in too in the hair , they must be full and thick , next the quill , and so descending into a round and sharp point ; if you finde any one haire longer then other , take it away with the flame of a Candle , passing the pensel through the flame , you must have severall pensels for severall colours . Gum-Araback . AMongst all your colours you must mingle gum Araback , the best and whitest , which you should have alwayes ready , finely poudred ( or dissolved in fair water ) and so with a few drops of pure water , mingle it with your colour , and temper them together til the gum be dissolved and incorporated with the colours . How to grinde your Colours YOu must grind your colours either upon a perphire Serpentine , or pibble stone , which are the hardest , and therefore the best to grind upon ; grind then with faire water onely , without gum , and when you have ground them very fine , put them upon a chalk stone , and there let them dry , and when they are dry take them off from the chalke and reserve them for your use , in papers or boxes . The proportion of a woman standing backe ; The same maner as you make the former figure , you must use in this backward of the woman , without altering any thing of the measure , except in observing the muscles , which are marked behinde must be made sweeter & smoother then the mans , as appeares in this figure . The Names of your Colours . Whites . Ceruse . White-lead . Yellows . Masticote . Yellow-Oker . English Oker . Greens . Sap-green . Pink & blew bice Green bice . Cedar-green . Verditure . Blews . Indico . Vltermarine . Blew bice . Smalt . Browns . Umber . Spanish-browne . Cullins-earth , Reds . India Lake . Red-lead . Red-Oker . Blacks . Cheristone-burnt . Ivory burnt . Lamblacke . What Colours must be Washt , and what ground . Ground . Ceruse . White-lead . Indian-Lake . English Oker . Pink . Indico . Umber . Spanish-brown . Colens-earth . Cheristone-black . Ivory-blacke . Washt . Red-lead . Masticote . Green-bice . Coedar-green . Ultermarine . Blew bice . Smalt . Verditer . Sap-green . Is to be steept in water . How to wash your colours . TAke some blew bice or other colour you would wash and put it into a dish full of pure water , stir it for a while together , till the water be all coloured , then let it stand a while , and the corruption will fleet upon the water , then poure away the water , and fill the dish with fresh water , and stir it as before till the water be troubled and thick ; which done , before it be halfe setled , poure it out into another dish , leaving the dregs and seethings of your colour in the former dish , which you must cast away , the troubled and coloured water being poured into your second dish , put more water to it , and wash it as before , then let it settle till it be clear , and so poure off the water , washing it againe , and again , if any scum arise , which may make foure or five sorts , still pouring halfe the thin water into another dish , and washing it as aforesaid ; when you have washed it often , and finde it well clensed , poure away the water , then set the colour in the Sun to dry , and when it is dry , strike off the faintest part of the colour , lying about the sides of the dish with a feather , and so use it for your finest work , the rest will serve well for courser worke . When you would use your colour , take of it as much as you can well spread about the sides of a shell , somewhat thin , and not on heaps , and so temper it finely with your gum as before . To avoid the cracking of your colour , and flying from the shell , to which some colours are subIect ; take a little fine pouder of white Sugar-candy , and with it and a little faire water temper the colour over againe with your finger till the candy be dissolved . Colours for Garments . To make a Grasse-green is made of Pink and Bice , it is shadovved vvith Indico and Pink . Popinia-greeen , of Indico and more Pink , shadovved vvith Indico . French-green of Pink and Indico — Indico Sea-green , of Bice , pink and vvhite — Indico The proportion of a Childe behinde . The former rule without changing any thing , must be observed in this present figure standing backward , and all the proportions and measures which are observed in the former , serve to this likewise . Carnation of Lake and vvhite — Lake Crimson , of Vermillion Lake and vvhite — Lake Scarlet Vermilion — Lake Purple : Bice Lake and white — Lake and Indico Violet : Bice and Lake — Indico Yellow made of Masticote , pink and saffron shadow with lake and Saffron Straw-colour : most pink , Saffron , white and Vermillion — Lake Orange-tauny : Vermillion , pink and masticote — Lake Ash-colour : Lam-black and white — Black Skie-colour : Bice and white — Bice Light hair-colour : Umber , yellow-Oker and white — Umber Sad haire-colour : Umber , oker and black — Umber and black Thus by a little practising you may learne to mingle and compound all other colours whatsoever . The manner of Working . 1 THe manner of working in Limming , is by little smal pricks with a sharp pointed pensel . 2 You must lay your colours on very faint at first , and so make them deeper and deeper by degrees , for if you lay it on too sad at the first , it is impossible you should well recover it to make it lighter , but if it be too light you may make it darker at your pleasure . 3 When you would worke , you must first lay on flat primer , which must be of the lightest part of the complexion 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 make , so that you may not need to heigthen ; or lay a lighter upon it , you may make a 〈◊〉 complexion of white lake , and red-lead 〈◊〉 together in a shell , if it be a 〈◊〉 complexion , mingle a little fine Masticote or English Oker , or both with the 〈◊〉 ; having laid on the primer which you must doe very quick and smooth , 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the 〈◊〉 after the primer is dry with lake and white very faintly , and so proceed 〈◊〉 the perfecting of it by degrees . Colours For the Face . FOr the red in the cheeks , lips , &c. temper lake , red-lead and a little white together , for the faint shadows that are blewish , 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 white together , for bice is not used in a face , nor any black ; for the deeper shadows take white English Oker and Umber , and for darke and hard shadows in many pictures , use 〈◊〉 and Pinke mixt with Umber . When you are come to the close of your , and have almost finisht your face , you 〈◊〉 in the last place doe all the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 , smilings and glansings of the eye , descending and contracting of the mouth , all which you must be sudden to expresse with a bold quick and constant hand , or 〈◊〉 alwayes not to depend to fast . Thus by a constant practise Ioyned with these 〈◊〉 and your own industry , 〈◊〉 may in time attaine to a great measure of perfection in this art of limming . Be patient , thou that seekest for this skill , By grace and art : so mayst thou have thy will . FINIS . Notes, typically marginal, from the original text Notes for div A28779e-360 Char-coal . Black-lead . Pen . Black-chalk . White-lead . Compasses . Fether . Perspective 〈◊〉 . 2 Gracefull posture . 〈◊〉 . 〈◊〉 . Fore-shortning . 5 Naturalnesse . Note . Ash-colour . Orange . Light-green 
A09192	----	The art of dravving vvith the pen, and limming in water colours more exactlie then heretofore taught and enlarged with the true manner of painting vpon glasse, the order of making your furnace, annealing, &c. Published, for the behoofe of all young gentlemen, or any els that are desirous for to become practicioners in this excellent, and most ingenious art, by H. Pecham., gent. Peacham, Henry, 1576?-1643? 1606 Approx. 112 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 40 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images. Text Creation Partnership, Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) : 2003-01 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1). A09192 STC 19500 ESTC S106084 99841809 99841809 6418 This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission. Early English books online. (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A09192) Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 6418) Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 581:03) The art of dravving vvith the pen, and limming in water colours more exactlie then heretofore taught and enlarged with the true manner of painting vpon glasse, the order of making your furnace, annealing, &c. Published, for the behoofe of all young gentlemen, or any els that are desirous for to become practicioners in this excellent, and most ingenious art, by H. Pecham., gent. Peacham, Henry, 1576?-1643? [8], 70 [i.e. 71], [1] p. : ill. Printed by Richard Braddock, for William Iones, and are to be sold at his shop at the signe of the Gun neere Holburn Conduit, At London : 1606. Page 71 is incorrectly numbered 70. Reproduction of the original in the Folger Shakespeare Library. Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford. Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors. EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO. EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org). The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source. Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data. Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so. Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor. The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines. Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements). Keying and markup guidelines are available at the Text Creation Partnership web site . eng Pen drawing -- 17th century. Drawing -- Early works to 1800. Watercolor painting -- Technique -- Early works to 1800. Glass painting and staining -- Early works to 1800. 2002-02 TCP Assigned for keying and markup 2002-02 Apex CoVantage Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images 2002-03 TCP Staff (Oxford) Sampled and proofread 2002-03 Judith Siefring Text and markup reviewed and edited 2002-04 pfs Batch review (QC) and XML conversion THE ART OF DRAVVING VVITH THE PEN , AND LIMMING IN WATER COLOVRS , MORE EXACTLIE THEN HERETOFORE TAVGHT and enlarged : with the true manner of Painting vpon glasse , the order of making your furnace , Annealing , &c. Published , For the behoofe of all young Gentlemen , or any els that are desirous for to become practicioners in this excellent , and most ingenious Art , By H. PECHAM , Gent. At London , Printed by Richard Braddock , for William Iones , and are to be sold at his shop at the signe of the Gun. neere Holburn Conduit . 1606. TO THE RIGHT WORSHIPFVL SIR Robert Cotten Knight . SIr , it hath bin vsuall aswel among Heathen in erecting their profane monuments , as Christians in dedicating their churches , to affect and chuse among many , some one saint tanquā numen tutelare aboue the rest : in whose honor when they had finished the maine worke , yet they thought not all wel , except his picture stood enshrined ouer the porch , or some other more eminent place . ( Though with a number more of my time I neuer dremt of any thing lesse thē building churches ) I imitate them so far , ( if it be not superstition , ) to chuse my Patrone whose name in the depth of an honest zeale , I carue in operis vestibulo , as Lipsius saith ; although in this case deuotion be liable to none account , I confes though I had neuer bin obliged vnto you for some particular fauors ; yet the loue you bear to the arts aboue any other I know , shold haue enforced my Genius to haue awaked , & sought you out wheresoeuer : not that I thinke so weak a present either worthy of your view , or so vntoward a tourney , but ( as it falleth out among pilgrimes ) while others of farre better merit , in zeale of your name hang vp their gownes or bracelets , I mighte sliely escape with my candle : and in truth I bring no better ; for imparting to manie what I haue , not hindering my selfe , I doe but accendere lumen de lumine as one saith . How necessarie a skill drawing or painting is ; & howe manie waies the vse thereof is required , none knoweth better then your selfe : how rare the perfection of it amongst vs , euery man may perceiue , when scarce England can affoord vs a perfect pen-man orgood cutter , ( I speak not of the pencil wherin our Maisters may compare with any els in Europe ) in respect of the dutchmen and other straūgers : for which cause ( as well to encorage as instruct any young practitioner that bereth good wil to this arte ) I haue collected as familiarly as I could , the chiefe and most easie groundes of drawing , annexing hereto the māner of limming in water colors , also certaine rules for Annealing & painting vpon glasse : which with my self , and my hereafter more serious endeauours , I offer to the censure of your worship , of whome J humbly take my leaue . From my studie in Kimbalton this eighth of Nouember . Who is sincerely deuoted vnto you . HENRY PECHAM . To the Reader . GENTLEMEN , you haue heer a few principles of mine art , which as franckly I impart vnto you , as the heauens freely bestowed them vpon my selfe : I cal it mine , because it was borne with me , nor euer vsed I the benefit of any instructor saue mine owne practise and experience . I haue ( it is true ) bestowed many idle howers in it , which perhaps might haue beene worse spent , yet in my iudgment I was neuer so wedded vnto it , as to hold it any part of my profession , but rather allotted it the place inter splendidas nugas , and those things of accomplement required in a Scholler or Gentleman . I speak not any whit to disgrace so worthy a skill , or to discommend the true & necessarie vse therof , but to giue my scholler a watch word , that like a simple wooer hee should neuer cast off the mistres to court the maid : but esteem himselfe a great deale better graced by propounding at the table aliquid cedro dignum , ( as K. Alphonsus was merily wont to say , ) or maintaining an argument in Philosophy or diuinity , thē by intimating his skil with the pencil , or insight in the Chords of musick , which perhaps he that holds a trencher at his back cā excel him in Q. Fabius could paint , yet hee was a greate counsellor . Epaminondas could playe or sing excellently to the Harpe or violls , but Iustine to his true glory addeth , that he was a man endued with such learning , and so great experience in military affairs , that it was a wonder how he could attaine to so absolute an heigth in both : in whom alone , and at once sprang vp and died the glory of the Thebanes , Socrates being aboue three score yeeres of age , spent one howr in a day with Conus a musitian in playing vpon the organes : Ifhe had spent aboue , I thinke we had not known him by the name of Philosophorum parens : And whereas Aristotle deseigning 4 principall exercises , wherein hee would haue all children in a well tuned city or commonwealth brought vp & taught , ( which are Grammatice , or Grammer : Gymnastice or exercising the body by wrestling , running , swimming tossing the pike , &c. Graphice , or well handling the pen in drawing , writing faire , &c : and lastly Musice or Musick ) his meaning is , vt adseriamagis studia capessenda idonei reddantur : the same vse and none other I wish to be made of drawing . Concerning these directions I haue giuen , they are such as I thought in respect of their breuity & plainnesse , fit for the capacity of the young learner , for whom they were first and principally intended : they are mine owne , not borrowed out of the shops , but the very same , Nature acquainted mee withall ; and such as euer in practise I found most easie and true . I may perhaps be snarled at by some obscure fellows that affect their own priuate gaine before a generall commodity : but if ( Reader ) thou shalt find any thing herein worthy thy practise or liking , I care not what the other say ; the worst hurt they can doe me , is to draw my picture ilfauoredly , and sell it : And perhaps I could requite them againe as Hipponax the Satirist did , who wrote so bitterly against certaine painters that sold his picture vp and down in a mockery to be laughed at ( because he was hardfauoured , ) that many ofthem for griefe hanged themselues . I had purposed to haue annexed hereunto a discours of Armory : the manner of painting with virgin wax , and with feathers , not altogether impertinent to our purpose ; but I haue reserued it ( being a while imploied in som important businesse ) till some other time , entreating thee in the meane while , to take vvhat I haue begun as affectionately as I offer it . The most assured friend to all that loue or learne this art of drawing or painting . H. Pecham . Ad Zoilum Authoris Epigramma . Zoile vicatim dum Criticus omnia lustras , blattaque liuenti dente alien● vor as : Usque licet nostrum ieiunus rode libellum qui tibi ( ni fallor ) mille venena dabit . 1. The excellency of painting . 2. The antiquitie . 3. Much esteemed in times past . 4. The manifold vses thereof . 5. Necessary to be taught . CHAP. 1. PICTVRA , or painting in generall , is an art which either by draughte of bare lines , liuely colours , cutting out or embossing , expresseth any thing the like by the same : which we may find in the holy Scripture both allowed , and highly commended by the mouth of God himselfe ; where he calleth Bezaleel and Aholiab , Men whom he hath filled with the spirit of God in wisedom and vnderstanding , and in knowledge , and in all workmanship , to find out curious workes , to worke in gold , and in siluer , and in brasse , also in the art to set stones , and to carue in timber &c. There plainly shewing , as all other good arts , so caruing or drawing to be an especiall gift of Gods spirit . In another place he goeth farther , and as it were challengeth to himselfe the Mastership of the company in that his Maiestique Erotema in lov in these words : Hast thou giuen the pleasant wings vnto the Peacocks ? and wings and feathers vnto the Ostrich ? whereas disabling the wit of man by his owne excellency : he giueth vs to admire that admirable wisedome in disposing so many beautifull colours , from the wings of the proude Peacock and Ostrich vnto the poore Butterflie , that astonished I may say with Aristotle , euen in these little painted Creatures there is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and in the very border of one of their wings , and euident tast of the diuine Omnipotency . But as Picture hath been allowed of God , so it hath aswell among Christians , as the Heathen bin honored from all antiquity , and always sound fauour with the greatest wits and mightiest Monarchs of the world ; insomuch as Aristotle in his Politiques accounteth it among those liberalia Paedeumata , and counselleth it as an especiall thing to bee taught vnto children : and not long after by the authority and labour of Eupompus a learned Geometrician and painter , it was taught in all Grammar schools throughout Greece . But some will tell me ; Mechanicall arts , and those wrought with the hand are for the most part base , and vnworthy the practize of Gentlemen and great personages . I confesse the Lord of Bartas hath said : L'eur esprit se'n fuit au bout des doigts . But forasmuch as their ends are honest , & themselues but the exercises of praegnant , & the finest wits : I see no reasō ( as one saith ) why nature should be so much wronged in her intētion , as not sōtime to produce into action that wherto she is well inclined : And no more disgrace to a Lord to draw a fair picture , then to cut his Hawks meat , or play at footeball with his men . Achilles thought no scorn to be so cunning in cookery , that whē certain embassadors came vnto him , his own hāds dressed them a great & roial supper : & Homer to no smal cōmendation of his Vlisses ( vnder whose person he shapeth an absolute wisemā ) saith he could make his ships himself . Quintus Fabius ( whose stock was one of the noblest in Rome , after called Pictore , ) with his own hāds painted the wals of the temple of Salus , & wrote his name vnderneath . Pomponius Atticus ( a man of singular wisedom , & so loued of Tully ) after he had composed a Poem of sundry deuises , beutified it with picturs ofhis own drawing . The Emperor Constantin gat his liuing a long time by painting . And in Plinies time certain festiuall days were yeerly appointed at Corintth for exercise of picture for great prizes & wagers . Since painting then hath been so well esteemed , & of it own nature so linked with other arts , as many of them can hardly stand without it : I think , not for pleasure only , but of necessity most needful to be exercised , of all such that either study the Mathematicks , mean to follow the wars , or trauell into sorreine countries . I haue heard many & excellēt men of these seueral qualities lament so great a wāt in themselues , otherwise most absolute . My scholer then I would make choise of , I wold haue a yong Gentlemā , if it might be , who were inclined to drawing by nature , at the least a welwiller & louer of it ; & as Tully would haue in his Orator , so I require in him aliquid redundans & ampu●andū , a prety fantastical head & something ( as chips of the sound timber , which cōmonly the best wits are subiect vnto ) to be pared of ; with all daily & cōtinuall practise , were it but Apelles his vna linea , without which it is impossible forhim to attain to ready draught , & les to excellecy in general 1. The most excellent painters of old time . 2. The great value and prizes of pictures . 3. Of certaine women that haue excelled herein . 4. Of Statuary or caruing . CHAP. 2. PAinters at the first ( saith Aelian ) were such būglers and so rude , that they were fayn to write ouer a Cow or a Hog , what beast it was : otherwise the behoulder could not tell what to make of it ; but in a short time they grew to that perfection , that they were honoured well nigh as Gods , as Metrodorus the Athenian : of whom , as of the rest that were famous in their times ( aswell for the dignity of this art as for the Readers recreation ) I will make mention , as I find in Plinie , Pausanias , and others . Apollodorus among the Athenians was the first that did expresse the life with colours , and that was famous for his pencill . Euphranor a painter of Isthmos , was the first deuiser ofEmblems , and heroicall Impresa's for shieldes , and the first that obserued Symmetry , or proportion , wherof he wrote many volumes . Parrhasius aboue all others excelled in black & white , and had the principall commendation for his Arte in casting and curling the hayre . Pyreicus ( as Volaterane saith ) was only famous for counterfeiting all base things , as earthen pitchers , Barbers shops , a scullery , Rogues together by the eares , swine sleeping in the my●e &c : Whereupon hee was sirnamed Rupographus , that is , a painter of base things . Aristides was the first that expressed sence and passion , as in that peece of his , where he painted a mother deadly wounded , with her child in her armes , striuing for the Teat ; she weeping in extreame passion , loath to deny it her brest , and loath to let it suck , for feare of killing it with her own blood , which in great aboundance issued foorth with her milke . This table Alexander caried with him to Pella . Nicophanes had attributed vnto him the statelines of Inuention . Protogenes was the first that could lay his colours so artificially , that one being worn off , another succeeded fresh , to the number of fowr or fiue : it is saide when he vndertooke any excellent peece , hee would obserue a strict diet ; eating only pease , lupines and such like , to the intent his wit and inuention might becom the more sharpe and fine : Amongst his other workes his Lalysus or Bacchus hath the principall praise , which table ( when Demetrius Poliorcetes besieg'd the Rhodes ) being in the Iland , he refused to enter where he hearde it was kept , least by the rudenes of his souldiers it might receiue harme : protesting as Plutarch saith , that he had rather burne all his fathers Images : which occasion at that time being ouerslipt , his enterprise came to no effect . Aelian saith this table was seuen yeers in making . Apelles who liued in the 1012 Olympiade excelled all the others , yet for action and disposition , he gaue place to Amphion : many times hee would sayle ouer to the Rhodes to see Protogenes and his worke : among his peeces the picture of Alexander at Ephesus , and his Venus which he left at his death vnfinished in Chios were the most notable . Galaton surpassed all others of his time , for witty conceit & Inuention : amongst other his deuises , he drew Homer vomiting , and a number of pety Poets gathering it vp . Claudius Pulcher painted Tiles so artificially , that Rauens lighted vpon them . I will passe ouer the artificiall peeces of Zeuxis , L : Manlius , Pacuvius a Tragedian Poet , Metrodorus a most cunning painter and a great Philosopher ; who , when L : Paulus wrote vnto the vniuersity of Athens to prouide him a graue and learned Schoolemaster for his sonnes , was chosen by generall consent , and sent to Rome , as the fittest man both to teache his children , and to adorn his triumphes . Nor will I make mention of others of later times , as Hercole di Ferrara , & his notable workmanship seen this day in Bononie . Bellino the venetian , whose fame caused the Turk to send for him , frō whom he returned roially rewarded . Vnicio , and his admirable peece of the twelue Apostles in the church of our Lady of grace in Millan : Pisanello that so beautified the Church of Laterane in Rome , which the world may scarce match for rarenes & tenuity of shadowing : Petro de Burgo , that so excelled in perspectiue . Zoto the Florentine with many others . Nor of those of neerer and our own times , as Michael Angelo & his brother , Alberdure , Stradane , M. Hilliard & M. Isaac our own countrimen ; because their works are yet scarce dry in the world . Now least you shold esteem but basely of this art , & disdain your pictur because you may haue it for a trifle ( which I acoūt a fault in many of our good workmen ) I will tell you the prizes of some peeces of note aswell in ancient time , as of late days . Caesar the dictator redeemed the tables of Aiax & Medea for 80. tal . which amounteth to 24000 french crowns , I speak with the least , because I take minus talentum alt : cum ( sor generally where you find talentum in any Latin author , as in Tully pro C : Rabirio Posthumo and in his Epistles ad Attic. & som other places where you haue it oftnest : you must vnderstād the Athenian talent , except you haue the addition of Aegineum , Sirium , Babiloniū , &c ) the greater was bigger ( as Budaeus saith ) by a third part : K : Altalus paid for one of Aristides peeces an hūdred talents . Hortensius the Orator gaue for a table of the Argonatae 144 talents , Mnason paid to Asclepiadorus for the 12 Gods , after 300 pound sterling a peece . Candaules K : of Lydia gaue to Bularchus for a peece of his the weight of the same in gold . Pope Innocent the 8 a worthy fauorer of all good artes , bestowed vpon Andrea Mantega his painter in the Beluedere in Rome , 2000 ducats for a months pains . The Genoans paid vnto two Germane painters for the battel of Patras fought between don Iohn of Austria , & Hali Bassa 187 ducats . And what a round sum was once offered by strāgers for S : Magnus altar cloth in London : many other examples might be alledged , but I haue said enough to shew that arts haue alwais bin wel paid their hire , & the professors bin had in esteem with the worthiest men . Neither hath picture bin peculiar to men only , but also women hauebin excellent herin . Timarete the daughter of Micon , a famous paintres drew Diana , which at Ephesus was counted among the best and ancient pictures . Olimpias taught Ant●bulus the art of shadowing , there wer other very famous herein , which for breuity I omit : as Irene , Calipso , Lala , Aristorete . But we end with those famous Artists leauing them to their graues , and their works to the admiration of all posterity , and speake of Statuary or Caruing , which thus farre differeth from painting ; this doth expresse hir image in the plaine or smooth superficies imaginarily ; the other in the hollow and vneuen superficies , really . It hath been I confesse in as great account as painting ; yet it deserueth not altogether to well , because it is more rude and rough in exercise , and worketh not with so fine a iudgement : for painting is tied to counterfeite all shadowes , expresse the life , sence and passion , whereas in caruing they fall in with the chissell , and nothing els required but an euen proportion . A painter not priuiledged to draw what he list . 2 Great abuses may arise of Painting or drawing . 3 How and when to vse it . CHAP. 3. AS I woulde haue my scholler take his pleasure , so would I not haue him buy it at too deeer a rate , either with losse of ouermuch time in neglecting the maine profession , or of his eares for a libeller , defaming honest men by ilfauoured pictures : as drawing them with Asses ears , huge noses , hornes or such like , neither to thinke with Horace that he may quidlibet audere : for there be some things that ought to be free from the pencill , as the picture of God the father : or ( as I haue seene ) the whole Trinitie painted in a glasse window : which hee cannot do without artificiall blasphemy , and reuiuing from hell the old heresie of the Anthropomorphites who supposed God to be in the shape of an old man , sitting vpon his throne in a white Robe , with a triple crowne on his head . I know what diuers haue in this behalfe alledged , one speciall place they haue in Ezechiel in the vision of the throne , but howsoeuer , it is misliked by many good Catholiques , and none of the worst deuines in their owne Catechismes and confessions , though especially and in plainest termes by Lorichius in these words . Est praeterea abusus imaginum quod sanctam Trinitatem praesumpsimus exprimere , quod haeresis est pestilentissima , quid enim magis S : Trinitati aduersum , atque Patrem effingere senis silicernij effigie , filium iuuenis formam habentem , spiritum sanctum alitis speciem volitantis referentem : Quid I diotae ex tali libro didicisse poterint ? errorem sane & haeresim . Secondly he must abstaine with Christian modesty from drawing arts of filthines , & laying open those parts which Nature would haue kept secret : what hurt hath that abhominable Aretine done by his booke and baudy pictures ? and what lewd art is ordinarily showen in the naked pictures of wax sould vp and downe as libidinis fomenta ? Surely I must commend art in them , though detest their wicked makers and abhominable ends . For the time of drawing , I woulde haue my Scholler take it when he is wearied at his book , forced to keep home by reason of foule weather , or sollicited by idlenesse to some wors businesse : hauing chosen such a conuenient time , let him make or buy him a fayre paper book for the nonce , to begin to practise in , and keep very carefully that he hath done , by which he shall see how hee profiteth daily , auoyd scribling in loose papers and ( keeping his hand from walls or wainscot ) to deale plainly the bable : For Il muro bianco carta di matto passeth currant through Italy . Instruments necessary for drawing . CHAP. 4. I Am not ignorant of sundry waies that haue beene deuised to teach draught , as namely by crossing the pattern , then your owne paper with equall spaces , filling the same as you finde in your example : also drawing vpon a lanterne horne , with a paper blackt with a torch , and such , like : neither do I mislike any such conuenient help to a yong learners furtherance ; but if you wil learn to the purpose , and grow cunning in short time , you shoulde rather fall to it onely by your owne conceipt and Iudgement , and let those toyes goe , you must first get you black lead sharpned finelie : and put fast into quils , for your rude and first draught , some ten or twelue . Moreouer you must not be without as many Sallow coales , sharpned at the ends : you shall chuse them thus , they are more blew and finer grained then the other coales , smooth ( being broken ) like fatten : you shall sharpen them vpon one of your fingers , as also your black lead ; otherwise they will quickly breake and point sharp . Get you also a small paire of brazen compasses and Brasill rule , for taking the distance , if you followe a printe ; and bee not without the crums of fine manchet or whitebreade , to rubbe out your lead or coal , when you haue done amisse , or finished your worke . Scriueners & Schoolemasters in the Country that teach to write haue diuers small pensills of broome , with which they shadowe greate letters in coppy bookes very pretily : they are made in this manner , take a broome stalk about the bignes of a spoone handle , and cut it euen at the end , when when you haue done , chewe it betweene your teeth till it be fine and grow heary at the end like a pensill , but I care not how little you vse them , because your pen shall doe better & shew more art . For your drawing pennes , neuer be without twenty or thirty at a time , made of Rauens and goose quills ; your Rauens quills are the best of all other , to write faire , or shadow fine , your goose quils serue for the bigger or ruder lines . The first practise . CHAP. 5. HAuing these in a readines , you shall practise for the space of a week or there abouts , to draw Circles , Squares of all sorts , a Cylinder , the ouall forme , with other such like solid and plaine Geometricall figures , till you can doe them indifferent well , vsing the helpe of your rule and Compasse : the reason of exercising you first in these is , when as Symmetry or proportion is the very soule ofpicture , it is impossible that you should be ready in the bodies , before you can draw their abstract and generall sormes , and haue woonted and made your hand ready , in proportions of all sortes , which are compounded of the same , as for example , your Circle will teache you , to draw euen & truly all sphaericall bodies which are , 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of like parts and formes , as the Sun , Moone , Stars , &c. The most flowers as the Rose , Marigold , Heliotropium , Daisie , &c : the most vessells as cups , Basons , Bowles , Bottles , &c. The square will make you ready for all manner of compartments , bases , perystiles , plots , buildings , &c : your Cylinder for vaulted turrets and round buildings ; your Orthogonium and Pyramis , for sharp steeples , turrets and all things , in mucronem fastigiata , your Ouall forme will help you in drawing the face , a shield , or such like : so that you may reduce many thousand bodies to these few generall figures , as vnto their principall heads and fountaines . After you are cunning in these figures ( beginning with the Circle and ) imitate some thing of Circular forme , what you shall think good , in which as in all the other aforenamed proportions you shall worke and help your selfe by the Diameter ( which is a strait line , drawn long waies iust in the midst of your circle or square ) and which will guide you marueilously in your work : for example if I would draw the Sun , so soone as I haue made a fayr Circle I draw ( with cole or lead that I may rub it out againe ) my Diameter , or line down the midst , ou●r which if you will again , you may draw a crosse line , both which deuide your Circle equally into 4 parts as you see . Which Diameter with the crosse line , are not onely your directors for the equall placing of the greater & lesser beames , on the side as you may perceiue : but also for the drawing of the nose , mouth and eyes euen , in the midst of the face . I will giue you another example of a goblet , first I make a halfe or semicircle for the bowle , downe the midst of which ( as low as I would haue the foote to come ) I draw my Diameter or straight line , which being done , the worst is past : you must now marke , I am not tied to make my bowle as roūd as the circle , but long or what fashion I list , no other vse hath the Circle there then to guide me euen on either side , whether I make it broad or narrow , long or short , embosse it or howsoeuer , the other part of the line causeth me to make the foct euen as you see . which line and circle ( as I said before ) you may with your white bread rub out , when you haue done . In these and such like you may at your pleasure find infinite variety to set your selfe a worke with , till you ar able , Sine cortice natare , to fall to work by your own iudgement ; which you shall do in your next and second practise . The second practise . CHAP. 6. YOu shall , next after your hand is grown ready in the aforesaid proportions , practise to draw smal and easie things , comming as neer your former examples as may be , by your conceipt only : as a cherry with the leafe , the shaft of a steeple , a single or canker Rose , &c. wherin you shall begin to take some delight , and find no great difficulty . But in drawing these and whatsoeuer els , I must not forget to tell you ; that you must be perfect and quick in the generall or outward lines , and giue them a reasonable good proportion , ere you fall to shadowing or tricking your work within : wherfore I would haue you make an essay 6 or 7 times at the least for the generall proportion only : if at the first it be not to your mind , as for exāple in drawing of a rose , be sure that the compasse of it be not faulty , ere you cast out the leaues by 5 equal lines , or in making a womans ruffe , that you skore it out first narrow in the neck , then wider from the cheekes , and narrow againe vnder the chin very truly , ere you add the lace or seting , al which is don with I line which I cal the general or extream . For those sorms that are mixed & vncertain , & where your circle and square cā do you no good ( being left only to your Idea ) as in a Lion , a Horse or such like : you must work altogither by your own iudgement , & win the proportion by dailie practise , which wil seem very harsh & strange vnto you at the first , but to help your self herein you shall do thus : hauing the generall notion or shape of the thing in your mind you mean to draw ( which I doubt not but you may conceiue and remember as wel as the best painter in the world though not expresse according to the rules of art ) draw it with your lead or coale after your own fashiō though neuer so badly , & laie it from you for a day : the next daie peruse it well , bethinke your selfe where you haue erred , and mend it according to that Idea you carrie in your mind , in the generall proportion : when you haue thus done , laie it by again til the next daie , & so cōtinue for 5 or 6 daies together , correcting by degrees the other parts euen to smal vains as your discretiō wil serue you , this may you do with 40 papers at once , of seuerall things , hauing done what you can ( though not to your liking ) confer it by the like , some excellent print or patterne of the same , vsing no rule or compasse at all but your own iudgement in mending euery fault lightly , and with a quick hand , giuing euery place his due ; whereby you shall of all sides meet with your errors and find an incredible furtherance to your practise : though hereunto is required I must confesse , a strong imagination and a good memory , which are the midwiues to this arte and practise as in all things els the nurse that bringes it to the ful growth and perfection . Of drawing the face or countenaunce of a man. CHAP. 7. SInce man is the worthiest of al creatures , and such pleasing variety in countenances so disposed of by the diuine prouidence , that among ten thousand you shall not see one like another ( as well for breeding delight , as for obseruing a methode after you haue practised according to your former directions in other things ) you shall begin to draw a mans face , in which as in al other creatures you must take your beginning at the forehead , and so draw downward till you haue finished . The end of the nose in ordinary proportion must be brought no lower then the middle of the cheek , from whence to the chin is for the most part as far , as from thence vpward to the eie browes . The nose of a ful face must not be expressed with apparant lines , but with a very fine shadow on each side as you see . To make an angry or sterne countenance let your brow bend so , that it may almost seeme to touch the ball of the eie ; at what time you must also giue the forehead a fine wrincle or two , and withall the vpper part of the nose betweene the eies . A great conceipt is required in making the eie which either by the dulnes or liuely quicknes thereof giueth a great taste of the spirit & disposition of the mind , ( which manie times I will not denie may be aswell perceiued by the mouth , & motion of the body , ) as in drawing a foole or ideot , by making his eies narrow , and his tēples wrinkled with laughter , wide mouthd , or shewing his teeth &c. A graue or reuerend father by giuing him a demisse and lowly countenauce , his eie beholding you with a sober cast which is caused by the vpper eielid , couering a great part of the ball , and is an especial marke of a sober & staied braine within , Nazianzen when hee beheld Iulian ( long time before hee was Emperour of Athens , at the verie first sight of his countenance , ( Praesaging his future disposition ) burst forth into these words ; Deus bone , quantum malum fouet romanum imperium : for ( as he witnesseth himselfe ) there was not any signe of goodnes or towardnesse in him , his eies rowled in his head , wandring and turning fearefully now this , now that waie ; sparkling with furie & anger , his nose was grown wrinckled with scoffing and deriding the rest of his countenance tending to mockery , his laughter so immoderate that his whole body would shake therwith , his shoulders shrinking to and fro , to his neck : his legges and feete seldome standing stil ; his questions and answeares suspitious , rash , and often interrupted by short fetching his breath : by which signes the good man foresawe his inbred tyranny and vile disposition , which after burst forth into an horrible persecution and open rebellion against God and his church . A Graecian Captaine in like manner noting very often the cast of the eie & countenance of Scylla , together with his gesture and motion of bodie , vsed these words : it is impossible but this gentleman one day shoulde prooue a great commaunder , and I meruaile that he is not aduanced all this while : by which examples and the like , I prooue that there is a certaine iudicium , or notice of the mindes disposition inly imprinted by nature euen in the countenaunce , and many times in the the eie or mouth , which ( as I haue said ) you must be carefull , as you shall haue occasion , warily to obserue . Now for the mouth ( though least of all other any generall rule may bee giuen for it , ) it consisteth principally of two lines whereof one expresseth the mouth it selfe , the other the neather lippe : the ouerlipp is best showen by a shadow cast ouer the crosse line as you see : which shadowe and crosse line if you drawe by the life muste bee hit at an heyres breadth , and if your picture bee little , you cannot thinke so small a thing as giueth or quite taketh awaie the tutch and resemblance of the mouth : and to saie truly it will bee the hardest peece of cunning that euer you shall meet withall : therefore you had need cause the party whome you will drawe to sit as we saie , Vultu composito , without stirring or altering the mouth were it neuer so little : wherefore you shall I beleeue find ( a mās face ) aboue all other creaturs the most troublesōe vnto you : for either they will smile , be ouerlooking your hand , or setting their countenances to seeme gratious and comely , giue you choyse of twentie seuerall faces . The proper and ordinary shadowes of the full face . IT is true that some do affirme , there can be no generall rule giuen for shadowing the face ; the reason is , euery seuerall countenance hath his proper shadowe as it falleth , fat , lean , swoln , wrinckled with age , or deformed by some other accident : but their argument is much at one with that I remember a Welshman vrged in good sadnes in the schooles when I was Sophister in Cambridge : Wales was ful of hills & dales , Ergo the world was not roūd : but to our purpose , The shadowes that fall naturally in this face are these , first a single shadowe in the temples , then a double shadow in the corner of the eies , a circular shadow down the cheek , vnder the neather lip , a little vnder the nosethril , frō the side of the nose to the corner of the mouth , what these seueral shadows and there vses are , you shall know anon . Of the three quarter face . The three quarter face , as I haue said , is diminished by a fourth part , where some part of the eie & cheek are taken away by the nose and made lesse : so that the cheek in full sight must not onely haue his due proportion allowed him , but as much of the head & neck as was taken away from the other side . In this face both the eies ought not to be made of equall bignes , because the eie is lessened with the cheek , as likwise a corner of the mouth ; the shadows in a manner are all one with the full face , saue in this the neck & cheek are commonly deeply shadowed . Of the halfe face . The halfe face of all other is most easie , insomuch that if you will , you may draw it onely with one line neuer remoouing your hand ; in this you are to shew but half an eie , and the eare at full , as you see . In making a true eare there is some difficulty , wherefore I haue giuen an example by it selfe . Of the whole bodie . CHAP. 8. WHen you are grown something perfect in the face , and can draw the head indifferent well , you must be carefull to proportion the body thereafter , then the error of which , no one falt is more common with most painters : for you shall scarce see one among twenty but will draw the head too big , which if you obserue , you shall find in most pictures : help your selfe herein by setting a boie before you , causing him to stand which waie you list , and so to wont your iudgment to the proportion by little and little : hauing finished the head , draw the neck , beginning it with one line from about the tip of the eare ; then draw the other downe from the ball of the cheeke ( which is lessened on the other side ) as far as you think good to the shoulder , where staie , till you haue shadowed it : the shadowes of the neck in a child or yong woman are verie fine , rare and scarcelie seen , but in a man the sinews must be expressed , with the vaines , by shadowing the rest of the neck , & leauing them white . For the proportion of the other parts ( because Master Haddocke hath preuented mee , whose booke in anie case I would haue you to buie , after you are well entred ) I will omit and shew you onlie such eminences which by shadow must be necessarilie expressed : after you haue don the neck , you are to expres the wing or vpper part of the shoulder by shadowing it vnderneath , the brawne of the arme must appeare full , shadowed on one side , then show the wrist bone thereof and the meeting of the vaines in that place , the vaines of the back of the hand , and the knuckles , are made with 2 or 3 heare stroaks with a fine touch of your pen : the paps of a mā are shown by two or three fine stroakes giuen vnderneath , in a woman , with a circular shadowe well deepened , the ribs are so to be shadowd , as you doubt whether they appeare or no ; except your man were starued , or you should draw death himself : the bellie shall be eminēt by shadowing the flanke , and vnder the breast bone : the brawn of the thigh shall appear , by drawing smal heare strokes from the hip to the knee , shadowed again ouerthwartlie : the knee pan must be shown with the knitting thereof by a fine shadow vnderneath the ioynt ; the sh nbone from the knee to the insteppe , is made by shadowing one halfe of the leg with a single shadow , the ankle bone will shew it selfe by a shadow giuen vnderneath , as the knee ; the sinews must seem to take their beginning from the midst of the foot : & to grow bigger the neerer they are to the toes . There is a great art in making the foote wherein your shadowes must take place as occasion serueth , and to saie the trueth , so they must in the other parts , but naturallie they fall as I haue saide ; for teaching you the true shadowing of a naked bodie ; Goltzius is one of the best whom aboue any other I wish you to ●mitate . Of Shadowing . That you might better vnderstand what I meane in this last chapter by so manie kinds of shadowes , I will ere I go farther shew you what they be , with their seuerall vses . The first is a single shadow , and the least of all other , and is proper to the plaine Superficies where it is not wholelie possessed of the light ; as for example : I draw a fowr square plate thus , that shaddowe , because there is no hol low , but all plain ( as neerest participatinge with the light ) is most naturall and agreeable to that bodie . The second is the double shadow , and it is vsed when the Superficies begins once to forsake your eies as you may perceiue best in a column as thus : where it beeing darkned double , it presenteth to your eie ( as it were ) the backside , leauing that vnshaddowed to the light . Your treble shaddowe is made by crossing ouer your double shadowe againe , which darkeneth by a third part in this manner , as followeth . It is vsed for the inmoste shadow and farthest from the light , as in gulffes , chinks of the earth , wells , caues within houses ( as whē you imagine to look in at a doore , or window ) vnder the bellies & flanks of beastes to shew the thik nesor darknes of a myghty wood , that it may seem nulli penetrabilis astro : consequently in al places where the light is beaten foorth , as your reason will teache you . Generall rules for shadowing . You must alwaies cast you shadow one way , that is , on which side of the body you begin your shadow , you must continue it till your worke be done : as if I would draw a man , I begin to shadow his left cheeke , the left part of his neck , the left side of the left arme , the left side of the left thigh , &c : leauing the other to the light , except the light side be darkned by the opposition of an other body , as if three bowles should stand togither , that in the midst must receiue a shadow on both sides . It will seeme a hard matter to shadowe a gemm or well pointed Diamond , that hath many side● and squares , and to giue the lustre , where it ought but if you remember and obserue the right vse o● your shadowes giuing the light to the lightwarde which I haue taught you , you shall easily do it of you● selfe . A merry iest of two Painters . VVHilest I lay in Huntingdon , there grew a qua●rel between two painters , the one a strau●ger and a Soiourner , the other dwelling in t●● towne , the ground of which quarrell was a secret aemulation betweene them ( as commonly falleth out among tradesmen of one profession ) which burst out so farre , that at length one challenged to paint with the other for a wager of 20 nobles ; the picture which should be drawn ( because the strāger had already made and sold many ) was the picture of Christ , and my selfe chosen iudge of the workmāship : great aduice and deliberation was taken on both sides ( Now the painter of the towne to shew ( as he thought ) extraordinary art in shadowing , had laid with charcoale in a deepe blew the cheeks and eies of his picture ) at the last , the worke beeing finished , and both ready to heare my verdict ; Newman the stranger who was the better workman so soon as he saw his aduersaries worke , God forgiue me ( quoth hee ) heer 's a picture with a witnes , it looks as if it had been beaten black and blew : and I pray you ( quoth the other ) was not Christ buffeted , whereat certain gentlemen present , and my selfe took so good an oceasion of laughter ( hee speaking it in an honest simplicity to saue himselfe ) that wee could do no lesse then make them both frinds giuing them their mony again ; & thus much of shadowing . Offore-shortning . CHAP. 9 FOreshortning is when by art the whole is concluded into one part , which onely appeareth to the sight : as if I should paint a ship vpō the sea , yet there should appeare vnto you but her fore part , the reste imagined hid , or likewise an horse with his brest and head looking full in my face , I must of necessity foreshorten him behinde because his sides and flanks appeare not vnto me : this kind of draught is willingly ouerslipt by ordinary painters for want of cunning and skill to performe it ; and you shall see not one thing among an hundred among them drawn in this manner , but after the ordinary fashion side waies , & that but lamely neither : I neuer beheld more absolute skil in his kind then in some of the Pageantes at the coronation of his Maiesty ; but I would not haue you meddle with it till you were growen very cunning in pour plaine Draught . The vse of foreshortning . THe vse of foreshortning is to expresse all manner of action in man or beast , to represent many things in a little room , to giue or shew sūdry sides of Citties , castles , forts , &c , at one time . Of Landt-skip . CHAP. 10. LAndtskip is a Dutch word , & it is as much as wee shoulde say in English landship , or expressing of the land by hills , woodes , Castles , seas , valleys , ruines , hanging rocks , Citties , Townes , &c. as farre as may bee shewed within our Horizon . Seldome it is drawne by it selfe , but in respect & for the sake of some thing els : wherfore it falleth out among those thing which we call Parerga , which are additions or adiuncts rather of ornament , thē otherwise necessary : as for exāple I should Draw the citty of London , I would beside the citty it selse , shew in vacant places ( as far as my table or Horizon would giue me leaue ) the Country round about , as Shooters hill , and the high way winding vp there between the woods , the Thames to grow lesse and lesse , & appearing as it were a dozen mile of , heer and there scattered with shippes and boats : Greenwitch with the tower there and such like , all which are beside my purpose , because I was tied to nothing but the citty itselfe : this kind of all other is most pleasing , because it feedeth the eie with varietie . Before you make your Landskp , you must haue perfected all your other work , & let that be the last : you may draw it at your discretion ( except you be tied to the contrary , & make it either plaine , hilly , all sea , &c : as for your superficies I meane of rising or declining of the ground with hilles or Dales , let it fall out how it will , because you cannot drawe it so rough with hills , or with so euen a plainnes but the earth hath the like in on place or other . Generall rules for Landtskip . YOu shall alwaies in your Landtskip shewe a fair Horizon , and expresse the heauen more or lesse either ouercast by clouds , or with a cleare sky , shewing the sunne rising or setting ouer some hill or other : you shall seldome , except vpon necessity , shew the moone or stars , because we imagin al things to be seene by day . 2. Yf you shew the Sunne , let all the light of your trees , hils , Rocks , building &c be giuen thitherward : shadow also your clouds from the sunne : and you must be very dainty in lessening your bodies by their distance & haue a regard , the farther your Landsskip goeth to those vniuersalia which as Aristotle saith ( in respect of they re particulars concealed from our sences ) are notiora : as in discerning a building 10 or 12 miles off , I cannot tell whether it bee Church , Castle , gentlemans house , or the like : So that in drawing of it I must expresse no particular signe as bell , portculleis &c , but shew it as weakly and as faintly as mine eie iudgeth of it , , because all those particulars are taken away by the greatnes ofthe of the distance . I haue seen a man painted comming downe a hill some mile and a halfe from mee , as I iudged by the Landtskip , yet might you haue told all the buttons ofhis dublet : whether the painter had a suttle inuention , or the fellows buttons were as big as those in fashion whē Mounseir came into England , I wil leaue it ( friendly reader ) to thy iudgement . If you laie your Landtskip in coloures , the farther you goe , the more you must lighten it with a thinne and aiery blew , to make it seeme farre off , beginning it first with a darke greene , so driuing it by degrees into a blew , which the densitie of the air betweene our sighte and that place doth ( onely imaginarily ) effect : your eie may easily bee deceiued in remote thinges , that is when the bodies appeare to your sighte farre bi gger then indeede they are , by the corruption ( as wee saie ) of the Medium : as for example , the Sunne and Moone at their rising or Setting , you see , seeme farre bigger then when they are mounted ouer our heades in the Zenith : the reason is the thicknesse or corruption , as I sayd , of the ayre or Medium ; which ( beeing morning and Euening subiect to vapours ) dooth participate and multiply the quality of the obiect : the same reason is giuen of a Seamew or stake that ( beeing fowre or fiue miles from you , neere the Sea ) will seeme as big as a Swanne , or greate Snowball : or of a twelue-pence , or apple cast into a cleare riuer : to take thereof iust and true Landtskip , neuer go foorth in a morning or euening , ( but in the middest of the day : ) for doubtlesse you will bee deceiued . An honest yeoman and a friend of myne was in this manner notablely coesoned in buiyng a bargain of Timber by the greate in a mystie or rimie morning , ( the trees seeming bigger then they were ) in a manner to his vndooing : but I feare mee , within these few yeares the mistes will bee so thicke , wee shall see no wood at all . Of Draperie . CHAP. 11. DRapery ( so called of the French word Drap , which is cloth ) principallie consisteth in the true making and folding your garment , giuing to euery folde his proper naturall doubling and shadow ; which is a great skil & scarce attained vnto by any of our country and ordinary painters : insomuch that if I woulde make triall of a good workman ; I would finde him quickly by the folding of a garment , or the shadowing of a gowne , sheet , or such like : but to auoide folding , you shall see our common painters set foorth their men & women , with lace , fringe , pinckings , &c. which makes as fayre a shew as the best . The Method now to bee obserued in Draperie , is to drawe first the outmost or extreame lines of your garment , as you will , full or narrow , and leaue wide and spare places , where you thinke you shall haue need of folds ; drawe your greater foldes alwaies first , not letting any line touch , or directly crosse another , for then shall you bring an irrecouerable confusiō into your work : whē you haue so done , break your greater folds vnto lesse , which shall be conteined within them : I would giue you an example , but euery print will shew you the like ; all your folds consist of two lines and no more , which you may turne with the garment at your pleasure : beginne your maine and greatest folds , from the skirt vp ward , and the closer the garmentes sitte , the narrower you must make them : for the shadowing of euery seuerall folde , obserue the first rule I gaue you in the Chapter of shadowing , and spare not to shaddowe your foldes , ( bee they neuer so curiously contriued ) if they fall inwarde from the light , with the double or treble shadow ; as you shall see occasion : for the shadow take his place in one and the same manner aswell in folding as without : some haue vsed to drawe the body naked first , and after to haue put on the apparrell , but I holde it as an idle conceipte , and to small purpose . Generall obseruations and rules for Draperie . Your greater folds must be continued thoroughout the whole garment , the lesser you may break and shorten at your pleasure . The shadowes of all manner of silkes , and fine linnen are very thick , and fine , so that your foldes must not onely be little , but their shadow or deepning verie light , and rare , which commonly at the most is but a double shadow giuen with a new , and the finest penne . You must not vse much folding where the garments ought to sit close or any eminency appeare , as commonly there doth in the brests of a woman , the armes , belly , thighes , legges , &c : but to shewe Arte , you shall leaue the forme of the brest , leg , &c to appeare thorough , which you may doe by shadowing the brest or leg , ( after you draw it ) on one or either side , leauing it white . As I tolde before of the light , fo must you in your draperie haue a care of the winde and motion of the ayre , for driuing your loose apparell all one waie , which I haue seene well obserued in many excellent peeces . Of Diapering . CHAP. 12. DIapering is deriued ( as I take it of the Greeke verbe 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which is , iraijcio or transeo , in English to passe or cast ouer , & it is nothing els but a light tracing or running ouer with your pen ( in Damaske brāches , and such like ) your other worke when you haue quite done ( I meane foldes , shadowing and all ) it chiefly serueth to counterfeite cloth of gold , Siluer , Damaske brancht , veluet , chamlet , &c : with what branche and in what fashion you list . If you diaper vpon folds , let your worke be broken , & taken as it were by the halfe : for reason telleth you that your fold must couer so mewhat vnseene , which being drawn forth at length and laid plaine sheweth all faire and perfect : as Ouid saith of Tapistry . Sic vbi tolluntur festis aulaea theatris , Surgere Signa Solent , primumque ostēdere vultus : Caetera paulatim placidoque educta tenore , Tota patent You must moreouer in drapering , let your work fall out so , that there may be an affinity one part with the other , maintaining one branche or the same worke throughout , setting the fairest in the most eminent place , and causing it to runne vpward : otherwise one might imagine some foolish Tailor had cut out his Ladies gown the wrong way . To make a chamlet you shall draw but fiue lines waued ouerthwart , if your drapering consist of a double line ; you may either shadow the ground , & leaue it white , or shadow your work and leaue the ground white : as you shall thinke good , in this kind your filling may be with smal pricks of your pens end , which will shew faire . Of Antique . CHAP. 13. ANTIQVE so called ab antiquitate , because the inuention and vse therof aboue all other kinds among the Graecians especially was most auncient and in greatest request , the Italian calleth it L'antica : it hath the principall vse in plate , clocks , armour , all manner of compartmentes , curious Architecture , borders of maps , &c : Though you shall seldome haue any greate vse of it , yet I woulde haue you know what it is , and what to obserue in it : The forme of it is a generall , and ( as I maye say ) an vnnaturall or vnorderly composition for delight sake , of mē , beasts , birds , fishes , flowers , &c without ( as wee say ) Rime or reason , for the greater variety you shew in your inuention , the more you please , but remembring to obserue a method or continuation of one and the same thing throughout your whole work without change or altering . You may , if you list , draw naked boyes riding and playing with their paper-mills or bubble-shels vppon Goates , Eagles , Dolphins &c : the bones of a Rammes head hung with strings of beads and Ribands , Satyres , Tritons , apes , Cornu-copia's , Dogges yoackt &c drawing cowcūmers , cherries & any kind of wild trail or vinet after your owne inuention , with a thousand more such idle toyes , so that heerein you cannot bee too fantastical . The late dutch peers in this kind excel all others , and certainly I know not by what destinie the Germanes haue wonne vnto them ( aboue other nations ) the glory of inuention , generally in picture : for except it bee a dutch peece , you shall haue it either lame , ill cut , false shadowed or subiect to some such grosse error . Wherfore , not without reason , Bodine calleth The country officinam hominum a shoppe of men , as from whence a man might bee hadde for all turnes , either Deuine , Phisitian , Souldier painter , &c. Though much I confesse may be imputed to the industrie of that Nation : ( for none in the worlde are more painefull then they ) yet without question the people of themselues , as they ar in genious & capable of all other arts , so naturally they are inclined to this of Painting : Since the greatest persons among them as Dukes , Earles , and in a manner all the Gentlemen doe beare an inbred loue to drawing , and of themselues by they re owne practise growe manie times wonderfull expert heerein : yet none at this daie who fauoureth a good picture , or any excellency in that kind , more then Rodulph the Emperour now liuing . Of Drawing beasts , birds , flowers , &c , CHAP. 14. YOV shall finde amonge beastes some more harder to bee drawne then others for two respectes , one is for a clean making and shape , together with a finenes of the cote or skin : the other for theyr nimblenes and much action , both which you may for exāple see to fal out in a horse , whose lineamentes are both passing curious , and coate so fine , that many sinews yea and the smallest vaines muste be showen in him , besides whose action is so diuers , that for hardnesse of draughte I know not anie one beast maye bee compared to the horse ; for sometime you muste drawe him in his carreer with his manage , & turne , doing the Coruetto , leaping , &c. which you shall not find in the Elephant , Cowe , Beare , or hogg as beeing beasts heauy and sloathfull by nature : moreouer wanting that finenes of coat or hide , so that you shall escape a greate trouble in shewing vains , knitting of Ioints , with the eminency almost of euery bone in them , which you haue in a horse and greyhound . Now for the manner of drawing these or any other beast whatsoeuer : begin with your lead or coale ( as before I told you and gaue you a generall rule ) at the forehead , drawing downward the nose , mouth , vpper and nether chap , ending your line at the throat , then learching it again where you began , from the forehead ouer the head , eares , and neck : continuing it till you haue giuen the full compasse of the buttock , but I will giue you an example . I Begin in this Lion my firste stroke at A , bringing it down to B , making the nose , mouth , and nether chap with one line , as you se ; there I rest : then fetch I that line forward behind by S : making the compas ofhis mane by pricks with my penne ( because if I shoulde make a line , I could not make it iagged ) then bring I the back down to the taile or D , leauing a little space for it , I continue my line from thence to E , or the heele , where I rest : then begin I again at B , and making the breast with the eminency thereof I stay at F , bringing out his neere fore foote , which I finish : then begin I at G not stirring my hand till I come to the foot or paw at H ; wher I finish it quite at E , or the heele . I next draw from his bellie two strokes at I and K : I make the other legge behind , thē the right fore foot issuing from the brest : thē I finish the tail , clawes , toung , teeth , beard , and last of al the shadowing : which method you shall obserue in all beasts howsoeuer they stand . Obseruations of the shadowing . YOV see him shadowed on the back side from CD , vnto E , the reason is the light beateth on his fore parte , wherefore os necessity the shadowe must be in euery parte behinde , eare mane , back , hinder legge , &c. But you maie say , how happeneth it then , that his nether chap and some part of his throat & belly are shadowed being both with the light ? I answeare the light of it own nature cā neuer fall vnder , but take the place aboue or in the vpper part , which place is heer praepossessed by the vpper & nether chap , which as you see fall in between as likewise the forfoot to the belly , which cause a shadow in either of those places . The treble shadow as it ought is giuen to the most in ward places : It your beast bee not in charge , that is not in armes , and you are to shew the ground vnder his feete ; you must make his farther feet on the other side somwhat shorter then those next you : the reason is , that distance of earth betweene them deceiueth the sight , causing the neerer to seem longest : as you may see by opening or stretching your fore and middle finger like a paire of compasses long waies from you , vpon a boord or table , drawing them with your pen as they stand , and obseruing the space betweene . Beasts more hard to be drawn for their shape and action . The Lion. The Horse . The Rhinoceros . The Vnicorne . The Stagge . The Lucerne . The Grey-hound . The Hiena . The Leopard . The Ownce . The Tiger . The Panther . The Ape , &c. Others more easie . The Elephant . The Dromedary . The Camel. The Beare . The Asse . The Hogge . The Sheepe . The Badger . The Porc-espine . The Wolfe . The Foxe . The Cow. The Otter . The Hare . The Coney . The All maner rough The & shag hair dogs In drawing these and all other beasts , the better you obserue their shape and action , the better shall you please , and your iudgement be commended , wherefore a painter had need to be well seene in Naturall Philosophie . The meanest workeman can drawe the ordinary shape of a Lion , when scarce the best of them all know , that his hinder partes are so smal , that there is in a manner a disproportion betweene his forepart and them : so that if I should drawe him in this manner among our ordinarie painters , my work would be condemned as lame , when I deserued most commendation . Moreouer if you aske a Country painter whether he could draw a Crocodile or no , hee will make noe question of it , when as except he trauailed through Aegypt , or met with Aristotle in English , all the wit he had could not so much as set the chaps right , or giue the future truely in the head to , shew the motion of his vpper-chap , which no creature in the world mooueth , saue onely he . If you draw your beast in an Embleme or such like , you shall sometime shew a lant-skip ( as it is ordinarily obserued by Iudicious workemen ) of the country natural to that beast , as to the Rhinoceros an East-indian Lantskip , the Crocodile an Aegyptian , by laying the ground low without hills , many woods of palme-tres , heere and there the ruine of a Pyramis , and so forth of the rest . Of birds . There is les difficulty in drawing birds thē beasts , & least of all in flowers , yet art and needful directions to be obserued in all of them : begin your draught in a bird , as I said , at the head , and beware of making it too big : Van Londerseel's peeces are much to blame for this fault , for in most of them the heads of all his birds are to great by a third part , neither is that fault proper to him alone , but to many good workemen els . You shall best remedy that by causing a bird to be held or tied in a clouen stick before you , where you shall take with your compasses a true proportion , which afterwards you may conclude into as small a forme as you list : there is not the same reason of proportion ( it is true ) in the heads and bodies of all birds alike , but hereby you shall euer after bee acquainted with a reasonable proportion , which though you hit not iustly , you shall come very neere : hauing drawne the head , bring from vnder the throat , the brest line , downe to the legs ; there stay : and begin at the pineon to make the wing , which being ioined with the back line is presently finished : the eie , legs , and traine must be the last , and ( as I told you before in beasts ) let the farther leg euer be shortest . the feathers as the hayre in beasts , must take their beginning ●t the head very small , and in fine rankes fall backward greater and greater , as this your example sheweth . Of flowers , flies , &c. For flowers , flies and such like , I wil leaue them ( being things of smal moment ) to your own discretion , counselling you at your leasure when you walke abroad into the fields , to gather and-keep them in little boxes vntill you shall haue occasion to vse them . To draw a flower begin it ab vmbone , or the bosse in the midst : as in a Rose , there is a yealowe tuft , which being first made , draw your lines equally diuided , frō thence to the line of your compas , which you are first to giue , and then the worst is past . You may shew your flower , either open and faire in the bud , laden with deawe and wette , wormeaten , the leaues dropt away with ouerripenes &c : and as your flower , so first draw rudely your leaues , making them plaine with your coale or lead , before you giue them their vaines or Iaggednesse . For Butterflies , Brees , wasps , grashoppers , & such like , which wee call Insecta , most of them are easie to be drawne , and not hard to be laid in colours : because the colours of many of them are simple , and without composition , as perfect red , black , blew , yellow , &c : which euerye ordinary painter may laie , who if they should bee put ( by mixture of many colours ) to make that purple of a pigeons neck , or giue the perfect colour but of a Daw or Iay , you should see them at their wits end . In the moneths of Iune and Iuly , you may gather of all manner of flies , which you may preserue all the yeere , eyther in close boxes , or sticking them with a pinne seuerally vpon small papers : Butterflies are where store of Thistles and Lauender is , your Brees by ponds and Riuers sides Notable absurdities to be auotded in draught . CHAP. XV. THE first absurdity is of proportion Naturall , commonly called lamenesse , that is when any part or member is disproportionable to the whole body , or seemeth thorough the Ignorance of the painter to be wrested from his naturall place and motion : As in the roofe of the Quire in Peter-borough Minster , you may see Saint Peter painted , his head very neere or altogether as bigge as his middle : and it is ordinary in country houses to see horsemen painted , and the rider a great deale bigger then his horse . The second is of Landtskippe , or Local distance , as I haue seene painted a Church , and some halfe a mile beyond it the vicaredge ; yet the Vicars chimney drawne bigger then the steeple by a third parte , which being lesse of it selfe , ought also to bee much more abated by the distance . The third absurdity is of accident of time , that is when wee fashion or attribute the proprieties of ancient times to those of ours , or ours to theirs : As not long since I founde painted in an Inne Bethulia besieged by Holophernes , where the painter , as if it had beene at Ostend , made his East and West batteries , with great ordinance & small shot playing from the walls , when you know that ordinance was not inuented of two thousand yeers after . The fourth is in expressing passion or the disposition of the minde , as to draw Mars like young Hippolitus with an amiable or effeminate countenaunce , or Venus like an Amazon , or that same hotspurd Harpalice in Virgil , this proceedeth of too sencelesse and ouercold a iudgement . The fift is of Draperie or attire , in not obseruing a decorum in garments proper to euery seuerall condition and calling , as not giuing to a King his Robes of Estate , with their proper furres and linings : To Religious persons an habite fitting with humilitie and contempt of the world ; A notable example of this kinde I found in a Gentlemans hall , which was King Salomon sitting in his throne with a deepe lac'd gentlewomans Ruffe , and a Rebatoe about his neck , vppon his head a blacke veluet Cap with a white feather ; the Queene of Sheba kneeling before him in a loose bodied gowne , and a French-hood . The sixt and last of shadowing , as I haue seen painted the flame of a candle , and the light therof on one side shadowed 3 parts : when there ought to haue bin none at all , because there is vndequaque lumen , which may cause a shadow but take none . THE Second booke intreating of the true ordering of all manner of water colors and painting vpon glasse . CHAP. 1. HAVING hitherto as plainelie , as I could , giuen you those directions I haue thoughte moste necessary for drawing with the pen : I will shewe you next the righte mingling and ordering of your colors , that after you can draw indiffernt well ( for before I woulde not haue you know what colors meaneth ) you may with more delighte apparrell your worke with the liuely and naturall beauty : and first of the choise of your grinding stone and pencills . I like best the porphyrie , white or greene Marble , with a muller or vpper stone of the same , cut verie euen without flawes or holes : you may buy them in London , of those that make toombs , they will laste you youre life time , wearing very little or nothing : some vse glasse , but many times they gather vp their colours on the ground : others slates , but they with wearing ( though neuer so hard at first ) will kill all colours : you may also make you a mullar of a flat pibble , by grinding it smooth at a grindstone if you doe it handsomly , it is as good as the best : your great muscle shells commonly called horse muscles are the best for keeping colors , you may gather them in Iuly about riuer sides , the next to these are the small muscle shels washt and kepte very cleane . Choose your pencils by their fastnes in the quils , and their sharp points , after you haue drawne and wetted them in your mouth ; you shall buy them one after another for eight or ten pence a dozen at the Apothecaries . Of the Seuerall Gummes that are vsed in grinding of water colors . CHAP. 2. Gumme Arabick . THE first and principall is gumme Arabick , choose it by the whitenes , clearenes , & the britlenes of it being broken betweene your teeth : for then it is good , take it and lay it in very faire water vntill it bee quite resolued , and with it grind your colors : you may make it thinne or thick as all other gummes , at your pleasure , by adding & taking away the water you put to it . 2 Gumma Hederae , or of the luie . There is an other verie excellent gumme that proceedeth from the Iuie which you shal get in this māner : find out first an O ake , or house that hath a great branch of Iuie climing vp by it , and with an axe cut it asunder in the midst , and then with your axe head bruise both the ends , & let it stand a month or there abouts , at what time you shall take from it a pure & fine gum like an oyle , which issueth out of the ends : take it off handsomly with a knife or spoon , and keep it in a viall ; it is good to put into your gold size and other colors for threee respects , first it alaies the smell osthe size , secondly it taketh awaie the bubbles that arise vpon your gold size , and other colors , lastly it taketh awaie the clammines , and fatnes from your other colors : there is moreouer great vse of it in the confection of pommander . 3. Gumme lake . Gumme lake is made with the glaire of egges , strained often and very short , about March or April : to which aboute the quantity of a pinte you muste put two spoonful of honey , and as much of Gumma Hederae as a hasell nut , and foure good spoonefuls of the strongest woort you can come by : then straine thē again with a spoong , or peece of wool , so fine as you can , & so long til that you see them runne like a fine and cleare oyle , keepe it then in a cleane glasse , it wil grow hard , but you maie resolue it again with a little cleane water , as you doe gumme Arabeck : it is moreouer an excellent vernish for any picture . 4 Gumme Armoniack . Take Gumme Armoniack , and grind it with the iuice of Garlicke so fine as maye bee , to which put 2. or three drops of weake Gumme Arabeck water , and temper it so that it bee not too thick , but that it may runne well out of your penne , and write therewith what you wil , and let it drie , and when you meane to guild vpon it , cut your gold , or siluer according to the bignes of the size you haue laid ; and then set it with a peece of wool in this manner : firste breath vpon the size , and then laye on your gold vpon it gently taken vp , which presse downe hard with your peece of wool , and then let it well drie , being dried , with a fine linnen cloath strike off finely the loose gold : then shal you find al that you drew very faire gold , and as clean as you haue drawn it , though it were as small as any heare : it is called gold Armoniack , and is taken many times for liquid gold . Of guilding or the ordering of gold and siluer in water colors . CHAP. 3. YOu maie guild onely with gumme water , as I wil shew you , make your water good and stiffe , and laye it on with your pencil where you woulde guild , then take a cushion that hath smooth leather , and turn the bottom vpward , vpon that cut your gold with a sharp knife ; in what quantity you will , & to take it vp draw the edge of your knife finely vpon your tongue , that it may be onely wet : with which , doe but toutch the very edge of your gold , it will come vp and you may lay it as you list ; but before you lay it on , let you gumme bee almost drie , otherwise it will drowne your gold : and being laid , presse it downe harde with the skut of an hare , afterward burnish it with a dogges tooth , or bores tush . I call burnisht gold , that māner of guilding which wee ordinarily see in old parchment & Masse books , ( done by monks and priests who were very expert heerin , as also in laying of colors , that in bookes of an hundred or two hundred yeares old you may see the colors as beautifull and as fresh as if they were done but yesterday , ) it lieth commonly Embossed that you maie feele it , by reason of the thicknes of the ground or size , which size is made in this māner . Take 3 partes of Bole Armoniack , and 4 of fine chalke , grind them together as smal as you can with cleane water , 3 or 4 times , and euery time let it drie , & see it be clean without grauil or grit , & then let it be throwghly Drie , then take the glaire of egges and straine it as short as water ; grind then your bole and chalk therwith , & in the grinding put to a little gum Haederae , & a little ear wax , to the quātitie of a fitch , & 5 or 6 chiues of saffrō , which grind to gether as small as you can possible , & then put it into an ox horn , & couered close let it rot in hot horse dung , or in the earth , for the space of 5 or 6 weekes , then take it vp and laie it in the aire , ( for it will haue an ill sauor ) & vse it at your pleasure . To set gold or siluer . TAKE a peece of your Gūme and resolue it into a stiffe water , then grind a shiue of saffron there with , and you shal haue a fair gold : when you haue set it , and you see that it is throroughly drie , rub or burnish it with a dogs toothe . To make liquid gold or siluer . TAke 5 or 6 leaues of gold or siluer , and laie it vp on a cleane Porphiry , marble stone , or pane of glasse , and grind it with strong water of gumme Lake and a pretty quantity of greate salte , as small as you can , and then put it into a cleane vessel , or viall that is well glazed : and put thereto as much faire water as will fill the glasse or vessell , to the end it may dissolue the stiffe water you ground with it , & that the gold may haue room to go to the bottom let it stand so three or foure houres , then powre out that water , and put in more , vntill you see the gold clean washed : after that take clean water , which put therto with a little Sal Armoniack & great salt , so let it stand three or foure daies in some close place : thē must you distil it in this māner , take a peece of glouers leather , that is very thin , & pick away the skinny side , and put your gold therein binding it close , thē hāging it vp , the Sal Armoniack will fret away , and the gold remain behind , which take , and when you will vse it , haue a little glaire water in a shell by you , wherin dip your pensill , taking vp no more gold then you shall vse . Of all sorts of Reds , and their Tempering . CHAP. IIII. Of Vermilion . YOur fairest and most principall Red is Vermilion , called in Latine Minium , it is a poison , and found where great store of quicksiluer is : you must grind it with the glayre of an egge , and in the grinding put too a little clarified hony , to make his colour brighte and perfect . Sinaper Lake . Sinaper ( in Latine called Cinnabaris , or Synopis of the City Synope in Pontus , where it was first inuented ) maketh a deepe and beautifull red or rather purple , almost like vnto a red Rose : the best was woont to be made , as Dioscorides saith , in Libia of Brimstone and quicksiluer burnt a long time to a small quantity : and not of the blood of the Elephant and Dragon as Plinie supposed : you shall grind it with Gum Lake and Turnsoile water , if you will haue it light , put to a little Ceruse , and it will make a bright crimson , if to diaper put to only Turnsoile water . Synaper Top's . Grinde your Tops after the same manner you doe your lake , they are both of one nature . Red Lead . Red lead , in Latine is called Syricum , it was woont to be made of Ceruse burnt ; which grinde with a quantity of Saffron , and stiffe gumme lake : for your saffron will make it orient and of a Marigolde colour . Turnesoile . Turnsoile is made of old linnen ragges died , you shall vse it after this manner : lay it in a saucer of vineger , and set it ouer a chafing dish of coales and let it boyle , then take it of and wring it into a shell , and put vnto it a little gum Arabeck , letting it stand 3 or 4 howrs , till it be dissolued : it is good to shadow carnations , and all yeallowes . Roset . You shall grind your Roset with Brasill water , and it will make you a deepe and a faire purple , if you put Ceruse to it , it maketh a lighter , if you grinde it with Litmose , it maketh a faire violet . Browne of Spaine . Grind your Browne of Spaine with Brasill water , and if you mingle it with Ceruse it maketh an horse flesh colour . Bole Armoniack . Bole Armoniack is but a faint colour , the chiefest vse of it , is , as I haue said in making a size for burnisht gold . Of Greenes and their tempering . CHAP. V. Greene Bice . TAke green Bice , and order it as you do your blew bice , and in the selfe same manner : when it is moiste and not thorough drie , you may diaper vpon it with the water of deepe greene . Vert-greace . Vertgreace is nothing els but the rust of brasse , which in time being consumed and eaten with Tallow turneth into greene , as you may see many times vpon fowle candlestickes that haue not beene often made cleane , wherfore it hath the name in latine Aerugo , in French Vert de gris , or the hoary greene : to tēper it as you ought , you must grind it with the iuice of Rue , and a little weak gum water , & you shall haue the purest greene that is ; if you will diaper with it , grind it with the lie of Rue , ( that is , the water wherin you haue sod your Rue or Herbgrace ) and you shall haue an hoary greene : you shall diaper or Damaske vpon your vertgreace green , with the water of sapgreene . Verditure . Take your verditure , and grind it with a weak gum Arabeck water , it is the faintest and palest green that is , but it is good to veluet vpon black in any manner of drapery . Sappe greene . Take Sapp greene and laie it in sharpe vineger all night , put to it a little Alom , to raise his colour , and you shall haue a good green to diaper vpon all other greenes . Of Whites and their tempering . Venice Ceruse . Your principall white is Ceruse , called in Latine Cerussa , by the Italian Biacea . Vitruuius teacheth the making of it , which is in this manner . The Rhodians ( saith he ) vse to take the parings of vines or any other chips , and lay them in the bottoms of pipes or hogsheads , vpon which they powr great store of vinegar , and then laie aboue many sheets of lead , and so still one aboue another by rankes till the hogsheads are full , then stoppe they vp againe the hogsheads close , that no ayr may enter : which againe after a certayne time being opened , they find betweene the lead and chips great store of Ceruse : it hath beene much vsed ( as , it is also now adaies ) by women in painting their faces , at whome Martial in his merry vaine skoffeth , saying ; Cerussata timet Sabella Solem. Actius saith it beeing throughly burnt , it turneth into a faire Red , which he calleth Syricum , grinde it with the glair of egs , that hath lien rotting a month or two vnder the ground , and it will make a most perfect white . White Lead . White Lead is in a manner the same that Ceruse is , saue that the Ceruse is refined & made more pure , you shall grinde it with a weake water of gum Lake , and let it stand 3 or 4 daies , Roset and Vermilion maketh it a fair Carnation . Spanish white , There is an other white called Spanish white , which you may make your selfe in this manner ; take fine chalk and grind it with the third part of Alome in faire water , till it be thick like pap , then roule it vp into balls , letting it lie til it be dry , when it is drie , put it into the fire , and let it remayne till it bee red whot like a burning coale , and then take it out and let it coole : it is the best white of al others to lace or garnish beeing ground with a weake Gumme water . of all manner of blewes and their ordering . CHAP. 7. Blew Bice . TAke fine Bice and grind it vpon a clean stone , first with cleane water as smal as you can , then put it into an horn and wash it on this manner : put vnto it as much faire water as will fill vp your horne , and stirre it well , then let it stand the space of an houre , & all the bice shall fall to the bottome , and the corruption will fleet aboue the water , then powre away the corrupt water , and put in more cleane water , and so vse it foure or fiue times , at the last powr awaie all the water , & put in clean water of gum Arabeck not to stiffe , but sōwhat weak , that the bice may fall to the bottō , thē powre away the Gum water clean frō the bice ; & put to another clean water and so wash it vp , and if you would haue it rise of the same color it is of , when it is drie temper it with a weake gum water , which also will cause it to rise and swell in the driing , if a most perfect blew , and of the same color it is being wet , temper it with a stiffe water of gumme lake , if you would haue it light , grind it with a little ceruse , or the muting of an hawk that is white , if you will haue it a most deepe blew , put thereto the water of litmose . Litmose blew Take fine litmose and grind it with ceruse , and if you put to ouermuch Litmos , it maketh a deep blew : if ouermuch ceruse and lesse litmos , it maketh a light blew : you must grind it with weake water of gumme Arabeck . Indebaudias . Take Indebaudias and grind it with the water of Litmose , if you will haue it deepe ; but if lighte , grind it with fine ceruse , and with a weake water of gumme Arabeck , you shall also grind your English Indebaudias , after the same manner , which is not fully so good a cullour as your indebaudias isyou must : Diaper lighte and deepe vpon it , with a good litmose water . Florey blew . Take Florey blew , and grinde it with a little fine Roset , and it will make a deep violet , and by putting in a quantity of Ceruse it wil make a light violet : with 2 parts of Ceruse , and one of red lead , it maketh a perfect Crane colour . Korck or Orchal . Take fine Orchal and grinde it with vnsleckt lime and vrine , it maketh a pure violet : by putting to more or lesse lime , you may make your violet light , or deep as you will. To make a blew water to Diaper vpon all other blews . Take fine Litmus and cut it in peeces , when you haue done , lay it in weak water of Gum Lake , and let it ly 24 howrs therein ; and you shall haue a water of a most perfect azure , with which water you may diaper and damaske vpon all other blews , and sanguines to make them shew more fayr and beautifull : if it begin to dry in your shell , moisten it with a little more water , and it will be as good as at the first . OfYealowes and their mingling . CHAP. VIII . Orpiment . ORpiment called in Latine Arsenicum , or Auripigmentum , ( because being broken it resembleth Gold for shining and colour ) is best ground with a stiffe water of Gumm Lake , and with nothing els : because it is the best colour of it selfe , it will ly vpon no greene : for all greenes , white lead , Red lead , and Ceruse staine it : wherfore you must deepen your colours so , that the Orpiment may be the highest , in which manner it may agree with all colours : it is said that Caius a certayne couetous Prince caused greate store of it to be burned , and tried for golde , of which he found some , and that very good ; but so small a quantity , that it woulde not quite the coste in refining . Masticot or General . Grind your Masticot with a small quantity of Saffron in Gum water , and neuer make it lighter then it is ; it will endure and ly vpon all colours and mettals . Pinke yealow . You must grind your Pinke , if you will haue it sad coloured , with saffron ; if light , with Ceruse : temper it with weake gum water and so vse it . Oker de Luke . Take fine Oker de Luke , or Luce , and grind it with a pure brasil water : it maketh a passing hayr-colour , and is a naturall shadow for gold . Vmber . Vmber is a more sad colour , you may grind it with Gumme water or Gumme Lake : and lighten it at your pleasure with a little Ceruse , and a chiue of saffron . Of blacks and their ordering . CHAP. 9. Harts horne . THe best black to make your Sattens and veluets , in water colours , is the Harts horne burnt to a coale : you may buy it at euery Apothecaries ( for it hath many vses in medicines ) buy the blackest , and if there be ( as commonly there is ) any white , or ouerburnt peeces it it , pick them out cleane , for they wil infect the rest : for a shift you may burne an old combe , fanne handle , or knife haft , or any thing els that is iuory , they wil make a very good black in water , but in oyle the best of all others ; or you may burne a manchet to a coale , which wil serue for a need . Ordinary lamp black . Take a torch ora link , and hold it vnder the bottom of a latten basen , and as it groweth to bee furd and black within , strike it with a feather into some shell or other , and grind it with gumme water . To work with mettals . Tinglas . Grind Tinglas with weak gumme water as smal as you can , and when it is drie , and you haue wroughte it , burnish it with a Dogs tooth , and it will bee like Mettal . Antemonie . Grind your Antemony as your Tinglasse , and burnish it in the same manner . Eler-glasse . Grind your Elerglas with stiffe water of Gumme Arabeck : for it is so brittle that otherwise it will not abide , and order it as you doe your other Mettals ; it will agree with all colours sauing Orpiment . Of making inkes of sundry colours . Greene inke . Take vertgrease and grind it with the iuice of a rotten apple with a little saffron , when you haue done put it into a clean Horn and let it stand a good while , vntill the best fleet aboue , which take and put into a shell , vntill you haue occasion to vse it . The best red inke . Grind vermilion with the glaire of an egge , or stiffe gumme Arabeck water , putting hereto a little saffron , and so write with it out of a shell , if it be drie , you may soften it by adding a little more water . yealow inke . Take saffron rust , or the seedes , and grind it on your painters stone , halfe an hower , with the yolke of an egge : if you wil haue it a light yealow , adde therto a little Ceruse . Blew Inke . Take Indico and grind it with gumme water , and put thereto blanck-bloome , as much as will quicken & and perfect his cullor . White Inke . Grind ceruse on a stone with Gumme water , and you haue done . Sanguine Inke . Take turne soyl and steepe it in gumme water , and after a while wring it into a shel , and so write with it . To keepe inkes from freezing . Put into any of them Camphire about the quantitie of a fitch , and stirre it well about , To make a golden water . Take greene vitriol , Sal Gemma , and Sal Armoniack , and put them together : so that their bee the quantitie of an ownce ; and seeth them in a quart of white wine , vntill it be halfe wasted awaie , and when it is coole worke withall : To make an excellent greene water . Take red vineger and the Vrine of a Ramme , the filing of brasse and an ownce of vert-greace , with the gall of a Bul , & boile them together the space of going halfe a mile : and then put thereto a prety quantity of Alome , & let it stand . 7. or 8. daies , and so worke with it . Thus briefly haue I taught you your colors , and the manner of ordering or tempering the same : for the mixtnre of some one cullor of many , ( as a bay or Sorrell in a horse ) you must haue some time to doe it by your owne discretion and obseruation : for it wold bee too tedious a peece of worke to giue directions all , when as a man may of one color alone , make aboue a thousand species , or kindes : wherefore when you come to a compounded color , ( like the aforesaid ) which you can very hardly make , mingle those colors which you know come neerest vnto it , confer and laie them to the life , adding or taking awaie as you see cause . The manner of Annealing and painting vpon glasse . CHAP. I. AS there haue been of late years many artes inuented , and others , that in a manner laie rude and vnregarded , through the industry of our times growne to ful perfection : So I make no question on the other side , but diuers by our Idlenes & negligence are vtterly lost and forgotten ; that I may alledge one in stead of the rest , I would know what Lapidarie , or any els could shew mee the art of casting that marble , where of wee see many fayre and beautifull pillars in Westminster , Lincolne , Peterborough ; &c , and in many places whole pauements , as in Saint Albanes Abbey , Gormanchester , surely I think not any : And what hath been in greater request then good workmanship in glasse , when scarce now any maie bee found ( excepte some few in Londō , and they perhaps dutchmen to ) that haue but the ordinary skill of annealing and laying their colours : verily I am perswaded , if our forefat hers had knowne , how little we regarded either their deuotion or cost in painting glasse windowes , they would haue spared their mony , to some better purpose ; nay if we would in many places imitate them so farre , as but to allow our Churches and Chappels glasse , it were wel ; where many times you shall see whole panes ( whereof some haue carried the names of their deuout and religious founders ; others the royal coates either of our auncient kinges of this land , their Allies , or of the benefactors and Lords of that place , monuments many times of great importance , ) for want of repaire partly beene beaten downe by the weather , partly by ouer precise parsōs & vicars , ( as one in Northamptonshire did in his chauncel , the armes of King Edward the 3. and the dukes of Yorke and Clarence , taking them for images , ) and the windowes stopt vp with strawe and sedge , or damd vp quite , a regard I confes hath been had of these abuses , but I feare me a great deal too late . The best workmanship that may be seene in England at this daie in glasse , is in K. Colledge Chappel in Cambridge , containing ( as they say ) the whole history both of the old and new testament , the next to that in Henry the seuenths Chapel at Westminster the one finished , the other wholly builte by the said religious King. There are many good peeces els in diuers other places , as Canterbury , Lincolne , &c : vnto which being drawne by their own antiquitye , and loue of arte , I haue in a manner gone in pilgrimage , neither , as I thought , loosing my labour , since I can shew almost 8 hundred seuerall auncient coates , which out of old and decaied windowes , I haue entertained from the iniury of rude hands , and fowle weather . CHAP. 2. THere be six principal colors in glasse ; which are Or , or yealow Argent , or white , Sables , Azure , Gules , and Vert , black , blew , red , and greene . How to makeyour Or , or yealow vpon glasse . Your yealow is made in this manner , take an olde groate : or other peece of the purest and best refmed filuer that you can get , then take a good quantitie of Brimstone , and melt it , when ye haue done , put your siluer into the Brimstone melted ; and take it forth againe with a pair of pliers or smal tongues , and lighte it at the fier , holding it in your tongues vntil it leaue burning : then beate your siluer in a brazen Mortar to dust , which dust take out of the mortar , and laying it on your Marble stone grind it ( adding vnto it a smal quātity of yelow Oker ) with gum Arabeck water and when you haue drawne with your pencill what you will , let it of it selfe throughly drie vpon the glasse . Another fair Gold or yealow vpon Glasse . Take a quantity of good siluer , and cut it in small peeces : Antemonium beaten to powder , and put them togither in a crucible or melting cruse , and set them on the fire , well couered round about , with coales for the space of an houre : then take it out of the fire , and cast it into the bottom of a candle stick , after that beat it small into powder , and so grind it . Note when as you take your siluer as much as you meane to burne , remember to waie againste it six times as much yealow oaker as it waieth , and seauen times as much of the old earth , that hath been scraped of the annealed worke , as your siluer waieth : which after it is well ground , put altogether into a pot and stir it well , and so vse it , this is the best yealow . Argent or white . Argent or siluer , is the glasse it self , and needeth no other colour , yet you may diaper vpon it with other glasse or Christal , beaten to powder and ground . Sables . Take Iet , and the scales of Iron , and with a wet fether when the smith hath taken an heat , take vp the scales that fly from the Iron ; which you may doe by laying the feather on them , & those scales that come vp with the feather , you shall grind vpon your painters stone , with the Iet and Gum me water , so vse it as your gold aboue written . Azure , Gules , and Ver● . These three colors are to be vsed after one māner you m ay buy or speak vnto some merchant you are acquainted withall , to po cure you what coloured beads you will , as for example , the most & perfectest red beads , that can be come by , to make you a faire red , beat thē into powder , in a brazē Mortar , then buy the gold smithes red Ammell , which in any case let be very transparent and through-shining , take of the beades two pearls , and of the Ammel one part , and gtind them together as you did your filuer , in the like sort may you vse al the other cullors . Another saire red vpon glasse . Take a quantity of Dragons blood , called in Latin Sanguis Draconis , beate it into fine powder in a mortar , and put it in a linnen cloath , & put thereto strōg Aquauitae , and strain them to gether in a pot , and vse them when you need . An other excellent greene vpon glasse . Take a quantitie of vertgrease and grind it very well with Turpentine , when you haue done put it into a pot , and as often as you vse it warme it on the fire . To make a faire carnation vpon a glasse . Take an ownce of Tinne-glas , one quarter of gum ofIet three ownces , ofRed oker fiue ownces , & grind them together . Another black Take a quantity of iron scales , and so many copper scales and waie them one against an other , and half as much Iet , and mix them well together . Before you occupy your scales , let them be stamped small , and put them into a cleane fire shouel , and set them vpon the fire till they be red whot , and they wil be the better . Another Carnation . Take a quantity of let , and halfe as much siluer scum , or glasse tinne , & halfe as much of Iron scales , a quarter as much of gum , and as much red chalk as all these do way , and grind it . The manner of annealing your glasse , after you haue laid on your colours . Take brickes , and therewith make an ouen fowre square , one foot and a halfe high in this manner : and raise it a foote and a halfe high , when you haue done , laye little barres of Iron ouerthwart it thus , three or fowr , or as many as will serue , then raise it aboue the barres one foote and a halfe more , then is it high enough : when you purpose to anneale , Take a plate of Iron made fitt for the aforesaid ouen , or for want thereof , take a blew stone , such as they make hauer or oaten cakes vpon which being made fit for the aforesayd ouen , lay it vpon the crosse barres of Iron : that done , take sleekt lime & sift it through a fine siue , into the ouen , open the plate or stone , and make a bed of lime , then lay your glasse which you haue wrought and drawne before , vpon the said bed of lime ; then sift vpon the said glasse : another bed of lime , & vpon that bed lay other glas , and so by beds you maie lay as much glas as the ouen wil containe : prouiding alwaies that one glasse touch not another . Then make a softe fire vnder your glasse , and let it burn til it be sufficiently annealed : it maie haue ( you must note ) too much or too little of the fire , but to prouide that it shal be wel , you shal doe as followeth . To know when your glasse is well annealed . Take so many peeces of glasse , as you purpose to lay beds of glasse in your ouen , or furnace , and draw in colors what you will vpon the said peeces , or if you wipe them ouer with some color , with your finger onely it is enough : & lay with euery bed of your wrought and drawne glasse one of the said peeces of glasse , which are called watches , & when you think that they are sufficiētly annealed with a pair of pliers or tongs , take out the first watch which is the lowest , & next to the fire , and laie it vpon a boord vntill it be cold : then scrape it good and harde with a knife , and if the color goeth off ; it hath not enough of the fire , & if it hold it is wel annealed . When you woulde occupie any oiled color in glasse , you shal once grind it with gumme water , & then temper it with spanish Turpentine , and let it drie as neere the fire as may bee , then is it perfect . Other notes worthy of the practise and obseruation . Colours for a table worke . Take Indie blew , and grind it vpon your stone , or glasse , and gumme it wel : and laie it vpon your table worke as you thinke good , striking your blew ouer with linseed oylvpon which after it hath dried a little , lay on lesse gold or siluer , and it will be faire . For a faire Red. Take faire black adding thereto a small quantity of Sanguis Draconis , and grind it vpon a stone with the fattest oyl you can get , afterward grind it as drie as you can , and put it into a shell : after you haue laid it let your color dry , and strike it ouer with linseed oyl , after that laie on you siluer . For greene . Take spanish greene , and grind it as you ground your black , and laie it : you may first shadow it with blew , and so lay your greene vpon it : and after letting it Drie in the sunne , lay on the green or siluer as is beforementioned . For a gold cloath . Take your carnation and deep it is as you would deepe with black , and strike it thin with oile , and after lay your gold on , and it will bee faire . To write vpon iron . Take vertgrease , greene copperaes , vinegar , and roch Alome : and temper them together : and melte wax vpon your sword or knife , vpon which draw or write what you will. Hauing thus ( friendly reader ) for thy behoof plaid both the Painter and Glasier at once , I craue pardon if in so deepe a skill I haue not satisfied thee in all things : what I haue omitted it is not through Ignorance , but because I would not trouble thee a learner ( as I imagine ) with ouer busie or tedious conclusions ; hauing long since lerned that lesson of Horace . Quicquid praecipies breuis esto . &c. And thus not doubting of thy good will for my paines , such as they are , I throw away my Apron , and bid thee heartily adew . FINIS . Notes, typically marginal, from the original text Notes for div A09192-e260 Fidibus praeclare cecinisse dicitur . Tuse . Q. li. 1 Xenoph. lib. vlt. Rer. graec . Politic. 8. Plin. lib. 36. cap. 5. Notes for div A09192-e650 Exod. 31. Iob : 39 : 16 Polit. 8. 1 Sem : Exam : de ingenios . Rutilius in vita Q. Fabii pictoris Iuriscon . In vita Pom Sigebert in Chron. de Oratore , Aelian de varia H●st . lib. 10 : Apollodorus Euphranor . Parrhasias . Pyreicus . Aristides . Nicophanes Protogenes . in Demetr . Apelles . Galaton . C. Pulcher. de quo Cicero . I de Oratore Herocle di Ferrara . Bellino . Vnicio . Pisanello . Petro de Burgo . Zoto . Mi. Angelo Alberdure . Stradane . M. Hilliard M. Isaac . The excee . ding value of pictures . de quibus Cic. Act. 6. in Verrem . B. in Asse , Ezech. eh . 1 , verse 27. Catholic . Institut . in praecept . 1. Black lead in quils . Sallow coal es . Rule and compasse . Manchet or fine white bread . Broome pencils . How to helpe you in your Idea . The space of an other eie to be left betweene the eies . great difficulty in the eie . Nicephor . lib 10 cap. 3 7. Nazianz. in 2. inuect . contra Iulianum . Brusonius lib ; 7. cap. 20 The mouth . Making the head too big , a common fault . The neck . The sholder . The arme . The wrist . The knuckles The paps . The Ribs . Thebelly . The thigh . The knee . The legge . The foote . The double shadow . 5. Poster . 1. Metam . 3. A lantskip must be giuē to euery beast according to his Country 1 Of lamenes 2 Of locall distance . 3 Accident of Time. Iud. 7. 4 In expressing the passion or disposition of the mind . Qualisequos Threissa fatigat Harpalice . Aeneid . 1. 5 Of drapery 6 Of shadowing . Notes for div A09192-e5750 The choyse of your grinding stone & mullar . Lib. 33. cap ; 7. A bright Crimson . Marigold colour . A purple . A faire violet . Horseflesh colour . Epigram , lib. 2. A fair Carnation . 
A43083	----	The art of glass shewing how to make all sorts of glass, crystal and enamel : likewise the making of pearls, precious stones, china and looking-glasses : to which is added, the method of painting on glass and enameling : also how to extract the colours from minerals, metals, herbs and flowers ... : illustrated with proper sculptures / written originally in French, by Mr. H. Blancourt, and now first translated into English ; with an appendix, containing exact instructions for making glass-eyes of all colours. De l'art de la verrerie. English Haudicquer de Blancourt, Jean, b. ca. 1650. 1699 Approx. 505 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 172 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images. Text Creation Partnership, Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) : 2004-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1). A43083 Wing H1150 ESTC R16918 12165353 ocm 12165353 55296 This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission. Early English books online. (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A43083) Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 55296) Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 102:4) The art of glass shewing how to make all sorts of glass, crystal and enamel : likewise the making of pearls, precious stones, china and looking-glasses : to which is added, the method of painting on glass and enameling : also how to extract the colours from minerals, metals, herbs and flowers ... : illustrated with proper sculptures / written originally in French, by Mr. H. Blancourt, and now first translated into English ; with an appendix, containing exact instructions for making glass-eyes of all colours. De l'art de la verrerie. English Haudicquer de Blancourt, Jean, b. ca. 1650. [14], 355, [13] p. : ill. Printed for Dan. Brown ... Tho. Bennet ... D. Midwinter and Tho. Leigh ... and R. Wilkin ..., London : 1699. Translation of: De l'art de la verrerie. Reproduction of original in Princeton University Library. Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford. Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors. EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO. EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org). The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source. Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data. Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so. Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor. The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines. Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements). Keying and markup guidelines are available at the Text Creation Partnership web site . eng Glass manufacture -- Early works to 1800. Enamel and enameling -- Early works to 1800. Precious stones. 2003-09 TCP Assigned for keying and markup 2003-10 SPi Global Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images 2003-11 Judith Siefring Sampled and proofread 2003-11 Judith Siefring Text and markup reviewed and edited 2003-12 pfs Batch review (QC) and XML conversion THE Art of Glass . SHEWING How to make all Sorts of GLASS , Crystal and Enamel . Likewise the Making of Pearls , Precious Stones , China and Looking-Glasses . To which is added , The Method of Painting on Glass and Enameling . Also how to Extract the Colours from Minerals , Metals , Herbs and Flowers . A Work containing many Secrets and Curiosities never before Discovered . Illustrated with Proper Sculptures . Written Originally in French , By Mr. H. BLANCOVRT , And now first Translated into English. With an APPENDIX , containing Exact Instructions for making GLASS-EYES of all Colours . LONDON , Printed for Dan. Brown at the Black Swan without Temple-Bar ; Tho. Bennet at the Half-Moon , D. Mid-winter and Tho. Leigh at the Rose and Crown , and R. Wilkin at the King's-Head in St. Paul's Church-yard , MDCXCIX . TO My Lord Marquiss OF VILLACERF , Counsellour of State , Chief Steward of the Houshold to the Late Queen ; Superintendant and Surveyor-General of His Majesty's Buildings and Gardens , Arts and Manufactures . SIR , THE Knowledge which I acquired by my Study and Experience in the Art of Glass , has Retriev'd several Important Secrets , which for a long time lay Buried in Oblivion : Of these I at length resolved to Compose a Treatise ; and I here make bold to Inscribe it to your Illustrious Name , that they may be once more Restored to this Kingdom . If your Honour pleases to look over the Wonders herein delivered , you 'll be satisfied I have found out and added several Curious Things of my own Invention , as well relating to the Secrets of Nature , as the most profound Science of the Adepti , or Ancient Philosophers . Hence it is , Sir , I am to hope You 'll Receive this Favourably ; that under the Honour of your Protection , it may meet with Acceptance Abroad : For if You grant Your Approbation , the World will not deny it Theirs . Permit therefore , Illustrious Sir , that I may Impart the Secrets of this Noble Art to the Publick , under your Auspicious Patronage : Which is the Most Humble Request of him who Subscribes himself with all Imaginable Respect , Your Honour 's , Most Humble , and most Obedient Servant , H. de Blancourt . THE PREFACE . THE Art of Glass , being one of the Most Noble and Curious of all other Arts , and the Wonderfulness of it , both in the Simplicity of the Matter , whereof it is made , and in the Formation of it ; as also the Various Colours it is capable of receiving , appearing so Curious and Entertaining , chiefly engaged my Thoughts in the Study of its Principles , and to penetrate into the most hidden Secrets of it . The Knowledge I had acquired in the Secrets of Nature , both by Speculations , and repeated Experiments , Excited me to a more particular Enquiry of whatever might be extraordinary in it , that I might Impart it to the Publick . Most People are of Opinion , That the Ancient Manner of Tinging Glass , ( with those fine and rich Colours , whereof there are still some Remains to be seen in Ancient Churches ) is at present quite lost . It is true indeed , it is lost Publickly , since those who publickly profess the Art of Making Glass , know nothing of it : But to those who set themselves throughly to study the true Principles of whatever they undertake , it is not difficult to Retrieve lost Arts , and Revive them in their Ancient Splendour and Perfection . I shall therefore here endeavour to Revive , and make Publick , this supposedly lost Secret , of giving all those Curious and Rich Colours to Glass , which the Ancients did , by shewing whatever has been performed , that is extraordinary and curious in this Science , which I have traced and recovered from the obscure Tracts of Ancient Authors , and confirmed by my own Experiments ; and also augmented what was delivered by them , in Preparations of several rare and precious Matters , that cannot but appear very extraordinary . This Age has been very happy for the Restauration of Arts and Sciences , of which that late Excellent Minister of State , Monsieur Colbert Superintendant , and Surveyor-General of the Buildings , Arts , and Manufactures of France , has been an Assiduous Reviver and Encourager : They seem at present to be arrived at so high a degree of Perfection , that there is not one but has surpassed whatever was done by the Ancients ; and those under his Inspection , particularly merit on that account a preference to any others . That of Glass , whereof we are at present to treat , has not been the last that has signalized it self , having already shewn Wonders in the extraordinary largeness of Coach-glasses . We have divided this Work into Twelve Books , which contain so many different Heads , tho' derived from the same Principles . If we were to follow the ordinary Custom of most Authors , we should Epitomize in the Preface , the Contents of those Twelve Books : But that seems to us a needless Task , since the Reader may please to peruse an Index , which we have for that purpose annexed to the End of this Volume , which will be sufficient for the Reader 's Satisfaction therein . Our Design being not to trouble the Reader with a long Preface , we have resolved only to touch very lightly of the Matters contained in the Book , and only to hint of some things that are omitted . Glass has something in it so beautiful to the Sight , and its Transparency is so agreeable , that it is no wonder we find it by several , and even in the Holy Scripture it self , compared not only to Gold , the most perfect of all Metals , but also to things far more high and Spiritual . They are Mysteries of deeper Consequences , than at first sight we imagine , since by them we are informed , that Vitrification gives a better Being , or Nobler Nature . This requires the attentive Thoughts of Philosophers , not only in the Nature of Metals , where it is easily seen ; but also in other things , where Sense and Experience testifie the Truth of it . We have asserted in our Book , that Glass is a perfect Metal , since it will bear the utmost force of Fire as well as Gold : And that there is but one sort of Fire , more Puissant than the Vulgar , that can consume it : But here we will take notice , that there are two Ways to make Glass , and that it may be made more or less fixed . That the more fixed , which is the least beautiful and the least transparent , resists every thing ; no Preparation of Mercury , nor any Species of Aqua-fortis , can Dissolve it , nor the most sub●le Poisons , or highest Corrosives , arrive any further than to break it . The less fixed , on the contrary , which is the most clear and transparent , as that of Venice , is less capable of Resistance , being composed of a more purified Salt : Thus it will Dissolve in the Earth , or in cold and moist Places , if there be more Salt in it proportionably ●han Sand , by a Separation natural to those two sorts of Matter : And Poisons Extracted out of Minerals will Dissolve it , by reason of their great cold . We shan't repeat here the Virtues Glass is capable of acquiring , ( whereof we make mention in several places ) by the Grand Elixir of the Philosophers , ( which makes it Malleable , and Converts Crystal into Precious Stones ) as also by several other ways . We 'll only add , That there are several other less and particular Secrets , by which it may be made soft and fusil like Wax , and afterwards reduced to its former hardness in Water ; but these are little Curiosities that serve to no purpose . Glass may receive either within or without any sort of Metallick Colours , which makes it very proper for Painting . Those which we shall teach to Extract from Metals , and shew in this Book for the tinging of Glass , give it a Lustre equal to Precious Stones , and set it off with an unspeakable Beauty . As we have given you the ordinary Preparations of all sorts of Metals , Crystal , Glass , Rochetta , Soda , Tartar , Manganese , Salt , Sulphur , Vitriol , Aqua-fortis and Regis , Pastes , Enamels , Pearls , and other things contained in this Work : So we can safely say , we have given you more of them than are common , and some which have never been publick ; which we have all along taken particular care to do , to oblige the Curious in this Art , who will apprehend it better by reading the Book it self , than we can tell them in the Preface . But more particularly to shew our Ingenuous and Vnprejudiced Impartiality in this Affair , and how little envy we have to the Students and Practisers of this Art , we discover to them such extraordinary and precious Receipts in it , as would have been Industriously concealed by any other Hand , because they point out the Paths to Persons Conversant and Illuminated in these Studies , even to their greatest Secrets , and most hidden Recesses . By what we treat of in this Book upon this Subject , ●ne may perceive that there is nothing in Nature which Man cannot imitate : And if we believe what Claudian ●ells us , of that great Sphere of Glass , made by Archinedes , we shall have reason to be as much surprized , as Claudian's Poem makes the Gods to be . If the Reader ●ould know the reason why that Sphere was made of Glass , ●e may see it in Cardan's Book , de Subtilitate , where ●e may see with it , a Quotation of the Verses we here ●ention . Besides what relates to the Art of making Glass , we ●lso treat of the Ways of Painting on Enamel and Glass ; ●nd we also shew the Way of Extracting Tinctures of ●everal Colours of Herbs , Flowers , Roots , Grain , Wood , Stones , and other things , for this sort of Pain●ing and Tinging of Glass . Altho ▪ this . Art of Painting seems different from that ●f Glass , yet they ought not to be separated , since this Painting is performed with Minerals , and that they melt ●n Fire like the Enamels . One of the most Ingenious we have ever had for Pain●ing on Glass , was one Jaques de Paroy , a Native of ●t . Pourcain sur Allier , who has Writ upon that Subject . His Genius always leading him that ways , he apply'd him●elf to it with a great Inclination and Industry , and suceeded in it accordingly : Whereupon he went to Rome to ●erfect himself , as being the greatest and most general ●chool for Painting and Sculpture ; where he studied ● long time under the Famous Dominican . After he at●ained to Perfection , he went to Venice , where he did ●everal fine Pieces . Returning into France , in the Province of Auvergne , where he was Born , he performed also some extraordinary Pieces in the Castle of the Count de Calignac , and afterwards in the Church of St. Mederick in Paris , where is yet to be seen of his , the Judgment of Susannah , which is very perfect and Exquisite , as well as all the other Pieces of the Choir . At length this Excellent Person● died at the Age of 102 Years , in the City of Moulin● Burbonois , where his last Funeral Obsequies were performed in the Church of the Jacobines . There are likewise more of those fine Paintings , whic● justly cause Admiration in all Learned Beholders , to b● seen in the Church of St. Gervais at Paris , and in th● Wooden-Chappel at St. Vincent's , in the Great Church o● the City of Metz , in that of St. Owen at Roan , in th● Castles of Gaillon and Annet ; and in several other places , which would be tedious to relate , where in a● of them are to be seen some of those Prodigies o● Art. The Way to become perfect in any Art , is wholly to d● vote and give ones self up to 't ; but the most part of thos● who have so Zealously apply'd themselves to it , and be● come Excellent therein , have left no other Patrimony ●● their Heirs , but their own Empty Fame , which they a●● ways pursu'd when alive , with far more Vigour than th● Goods of Fortune . Witness Lisippus , that Incomparab●● Engraver , why Died of meer Poverty , because instea● of seeking whereby to Live , he continually employ'd him self about his Art. And Miron , who seem'd to have ●nimated his Statues , cast them so happily in Brass , l●● so little behind him , that no one would take the pains to ● his Executor to look after it . We might give a Thousand Examples of these Truths , and in what Esteem those who have excell'd in these Arts , have been had by great Princes all over the World , but the Subject would require a larger Discourse than we have allotted to this Preface , which obliges us to come to a Conclusion ; only further desiring the Reader not to expect any Quaintness of Expression , or Politeness of Stile , but rather to content himself with the Exactness which we have always taken care to observe in giving him the Preparations we pretend to shew , with all the Truth and Fidelity possible . OF THE ART OF GLASS . PART I. CHAP. I. Of the Original , Antiquity , and Vse of Glass . IT has not been without Reason , that several Learned Persons have compared Man to a Microcosm , or Little World , since he contains in himself all the Excellencies of the Greater ; and that God , having created him after his own Image , has given him an Absolute Dominion over all Creatures in this World : Not only over Animals and Vegetables , and those other visible mixt Bodies , among which we are immediately conversant ; but also over Metals , Minerals , Semiminerals , Pretious Stones , Pearls , Corals , and whatever Treasures are hid in the Bowels of the Earth , or Bottom of the Seas ; that he might make use of them for his own Pleasure , and that by the Understanding God has given him , he might know their Properties , to make them usefull for his particular Occasions . The Power of Nature is limited in all her Effects , and Man alone can augment and enlarge by Art , the Virtues and Powers which she has produced , by separating the Pure from the Impure , that which is more Subtil and Spiritual , from the more Gross and Earthy ; which Nature her self cannot do , by reason she has no Tools nor Instruments proper for such Separations ; especially of those Impurities , which by proceeding from the Corruptions of the Matrixes , where all her Generations are made , perpetually mix themselves with all her Productions : Besides that the Universal Seed ( or Spirit ) of the World , which contains in it self the three Principles and four Elements , whereof every thing in Nature is compos'd and nourish'd , is it self not free from Impurity ; for in making its Circulations from Heaven to Earth , and from thence again to Heaven , where it is impregnated with all the Virtues of the Constellations and Planets , it returns again , and descends even to the Center of the Earth , there to be impregnated with a Body and Salt , and acquire the utmost Elementary Perfection ; whence the Central Fire forcing it to repass to the Surface , and thence into the Globe of Water and Air , after having produced , in its passage , in all the Elements , an● infinite Number of Mixtures , it ascends again into the Heavens , whence it penetrates and animates the whole Universe . It is by all these Circulations tha● this Seed or Soul of the World becomes invested with Impurities , whereof the general or universal Spirit is tainted , so that the Pure and Impure ascend and descend together in Confusion ; insomuch , that only the Industry of Man can separate them , by ejecting the unprofitable excrementitious Parts , and separating and purifying its Principles , and then reuniting them , to make a Compound of a greater Virtue ; so that of that Compound you may make a Species capable of producing its * like : For the Nature of one Mixt or Compound , cannot produce or be chang'd into a Mixt of a different Nature ; We must always sow Wheat to have a Crop of Wheat . Hence it is that so many great Philosophers have told us , That Man , by the means of Art , might begin where Nature left off , by purifying its Matters , and reducing them to their first Principles , and thence raising them to the utmost degree of Perfection ; whether the End be to prolong Man's Life , or curing his greatest and most inveterate Diseases , as also of other Animals ; or for Metals , Minerals , Pretious Stones , Plants , and other Vegetables . Now such Separation and Purification of Substances is not impossible , as long as you destroy not entirely the Subjects : But it must be perform'd by something that specifically agrees with their own respective Natures ; then ( by it ) you may make a perfect Reduction of their Substances , wherewith by means of Art , Man may perform all those things I have now mention'd , as to cure the most inveterate Diseases , convert what is imperfect into the most perfect ; and it is hereby that you have display'd , that absolute Dominion which God has given him over all the Creatures . It is not my present Design to enter into the depth of the Mysteries of this sublime Science , which I leave to those true * Philosophers , who are the only Creatures to whom God has reveal'd them , and whereof all other Men , like my self , are unworthy : but only to shew by sensible Demonstration , That Man , in many things , is capable of imitating Nature by the Assistance of Art ; and of performing several things by his Industry , and the Work of his hands , which look more like Miracles , than the Effects of Art. Those which make the Subject of the following Discourse , would be no less surprizing , if they were less common ; but from the time our Eyes become accustom'd by constant use to any Object , the Esteem of it begins to be lessen'd , and fall ; Witness Nature her self , whose Annual Renovation , tho' we are accustom'd to it , ought to be a perpetual Subject of Admiration . Of all the Works of Art , that of Glass is not the least considerable , whether it be Natural or Artificial ; it melts in the Fire without consuming , and is therein perfected or made fine like Gold , which is a perfect Metal , and there leaves behind it its Dross , becoming purified and whitened , which renders it more proper for making Dishes , Glasses , and other Vessels for Man's use , than any other Metal , or Matter whatsoever . Nay , I may yet go farther , and say , That Glass not only purifies it self in the Fire , but also assists to purifie and melt all other Metals , and render them more plyable and malleable , and so more easie to work upon to the ends they are design'd for . In the Spagyrick Art , in Physick , in Chymistry , it is impossible to be without Vessels of Glass , whether for Sublimations , Distillations , or Putrefactions , Digestions , Circulations , or other Operations to which they are necessary for several Reasons ; one whereof is , That all the gradual Alterations , of the Matter therein contain'd , and what is done in it on the Fire , are visible to the eye ; and another , That those Matters can neither be imbib'd by the Vessel , nor transpire thro' its Pores , nor it communicate any ill Scent or Taste , which might be noxious to the Health , if the Matter be prepar'd for Medicine : Moreover the Philosophers make use of no other Vessels for their curious Operations , whether it be to extract the Philosophick Mercury , or purifie it , or for the Decoction of their Grand Elixir and Panacaea's , which they cannot perform without Glass ; for otherwise they would labour in the dark , and could never well regulate their Operations : Besides the Volatility of their Spirits , which they must preserve , is of so subtile and quick Penetration , that no other Vessels could hold them . Churches , Palaces , Castles , and Particular Houses , owe their chiefest Ornaments as well as Conveniencies , to Glass ; for that transparent Substance guards them within from too great Heat and Cold , without hindring the Intromission of the Light. Looking-Glasses , and other great Plates of Glasses are as so many surprizing Objects to our Eyes , representing so distinctly and naturally all even from the least to the greatest Actions of the Objects before them ; whereby also one may always keep himself in a neat and agreeable dress . Notwithstanding not one in a Thousand of those who have them , ever reflect on the Admirableness of the Work , which is beyond doubt , one of the chiefest , and most perfect Pieces of Art , and than which Man can make nothing more wonderful . Moreover , China-Ware for adorning Capboards and Tables , Dishes , divers sorts of Glasses , and Figures , and a thousand other Curiosities , of all sort ; of Colours , which serve both for Pleasure and Use , and employ the Poor all over the World ; are they not well worthy of Admiration ? But if we consider the Painting and Representations in the Glasses of Churches , we must at the same time admire , that the Colours which we extract from Metals for that End , can be so very lively , as to resemble so many pretious Stones . If any of this Glass be cast into a Furnace , you may see what a vast number of Colours it is susceptible of , even beyond Comparison . * Glass is called by that Name , because it is a transparent Metal , while other Metals are opaque , there being only Glass that can shew what it contains within . The Name of Glass , which the French , Germans , and English have given it , seems to be taken from its resembling or approaching somewhat in its Colour to † Azure , or Sky-colour . The Word Glass , also seems to be deriv'd , from its Resemblance to Ice ( from Glacies ) , while the Fire does much the same thing in Glass , as the Frost in the Water : Thus all Glass looks like Frozen Water ; which made a modern Author merrily say , That it made Wine smile to see it self cherish'd in the bosom of its most Mortal Enemy . Monzerus tells us ; That when Looking-Glass was first invented , they were sold very dear , as if they had been made of some pretious Matter , and also by reason People took so much Pleasure in seeing themselves so lively pictured . To this we may add , That it is not above 200 Years since they came first to be in use , and that the way of making them was found out by a certain Person , who , melting some Glass in a Crucible , chanc'd to spill it on the ground , where it running under a great Square Tile , wherewith the Floor was pav'd , oblig'd the Workman to take it up , where he found it in Form of a Looking-Glass-Plate , ( which could not have been so form'd by the ordinary way of blowing ) , which began to employ his Thoughts all that Night , and thence he conceived , That Glass might be run into Plates like Metal , which he began to experiment from that day forward ; and so he found out the way to those Consequences which meer Chance was the first occasion of ; as it had been also before of the very Matter whereof this Metal is compos'd , as we shall hereafter shew . The use of Glass is so Antient , that it is difficult to assign the time of its first Invention : Pliny pretends , that it was in the City of Sidon that the first Vessels of Glass were made , as may be seen in the 26 th Chap. of his 36 th Book . Others affirm its Origin must be as antient as Bricks , by reason one can scarce make the one without the other ; this is the reason that has made some assert that this Art was known at the time of the Building of Babel , that being made of Brick , and that way of Building continu'd in Egypt , since we read , it was the sole employ of the Children of Israel in their Captivity to make them . This might be strengthen'd by a convincing Proof out of the Bible , whereof Moses was the first Author , where you read of Glass , which would not have been mention'd if it had not been in use in those Days . The Passages we find of St. Iohn in the Apocalypse , seem to put a very high esteem on Glass ; for in speaking of the Throne of God , Chap. 4. ver . 6. he says , And before the Throne there was a Sea of Glass like unto Crystal . And speaking of the Heavenly City , whereof he gives the Description Chap. 20● Ver. 18. he says , And the building of the Wall of it , was 〈◊〉 Iasper , and the City was of pure Gold , like unto clear Glass . and at the 21. verse , And the twelve Gates were twelve Pearls , every Gate was of one Pearl , and the street of the City was pure Gold , as it were transparent Glass . That is to say , a Glass of Gold , or more properly , Gold Vitrifi'd , which is that Electrum of Ezechiel , whereof St. Ierome makes mention . I may strengthen it yet further , by a passage out of Iob , Chap. 28. ver . 17. where speaking of the Wisdom of God , he says , The Gold and Crystal cannot equal it . Which does not only shew us the Antiquity of Glass , but also in what esteem it was had in those days , being always equall'd to Gold. This last passage is also Cited in a Translation of St. Ierome , and in several other Authors , among whom , some have chang'd the word of Gold and Glass , to that of a Stone more precious than Gold. Others to a Carbuncle , or some other precious Stone . But , ( say they , ) all these names are understood of only one and the same Stone , which the Antients believed gave Light by Night , and which is no where to be found . This last Opinion is very Mysterious , and that one only Stone , according to St. Paul , in the Epistle to the Romans , ought to be understood of the Divine Union with our Nature , by the Mystery of the Incarnation of the Word . The great Hermes , the Father of the Philosophers , call'd that Stone , the Image of the Invisible God , which Moses ( also ) shut up in the Ark of the Covenant , and which was call'd the Glory of God , shining in the Night like a burning Fire , or like a bright and and shining Star which gave light by Day , as you may see in Numbers . This it was , which these Authors meant and understood , but which no others can comprehend , unless it be the true Philosophers . We design to treat more largely thereof in our next Work , Entituled , The Mystical Characters of Antiquity unveil'd and laid open , wherein we will make it appear , that of those Characters were Compos'd the Two Tables of the Law , which were afterwards put into the Ark , and which are the two Pretious Stones which serve at present for Guides to the wise among the Philosophers , as they did heretofore for Figures to the Antients . We might fetch the Origin of Glass from Tubal-Cain , the Son of Lamech ; for he being the first Chymist that found out the way of melting Metals , and the uses of Iron and Brass , whereof he forg'd Arms for War , as is noted in the 4 th . Chap. of Gen. it is not improbable , but that he might be the first Inventor of Glass , because one can scarce avoid reducing Calcin'd Metals into Glass , especially when the Fire is more than ordinarily violent , and the Matter remains longer in it than it ought . It was this which made Ferrandus Imperatus , say , that the Origin of Glass came from Fire , or from its Reverberation alone in those Furnaces where Fire was preserv'd in its full force . We own Fire to be the first Agent both of Nature and Art ; but with this distinction , that that of Nature vivifies or enlivens , and that of Art resolves and destroys , especially when it is too vehement : But he who knows how to direct and manage it , may make good use of it for the Separation and Perfection of the Matters wherein he works ; whence it very often happens that several Persons seek that which they cannot find , and find that which they did not seek ; wherefore we may truly say , that most part of our best Inventions and Secrets , have been found out by meer chance , and as it were hazard of Art. The great Hermes was not ignorant of the Art of making Glass , since he taught the Knowledge of it to the Aegyptian Chymists , but not that of the Transmutation of Metals , tho' he possess'd it , as Kircher tells in his Oedipus ; That since that time , that People have always profess'd this Art , in which they were so Expert , that Flavius Vopiscus speaking of Alexandria , tells us , it was very Rich , and Fruitful in Corn , and that no one is there idle , one part of the Poor making Glass , and the other Paper . We have another Evidence of the Antiquity of Glass , in the 4 th Book of Lucretius : But the most part of Historians attribute the Invention of it to the Alchymists , who by endeavouring to counterfeit Pretious Stones , found out this Secret. It is to these great Men , indeed , we are oblig'd for almost all our Modern Knowledge of the most curious Secrets of Nature , they having unveil'd her most hidden Mysteries . The Profession of an Alchymist in those Days , was not Vilifi'd as it is now , it being esteem'd very Honourable , Kings themselves exercising it . We shall discourse thereof in the Work we have promis'd , and whence the word Chymistry is deriv'd , where we will prove its Antiquity by several passages out of the Holy Scripture . But we will here add , that the Chymists of this present Age are very far remov'd , both in Knowledge and Probity from those Antient ones , who never practis'd those base Sophistications , and a thousand other Tricks of that Nature , which the Modern do ; which is the reason that this Art , so Noble and Sublime in its Principles , is now a-days so much Vilifi'd , that to have the name of a Chymist , ( of that sort , ) is enough to render a Man detestable among honest Men. Also most part of those who set up for that Profession , are nothing but a sort of Quack Collectors of Recipe's , with which , under the false appearances of Fixation , of Augmentation of Gold and Silver , which they call Powders of Projection , &c. and which they pretend to do with common Mercury , the Imperfect Metals , Minerals , Salts , Powders , and other Ingredients , Heterogeneous to the principal Matters , with these , I say , they abuse Credulous Persons by their fair words often to their Ruine . It is not with common gross Matters that Philosophers work , nor can they bring any thing to Perfection , before they have converted their Matters into Fluid , Volatile , and Spiritual Substances , such as they were before their Coagulations ; not by the means of Aquae Fortes and Corrosives , which the Antients knew nothing of ; but by means of the same Liquors that engender'd and nourish'd them , which is as it were their Parent , Homogeneous to them , and that Water of Life of the Philosophers , or rather the Key of Nature , without which , you 'll always work in vain . That which seems to the Eyes of the Credulous to be Augmentation , will never undergo the true Proofs of Silver and Gold ; if it should chance to undergo some one tryal ; you may be sure the second will make all the hopes of the pretended profit vanish in Smoak , and on the contrary , make you sensible of considerable loss , both by the waste of the Matters , and the Charges expended on the way of managing them . Thus those who have so little Sense as to engage in these Matters , may one Day find themselves drawn in to their loss . But let us return to the Origin of Glass ; the Author of the Essays of the Wonders of Nature , tells us , That the Limon of Lac Cendevia , which is found at the Foot of Mount-Carmel , was the first Matter wherewith Glass was made . That some Mariners being about to make a Trevet for a Kettle , went ashore in a place where they found this Lac , that they took some of the Sand , and mix'd it with Nitre , wherewith their Ship was laden , and that making a Fire under the Kettle , they saw a Noble Stream as it were of running Crystal , or melted Jewels , whence they learn'd to make Glass of those two Matters , since which time , ( says he , ) they have also mixed Load-Stone , seeing that will attract Glass as well as Iron ; thence following they made use of certain fine Stones , and also of Sand , as the Indians also did of Crystal ; but that in his time they made use of a Glassy Substance , extracted from an Herb , call'd Soda , wherewith they mixed Sand to fix it . Pliny tells us something like this , in his 5 th Book , Chap. 19. where he also asserts , that we were indebted to Chance for the first Invention of Glass , which was on the Banks of the River Belus in Syria , where certain Merchants being drove a-shore in a Storm , were obliged for sometime to stay and make Fires and to dress their Provisions ; that the place abounding with a certain Herb call'd Kali , which , by the great Fires they made , being reduc'd into Ashes full of Salt , and joyn'd with Sand and Stones proper for making Glass , which are Natural and plenty thereabouts , run down into a sort of melted Glass : Which shew'd them not only the manner of making Glass ; but also Crystal , and several other ●ine things , which had not been found out without the Invention of Glass ; the use whereof is so necessary to pass away Life with Pleasure and Satisfaction , that Divine Providence has taken peculiar care that no place on Earth should want Materials to make it , all being stock'd with them in such abundance , that they seem inexhaustible . Which once made a certain Artist pleasantly conclude , That the Art of Glass would last throughout all Ages ; for the general Conflagration in reducing the Earth into Ashes , by reason of the vast quantities of Salts that are mixed with it , would at last vitrifie the whole Mass into a lasting Monument of the Art. It is true , the end of the World , according to the Holy Scriptures , is to arrive by Fire , not by that material Fire we use in our Chimneys ; but by that which we call Elementary and Central , whereof God will only augment the heat , which will so dry up and parch the Earth , and exhaust all its humidity , that it shall not only be Calcin'd , but chang'd into a better Nature ; afterwards to be inhabited by a new World of a Spiritual , Incorruptible and Glorious Nature , no more to be subjected to any change . What the two Authors we have just cited tell us , concerning the Origin of Glass , is far better clear'd , and more particulariz'd by Iosephus , in the 9 th Chap. of his 2 d Book of the Wars of the Iews , wherein he acquaints us with several surprizing things concerning the Sand for making Glass , whereof we have been speaking . He takes notice that the River Belus arises out of Mount-Carmel , and passes between Ptolemais and Tyrus ; that it is not above 2 Furlongs from Ptolemais that near this River is the Sepulchre and Statue of Bel or Belus , Father of Ninus , first King of the Assyrians , whom the Babylonians worship'd for a long time , and Sacrific'd to , by the order of Ninus , who was the first Author of the Idolatry and Priesthood of the Chaldeans , according to Eusebius , lib. 1. and Isidore , lib. 8. That that Statue of Belus , whom the Pagans call'd Iupiter , was almost 100 Cubits high , ( which is very remarkable , ) and that in that place there is a Valley almost round , full of a clear Sand very fit for making Glass : And if the Ships which come thither for their Lading , chance to empty the place , it is immediately fill'd again , by the Winds driving it down from the Precipices of the Mountains which environ the Valley round ; insomuch , that having for many Ages past , made use of this Sand , it still always remains in the same abundance . He also tells us in the same Book , Chap. 17. that this Sand has a strange Nature above any other , which is , that it will change any Metal into Glass that is thrown in among it ; and that which is yet more strange , that all the pieces of Glass made of this Sand , and cast again upon it , are immediately converted into Sand again : That there is also found among this Sand a Pretious Stone about the bigness of an Acorn , very fine and transparent . Tacitus in the 5 th Book of his Annals , makes also mention of this River Belus , telling us it enters into the Sea of Iudea , at the Mouth whereof , the Sand that is gather'd up , by reason of the great quantity of Nitre contain'd in it , is easily chang'd into Glass in the Furnaces . And altho' the Shore is but small , that the Sand is notwithstanding inexhaustible . Strabo tells us the same thing in his 12 th Book , and Pliny in his 6 th , and also Agricola in his Treatise of Fossils : And one may say , that generally all Authors , who have spoke of Glass , have made mention of the place where this Sand is gotten , whereof Glass is made without any other mixture , wherein the Effects of Nature are to be admired , in affording us so fine and pretious a Metal in so base and common Matter . This ought to be an example to the Curious , and teach them , that those who seek for the prime Agent of Nature only in rare and pretious Matters , may be grosly mistaken , seeing it may often be found in the most Simple and Common ; and often even in those things we tread under foot : So true it is , that Wise Nature , or rather the infinite Goodness of God , has so ordain'd the Business , that the Poor as well as the Rich , may partake of the most pretious and valuable Treasures , and as easily arrive to that Sovereign , Universal Medicine , to cure all Diseases ; otherwise God could not be said to have dispens'd his Benefits to all Mankind , and his Word , which is infallible , would not be true , when he says , That he is no respecter of Persons , but that every one who loves and fears him , shall be accepted by him . Which shews us , that it is his Will to be known by all Men , and that all those who live in his Laws , may hope to be possess'd of this hidden Treasure , to employ the fruits of it to his Honour and Glory , which are the true Sentiments all good Christians ought to have ; otherwise they ought never to hope for that Divine Treasure , which God only manifests to his Elect. Several Authors have written , and among the rest Pliny , Cassius , and Isidorus , That in the time of the Emperor Tiberius , who reigned in the time of our Saviour , a certain Person , but Anonymous , an Architect by his Profession , having by an admirable Piece of Skill , set upright again in the City of Rome , a great Portico that lean'd to one side , and made the Foundation firm and immoveable : Tiberius paid him , and banish'd him the City , forbidding him to return . In the mean time this Person had found out the means to make Glass malleable , and came again to Rome , and presented one of these Glasses to the Emperour , who , being angry with him for returning without his Leave , flung the Glass against the ground , which only bruised : That this Workman taking it up again , immediately mended it with a Hammer upon a little Anvil he had brought on purpose , expecting for it the Emperour's Pardon ; but it happen'd quite contrary ; for that Prince asking him , if there were any other that knew the Secret , he answering no , the Emperour immediately caused his Head to be cut off on the spot , for fear the Knowledge of this Secret , should come to be propagated to Posterity , and that Gold on that account should come to be no more valu'd than Dirt , and consequently all other Metals lose their Esteem and Value . In short , Glass would be more valuable than Gold , if it were malleable , by reason of its Transparency . Our Age , fruitful in great Men , has had no less Advantage in the Reign of the late King Lewis the Iust , than that of Tiberius ; since we are assur'd , That a certain Learned Man having found out the same Secret calls it by the Name of Ferretto , nor makes any mention of it . CHAP. XX. To make Ferretto of Spain for Tinging Glass . ALtho' Ferretto be found in Mines , yet it may be artificially made much better , as I shall shew in the following Chapter . Excellent Ferretto used to be made heretofore in Cyprus , and at Memphis , the Metropolis of Egypt , but it is no more used in France , whether by reason they make no more of it there , or that we bring it no more from those Places , I cannot tell . Neri and Merret , who have written of the Art of Glass , use only Copper or Brass to make Ferretto : We will give you their Preparations ; but true Ferretto cannot be made without Iron or Steel , altho' Iron and Copper are somewhat of a like Nature ; since 't is easie to convert the former into the latter : wherein there is far more Virtue for several Operations than i● the Natural Copper , and it is finer , more pure , and redder . An ordinary way of making Ferretto is this ; Take Filings of Iron very clean , and Sulphur beat to Powder , put them in a Crucible Layer over Layer , or first one Layer of Sulphur , then one of Filings , and so on , beginning and ending with the Sulphur ; which is called Stratification , or Stratum super Stratum . After that you must cover the Crucible with another , or with a Tile , and lute it close , and set it into a Furnace with Coals round it for six hours , encreasing the Fire every two hours , that is , the two first hours let the Fire or Coals be half a foot from the Crucible ; the two second about a quarter of a foot , and the two last let it be covered all over with Coals . Then , the Matter being cool'd , you must pound it small , and keep it for Use. CHAP. XXI . Another Extraordinary Way of making Ferretto of Spain , which is a great Secret. THis way of making Ferretto is not common , nor much known ; wherefore we will here teach it for Satisfaction of the Curious . It is of a very wonderful use , not only for Tinging Glass , but for several Chymical Operations , wherein we know the use of it , which is very surprizing , if a second and further Preparation be made of it , whereof we shall here make no mention , it being foreign to our Subject ; but take that which serves for Tinging Glass as follows . Take very fine Steel , for in the Perfection of that consists all the Excellency of the Work ; make it into thin Plates , or file it : also do the same ▪ with Copper or Brass , viz. make that also into thin Plates , or take the Filings of it , one part to two of the Steel ; put them into a Crucible stratum super stratum , lute them , and put it on a gentle Fire for Eight Hours , then take it out , and melt the whole in a Wind-Furnace , then cast it in a Lingot , or in little Plates , and the business is done . To make use of this in Glass , you must calcine these Plates , then pound them , and searce them , and keep that Powder in a Pot close shut up for use . CHAP. XXII . Another Way of making Ferretto of only Copper , for Tinging Glass . NEri and Merret give the Name of Ferretto of Spain to the following Preparations , in this and the next Chapter ; asserting that it communicates several very fine Colours to Glass . The different ways of Calcining Metals , causes different Effects ; which is known to the Experienc'd in this Art. If the Ferretto we have taught in the precedent Chapters , be of vast use in Glass , and very serviceable in Pastes , Enamels , and Glass of Lead , by reason of the great Resemblance it causes to Precious Stones ; this and the following are of no less use . Take thin Plates of Copper or Brass , cut them into pieces , and put them into a Crucible , in the Bottom of which you have laid a Bed of Sulphur pulveriz'd , then a Layer of Copper ; then another of Sulphur , and then again of Copper : which you must thus continue stratum super stratum , till the Crucible is full . Then cover over the Crucible with another , or with a Tile , and lute it well , and dry it , and put it into a Furnace among hot Coals in a good brisk Fire for the space of two hours . Then take out the Crucible , let it cool , and you will find the Copper or Brass calcin'd , which will break and crumble between your fingers like dry earth , of a blackish Colour . You must pound it to a fine Powder , and searce it and keep it in a Vessel well closed for use . CHAP. XXIII . Another Way of making Ferretto of only Copper for Tinging Glass . THis second way of making Ferretto is something more troublesome than the former , but its Effects in Glass are far finer . In this method you must take Vitriol instead of Sulphur , wherewith you stratifie the thin Plates of Copper in the Crucible just as in the precedent Chapter , then set this Crucible to Calcine in the Mouth of a Glass-Furnace , which the Italians call Occhio , and the French the little Working hole , where it ought to stand for the space of three days . Then take out the Crucible and add to the Copper new Rows or Layers of Vitriol , stratifying it as before ; then you put the Crucible in a Reverberatory Fire in the same place as before ; which you must continue to do for six times successively one after another , and then you will have a very Excellent Ferretto , which you beat to Powder , and it will tinge Glass of Extraordinary Beautiful Colours . CHAP. XXIV . To make Crocus Ferri , commonly called Crocus Martis , to colour Glass . WE will shew several ways of preparing Crocus Martis , some more Simple , others more Extraordinary and Curious , both with and without Liqours or Menstruums , whereof the effects are different both in tinging Glass , and other uses , to which it is put . Crocus Martis , which is made without Menstruums , depends on a very fine Calcination of the Iron , by means of which the Tincture that is Extracted , gives a very fine red to Glass , and so communicates it self to it , that it not only manifests it self , but makes all other Metalline Colours ( which Ordinarily are hidden and dead in Glass ) appear fair and resplendent . As to the way of Menstruums , we may say that all Acid and Corrosive juices which Operate on Copper , will also do the same on Iron , so that you will always have a red Colour , more or less bright , and which may be mixed with Tinctures of other Metals to cause other different Colours . We don 't in this place understand by our two methods of dry and wet ( or with and without Menstruums ) for the preparation of Crocus Martis , those two ways which the Philosophers speak of , in the same Terms , their dry way or method being only a certain Vitrified matter , and their wet or Menstruous one , a sort of sweet * Liquor without any Corrosive , wherein Metals will dissolve like Ice in warm Water , and which afterwards cannot be reduc'd again into Metals by any way whatsoever . The first way of making Crocus Martis take as follows ; Take very fine filings of Iron , or those of Steel are better , mix them in a Crucible with three parts of Powder'd Brimstone , Stratum super Stratum ( Commonly noted thus S S S. ) Calcine them four hours at a very strong Fire , till the Sulphur be Consumed : then take the Crucible out of the Fire , and let the matter Cool , then grind it to very small Powder , and searce it through a very fine Sieve , then put that Powder into a Crucible , and lute it well , and put it into the Mouth of a Reverberatory Furnace for the space of Fifteen Days or more ; and of the Reddish Colour it was before it will become a very deep red almost like Purple : keep it in a close Vessel for the use of Glass Colours ; it will work many wonderful Effects . CHAP. XXV . Another way of making Crocus Martis for Colouring of Glass . THO' this second way of making Crocus Martis be very Easy , yet it ought to be Esteemed ; since it tinges Glass of the true red Colour of Blood ; it is prepared thus . Take filings of Iron , or , which is better , of Steel ; mix them well in Earthen Pans with strong Vinegar , only sprinkling them so much that they may be throughly wet , spread them in Pans and set them in the Sun till they be dry , or if the Sun be hid by the Clouds set them in the open Air ; then Powder them , and sprinkle them again with Vinegar , and dry them as before , then Powder them again , and repeat this Process Eight times ; at last grind and searce them well , and you will have a very fine Powder of the Colour of beaten brick , which keep in close Vessels for use . This Crocus Martis thus made with Vinegar complies very much with Greens , and the Emerauld Colour of Glass of Lead . It is used also in Pastes for the same Colour with Verdigrease , and in Blacks . CHAP. XXVI . Another way of making Crocus Martis with Aqua Fortis . CRocus Martis may be prepared a third way , with Aqua Fortis , by which the red Colour of Iron is made yet more manifest in Glass ; wherein it is so very resplendent and bright , that it seems almost incredible , if experience did not shew it . Put fine filings of Iron or Steel into glaz'd Earthen Pans , sprinkle them with Aqua Fortis , and set them to dry in the Sun , and then reduce them again into Powder , and repeat this process several times , as you have done with the Vinegar , in the precedent , Chap. and having obtained a good red Colour as before , Powder it and searce it , and keep it for use . CHAP. XXVII . Another way of making Crocus Martis with Aqua Regalis . THis is a fourth way of making Crocus Martis , and perhaps the best of all , because in them you cannot find such Diversities of Colours as in this . Dissolve , silings of Iron or Steel , in a Glass Body well Covered , in Aqua Regalis , that is in Aqua Fortis made Aqua Regalis with sal Armoniac , as we shall shew in the second Book . Keep them so three days , stirring them every day well , during which you may add fresh filings little by little , wherein you must be very Cautious : for it riseth so much by Fermentation in the Aqu. Reg. that it will endanger breaking the Glass or running over . After three days set your Cucurbite on a gentle Fire , that all the Water may Evaporate till it leaves the Crocus behind dry , which is admirable for Tinging Glass , which keep for use . CHAP. XXVIII . Another way to make Crocus Martis . THis way tho' it be easy makes a Crocus of no less Virtue and Beauty than the precedent . To make it take fine filings of Iron or Steel without any rust , let them stand in a Reverberatory Furnace with a very strong Fire , the heat being at least to the fourth degree , till it becomes of the Colour of Purple . Then take it out of the Fire , and when it is Cool , put it into a Vessel full of Water , and stir it briskly about , and then presently pour off the Water into another Vessel , which you may reiterate . Thus there will remain in the first Vessel the Iron that is not yet Calcined , which if you please you may put again into a Reverberatory Furnace ; In the second Vessel there will be the Crocus which set over a gentle Fire to evaporate the Water . But you must not decant off the Water tho' it appears clear after it has settl'd : for tho' the Crocus may seem to be precipitated to the bottom , yet the Water Contains the most subtile parts of it imperceptibly suspended in it . Having well Evaporated the Water you will have a very red Powder , very fine and Extraordinary , which keep for use . CHAP. XXIX . The last way of making Crocus Martis . THis last way will be of some use to those who shall desire to have the Iron or Steel Granulated , or in little drops , the Metal whereof is difficult to Melt . Take a bar of one or the other Metal , of the weight of five or six pounds , which heat as hot as you can in a Smith's Forge , so that it may Sparkle when it comes out of the Fire : At the same time another Person must have ready a long stick of Brimstone and large which is the best for this Operation , and the Metal coming out of the Fire in the condition we have shewn , you must thrust them one against another over a great Earthen Pan full of warm Water , into which the Metal will drop in little drops , or granuli , melting like Wax , when touch'd by the Sulphur ; then you must take those little grains , and Stratifie them in a Crucible with Powder'd Brimstone , and afterwards sett them in a Reverberatory-Fire , where they will be reduc'd to a red Powder , which grind and searce and keep for your use . CHAP. XXX . The way to Calcine little Plates of Copper , to tinge Glass of a blue Colour . WE have shewn the way to make Crocus Martis for Colouring Glass , and now we will shew that of Copper , which is very near in nature to the other as we have remarked ; And which dissolves in the same Acids and Corrosives . Venus as well as Mars ( or Copper as well as Iron ) gives us different Colours , which proceed from different ways of preparing them , as we shall see in the following Chapters . Merret pretends that Brass gives us a finer blue than Copper , by reason of the Lapis Calaminaris which is mixt with it , and partly causes the Colour . Of all Metals Copper is only used ( as Allay ) to give malleability to Gold and Silver in Coin : It melts easily in an indifferent heat , but it is calcin'd into powder with difficulty . There are several ways of Calcining Copper , here follow five of them by help of fire . The first is of Copper alone without any addition ; the second by the addition of Sulphur ; the third by Vitriol ; the fourth of Brass alone divers ways ; the fifth by a preparation of the Vitriol of Venus . These preparations are the best , and of more value than those prepared by Spirits and Corrosives . All these different ways of Calcinations and Preparations of Venus , shall be explained in several Chapters of this Treatise , whither the curious Reader may have recourse . The little Plates or Leaves , whereof we are now to shew the preparation , are a sort of Copper or Brass exceeding thin , approaching the Colour of Gold , called Festoons . These Plates are made of this Colour by Lapis Calaminaris , which does not only Colour the Copper , but augments its weight ; this Brass being well calcined tinges Glass of a Blue , and Sea-Green . The way to calcine it is this . To avoid the expence of buying new , you may make use of those leaves that have been already used and worked , they being good , and cut them with Scissers into little pieces , and put them into a Crucible covered and luted , in the mouth of a Furnace to Calcine , and let them stand there for four days , at a Coal fire , so that the leaves may not melt : For then they would be unfit for this use . The four days being expired , the whole will be calcined , beat them on a Porphury Stone , and Searce them thro' a fine Sieve ; and you will have a blackish powder , which you must spread on Tiles , and put it into the same Furnace for four days longer ; then take it out and blow off the ashes that may be fallen on it ; then reduce it again into Powder , searceing it thro' a fine Sieve as before , and keep it for use . You may know when it is well Calcined , if the Glass rises and swells when you put it upon it , if it does not you must calcine other leaves , those being not Serviceable by reason they are burnt in the Calcination . CHAP. XXXI . Another way of Calcining these leaves of Copper to make a very transparent Red , Yellow , and Chalcedony . TAke the same leaves as in the precedent Chap. Cut them into small pieces and Stratifie them with Sulphur pulveriz'd , in a Crucible covered and luted . Then set them on burning coals at the Mouth of the Oven to Calcine for Twenty Four hours ; then take it out and grind it small ; then put it in an Earthen Vessel in a Reverberatory Furnace , where leaving it 10 hours , take it out and powder it , then keep it for use . CHAP. XXXII . To calcine Copper to a Red Powder , which serves in several Processes for colouring Glass . ALtho' Copper be of the same nature as Brass , which serves to Colour Glass blue , yet there is some difference between them , for the latter will tinge it of several Colours , which proceeds from the Lapis Calaminaris , and some other mixtures in the preparation . To make this powder , Take what quantity you please of Copper in thin plates , put it into a great Crucible into the Furnace , till it be calcined , without melting ; then being cooled , reduce it into powder which will be very red , and searce it ; whereof you may make divers uses as we shall shew hereafter . CHAP. XXXIII . To make Copper thrice calcin'd for colouring Glass . THE same red Powder in the preceding Chapter serves here . Take of that Powder and put it on Tiles , and calcine it again in the Furnace four days ; it will become black , and coagulated into one Mass : Powder it and searce it , calcine it again 5 or 6 days in the same Furnace , and it will become grey without coagulating any more , or running into Lumps , and will be in a condition fit to be dissolv'd . Of this Powder which the Italians call Ramina di Trecotte , is made Sky-colour'd blue , the colour of Turcois , the green of Emerald , and several other colours . It must not be calcined above thrice , for it would no longer Colour Glass . You may know if it be calcined well , by casting some of it in a Pot of boiling Glass ; if it swells as we have said before , if not , you must set it yet Twenty Four hours longer in the Furnace , or rather begin a new Process . CHAP. XXXIV . Another way of making thrice calcin'd Copper with less charge and more ease . WOrkmen who seek ways to spare their pains , will find this way of Calcination less Expensive than the others , and almost of equal beauty : Take the Scales which the Brasiers make when they hammer Pans , Kettles , or other works of Brass , as being much cheaper than new Copper . To calcine these Scales there is no need of Stratification as we have shewn before in other Copper , which is troublesom ; they need only be well washed from all foulness ; and being well dry'd , put them into one or more Crucibles , and set them just into the Mouth of the Reverberatory-Furnace for the space of four days : Being at length cool'd , pound or grind them and fearce them . Then set that powder a second time in the same Furnace to reverberate during four days longer ; and you will have little Balls of a black Colour , which you must pound and searce again , and then put them the third time into the Reverberatory ; and after four other days reduce them to powder as before ; thus it will be prepared with less Expence , and as good to colour Glass , which will be easy to see by making tryal on melted Glass : For if it makes it rise when you cast it on , it is right . CHAP. XXXV . Another Calcination of Copper call'd Aes ustum . THe best and finest Aes ustum we have in France is brought from Holland ; but several curious persons make it themselves far finer . That which makes the Beauty of the Dutch is the Sea-Salt , that they add to the Sulphur , and which they mix together in Powder to stratifie the Copper in a Crucible covered and luted as we have shewn ; they take ⅔ of Sulphur and one third of Sea-water Salt ; then they put the crucible on a hot fire of Coals , where they leave it till the Sulphur be wholly consumed ▪ After that they take it out and it is of an Iron-gray , and reddish within : the Tincture it gives Glass is very fine , and it is also serviceable for other Uses . CHAP. XXXVI . Another better way of making Aes ustum . CUrious Gentlemen who employ themselves sometimes in Chymistry , and do not grudge their time and charge as the Workmen doe who get thereby their lively-hood ; have far finer and more Ingenious preparations of aes ustum , which render it of greater virtue , and more Power to tinge , We will only give the reader one of them . Take thin Plates of the Reddest Copper which is the hardest sort , make it red-hot in a Crucible or otherwise , then extinguish it in a Lee of Urine , wherein common Salt has been dissolved ; and reiterate this process till the Copper become of the colour of Gold both within and without . After that you must cement those Plates with two parts of Sulphur , two parts of Salt-Petre , and one part of Vitriol calcin'd ad rubedinem , the whole reduc'd to powder , wherewith you must stratifie those Plates in a Crucible , pressing close each Layer or Row ; then you must cover it with another Crucible mouth to mouth , the upper having a hole bored at bottom , then lute them well together . The Lute being dry put the Crucible in a * Round Fire during six hours , and hot ashes underneath . The first two hours the fire must be one foot distant from the Crucible the two second hours one half foot nearer ; and the two last hours quite close covering the Crucible ; You must take special care that the matter does not melt , and that the fire be not too great , for that would spoil all . The Crucible being cold , you must take it out , and emptying the matter pound it well ; this is what we call Aes ustum . To make it fit for use you must wash it , to take away the Sulphur , and then dry it and keep it in a close Vessel . There are other curious Persons who make an Aes ustum yet finer than this , and more penetrating in Colours ; but the preparation is more costly and requires more time ; for instead of Brimstone and Salt-Petre they make use of a purified Sulphur and fixed with Sal Armoniac ; and instead of ordinary red Vitriol they use Roman Vitriol which they prepare with Lee of Urine , and a fusil Salt , which afterwards they put in a reverberatory . But since the others serve well enough for colouring Glass , and are easier to make , we shall not here give you the preparation of this last which would be too long , and being more serviceable to several other purposes which Experience testifies . CHAP. XXXVII . The way to make Crocus Veneris . SInce we have shewn the way to make Crocus Martis , it is but reasonable we should now shew you how to make Crocus Veneris . We cannot pass by in silence the Crocus which may be made of the Aes ustum , we have taught in the Precedent Chap. tho' we are certain the Glass-Makers will not make use of it , by reason of the length of time requir'd for preparing it : But the curious who are Ignorant of it will be glad to know it , wherefore we here shew it to oblige them . Take as much aes ustum of the Precedent Chap. as you please , add to it its weight of good Verdigrease , and as much Sal Armoniac fix'd and fusil ; pound the whole together well , and dry them over the fire in an Iron Fire-shovel : Then pour into the shovel Lee of Urine , and make the whole boil till the Lee be entirely consum'd ; Then put on more of the same Lee ; boil it till the Lee be consumed as before , and reiterate it a third time . Then pound or grind the Matter and put it in a Reverberatory to Calcine well , then pound it again into an impalpable Powder , and put it into an Earthen glazed Pot ; pour upon the same Lee of Urine , wherein you dissolve it , viz. to each pound of Lee , four ounces of Sal Armoniack fix'd and fusil . Then boil the whole over a little fire in ashes for a quarter of an hour , then decant off that Lee into some fit Vessel , for that will contain the Tincture of the aes ustum , and of the Green which it has Extracted . Put more Lee upon the Matter , and boil it yet a quarter of an hour over the same Fire , then decant off that Lee to the former ; thus continue to water it with fresh Lee and decant it off to the former as long as it will extract any Tincture from the matter . Then take all these tinctured Lees , and filter them thro' whited brown paper , then Evaporate three quarters over a gentle Fire . And put the remainder into an Alembick , with the Helm ( or head ) on , and the Receiver , and distil it till it be dry : Then you will find at bottom of the Alembick a Crocus Veneris , of a very wonderfull Virtue for colouring Glass and other Chymical Operations , and some Medicinal Uses . CHAP. XXXVIII . Another way more easie to make Crocus Veneris . AS those who apply themselves to this Art , are not all equally curious in their Work , and good husbandry being in fashion in this Age ; we will shew some more easie ways , and more ready to make Crocus Veneris , whereof this is one . Take very thin Plates of Copper , put them into an earthen Pot with common Salt , S. S. S. and put this pot on the Furnace , where let it stand till the matter be very red : Then put the Plates with the Salt into cold Water , and wash them well to take away all Blackness . Reiterate the stratification of these plates with common Salt , calcining them at the fire , and washing them as before , as often as you please . After the last time pour warm water on that where the Plates have been extinguished , and then let it stand still some time , then empty it , and you will find at the bottom of the vessel a Crocus Veneris red as blood . You must wash it well several times to cleanse it , then dry it well with a linen cloth , and keep it for use to colour Glass . There are some who content themselves to take Aes ustum , prepared with Sulphur and common Salt , as we have shewn heretofore , and to heat it red-hot in the Fire nine times , and quench it as often in Linseed Oil ; then dry it and powder it . CHAP. XXXIX . Another easy way of making Crocus Veneris . WE now give another easie way of making Crocus Veneris . Take of Copper simply calcin'd one part , of Sulphur vivum eight parts well powdered ; mix them together in a large Crucible , which then set on a Coal-fire in a little Furnace , stirring the Matter continually with an Iron Rod , till the Sulphur be consumed ; and reiterate this Process five or six times , then cast it thus refin'd into an Earthen Pan of boiling Water , stir it often with a Stick while the Calx descends to the bottom , then the Water being settled and clear , evaporate ¾ to extract the Crystals , or rather evaporate the whole , and you 'll find at bottom of the Vessel a Crocus Veneris very fine and red . CHAP. XL. The first Colour of Sea-Green for a Tincture of Glass . THE Colour of Sea-Green is given by the Italians to Beryl , which is a Precious Stone found at the Foot of Mount Taurus , by the River Euphrates , which has the Green-blue of the Sea. It is found in the Indies of a Colour somewhat paler , which makes it be called by different Names , and when the Colour is deeper , they commonly pass for other Precious Stones : It is therefore the Water expresses its Colour . We will treat more largely of it in our fifth Book , wherein we shall shew the way of imitating Precious Stones . This Colour , which is one of the finest Sky-Colours , ought to be made in fine and well purifi'd Crystal , which the Italians call Bollito , for if you make it in common Glass it is not so fair : You must likewise put no Manganese in this Colour . To make it therefore very fine and beautiful , Take Crystal-Fritt , put it in a Pot in the Furnace , where being well melted and clear , you must skim off the Salt , which will swim on the top like Oil , with an iron Ladle : for if you should not take it off , the Colour would be foul and oily . The Matter being well purified , you must add to it , to every 20 pounds or thereabouts , 6 Ounces of the Powder of Copper calcin'd , as we have taught in Chapt●● XXX . with a fourth part of Zaffer prepar'd , also in Powder , and well mixed both together ; in p●●ting both these Powders into the Pot on the Cr●stalline Metal , you must do it little by little , for fear the Crystal rising and swelling should run over , whereof care must be taken , stirring it well all the while . This being done , let the Metal stand still and settle for the space of three hours , that the Colour may incorporate , then stir it again : then the Workman may make a proof of the Colour . Twenty four hours after the mixing of the Powders it may be wrought , for by that time it will be well coloured ; but the Workman must first well mix the whole , for fear the Colour should not be precipitated to the Bottom . Which must always be well observed in all Vessels wherein there are Colours , and the Doses of the Tinctures rightly proportioned to the Crystalline Metal in the Pots , according to the quantities we have set done . CHAP. XLI . Another Sky-Colour , or Sea-Green . YOU must use , for this Colour , which is a little close , the same Crystal-Frit as in the precedent , made with Rochetta or Polverine of the Levant ; and having fill'd a Pot of it , let it be well purified , and take off the Salt that swims on the top ; then put to it 20 Pound of Metal , six Ounces of the Powder of calcin'd Copper little by little , stirring it , well , observing the same Rules we gave for Sea-Green before . Then you will have a very admirable Colour , which you may make lighter or deeper as you please . Two hours after stir it again well , and you will see if the Colour pleases you ; in which case let it stand still 24 hours without any stirring , and then it may be wrought as before . CHAP. XLII . Another Sea-green colour in Artificial Crystal , which the Italians call Bollito . THese colours are not to be made without a great deal of Precaution , which this needs as much as any . To succeed well , you must have in the Furnace a Pot filled with 40 pound of good Crystall●Fritt , carefully skimm'd , boil'd , and purifi'd , without any Manganese : having arrived thus far , you must take 12 Ounces of the Powder of Small leaves of Copper thrice calcin'd , as we have shewn chap. XXX . And half an ounce of Zaffer in Powder , prepared as in chap. XVII . Mix these Powders together , then put them at four times into the Pot , that they may the better mix with the Glass , stirring them at each time well , as you put them in , for fear it should swell too much , and run over . Two hours after the whole is incorporated , well mixed , and pretty well settled , try if your colour is deep enough then let it rest , tho' the Sea-green or sky colour seems at first Greenish you need not be concerned at that : For the Salt in the Glass will consume all that Greenness , and change it into Blue . After your Metal has stood at rest 24 hours , it may be wrought , and you 'll have the colour deeper or lighter , according to the quantity of Powder you have used in it . There is no other Rule in that , but the Phancy of the Workman , which is the reason it cannot be ascertained ; besides the Matter we use to tinge Glass , makes it have some more colour , some less , which proceeds from the Preparation of it . CHAP. XLIII . A fine Sky-Colour or Sea-Green in Crystal . THis fine Colour requires a Crystal Fritt well purified from its Salt , as we have noted before ; and which has not been put into Water . Put 60 Pounds in a Pot , and having well prepared it , put in one Pound and half of Scales of Copper in Powder , the Preparation whereof we have shewn in Chapter XXXIV . with four Ounces of Zaffer prepared and mixed together ; and stir the whole well with the Glass for the space of two hours . Then see whether you like the Colour , then let it stand at rest 24 hours ; then stir the whole again , as before , that it be well mixed with the Glass and the Colour incorporated with it ; then it may be wrought . It will give a very fine Blue , as has been often experimented . The Colour may be heightened as you please ; but take care you do not make it too high . If you mix with Fritt of Rochetta , as much Crystal Fritt , you 'll have as fine a Blue as can be wished . CHAP. XLIV . Another Sky-Colour or Sea-Green , made with less charge , to colour Glass . THough , this Colour be inferiour to the last , yet it has its Beauties sufficient to satisfie both the Sight , and pay the Pains of the Workman . He must take the same Preparation of Scales of Copper , we have mention'd in the precedent Chapter , and the same Dose of Zaffer , with as much Crystal made of Rochetta of the Levant , and Barillia of Spain , without any Manganese either in the one or other , and which has not been cast into Water , but well purified from its Salt ; observing in this place all we have noted to be done in the other Preparations of Crystal and Sea-Green in the preceding Chapters , and you 'll have a fine Sky-Colour or Sea-Green , fit for any Use. CHAP. XLV . Another Sea-green far finer than the rest . NEri seems to be the Inventor of this new Sea-green , and to have first Experimented it . It is made with Caput Mortuum of * Vitriol of Venus without any Corrosive , which is a very curious preparation , we will shew it at the End of the 7th Book . This Caput Mortuum ought to be exposed to the Air for some days , in a place where the Sun cannot come , where ( by a Magnetical Virtue ) it will attract the Universal Spirit ; which will restore to it again Part of that it has lost by Extraction it has Suffered , and will become of a whitish green Colour . Then pound it with the same dose of Zaffer prepared as in Chap. 43. put the whole into a Pot fill'd with Crystal Metal , very fine and well purified from its Salt , observing all we have noted on this Subject ; and it will make an extraordinary fine Sea-green . CHAP. XLVI . To make a green Emerald-Colour in Glass . WE will pass from Blue to Green , and from Venus to Mars , which enters into the preparation of this . For making this Emerald Colour , take common Glass well purified from its Salt , without Manganese , as we have shewn in Chap. 12. Put it in a Pot in the Furnace , and when it is well melted and purified , add to it ( for Example ) to 100 Pounds of Glass , 3 ounces of Crocus Martis Calcined with Vinegar as in Chap. 25. mix well the Glass at the same time to make it Incorporate with the Crocus , then let it rest an hour , that it may throughly take the Colour . This way nothing will come out Yellowish , and it will lose that Foulness and Blueness which the common Metal always hath , and it will become Green. Then add to the same dose of 100 Pounds of Glass 2 Pound of the Scales of Copper thrice calcin'd as in Chap. 34. And put it in at Six divers times , Mixing it well each time with the Glass , then let it stand 2 hours to imbibe the Tincture . After 2 hours stir it again , and see if it be as you would have it ; if the Colour be too Blue you must add to it some Crocus Martis prepared as before and you will have a very fine Emerald Colour . Twenty four hours after , mix it as before ; and then you may work it as you Please . CHAP. XLVII . Another Emerald green more fair than the preceeding . THe more pure the matter is , the finer the work will be that is made with it : Thus to make a more fair Emerald green than the preceeding , take Crystal Fritt without Manganese , which has been twice washed in water to take out all the Salt ; and put it in a Pot in the Furnace : Then add to it half of common White Metal also without Manganese . These two matters being well melted , mixed , and purified , put to 100 pound of metal 2 pound and a half of powder of Copper Plates thrice calcin'd , prepared as in Chap. 33. with 2 ounces of Crocus Martis Calcined and Reverberated with Sulphur as in Chap. 24. After having mixed them well together : You must put in those Powders at six different times , stiring well the matter each time , and Moreover observe all we have said in the Preced . Chap. You may make the Colour Lighter on Deeper , as you please , adding Crocus Martis if it be too Blue , and Calcin'd Powder of Venus if it be not enough so ; you will have from this a surprizing Burnet Green. CHAP. XLVIII . Another wonderfull Green. ALtho' this Colour is very admirable , yet we only make use of it in common Glass , made with Polverine and without Manganese . Being well melted and purified , you must put in equal parts of Powder of Scales of Copper thrice calcin'd , and Scales of Iron which fall from the Smith's Forge , without any other preparation than well washing them , to cleanse them from Ashes and Coals that mingle with them ; afterwards well dry them , and Pound them as fine as you can and searce them : These Scales serve in room of Crocus Martis . You must observe the doses and way of Proceeding as we have heretofore noted , in Emerald Colours : These Scales of Iron will give an admirable Green ; and they will drive out all the dull naturall Green which is in common Glass , and make it become Yellowish , or will give it a yellow Green , very Bright and Fair. CHAP. XLIX . Another Oriental Emerald Green finer than the rest . TO make this fine Emerald colour ; put into a Pot 4 pounds of common Fritt of Polverine , 5 pound of common white Glass Pulveriz'd , 5 pound of Crystal Fritt well washed ; add to this Composition 3 pound of Minium or Red-Lead , mix them all together , and in a little time they will be pretty well purified . After that , cast all that metal into water to Purifie it more , taking care that no part of the Lead sink to the bottom of the Pot wherein it is cast , for it will break it , if Speedy care be not taken to take up again what is Precipitated . This Glass thus washed , and after dryed ought to be put in the Pot again , to be melted and Purified during the space of one day ; then you must add a little of the Caput Mortuum of Vitriol of Venus without Corrosive , whereof we have spoken Chap. 45. with a little Crocus Martis : stirring the metal , and moreover proceeding as we have shewn in the Preceding Chapter . Then you will have an admirable Oriental Emerald Green , which may be wrought as you please . The Minium or Red-Lead , we speak of may be had at any Drugsters ; yet you may make it with common mineral Lead , which is better in this Operation than that in Pigs , and cheaper . Pound it well , then calcine it at a good Fire , and it will be reduced to a Red Powder . CHAP. L. The way of making Turcois blue , a particular Colour in this Art. WE ought to have put this Colour of Turcois after the Blue , and before the Green , but because it is a particular and principal Colour , we thought it would not be amiss to conclude this book with it . For this colour take a pot full of Crystal Fritt tinged of an Aqua-Marina Colour or Blue , whereof we have given several preparations ; which colour must be fair and full , for all depends on that . It being well melted put into it little by little sea-salt decrepitated , white and reduced to Powder , mixing it well and softly as we have noted in speaking of other Metalline Colours ; and the Blue from clear and transparent will become thick , for the Salt penetrating the Glass takes away its Transparency , and causes a Paleness ; hence alone comes the Turcois Colour used in Glass . When the Colour is right to the Workman's Fancy , it must be presently wrought , for the Salt will evaporate , and make the Glass transparent and disagreeable . If in working this Metal the Colour fades or goes off , you must add a little more of the same decrepitated Salt as before , and the Colour will return . We will here advertise the Workman , that he must take care that his Salt be well decrepitated , otherwise it will always crackle , and be apt to fly in his Eyes , and endanger his Sight . You must ( as I have said ) put in the Salt by Intervals , till the Colour Pleases you . It will suffice for this use , that the Fritt tinged Aqua-Marina or Blue , be made of one half Crystal Metal , and the other of Rochetta , and the Colour will be very fair and good . The End of the First BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK II. CHAP. LI. Wherein is shown the art of making Chalcedony of the Colour of Agats and Oriental Jasper ; with the way to prepare all Colours for this purpose . To make Aqua-Fortis and Regalis , necessary in this business . The way of preparing and calcining Tartar , and uniting it with the Red Colour of its own kind called by the Italians Rosichiero , which produceth Glass of many Colours with undulations in them very pleasant to behold , and gives it an Opacity like Oriental Stones . BEfore I proceed to the Explication of these preparations , it will be necessary to shew those of some Minerals used for such Compositions . And although one may buy several of them Publickly , ready made , yet our design being to make this work as perfect as we can , it will be necessary that we shew the Chymical way of preparing them after the best manner , by which the curious in this Art may do it themselves for less charge than they can buy them . There is no doubt , but that the Metalline matters made use of to tinge Glass , may give it several colours more lively and brighter than any it receives in the ordinary Furnaces , when these matters are artfully prepared , and their Metalline Colours are choicely pick'd out and Collected , and well purified from Heterogeneous matters which hinder the communication of their Tincture to the Glass . The colour of Chalcedony , or rather the matter whereof it is made , is nothing but an Amassement of Several Colours which may be made in Glass , and which many are not acquainted with . We will shew the whole process and the way of well succeeding in it . It is most certain that all the Colours we can extract will never give that Beauty and Splendor to Glass which is desired , if they be not well prepared . You must therefore for this purpose well calcine and dissolve the metals with Aqua Fortis . You must open the Copper , Sulphur , Vitriol and Sal Armoniac and other minerals with a great deal of patience , and prepare them at a gentle Fire , the violence of the fire being very noxious in this affair as well as in others , which very often renders Operations defective , which otherwise would succeed well , among those who are impatient or ignorant . You must observe Regularity in all those Cases we shall treat of , and exact proportions of the Doses , and put them in , in fit and due time , otherwise the Process will miscarry ; especially in the Red Colour whereof we treat in the 8th Book , and in the Tartar that it may be perfectly Calcin'd . You must yet further observe that the Metal be well Boiled , well Purified , and made fit for Working ; then proceed in it as diligent Workmen ought to do . Thus you may perfectly imitate Agat , oriental Chalcedony , with the Fairest and most Beautifull Colours , and wavings , so lively and full , that it will seem as if nature her self could not arrive to the like perfection , or art imitate it . Yet experience shews us that in several things , and in particular in this Art of Colouring Glass , that Art cannot only imitate nature , but also far surpass her . The Eye and Phancy shall be judge , in the three ways which we will shew , where every thing shall appear so distinctly , that the curious shall easily understand it , and all that will apply themselves to it may succeed therein , if they do not deviate from these precepts . If they are well put in practice , you 'll find more than we can tell you . CHAP. LII . The way to prepare Aqua-Fortis , which dissolves Silver and Quicksilver . THERE are several sorts of Aqua-Fortis's , prepared after different manners , appropriated to the different Uses they are design'd for ; but all of them always with Salt-Petre or Nitre , which is the principal ingredient in Aqua-Fortis . That we shall here Treat of being not an Ordinary one , may pass for one of those that have a peculiar Composition . For this Water , take 1 pound of Nitre or Salt-Petre refined , three Pound of Roch-Allom calcined on the Fire-Shovel ; and four Ounces of Crystalline Arsenick , the whole reduced into Powder , to which add seven Ounces of * fine Sand ; and having well mixed the whole Composition , put it into a Glass Cucurbit , always leaving ⅓ part of it Empty , ⅔ being filled , lute the Cucurbit well with a strong lute , whereof we will give you the preparation at the end of this Chapter . But before you put the Cucurbite or Body on , you must lay Sand four Inches deep , and thick Iron-Bars to bear the weight , then fit a head , and lute the joints well , with a lute made of fine Flour and Lime powdered , and mixt with whites of Eggs : then put on the Joints roulers of fineLinen , then lute it again and then put on Linen roulers again , three or four times , each time letting it dry before you put on the next rouler . And then this will bear the Violence of the Fire , and the penetrating force of the Spirits of the Aqua-Fortis . After that , you must put this Body of the Alembick in a deep Earthen-Pan , made of the same Earth as Crucibles , filled with Sand , so that it be buried in the Sand to within two Inches of the joints ; then set it in a Wind Furnace fit , and capable to maintain an equal Fire . We here give you the figure of it , this Furnace may serve for several uses , as we will hereafter Explain . Your Alembic being thus fitted , you must put to the head a Glass Receiver very capacious , the better to resist the force of the Spirits , otherwise all may break . Lute it well to the Mouth of the Alembic , as you did the joints before , and with the same precaution of letting it dry each time in the Air , taking care not to kindle the Fire in the Furnace , till the lute of all the joints be dry , for that is very necessary . The whole being thus in right order , kindle a small coal Fire for the space of three hours , during which time the windy humour that is in the Materials , and which would break them will be drawn of into the Receiver . So continue a moderate Fire for six hours , then encrease it little by little , putting on at last billets of dry Oaken-Wood to the coals , for six hours more , till the Alembic or head begin to be tinged yellow , and the Spirits begin to rise . Observe to continue this Regimen or degree of Fire , till the head and receiver begin to grow red ; then augment it till the Alembic become of a deep red ; continue this degree of the Fire as long as that Colour lasts , till all the Spirits are drawn of , and the Head and Receiver begin by degrees to grow clear , and reassume their common Colour in cooling ; which sometimes will be two days first . Notwithstanding you must continue the Fire some time afterward ; then let the Furnace cool of its self ; taking care , that whilst the Alembic and Receiver are still red , and the Fire in force , that you admit no cool Air into the place , and that nothing cold touch them , which would break them . When all is cold , cover the head and receiver with wet Linen cloaths , that the Spirits ( which are about the Head and Receiver ) may the better sink to the bottom of the Receiver , and let it stand so twelve hours . Then bath the joints and the luting with warm Water , that you may the better loosen the bandage , and so take off the head from the Receiver , otherwise it would be difficult to do it ; then you may break the body which will be good for nothing , and take out the Faeces which reduce again into Powder : add to each Pound of that Powder , four Ounces of refin'd Nitre , and put the whole into a Cucurbit ( or Body ) whereon pour all the Aqua-Fortis before distill'd ; then put on the Head and Receiver , and lute it and dry it well as you did before ; having put it on the same Sand Furnace , during the first four hours make a gentle Fire , which afterwards may be encreased little by little , till the Head and Receiver begin to grow clear and all the Spirit is drawn over . After which let all cool , covering the Head and Receiver with wet Cloaths ; then let it stand twelve hours as before . Then unlute the joints again with warm Water , and put the Aqua-Fortis into Glass Vessels well stopt , that the Spirits may not exhale , and keep it so for uses hereafter to be mentioned . This is the Aqua-Fortis which is commonly called Water of separation , and the best that can be made . There are some that instead of Roch-allom take the best Roman Vitriol , or the like . You may know whether the Vitriol be proper for this use or not by rubbing it on a piece of well polished Iron ; if it be it will leave a Copper Colour on it ; Then this Vitriol , the purification whereof we will give in the next Chapter , will make an Aqua-Fortis far more penetrating than the former . Now we come to shew how to make the lute which we promised , which tho' common is very usefull in this Case . You must take one Part of Lome ( a fat Earth ) which is found in Rivers , 3 Parts of Sand , of common Wood Ashes well sifted , and of the Shearings of woollen Cloath each one half ; mix the whole well together , and putting water to them make a soft past , to which add one third part of common Salt Powder'd , and work them all well together , then use them in luting your vessels . Here follows the description of a usefull Furnace , which may serve instead of several others , the Number whereof would be troublesome , it being proper for several Operations . To render this Furnace more Intelligible to those who are not acquainted with it , we have here given a Cut of it , whereon we have marked A. B. C. the places made use of , with their Names , that they may by the same Letters here set down again be the better understood . A. is the Ash-hole , into which all the Ashes , on the Iron Grates which go cross it , fall down , and which are taken out with a little Iron shovel , or a sort of Iron Peel . B. is the space or whole room of the Ash-hole . C. Is the Fire-Grate which ought to be of square Iron Bars lying with the Edges upwards that the Ashes may not lie thereon , which they would do if the flats were upwards . D. is the place where the Fire is made of Coal or Wood. E. is the Door of it . F. is several holes wherein are put Iron Bars which go cross from one side to the other , to keep up the vessels wherein the matters to be worked are contained , stopping up the other holes that are not used with Lute . G. is the Work hole , or little Laboratory of the Furnace . H. is a semicircular opening with the like hole in the Cover to put the neck of the Retort through , when you distil in a Reverberatory , or otherwise . I. is the inner part of the Work-hole of the Furnace . K. is two Registers . L. is the Cover of the Furnace for 8 Registers . M. is a round hole which serves for a Register to Reverberate , and to pass the neck of the Matrasses through which are in Balneo , whether in digestion or otherwise . N. is the Registers which are to be opened or shut to augment or diminish the heat of the Fire of the Reverberatory . 2. For a Reverberatory Furnace , if you cover the work-hole with its cover , or door , and shut the Registers , the vessel containing the Materials being exposed to the naked flame . 3. For a Balneum Mariae , if you put into the hole a Copper Vessel of the same Diameter , in shape of a Copper , the bottom whereof must be strong and flat , and fill it with hot water , wherein you may put the Vessel that contains your matter : Which if it be a Matrass or Bolt-head , you may let the Neck out at the hole at the middle of the Cover , which covers the Balneum ( or vessel full of water . ) 4. For a Balneum Vaporosum , by putting in the same hole , a vessel full of water that shall rise in vapours : And in that vessel , another which shall contain the materials two Inches above the water , shutting this vessel with a fit cover least the vapours Exhale . 5. For a Balneum Aereum , or dry bath , by putting in the same hole a vessel filled with hot Air shut close , and therein also another vessel with the Materials . 6. For a Sand or Ash Furnace , and with filings of Iron , if the vessel put in the hole , and which is exposed to the naked Fire be filled with Sand , Ashes , or Filings of Steel , and that you pu● in the one or the other , the vessel that contains the matter you are to work on . 7. For a Lamp Furnace , if in place of the Bars below you put a Porringer full of Ashes , to contain the Vessel wherein your matter is ; provided you put also a Glass Bell on that Vessel to cover it that must stand on the Brim or Ledges of the Porringer , well sitted to it , to preserve the heat that arises : and then put under that Porringer the Lamp on a little Trevet . In short , this Furnace may serve for almost all Chymical Operations whatsoever , which would be too long here to mention . CHAP. LIII . The way of purifying Vitriol to make Aqua-Fortis stronger and more penetrative . WE have promised in the preceding Chapter , to shew the way of purifying Vitriol , which consists in taking away its Yellowness , which alone hinders the good effects it is capable of producing . Take Roman Vitriol , the best you can get ; dissolve it in common warm Water , then let it stand three days ; then filter it , and fling away the yellow Faeces ; then evaporate in Glass Bodies two thirds of the Water , and put the Remainder into Earthen glaz'd Pans , and set it in a cool place for the Crystals of it to shoot , which in 12 hours time they will do , about the Brims of the Pans in little transparent pieces , like natural Crystal of an Emerald-Colour ; and at bottom there will remain a sulphureous Sediment , which must be carefully separated , and cast away . Then you must take all those little green Crystals , and dissolve them again in warm Water , as before , and then filter and evaporate them in the same Glass Bodies : And set them again to crystallize , as before , in a cool place , taking care to separate all the yellow Faeces you find . Reiterate this Process of disolving , and filtering , evaporating , and crystallizing the third time ; then you will have a well purified and refined Vitriol . We will here add for the sake of the curious , that those who make use of Vitriol instead of Roach-Allum , to make Aqua-Fortis , the Preparation whereof we have shewn in the precedent Chap. ought to take a special care in the Distillation , that assoon as the Red Fumes are passed , all the Spirits of Nitre are raised , and that then the Fire must be extinguished ; for that which follows after , is only Spirit of Vitriol , which hinders the Operation of the Spirit of Nitre in the Solution of Metals . You may also draw a parting Water in 12 hours time , ( as some Refiners do ) during which time , but little Spirit of Vitriol can arise with their fires . CHAP. LIV. The way to make Aqua Regalis for the solution of Gold and other Metals , except Silver . AQua Regalis , is nothing but a common Aqua-Fortis , wherein you dissolve ¼ of its weight of Sal-Armoniac . But to have a good and strong Aqua-Regalis you must take one pound of Aqua-Fortis prepared as in Chap. 52. put it in a Glass Matrass , and add to it only 2 Ounces of Sal Armoniac , then put the Matrass into a warm Bath or Pan , of warm Water , and stir it often , that the Sal armoniac may be well dissolved in the Aqua-Fortis , which will be tinged of a yellow Colour . Then you must add as much Sal-Armoniac to it as the Aqua-Fortis can dissolve , then let it settle a little ; and the Sal-Armoniac will leave at the bottom all its Terrestreity . After that decant it gently off into another Vessel , so that you don't trouble the settling at bottom , or rather filter it through whited-brown Paper . This Water will dissolve Gold and other Metals , far better than the common Aqua Regalis , except Silver , which it toucheth not at all , for reasons which Chymists are acquainted with . CHAP. LV. Another way of making Aqua-Regalis far stronger than the former . OUr Design being not only to shew Operations and Processes proper for Glass , but also for the sake of Gentlemen chymically inclin'd , whose Curiosities are not contented with what 's common , or with ordinary Preparations ; those which we here give of Aqua-Regalis are among the number of those , whose Virtues are far above the common Preparations , they more intimately penetrating and dissolving Gold and other Metals than others , rendring them more volatile , and consequently more proper to be drawn over in Distillations . The first is that which some Philosophers call the Water of the two Champions , which is made with two parts of purified Sulphur , two parts of purified Sal-Armoniac , and one part of calcin'd Flints , all reduced to powder , and mixed well together . Then take an earthen Retort , which must have a little hole on the back ( or Curvature ) on the upper side , through which you may put in the Ingredients . For the more safety sake , you may lute the Body of the Retort over well , and let it dry ; then put it in the Furnace we have describ'd chap. LII . and fit to it a great Glass Recipient ( by reason of the violence of the Spirits ) wherein you may put a little common Water to attract them ; lute the Joints of them as you do for Aqua-Fortis , and let them be well dry'd before you kindle the fire , for Reasons we have elsewhere assigned . The Lute being dry , and all in right Order , you must begin by a gentle fire , that the Retort may grow warm by degrees , and afterwards gradually encrease it till it grow red-hot . Then put in at the Hole of the Retort four Ounces at a time of the Ingredients you have prepared , and stop it again presently . Doing thus you will see in a little time ▪ great quantities of cloudy Vapours arise , and pass into the Receiver , and fill it , which will dissolve little by little , mixing themselves with the common Water , and the Receiver will grow clear . Assoon as you perceive this , you must put four Ounces more of your Ingredients into the Retort , and give time for the Vapours ( arising again ) to dissolve as before ; then reiterate this Process till all your Ingredients are distill'd off . Then unlute your Receiver , and pour the Liquor into an Alembick , and draw off the Phlegm in Balneo Mariae , and rectifie it in an Ash-Fire : Then your Water will be made , and fit to dissolve any Metal but Silver . CHAP. LVI . Another way of making Aq. Reg. more easie , and with less precaution . THIS second way of making Aq. Reg. will be more easie than the former , and the Water of as much force . Take 1 pound of good Salt-Petre , powder it , and mix it with 3 Pound of Potters Clay , or Flints calcined to Powder ; put the whole into a Glass Retort well luted , and sit to it a great Receiver , lute the Joints well , then put it in a reverberatory Furnace , and distil it according to Art in a gradual Fire . When all the red Spirits are passed over , as we have explained in speaking of Aq. fortis in the 52 Chapter . Then draw off the Phlegm in Balneo Mariae ( which the Chymists and we hereafter will note by the two Letters B. M. ) then rectifie it in an Ash Furnace , and keep it for use . Then take a Pound of Sal Armoniac , well powder'd , and mix it with four Pound of Wood-Ashes , ( out of which you have before extracted all the Salt with warm Water ) then put the whole into a Retort , sit a Receiver to it , and distil it in a Sand-Furnace , and the Spirit of the Sal Armoniac will pass over into the Receiver . Then unlute your Receiver , and take off that Phlegm of the Spirit in B. M. and rectifie it in Ashes . This done , take equal parts of each of these Spirits ; then mix them together and distil them in an Ash-Furnace . Then you 'll have a strong Menstruum for dissolving Gold. I can't here omit , that the Spirit of Sea-water Salt distill'd as Salt-petre , has the same effects as the Water of the 2 Champions whereof we have given the Preparation in the preced . Chap. and as that we have just now treated of ; and in the mean while is not so sharp nor corrosive . You must , to make it succesfully , take 3 parts of Spirits of Sea-water Salt , and add to it one part of Salt-petre , then distil it together in an Ash-Furnace , the better to unite them . Then you 'll have an Aqua Regalis , which will dissolve Gold sooner than the Spirit of Sal-Armoniac , and which will make it rise and pass over in the Receiver ; thus you may this easie way make it more fit for the use you design it for . But notwithstanding this , you must not imagine that this Solution of Gold is a radical and total one , because it will pass over in an Alembic , and that so it is reduc'd into a Species of Aurum potabile : For there is nothing but the one Sovereign Menstruum of the Philosophers , which has that virtue , as being homogeneous to it , and formed of it . That is the only Liquor in which it can putrisie and be totally resolved , and regenerated again after the manner of the Phoenix , to become a Spiritual and Glorious Body , capable of performing all those wonderful Effects ascrib'd to it . CHAP. LVII . The way to Calcine Tartar. WE have already given one Preparation of Tartar in Chap. 15. both for the Calcination of it , and to extract the Salt ; and we have largely shewn in Chap. 5. of what importance it is to dry it throughly : For that reason we will not repeat it here , but refer the Reader thither . To make this Calcination , which is easie , Take Tartar in great lumps , the thickest and most shining you can get , blow away all the Powder , then put it in new Earthen Pots upon live Coals , or in a little Furnace , where you must leave it till it smoaks no more , and all its humidity be exhaled , and it be reduc'd into Lumps of a black purplish colour ; then it is calcin'd and well prepared . Tartar may also be calcin'd by wrapping it in pieces of brown Paper ; then lay a Bed of live Coals , and lay a bundle of it upon them , then another Layer or Bed of Coals , and on them another parcel of Tartar ; continue thus to do S. S. S. till all your parcels of Tartar are laid on , observing that the upper Layer be always of Coals ; and leave the whole in that State till the Tartar be well calcined and leaves off smoaking ; then take it off and blow away the Ashes . CHAP. LVIII . A way to make a fair Chalcedony in Glass . ALtho Chalcedony is not so dear as it has been heretofore , since it is found in Europe ; yet People have not left off counterfeiting it by help of Art , to make several Works of it no less beautiful than the true , and much cheaper . We will shew three different ways to prepare this Chalcedony , which will make three different Species of it , all of them very fair , but whose Beauty may be also augmented by the number of Ingredients we compose them of , and which cause those Diversities of Colours , which that Stone ought to have . Among the rest of the Ingredients we employ in this Subject , there are some that give no colour to Glass , as Tartar , Soot , Sal-Armoniac and Mercury . Those that are of an unctuous Nature , as Lead , Soot , Tartar , the Azure-stone often hinder the Union of the Ingredients , by reason of the Separation which may happen by the cooling the Metal ; which does not happen to those who know how to observe the degree of heat , wherein the principal knowledge of this Art consists . To make the first sort of Chalcedony : Put two Pound of Aqua fortis ( whereof we have given the Preparation in Chap. 52. ) into a Glass Body with a long Neck , four Ounces of fine Silver in small and thin Plates , or granulated , put the Body in an Ash Furnace over a soft Fire , or in warm Water , and the Silver will be presently dissolv'd . At the same time take another Body and dissolve in it 6 Ounces of Quick-silver in a Pound and half of the same Aqua fortis . After that pour both the Solutions together into a greater Body , which put in the same Bath , or warm Water , or Ash-Furnace : then add to it six Ounces of Sal-Armoniac , which dissolve over a gentle Fire ; then put to it one Ounce of Zaffer , and half an Ounce of Manganese prepared , little by little , with as much Ferretto of Spain also little by little , for fear the Matter coming to swell too much should break the Vessel . Add to all these Ingredients one Ounce of Crocus Martis calcined with Sulphur ; as much Scales of Copper thrice calcined , which ought to boil like Manganese ; as much blue Lake that the Painters use ; and the same quantity of Red Lead , the whole reduc'd into Powder . In putting in these Powders you must gently stir the Glass Body , that they may the better incorporate with the Aqua fortis , nevertheless take care there be not too much heat ; then you must well stop the Matras ( or Glass Body ) stirring it well every Day for ten Days , that the Powders may well incorporate , and that they may always appear as separated from the Water . After that put the great Glass Body in a Sand-Furnace in a temperate heat , or rather empty it into a GlassCucurbit , after having luted it at the bottom , and put it over the same Fire , so that the Aqua fortis may evaporate in 24 Hours , and at bottom of the Vessel you will have a yellow Powder , which keep safely in Glasses for use . When you are to make Chalcedony , take white Crystal in Glass , well purified , and that has been often melted ; for Crystal new made is not fit for that Operation , because the Colours will not stick to it , but are consumed by the Frit . Put about twenty Pound of this sort of Crystalline Glass into a Pot ; and being well melted , put in about three Ounces of your Yellow Powder at three different times , mix the Glass well with it each time , that the Powder may incorporate with it , the Glass being thus well mixed , let it stand an Hour , then mix it once more and let it stand during 24 Hours : Then mix it again for the last time , and make an Essay of it , it will give a yellowish Azure colour . Having made your Essay , and found your Matter right , you may take your Pot out of the Furnace , and when it is cold you 'll have colours which shall represent Wavings of the Sea , and other fine things . But to have a very fair Chalcedony , you must make a second Operation to join to the first , by taking eight Ounces of Tartar calcined , as we have shewn Chap. 41. Two Ounces of Soot of the Chimney well purified , half an Ounce of Crocus Martis calcined with Sulphur : Mix the whole well together , then put it into the melted Metal at five or six different times ; otherwise the Impetuous Swelling of the Materials would break the Pot , and the whole would be lost ; which may be avoided by putting it in little by little , stirring it each time well , that the Matters may incorporate : Make the Pot also boil , then let it stand twenty four Hours . After which you may work it into what you please , which put in the Furnace to whiten , and see if the Glass please you ; if it be green without , and blue , white , red , yellow and of other Colours like Jasper and Oriental Agat . If looking on it obliquely it be red like Fire , and held to the Sun it shew the Colours of the Rain-bow by reflection of the Rays ; if so , then it is fit to make all sorts of Vessels which may be polished at the Wheel . If it be pale and clear , you must add to it more calcined Tartar and Soot as before , stirring it well to make it incorporate ; then let the Glass stand and purifie several Hours , and afterwards work it as you please . Chalcedony is much used for the Effigies of Kings and Princes , for Heads , Cups , and many other Vessels ; principally for making Seals , because it may be graved easily , and the Wax will not stick to it . CHAP. LIX . A second Species of Chalcedony . THE second sort of Chalcedony ought to be finer than the former : The Preparations are as follow . Put into a Glass Body a Pound of Aqua fortis , and three Ounces of coppel'd Silver granulated , the better to dissolve . In another Glass Body put also a Pound of Aqua fortis , with five Ounces of Mercury well purified and passed through the Glove , and close it well . Take likewise another Glass Vessel , and put into it also a Pound of Aqua fortis , with two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac to dissolve in it . After it is dissolv'd add to it Crocus Martis prepared , as in Chap. 27. Feretto of Spain , of Chap. 22. Copper calcined as in Chap. 32. Leaves of Copper calcin'd by means of Sulphur , as in Chap. 31. of each half an Ounce , the whole reduced into Powder ; taking care to put them in one after another , and little by little , for fear the Vessel should break . Then put in another Earthen Body , one Pound of Aqua fortis , with two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac ; and the whole being dissolv'd , add successively as before of good crude Antimony , of blue Enamel which the Painters use ; of red Lead , and of Vitriol well purified of each one half Ounce ; the whole well powder'd , and put in little by little , as we have said , for fear of breaking the Vessel , then close it well . Take also another Glass Body , wherein put one Pound of Aqua fortis , and two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac ; being dissolv'd , add to it two Ounces of prepared Zaffer , as we have shewn in Chap. 17. a quarter of an Ounce of Manganese of Piedmont also prepared , as in Chap. 18. half an Ounce of thrice calcined Copper , as in Chap. 33. with an Ounce of Cinnabar ; the whole being well pounded , put it by little and little into the Vessel ; taking care ( as we have said ) that the Powders don't by too much swelling break the Vessel ; then close it well . You must have a sixth Vessel of the same bigness with the rest , wherein likewise put a Pound of Aqua fortis , and two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac ; as soon as it is dissolved , cast in two Ounces of Ceruse little by little , for that will cause a great fermentation . Then add the like weight of Painters red Lake , and as much of Iron Scales from the Anvil , putting it in little by little , as we have heretofore admonish'd , and for the same Reasons ; and lastly proceed very slowly in all these Operations ; then stop your Vessel well . All your six Vessels being on a gentle fire of Ashes , or in a warm Bath , to hasten the Solution of your Materials , you must stir them at least six times a Day , during the twelve in which you leave them in that heat , that the Aqua fortis may the better penetrate the Powders , and they communicate their Tinctures the better to the Glass . The twelve Days being past , take a great Glass Crucible that will hold the whole , and lute it well for fear of breaking ; let the lute dry , then pour in gently your Materials in the six Matras's one after the other , after having well stirred each of them beforehand ; then put your Cucurbite on a gentle Ash Fire , and fit to it a Head and Receiver , and lute well the Joints ; then distil gently all the Aqua fortis for the space of Twenty four Hours , that is in the Body , making a very gentle Fire towards the end , otherwise the Powders may be spoiled by too much heat , and the Spirits which ought to remain in the Powder would pass into the Receiver . Then they will remain at the bottom of the Vessel of a yellowish red colour , which keep in a Glass well stopped , for tinging Glass , or Crystal , which is yet better , as I have shewn in the preceding Chapter . CHAP. LX. The third and last way of Chalcedony . THIS third way surpasses the other two in Beauty ; it is something tedious , but the Learned know that what is most perfect , requires most time . To make this Preparation , you must use the Aqua fortis of Chap. 52. putting one Pound in a Glass Matrass , with four Ounces of Leaf-Silver to dissolve , and stop the Matras . Take another Matras , wherein put a Pound of the same Aqua fortis , with five Ounces of Mercury purified with Salt and Vinegar after this manner . Take common Salt , sprinkle it with Vinegar in a Wooden-dish , where add to it a little common fair Water to make it dissolve , put in your Mercury , and stir it well with a Wooden-Pestle to draw out the Blackness ; repeat washing them often with fresh Salt and Vinegar , till there be no more Blackness ; then dry them with warm Linen or Cotton , and pass it thro' the Glove , then it will be purified , and fit to put in your Aqua fortis . When it is dissolved , stop the Matras and keep it . Take another Glass Body , wherein put a Pound of Aqua fortis with three Ounces of fine Silver calcined . Amalgamate the Silver with the Mercury , as the Goldsmiths usually do , and put it into a Crucible , with its weight of common Salt purified , as we have heretofore shewn : Then put the Crucible on hot Coals , that the Mercury may evaporate , and that only the Silver remain at bottom , which will be purified and calcined . Then add to that calcined Silver , an equal weight of common Salt purified as before , mix them well together , and put them over the Fire in a Crucible to calcine them afresh ; then wash them well with warm Water to take out the Salt ; then put this Silver into a Glass Vial fill'd with common Water , which boil till one fourth part be consumed , then let it cool and settle to the bottom , then decant off the Water , and put more upon it : Reiterate this Process with fresh Water three times , and at the fourth dry the Silver , and put it into your Aqua fortis , and stir it well , and stop the Matras . We have promised to give the way of purifying common Salt , which is this . Take what quantity you will of Sea-Salt , dissolve it in a convenient quantity of common Water , boiling it for the space of two Hours , then let the Water rest , that the earthy part of the Salt may settle to the bottom : Then filter the Water , and evaporate it in an Earthen Vessel , or rather in a Glass Cucurbit , till the Salt remain dry at the bottom . Dissolve this Salt again , making the Water boil , then let it stand for the Dregs to settle , after which filter it and evaporate it as before ; which you must continue to do , till it leave no more Faeces or Dregs , and it will be well purified and prepared . To continue our Preparation of the Materials , you must put into a Glass Matras a Pound of Aqua fortis , with three Ounces of purified Sal-Armoniac ; that is to say , filter'd and whitened till it leave no Faeces or Dregs , as we have shewn in common Salt : Then dissolve in that Water a quarter of an Ounce of Silver , and stop the Vessel well . Take another Glass Matras , and put into it also a Pound of Aqua fortis , with two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac ; being dissolv'd , put into that Water , of Cinnabar , of Crocus Martis calcined with Sulphur as above ; of Vltramarine , and of Ferretto of Spain , prepared as in Chap. 22. of each half an Ounce , the whole well pounded into Powder ; you must do this little by little as we have heretofore hinted for fear of breaking the Vessel , by the fermentation which they make with the Aqua fortis ; then stop the Matras . Put into another Matras a Pound of Aqua fortis , and dissolve in it two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac as before ; add to it of Crocus Martis calcined , as in Chap. 25 , with calcined Tin , known among the Glass-Men , of Zaffer described in Chap. 17. and of Cinnabar , of each half an Ounce , the whole well powder'd , and cast little by little into your Matras , for the Reasons before assigned , which require that great precaution ; then stop the Matras . Take another Glass Body , wherein put one Pound of Aqua fortis , and dissolve in it two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac ; then add one Ounce of small Leaves of Copper calcined , as in Chap. 31 , half an Ounce of Scales of Copper thrice calcined , as describ'd in Chap. 34 , half an Ounce of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , as in Chap. 18 , and half an Ounce of Scales of Iron which fall from the Smiths Anvil , the whole well pounded , which cast little by little into your Matras for fear of breaking it , then stop it well . Put into another Glass Body one Pound of Aqua fortis , and two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac : The dissolution being made , put to it little by little half an Ounce of red Lead , one Ounce of Scales of Copper of Chap. 34 , half an Ounce of crude Antimony , and as much Caput Mortuum of Vitriol purified , the whole well pulveriz'd ; then stop the Matras . Take another Glass Matras , put into it one Pound of Aqua fortis with two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac ; add to that Water of Orpiment , of white Arsnick , of Painters Lake , half an Ounce of each ; the whole being well powder'd , and put into a Matras with the same precaution as before , stop it well . We have not repeated at each Operation , that you must put your Matras on an Ash Furnace over a gentle heat , or in a warm Bath to hasten the Solution of the Materials ; because we have told you it must be always done in Chap. 58 , in speaking of the Preparation of those things which serve to tinge the first Species of Chalcedony ; which may suffice for the instruction of those who employ themselves in this Art. We will add , that all the nine Matrasses mentioned in this Chapter , must remain fifteen Days in the same heat , stirring them often every Day , that the Water may the better operate on the Materials subtilizing them , and well opening their Tinctures . Then put all these Materials , with the Aqua fortis , into a great Glass Body , little by little , that they may unite well together . Close the Body and set it in the same heat , stirring it well for six Days . After that , take a great Glass Cucurbit well luted half way up the Body of it , put it on an Ash Furnace , put into it all the Materials out of your Body , fit to it a Head and Receiver , lute well all the Joints , then distil it during the space of twenty four Hours , over a very gentle Fire , for fear the Colours should be spoil'd , that the Water pass gently over , and the Spirits remain in the Powder , which of green will become yellow . Thus putting that Powder in the requisite Dose ( as we have taught in the first Species of Chalcedony ) into purified Glass Metal , made of broken pieces of Crystal , and not of Fritt ; and adding to it in its due time , calcined Tartar , Soot of Chimney , Crocus Martis made with Vinegar , observing all we have on this Subject remarked , these Materials will give an opacity to Glass , which may be worked twenty four Hours afterwards , managing it well with proper Tools , and often heating it ; and you 'll have things made of an extraordinary Beauty , greater then can be imagin'd . The End of the Second BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK III. CHAP. LXI . The Way of making Glass of the colour of Gold Yellow , of Granat , Amethist , Saphir , Velvet Black , Milk White , Marble , Peach Flower , and deep Red : Also to make Fritt with Natural Crystal , to colour Glass of a Pearl Colour , Viper , Ruby , Topaz , Opal , Sun-flower and others , with several other particulars in this Art. THERE are several Ways of giving Glass the Colour of Gold , of Amethist , of Saphir and others ; which are not unknown to the Curious in this Art ; and as there is generally some one way more particular and finer than the rest , several may be ignorant of that ; for that reason this Third Book is destin'd to that end , viz. to shew the best , and also to make Fritt of Natural ( or Rock ) Crystal , the way and Process whereof we will lay down so distinctly , that it shall be impossible for any one to miss his aim in doing it , that observes these Rules : To that end we caution those who employ themselves in making them , that they must be very punctual in the Dose , Time , and Circumstances , and Materials : For if you err in any one , the whole will be spoil'd and come to nothing , for you will have quite different Colours from what you proposed to your self . We will endeavour to make our Descriptions in the following Chapters , so clear and plain , that we hope they will prove to the Reader 's Satisfaction . CHAP. LXII . To make a Gold-Yellow in Glass . GOld-colour being one of the most noble and finest we can make , by reason of its imitating the most perfect Metal in Nature , as we have said in Chap. 8. must be made with the purest Materials , and great precaution . Take two parts of Crystal Fritt , made with Tarso , and not with Sand , which is not so good ; and one part of Fritt composed of two thirds of Tarso , and one third of fine Salt of Polverine , prepared as in Chap. 7 , pound and mix them well , and to each hundred Pound of this Composition , add one Pound of Tartar purified , pounded and searced fine ; and one Pound of Manganese of Piedmont , prepared as in Chap. 18 , mixing well these Powders with the two Fritts , because you must not cast them on the melted Glass as in other Colours : Then put the whole little by little into a Pot , and put them into a Furnace , wherein let them stand at an ordinary Fire four Days , for fear the Glass rising , should run over . When that Matter is well purified , you may use it for making Vessels , and what other Works you please , which will be of a fair colour . If you would have the Colour yet clearer , you must add more Powder , and you will have a very fine Golden-colour . If you would have it yet finer , take fine Crystal Fritt made of Polverine of Rochetta , and the Golden-colour will be yet more fair . CHAP. LXIII . Granat-Colour in Glass . THE beauty of this Colour is to express the Yellowish-red of Fire , when it is exposed to the Sun : We will treat more largely of it in the fifth Book , in shewing the way to counterfeit this Stone , as also several others . To give Granat-colour to Glass : Take of Crystal Frit , of Fritt of Rochetta , each an equal quantity , mix them well , and to an hundred Pound of these Materials , add one Pound of Manganese of Piedmont , prepared as in Chap. 18 , one Ounce of Zaffer , prepared as in Chap. 17 , mix them well with the Fritts , then put them little by little into an Earthen Pot made red-hot in the Furnace , because the Glass is apt to rise and run over . After four Days the Glass being well tinged and purified , you may work it ; you may encrease or diminish the Colour as much as you please , that depends on the Discretion of the Workman who puts in the Powders , which ought to be orderly put in , that the Matter be not spoiled . CHAP. LXIV . To make an Amethist-Colour in Glass . AMethist being of a Violet Colour , proceeding from Red and Blue , must be well imitated to look beautiful . For this Colour , take Crystal Fritt well made , with Tarso and not Sand , this Colour requiring no other ; to which add to each Pound one Ounce of the following Powder , which mix well together before they be put into the Pot. After that you must set the Pot to the Fire in the Furnace little by little , otherwise the violence of the Powder would cause it to break . When this Glass has been well purified for the space of four Days , and it has the colour of Amethist , you may work it . This Colour may be augmented or diminished by means of the Fritt , or Powder , according to the Discretion of the Workman . This is the Powder which produces the Amethist Colour in Glass . Take one Pound of Manganese of Piedmont , prepared as in Chap. 18 , and an Ounce and half of Zaffer , prepared as in Chap. 17 ; mix them well together , and put the Dose we have shewn to each Pound of Fritt , to have a true Amethist-Colour . Porta in his sixth Book , Chap. 5. only allows one Drachm of Manganese to each Pound of Metal , to make the Glass of an Amethist Colour ; but that Dose is too weak , and you must follow that we have shewn . CHAP. LXV . To make Glass of a Saphir-Colour . TO imitate the Colour of Saphir in Glass , which is of a clear and transparent Blue ; you must put to each hundred Pound of Fritt of Rochetta , one Pound of Zaffer prepared , with an Ounce of Manganese of Piedmont , also prepared as we have shewn . Well mix these Powders with the Fritt , then put the whole into a Pot in a Furnace , letting the Glass be well melted and purified : For the longer it remains on the Fire it becomes so much the siner , if you take care to take it out from time to time . Then mix it very well , and make an Essay of the Colour , and if it be not full enough , augment or diminish it as much as you think fit ; then the Glass may be wrought , and you will have a Saphir of the Colour of the Double Violet of Constantinople , which the small Dose of Manganese produces . CHAP. LXVI . Another way of giving Glass a finer Saphir-Colour . GLASS will have a far fairer Saphir-Colour , if in room of Fritt of Rochetta , you take good Crystal Fritt , and add to it the same Dose of Powder , as in the preceding Chapter . Of this Glass thus tinged you may make what Works you please . You must not put the Powder of Manganese and Zaffer on the melted Glass , but mix it with the Fritt as we have noted : For the Colour the melted Glass takes , is not so fine as when the Materials are first mixed . CHAP. LXVII . To give Glass a Velvet Black. ALTHO' this Black Colour look mournful , yet it is not without its Beauty : To make it , take pieces of Glass of several Colours , to which add a little less than half the quantity of Manganese as Zaffer , and put the whole into a Pot in the Furnace . This Glass being well purify'd may be wrought , and it will give a Black like Velvet , fit for many things . CHAP. LXVIII . Another Way of giving Glass a much fairer Velvet Black. ANOTHER Way of giving a Black Velvet Colour to Glass , much fairer than the former , is to take twenty Pound of Crystal Fritt in Powder , with four Pound of Calx of Lead and Tin , of each an equal quantity ; mix the whole well together , and put them into a Pot heated in the Furnace ; and when this Glass is well melted and purified , you must cast in three Ounces of Steel calcined and powder'd , and three Ounces of Scales of Iron from the Smiths Forge , powder'd and mixed with the Steel ; mix the whole well as you cast them in , that the Glass may not rise , and the better to incorporate them . Then let all rest twelve Hours , during which time , stir them sometimes ; then you may work it : And you will have a Velvet Black Colour very fair , wherewith you may work as you please . CHAP. LXIX . Another Velvet Black fairer than the precedent . THIS last Way of making a Black , surpasses in Beauty the preceding . Take one hundred Pound of Rochetta Fritt , two Pound of Tartar , six Ounces of Manganese prepared , reduce all to Powder , mix them together , put them into a Pot , which you must put into the Furnace leisurely , that the Matter don't rise too much . Then let it melt and purifie during the space of four Days or thereabouts ; mix the Materials well , cast them into Water the better to purifie , and then melt them again ; and you 'll have a Black of an extraordinary Beauty , which may be wrought as you please . CHAP. LXX . To make a Milk White Colour in Glass . THE Milk White to be done well , requires no less exactness than the Blue . To succeed in it , take twelve Pound of good Crystal Fritt , two Pound of Calx of Lead and Tin , one of each , and half an Ounce of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , as we have shewn : The whole pulverized and mixed together , and put them into a Pot heated in the Furnace , where let them stand twelve Hours , then mix the whole well , and make an Essay of it . If the Colour don't please you , add to it some Calx of the two Metals before mentioned , which incorporate with the Glass , well mixing it . Eight Hours after the Glass will be fit to work , and white as Milk. CHAP. LXXI . Another Fairer and Whiter Colour . THIS second way of giving Milk White to Glass , is much better than the precedent , and the Working more exquisite . We only make use of the Calx of Tin , without mixing any Lead ; and we put sixty Pound of that Calx , to four hundred Pound of pure Crystal Fritt , with two Pounds and an half of Manganese of Piedmont prepared ; the whole being well pulverized and mixed , must be put in a Pot heated in the Furnace , there to purifie during eight Days : Then cast the Matter into the Water the better to purifie it , then put it to melt again in the same Pot , after having dry'd it . If it be transparent , you must add to it fifteen Pound of the same Calx of Tin as before , mixing it well with the melted Metal , to make it the better incorporate ; twenty four Hours afterward , it will be finer and whiter than Snow , and ready to work . CHAP. LXXII . The Way to give Glass the Colour of Lapis Lazuli . LAPIS LAZVLI , which is a fine Blue , and full of Veins of Gold , will not be easie to imitate , without a great deal of Care and Industry in its Preparation . To make this fine Colour , we must make use of the same Matter of the fine White in the preceding Chapter , and when it is in fusion in the Pot , you must add to it little by little the Blue Enamel in Powder , that the Painters make use of , mixing well the whole together each time , and that as often as there is occasion to make this Colour . Then try if it please you , and when it is to your Mind , let it stand two full Hours , then stir it well and make a second Essay of it . If the Colour be perfect , let it stand ten Hours and then mix it again . If it keeps in the same State without changing colour , you may employ it in making what Vessels you please , which will be of the true colour of Lapis Lazuli . If in working this Glass it chances to rise , you may cast in a little Leaf-Gold , which will make the Glass approach yet nearer to Lapis Lazuli , and which will in a moment stop the rising of the Metal , as Sugar will do in boiling Oyl . CHAP. LXXIII . The Way to make a Marble-Colour in Glass . WHITE Marble being very simple , it is easie to imitate , the way of doing it only requires Crystal Fritt , which must be worked as soon as it is melted , before it be purified , for so it will give a very fair Marble Colour . CHAP. LXXIV . The Way of making a Peach-Colour in Glass . TO make this Colour , which is a very agreeable one , take Glass prepared , and tinged of a Milk White , whereof we have spoken in the precedent Chapters ; and when it is in good fusion , put in some Manganese of Piedmont , prepared as in Chap. 18 , and that little by little , stirring the Matter well at each time , till the Colour become as fine and perfect as you desire it ; but you must work the Glass in time , otherwise the Colour will be lost ; and you will have a very fair Peach Colour . CHAP. LXXV . The Way of tinging Glass of a deep Red. OPAQUE Colours have a Body , but the Transparent ones none ; wherefore this deep Red must be mixed with Matters that give it one , as we will shew . You must take twenty Pound of Crystal Fritt , one Pound of pieces of White Glass , and two Pounds of calcined Tin ; mix the whole well together , and put it in a Pot in a Furnace that it may purifie . That being well melted , cast in an Ounce of calcin'd Steel well pounded ; and an Ounce of Skales of Iron from the Anvil , well pulveriz'd and mixed together , stirring well the Glass with an Iron Stirrer , when you are putting in the Powder , to hinder it from rising too much . You must take care not to put in too much of the Powder , for that would make the Glass black , whereas it ought to be clear , shining , and of an obscure yellow Colour . Then take about six Drachms of calcined Copper , prepared as in Chap. 32 , cast it upon the melted Glass , often mixing it , to three or four times , and the Glass will be as red as Blood. If the Workman like the Colour , he must presently work it , for fear it should become black , and the Colour be lost , wherein you must take great care . If notwithstanding this the Colour comes to be lost , you must add more Scales of Iron in Powder , and it will return . This Work seems somewhat wearisom , but you must not think of that , but prepare and finish the business carefully , otherwise you will not succeed . CHAP. LXXVI . The Way of Calcining Natural ( or Rock ) Crystal , to make an Extraordinary Fritt . ALTHO' we may imitate Natural Crystal by help of Art , and make as fine with the Materials we have shewn how to prepare ; yet the way we are going now to describe , of making a Fritt of Natural Crystal , will make one so extraordinary , that it will surpass in beauty all we have yet shewn the Preparations of . Make Natural Crystal red hot in a Crucible covered close , then extinguish it in Water , and reiterate the same eight times . Then dry it well , and grind it on a Porphyry Stone to an impalpable Powder . Often purifie this Powder of Crystal , after the same way we have shewn to purifie Polverine of Rochetta , in Chap. 7 , observing all we have said on that Subject . Then mix that Crystalline Matter , with about one third part of Salt extracted from Polverine of Rochetta , prepared as in Chap. 7 , make a Fritt of it , then put it into a Pot well heated in the Furnace , and when it is in good fusion add to it a proportionable Dose of prepared Manganese of Chap. 17. After that often cast it into the Water to purifie , as we have noted in ordinary Crystal , and purifie it very well at the Fire before you work it , as we have elsewhere hinted . Then you will have a Crystal more beautiful and shining , than you have otherwise ever seen . CHAP. LXXVII . To make Pearl Colour in Crystal . TRUE Pearl Colour is so fine and shining , that it might seem difficult to give it to Crystal ; yet it is so easie that Tartar alone does it . Those who have a mind to perform this Process , must calcine their Tartar till it become White , as we have shewn at the end of Chap. 5 , then having well purified the Fritt of the Natural Crystal , whereof we have spoke in the preceding Chapter , and being in a good fusion in the Furnace , you must cast into it this white Tartar at several times , mixing the whole well each time , which must be continued to be done till the Glass becomes of a Pearl Colour ; for there is no other Rule in this Case than Experience to guide your self by . When the Colour is come to perfection , and the Workman likes it , he must presently work it , because it will be soon lost , as Experience testifies ; and you may make of it Works of an extraordinary Beauty . CHAP. LXXVIII . The Way to tinge Natural Crystal of a Viper colour . THE Green Viper Colour is not disagreeable , but it is very dangerous to make , by reason of the Materials whereof it is composed , if you are not very careful in making it . Take two Ounces of Rock Crystal of a good Water , two Ounces of crude Antimony , and as much Orpiment , with one Ounce of Sal-Armoniack ; reduce these three last into Powder : Stratifie with these Powders the Pieces of Crystal , in a good Crucible ; cover it with another that is bored through the bottom , lute them well together , and when the Lute is dry , put them in the middle of the Coals in a Furnace , let them be gently lighted that the Crucible may grow hot by degrees . It will smoak very much when it first grows hot , wherefore this Operation must be made in a large Chimney , that the Smoak may fly away , and you must go out of the Laboratory , because it is very dangerous and may prove Mortal . Let the Fire kindle of it self , and the Crucible grow cold ; then take out the Pieces of Crystal which lie on the top of the Crucible , which will have the Colour of Rubies , and be marked with fine Spots ; and those which are at the bottom will for the most part have the Colour of Vipers . Separate the other pieces from them , which will be of other Colours , and polish the whole at the Wheel like other Stones , then with Foils you may set them in Gold. These Stones will be of a very agreeable colour . You might tinge a great number together , but that would be more chargeable . CHAP. LXXIX . To make in Natural Crystal the Colour of Rubies , Topaz , Opal , Gyrasol and others . IT seems something strange that Crystals mixed with Matters that tinge it , should in the same Vessel receive so many different Colours . But if you consider that the Spirits of these Matters , have Virtues different from those of their Bodies , you will not so much wonder at such Diversities . The Pieces which lie highest , are the most penetrated by these tinging Spirits which always ascend , and so give them more vivacity and colour ; and so to the others in proportion to your Orders . For this Operation , take two Ounces of Orpiment of a yellow Colour approaching Gold or Saffron , and as much White Arsenick ; one Ounce of crude Antimony , and the same weight of Sal-Armoniac ; the whole reduced to Powder and mixed together . With this Powder stratifie pieces of Natural Crystal in a great Crucible , putting the least pieces to the bottom , and the greatest at the top which ought to be fine and without Spots . The Crucible being fill'd with the Powder and Crystal , cover it with another bored at the bottom , lute them well and let the lute dry . This last Crucible must ( as we have said ) be bored at bottom , that the smoak of the Materials ascending through the Hole , may better tinge the Crystals in passing , which it would not do so well if it passed out of the sides . When the Lute is dry , put it in the Furnace , and cover it with Coals up to the middle of the Crucible on the top , then put some live Coals to them , that they may kindle ●y themselves little by little , they ought to be great Coals , and made of Oak . You must take care of the Smoak , it being very dangerous , as we said before ; and order it so that they kindle well , that the Business may succeed , and that the Fire may go out of it self , taking care that no Air can get in at the Mouths of the Crucibles , for that would make the Crystals break , and then they are good for nothing . The Crucibles being cold unlute them , and take the Crystals out , the greatest parts of which will be tinged with the colours we have mentioned : Polish the best colour'd at the Wheel , which will also brighten their Colours , and make them look like Oriental Stones , and they 'll be fair and hard as they are . All the Success of this Secret consists in the Orpiment , which must be of the colour of Gold ; and if you don't succeed the first time , you must try a second ; and observing well what we have said , you may be assured to succeed . The End of the Third Book . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK IV. CHAP. LXXX . The Way of making Glass of Lead , commonly called Vitrum Saturni : To calcine Lead , and extract from it the Colours of Emerald , Topaz , Sea-green or Azure , Granate , Sapphire , Gold , and other Colours . GLASS of Lead , known to few Artists in this way , because they make no use of it by reason of its brittleness , is beyond doubt , the fairest and noblest Glass of any other . In this Glass you may imitate all the Colours of Oriental precious Stones ; and if this Glass were as tough as Crystal , it would far surpass it in beauty . It is true , if you don't work it with great care , no Pots nor Crucibles will hold it , for it will crack them and run out . I will here give all the Methods of preparing it , and that so distinctly , that the unexperienced may succeed in it . The Business principally consists in knowing well how to calcine the Lead , and re-calcine it again , which is commonly known , notwithstanding in the next Chapter we will shew how to do it for the sake of those that do not know it . The better the Lead is calcined , the less apt it is to turn into Lead again , and break the Pots in this Operation . We will also shew , that you must always drop the Glass into Water when it is melted , for the least Lead remaining in it , breaks out the bottoms of the Vessels , and s● you lose your Matter , which may be avoided by carefully minding what we have said , and which we shall note again in the following Chapters . It is our Opinion , and that not without reason , that that subtilty whereby the Lead so easily in this case pierces the Pots when it is not wholly calcin'd , comes from a certain unctuous yellow Matter like Oyl , that is seen to swim on the top sometimes in a violent fusion . For we have often observed , That if that unctuous Matter be not taken off as soon as it appears on the top , it will pierce the Pot , and so all run out among the Coals . This unctuous Matter has strange and infinite Virtues known to the Adepti , both in curing Diseases , and other Operations . He who knows how to make it Transparent , and give it the Jacynth Colour in Ezekiel , which is that Electrum spoken of in the first Chapter , may boast he has a Material , from which may be extracted a lac Virginis , in great esteem among the Philosophers . But let this suffice , we are not here to instruct the ignorant in those Arcana , but remit them to the Writings of the Adepti . Kircher assures us , that if Mercury congealed with the Vapour of Lead , be heated in a Brass-Spoon over live Coals , it will exhibit a strange variety of Colours , that you cannot imagine the like . And Zibav . speaking of Lead in his seventh Book , C. 20. de Transmut . Metall . That the Melters and Tryers of Metals daily turn Lead into Glass , and that this Glass is Black , Red , Yellow , Green , or otherwise coloured , according as the Lead is differently calcined . CHAP. LXXXI . To Calcine Lead . LEAD is easie to be calcined , because it is so to melt ; for this purpose you may make use of the Furnace described in Chap. 52 , or in a Kiln : You must put in a good quantity of Lead at a time ; for in two or three Days may be calcined several Hundred Weight . The Fire ought to be hot enough to melt Glass , and not hotter ; for if it be hotter it will not calcine the Lead . As soon as the Lead is melted , and it yields on top a yellowish Matter ; begin to draw forward the calcined part with an Iron fit for the purpose , always spreading it in the internal Extremity of the Furnaces or Kilns bottom . This Lead being well calcined for the first time , ought to be put again into the Furnace moderately hot to reverberate . You must spread it with the Iron , and stir it continually for several Hours , and at this second calcination it will become Yellow ; then searce it through a fine Sieve , and that which does not go through , must be put with other Lead to calcine afresh ; always taking care , that the Furnace have just a moderate heat , and be not too hot . There are several other ways of calcining Lead which we will not mention here , because this we have shewn is the best and most easie , and will dispatch a great quantity in a short time . All the Potters know how to calcine it , because they make use of it in their Glasing . CHAP. LXXXII . The Way to make Glass of Lead . WE have told you the Beauty of this Glass , in Chap. 77 , which may be tinged of several Colours , as Black , White , Green , and Red , which are natural to it , the degrees of the Fire only making it take those different Colours . This Glass being well made , besides the Beauty it has , which it communicates to Glass , and to Tinctures of precious Stones wherein it is employ'd , it has other great Virtues in Metallick Operations , which are not known to all the World , whereof we could largely treat , if it were not besides our Subject . To make Vitrum Saturni : Take fifteen Pound of calcined Lead , as we have shewn in the preceding Chapter , and twelve Pound of Crystal or Rochetta Fritt , according to what colour you would have ; mix them well together , and put them in a Pot in the Furnace , where ten Hours after it will be in good fusion ; then cast the whole into Water , and take out speedily the remaining Lead at bottom of the Vessel , for fear it should break ; then take it out of the Water and dry it , and put it into the same Pot to melt again : Take care not to put in the Grains of Lead ( if there by any ) which were in the Water , and which will be loosened from the Matter . After your Matter has been again in fusion six Hours , you may work it . You may also make a Glass of Lead , by taking three parts of Lead , one of fine Sand , and change them into Glass in the Furnace : As also of three parts of calcined Litharge , and one part of calcin'd Flint , melted and vitrified in the Furnace together . CHAP. LXXXIII . The Way how to Work Glass of Lead . IT is not enough to shew how to make Glass of Lead , if we don't shew how to work it too . If any one would make Vessels of it for use of any Figure ; he must take a Glass Workman's Iron they use to take the Metal out of the Pots with , and take what quantity of Glass of Lead with it he pleases , when it is in fusion , and let it a little cool , then work it after the manner we have shewn Chap. 3. You must clean well the Marble you make use of , and while the Glass is cooling , you must wet the Marble with cold Water ; for otherwise the Glass would scale it , and part of the Marble would stick to it . If the Marble be hard , you have so much the less to fear , for it will not break so easily , nor stick to the Glass . CHAP. LXXXIV . To make Glass of Lead of a fair Emerald Colour . THE easiness of tinging Glass of Lead of any colour , is the reason , you may be sure , of giving it an excellent Emerald-Green , especially because Green is also Natural to it . Take twenty Pound of Crystal Fritt powder'd and searced , and sixteen Pound of Galx of Lead also sifted ; mix them well together , then put them little by little into a Pot heated in a Furnace , and eight or ten Hours afterwards it will be melted ; then cast the melted Matter into Water , and carefully take the remaining Lead from it ; then put the Matter after it is dried into the same Pot again , and seven or eight Hours after it will be again melted . Reiterate this process of casting the melted Matter into the Water , and separating the Lead that sticks to the Pot , as before ; then this Glass will be cleansed and purified from all the foulness and unctuosity the Calx and Powder would leave in it and be very resplendent . You must put it again in the Pot , where it will melt and purifie in a little time . When it is melted , put to it six Ounces of Scales of Copper thrice calcin'd in Powder , as in Chap. 34 , with twenty four Grains of Crocus Martis , made with Vinegar , as in Chap. 25 , also in Powder , and mix them together . This Powder must be cast in at six times , always mixing well the Glass , and taking at each time the interval of saying the Creed : Let it rest one Hour , and then stir it again , and see if the Colour pleases you : If it be as you would have it , let it stand eight Hours , that the whole may well incorporate . Then stir it well , and let it rest a little , that the Faeces may precipitate to the bottom of the Pot ; then it may be wrought , and the colour can scarce be distinguished from true Emerald . CHAP. LXXXV . Another Way of making Glass of Lead of a fairer Emerald than the former . FOR this colour , which will be far fairer than the precedent , you must change one Ingredient of the other Chapter , and instead of Scales of Copper thrice calcined , put the same Dose of Caput Mortuum , of Vitriolum Veneris , prepared as at the end of the seventh Book ; then proceed exactly as in the former Chapter , and you 'll have a very exquisite Green. CHAP. LXXXVI . To make a Glass of Lead , of the Colour of Topaz . TOPAZ is a lighter colour than Emerald , and casts Rays the colour of Gold , wherefore the colour can't be well imitated except this way . Take fifteen Pound of Crystal Fritt in Powder , and ten Pound of Calx of Lead also in Powder , mix them well , and searce them very fine , then put them in a Pot heated at the Furnace , where leave it eight Hours , that it may be melted . Then cast the Matter into Water , and take out of the Pot all the Lead ( if there be any ) that remains . Put the Matter again into the Pot to be melted , and cast it by intervals into the Water . Add to that Matter half its weight of Glass tinged of a Golden colour , as in Chap. 62. incorporate and purifie well the whole together , and you 'll have a Glass of the true colour of Oriental Topaz , fit to be wrought . CHAP. LXXXVII . To make a Sky , or Sea-Green , in Glass of Lead . WE have shewn several Ways in the first Book to tinge Glass of a Sky-colour , or Sea-Green , which would be needless to repeat here . That we now shew which is made in Glass of Lead , has no less Beauty . Take sixteen Pound of Crystal Fritt , ten Pound of Calx of Lead , mix them together , and put them gently into a Pot heated in the Furnace , where they will be in good fusion in twelve Hours time . Then cast that Matter into Water , as I have shewn before , and take the remaining Lead out of the Pot , and put yout Matter in again to melt . Eight Hours after cast it again into Water , taking the remaining Lead out of the Pot , then it will be well purified . Put it in again to melt in the same Pot , and when it is in good fusion , cast in at four different times , four Ounces of small Copper Leaves , prepared as in Chap. 30 , with a quarter of an Ounce of Zaffer , prepared as in Chap. 17. After having mixed these Powders well together , and the Matter at each casting of it in : Two Hours after stir the Matter well in the Pot with an Iron Rod , and make an Essay to see if the Colour be full enough , then let it stand ten Hours to purifie , and to give the Colour time to incorporate with the Glass : Then it may be wrought to the Uses you design it , stirring it well , and letting it rest a little to settle , before you Work it . CHAP. LXXXVIII . To make a Granat Colour in Glass of Lead . THE Vivacity of this Colour appears no less in Glass of Lead than in Crystal , if it be made carefully . To make it , take twenty Pound of Crystal Frit , with sixteen Pound of Calx of Lead ; and after having added three Ounces of Manganese of Piedmont to it , and half an Ounce of Zaffer , both prepared as we have shewn ; put the whole into a Pot heated in the Furnace : Twelve Hours after , cast that melted Matter into the Water , and take out the Lead that remains behind in the Pot. Then put the Matter again in the same Pot , where it will be purified ten Hours after . You must mix it well with the Iron , and let the Faeces precipitate ; then see if the Colour pleases you ; then work it to what Uses you please , and you 'll have a Glass of Lead of a fine Granat-colour . CHAP. LXXXIX . To make a Sapphire-Colour in Glass of Lead . THE Beauty of Sapphire is no less imitable in Glass of Lead , than the Colours of other Precious Stones ; and its clear Blue Transparent Colour will have as much Splendour . To make it , mix together fifteen Pound of Crystal Frit in Powder , and twelve Pound of Calx of Lead , then searce it , pounding again what does not pass through the Sieve . Add to that two Ounces of prepared Zaffer , twenty four Grains of Manganese of Piedmont also well prepared , mix the whole well together , put it in a Pot heated in the Furnace , and let it stand to melt during the space of twelve Hours . Then cast the vitrified Matter into Water , and carefully take away the Lead that remains in the Pot ; then put the Matter again into the same Pot , and let it stand to be re-purified Twelve Hours . Then see if the Colour pleases you , and you may Work it . You 'll have a Colour like the true Oriental Sapphire . CHAP. XC . The Way to make a Golden-colour in Glass of Lead . THIS Colour is as fine in Glass of Lead , as in Crystal : It takes that Colour both from the Lead , and the Ingredients mixed with it . Take sixteen Pound of good Crystal Fritt in Powder , to which add the same weight of Calx of Lead also in Powder , and well searced ; then add six Ounces of Copper Scales thrice calcin'd , as in Chap. 34 , and forty eight Grains of Crocus Martis , made with Vinegar , as in Chap. 25 , the whole mixed well together , put it in a Pot heated in the Furnace : Twelve Hours after cast the Glass in Water , and take the remaining Lead out of the Pot , and then put the Matter again into the same Pot , to be well purified during Twelve other Hours . After that , stir it well , and see if the Colour pleases you ; if it chance to be greenish , add to it some Crocus Martis , and the Greenness will vanish ; then you will have a Golden-colour very fine , which may be Wrought . These are all the Colours we can give to Glass of Lead alone . We shall augment the Number in a Past of Lead , whereof we shall shew the Preparation in the following Book , because it is useful for imitating Precious Stones , as we shall shew in the same Book ; which is the Reason we have not done it in this . The End of the Fourth BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK V. CHAP. XCI . Shewing the Way to prepare Natural Crystal , and to make a very fine Salt of Tartar , and several sorts of Pasts , for Emerald , Topaz , Chrysolite , Iacinth , Granat , Sapphire , Beryl or Egmarine , Carbuncles , Rubies , and several other Colours , of so great Beauty that they surpass the Natural Stones themselves in every thing but Hardness . WITHOUT doubt it will seem surprizing to several , that Art should be capable of imitating the Natural Colour of Precious Stones in so great Perfection , as that the Beauty of the Artificial should surpass that of the Natural Oriental ones , in every thing excepting their hardness , which they have been many ages in acquiring : and I doubt not but several Ingenious Men are this day searching after means to give them that too . The Curious will find in this Book all that is necessary to attain this Art , nay , and to do something more than I mention . For since Art can easy imitate Nature , it is not to be doubted but that Ingenious Men may some time or other arrive to give the same perfection to Crystals that precious Stones have acquired in the Bowels of the Earth . The Natural , or Rock Crystal , which we make use of , as the Basis of our Artificial Gems , is the only Stone that does not proceed from any Metal , being the first substratum of others , only made of a congealed Water , with a subtil Earth , as other precious Stones . It s Virtue proceeds from Mercury , and the Spirit of Raphael , having also a great Sympathy with Saturn and Iupiter , whence it is proper for healing several Diseases . All the diversities of Gems proceed only from a sulphur or an unctuous Substance , which insinuates its self in their Composition , which fixes them more or less and also tinges them . This Sulphur is an Exhalation of Metalline and Mineral Spirits , forced up by the Central Fire , which virtually contains divers Colours , and which are determin'd and brought into act by proper Subjects . Thus Granat and other precious Stones agree with Crystal , as Mercury does with Saturn , their harmony in the Heavens assures us of these reasons and proportions here on Earth . Precious Stones derive their Origin from the Stars and the Primum Mobile , as do the Metals both perfect and imperfect , of the colour of Sulphur , and the qualities whereof they partake , and wherein they agree with the Stars . Great and wonderful Operations might be performed with these Precious Stones , if they were separated from the Impurity of their terra damnata , and reduc'd by the universal Menstruum into their first principles . It is only by this Menstruum , or mundane Spirit , that Metals and Minerals can also be so dissolv'd , that being full of their Attractive Virtues . We can boldly assert that this universal Spirit contains in it self all the secrets of Alchymy ; and that without it , it is impossible to have the Tincture , Water , and Salt of Precious Stones , or to make use of the admirable Virtues God has imparted to them . Yet I don't dispute but that there is a certain Acid Water Extracted from a Simple , wherein a dissolution of Gems may be made , and an admirable Magisterium , and a Precious Treasure for the Health , being prepar'd secundum Artem. That Water will also extract the Tincture of Gold , the Virtue of which is not less for preservation of Life , and curing several Malignant Fevers . As to Artificial Gems , which are the Subject of this Book ; all the Art consists in rightly imitating the Tinctures of those that are fine , which must be extracted from Subjects that resist the Fire . The Tinctures we give them are fixed in the Crystals though volatile , without altering their Colour . As for example Verdigrease being put on the Fire , becomes of another Colour , but being in fusion with the Crystal it fixes and changes not its Colour ; for natural Colours always return to their principle , and the great quantity of fixed , always retains some of the volatile . You must therefore for this end take permanent Colours which change not , being mixed one with another . For example Blue and Yellow make Green , you must therefore take a Blue that cannot be altered by the Yellow you mix with it ; and a Yellow that cannot be altered by the Blue ▪ and so of others . Isaac Hollandus , who has writ much on the Art of making Gems , shews us a very fine way , by which he has performed things almost incredible . We will give you some of his Preparations , among those we de●●gn to treat of , and add several curious Matters to wha● he has said of them , both for Pasts , Tinctures , and t● Fabrick of Gems , to Encourage the Lovers of this Art to set their Hands to work at it . It is true the way is troublesome and tedious , but any one that will diligently apply himself to it , will find himself sufficiently rewarded for his pains , both by the Pleasure of seeing so fine Productions , and the Profit he may get by a thing of so small charge . CHAP. XCII . The Way of preparing Natural Crystal . WE have already given a very fine Preparation of Natural Crystal in the second Book , Chap. 76 , yet we will give you here the principal one , which is its Calcination , and which we will explain at large . To perform this Calcination well , Take Natural Crystal the fairest you can get , since that is the Basis for Artificial Gems , it is no matter whether it be in great or small pieces . Fill with these Pieces of Crystal a large Crucible , cover it with a Cover made of the ●ame Earth , which must be somewhat broader than the Mouth of the Crucible , for fear Ashes or Coals tumble in , which you must take particular care of . Then set your Crucible in burning Coals in a little Furnace , and when your Crystal is well heated , cast it into a Vessel of cold Water , the more Water there is , so much the better will the Calcination be performed , because the cold of it is so much the greater . Then take it out of the Water , and dry it in an Earthen Ladle , then put it into the same Crucible to be heated again , taking care to cover it well : Then cast it again ●nto fresh cold Water , and repeat heating it and quenching it thus twelve times , changing each time the Water . You may know if your Crystal be well calcined , for it will easily break and crumble : If there appear in it any black Veins , you must take care to take them all clean out , by breaking them , and do this till only the White remains behind ; then it is well prepared . After you have well dried your Crystals thus calcined , grind them to an impalpable Powder on a Marble or Porphyry Stone , by putting a little on at a time , and fearce it well through a fine Silken Sieve . And since we use this Powder of Crystal for all Artificial Gems whereof we are going to treat , your best way will be to keep a good quantity by you , which you may always have recourse to in Working . If you design to succeed in this Art very well you must not use ordinary Fritt of Crystal , how good and fair soever it be , nor Chalcedony , nor Tarso , nor any other Stones ; for the Glass made of them is far less fàir and resplendent than that made of Natural Crystal , which has the most lustre , and approaches nearest precious Stones , as we have already remarked in the preceding Chapter . CHAP. XCIII . The Way of making a very sine and pure Salt of Tartar. NERI makes use of no Salt of Tartar , in all his Preparations of Artificial Gems ; notwithstanding this Salt being prepared after a certain manner , we shall here relate , for the sake of the Curious . It serves in a great measure to work the Crystal , being a true Vehicle , for the better introducing the Colours that are to be given , and which is of use for the Tinctures several ways . Those , who in their Operations of Artificial Gems , have made no use of Salt of Tartar , have without doubt been ignorant of this fine Preparation of it ; for if you use ordinary Salt of Tartar , there is a Sulphur and Foulness in it , which renders Crystal obscure , and consequently would be hurtful in these Operations . To make this Salt , you must first calcine your Tartar , till it become Grey , and not to perfect Whiteness ; and then dissolve it in warm Water to extract the Salt , filter that Water , and then evaporate it over the Fire ; then you 'll have remaining at the bottom of the Vessel , a White Salt. To take away all Foulness from this Salt , dissolve it again in warm Water , then evaporate it again over a gentle Fire ; take it off the Fire , and cast it into cold Water , and you 'll find it will leave on the surface of the Water a thick Froth , which you must skim off with a Skimmer that has little Holes no bigger than a small Pins Head : Put the Vessel again on the Fire , and evaporate the Water as before , then take it off the Fire , and cast upon it fresh cold Water , and skim it well as before . Reiterate this Process till you find no more Froth ; then Evaporate the whole over a gentle Fire till it be dry , and you will have a Salt of Tartar well purified , which is not so fusil as the other , because it is free from all that Unctuosity which causes the Fusion . Keep this Salt of Tartar in a Vessel well stopped , and use of it in Crystal with your Colours when you set them to melt . Altho' this Salt of Tartar be very fine and pure , yet it is not that of the Philosophers , which has far more Virtue , and opens more powerfully the Metals and Minerals where it is employ'd , tho' it be of the same Nature as this , and extracted from the same Principle . The Philosophers have moreover another Salt of Tartar extracted from Metalline Matters ; and this last is far more Excellent than any others . We will treat thereof at large in the Treatise we have promised , where we will explain the Virtues both of the one and the other , as well in Medicine as in the Business of Metals , and shew several very Curious Effects performed by their means . CHAP. XCIV . To make a Past for Oriental Emerald . WE have already shewn the way of tinging Crystal and Glass of Lead , of a very fair Emerald-colour , but not to make a Stone that shall imitate a true Natural Gem , which may be used in Rings , or otherwise , which now we come to do . There are divers sorts of Emeralds , but at present , they are all distinguished into either oriental or Occidental , the Orientals are more hard , and the others less . We will shew several ways of Imitating t●e Emerald more or less full , which will be all Beautyful . This is the first . Take two Ounces of natural Crystal prepared , as we have shewn in Chap. 92. and 4 Ounces of common Minium or Read-Lead , powder'd and Searced , add 48 Grains of Verdigrease well pounded and of a good Colour , with 8 Grains of Crocus Martis prepared with Vinegar as we have shewn Chap. 25. Mix the whole well together , and put it into a good Crucible that will resist the fire , in it you must leave an Inch empty . Then cover the the Crucible with an Earthen Cover , lute it well , and dry it , then put it in the hottest place of a Potters Furnace where they make their Earthen Vessels , and let it stand as long as their Pots . Being cold break the Crucible and you 'll find within a matter of the Colour of a very fine Emerald . If you afterwards set it in Gold , it will surpass in Beauty the true Oriental Emerald . If it happens that your Matter is not enough resin'd and purified , you must put it in again a second time in the same Furnace , where it will be purified as much as needs be ; which you may know by lifting up the Cover , if the Matter appears shining . If it is not so , lute the Cover on again , and put the whole in the Furnace . You may take notice once for all , that you must not break the Crucible , before the Matter be throughly baked and purified , for if you do , and so are obliged to put the Matter into another Crucible , the Past will be painted and full of Blisters . If you cannot easily come to a Potter's Furnace , you may make one your self with little Charge , wherein you may put twenty Crucibles at once , each of different Colours , so one Baking may serve for a great deal of Matter . You must make use of dry and hard Wood to heat the Furnace , as we have said before in baking Glass , and continue the Fire twenty four Hours , in which time your Matters ought to be baked and purified enough , but for more Surety you may continue the Fire six Hours longer , and they will be certainly baked enough . Your Matter being thus rig●tly baked , you may polish it at the Wheel , as we have said ; and set it with a Foil in Gold , as is done with true Gems , and you 'll have a brighter Emerald than the Oriental . CHAP. XCV . Another deeper Emerald-Colour . THAT which makes Emerald deeper than the precedent , proceeds from the smaller quantity of Crystal employ'd in it , with more of the other Materials , which make it more fair , but also more brittle . You must Bake it at least six Hours longer than the precedent , to take away that Imperfection which Lead usually gives . The Dose of this Past , is one Ounce of Natural Crystal prepared , as we have shewn , six Ounces and an half of Red-Lead , seventy five Grains of Verdigrease , ten Grains of Crocus Martis made with Vinegar , the whole pulverized and well mixed together ; then follow the Method we have shewn , in the preceding Chapter , which would be too tedious to repeat here , and on every occasion , so we will avoid it ; only observing to let your Matter stand longer in the Fire , as we have said , and you 'll have an admirable Oriental Emerald-colour , which being set in Gold with a Foil of the same Metal underneath , will be inexpressibly fair . CHAP. XCVI . Another Way to make a fairer Paste for Emeralds . THIS Paste will be as brittle as the precedent , for the Reasons we have said ; for you must take seven Ounces of Minium , to two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared : To which add full eighteen Grains of Verdigrease , ten Grains of Crocus Martis , the whole pulverized and well mixed . Then proceed as we have shewn in Chap. 94 , and you 'll have an Emerald fit for all small Works , but not so hard as the former , by reason of the great quantity of Lead in it . Wherefore you ought to keep it longer in the Fire , that the pale ' Colour of the Lead may vanish . CHAP. XCVII . Another fairer Paste for Emeralds . THE Colour of this Paste will surpass the others in Beauty , if the Workman takes care . Take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , six Ounces of Minium in Powder , and eight Grains of Verdigrease also in Powder , mix the whole well together , then put them into a large Crucible covered and well luted , in the same Furnace as before . Moreover do all as in Chap. 94 , and you 'll have an extraordinary fair Emerald-colour . CHAP. XCVIII . Another very fair Emerald-Colour . THIS Stone will be far harder and finer than the precedent , because it contains less Lead . To make it , take four Ounces of Natural Crystal , prepared as in Chap. 92 , the fourth part of an Ounce of Red-Lead , and the same quantity of Verdigrease , the whole pulverized and sifted fine , which put together in a Crucible well closed and luted , in the same Furnace as before , proceeding as in Chap. 94 , leaving the Crucible in the Fire thirty six Hours . After which , if you will you may cast your melted Matter into a Marble Mould heated , putting it near the Fire to cool gently , and you 'll have a very fine Emerald . CHAP. XCIX . To make a Paste for an Oriental Topaz . THE Topaz of the Ancients , is the same which the Moderns call a Chrysolite , whereof we shall treat in Chap. 101 , and their Chrysolite , that which Modern Jewellers call a Topaz , which is a Stone of a Golden-colour . Such are the Oriental Topaz's which are the most hard of all Stones next the Diamond . Their Colour is like Water tinged with Saffron or Rhubarb , but shining and pure . There are some found in Europe , but as soft as Crystal , and approach somewhat on Black with a Golden-colour ; if there is any one found of the Colour of pure Gold , it is extraordinary , and not distinguishable from the Oriental ones , but in hardness . To imitate the Oriental ones , take two Ounces of Natural Crystal of Chap. 92 , seven Ounces of Red-Lead in ●ine Powder and searced ; mix the whole well together , put them into a good Crucible , wherein you leave an empty space of about an Inch deep , for fear the Matter should run over in Baking , or stick to the Cover of the Crucible in rising , and spoil the Work. Then proceed as in Chap. 94 , observing the same Circumstances of Time and Fire , and you 'll have an admirable Topaz-colour . CHAP. C. Another fine Topaz-Colour . TAKE two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , as we have shewn ; two Ounces of Native Cinnabar , two Ounces of Aes●ustum , the whole powdered , four times as much calcined Tin also pulverized , put the whole in a Crucible well covered and luted , into a Furnace as before , wherein let them stand twenty four or thirty Hours at a Fire not too violent , and which shall always retain the same degree of heat , for this Powder will easily melt . Then you 'll have a fine Topaz-colour'd Paste . A very fine Topaz-colour may be made by putting to four Ounces of the same Natural Crystal half a Dram of Crocus Martis , and a very little Minium , observing the same Circumstances for Baking it as before . CHAP. CI. To make a Paste for an Oriental Chrysolite . WE have told you that the Modern Jewellers call that a Chrysolite which the Ancients called a Topaz , or Chrysopas , which is a Precious Stone , Green and Diaphanous , some whereof cast a Lustre of Gold : This Stone is so hard , that it will easily endure the File , and sometimes there are pieces of them found big enough to make Statues of ; witness that related by Iuba King of Mauritania , which was made in Honour of the Queen Arsinoe , Wife of Ptolomaeus Philadelphus , of the height of four Cubits . To imitate this Stone , take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepar'd , eight Ounces of Minium in small Powder , add to it 12 Grains of Crocus Martis made with Vinegar , as in Chap. 25. mixing the whole well together . Then put the whole into a Crucible in the same Furnace as before , leaving it there a little longer than the others , that it may have time to purifie from the Lead . Then you 'll have a Paste for the Oriental Chrysolite , which will appear very admirable set with a Foil in Gold. CHAP. CII . To make a Paste for Sky-colour , to imitate the Beryl , called also Aqua-Marina . WE have already treated of this Colour in Chap. 40 , wherein we have taken notice how this Name of Beryl came to be given it by the Italians , because it has the Blewish-green of the Sea , and also whence this Stone is gotten . To imitate this Stone , take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , five Ounces of Minium , twenty one Grains of Zaffer , prepared as in Chap. 17 , the whole reduced to a fine Powder , put it in a Crucible covered and luted , proceed as in Chap. 94 , and you 'll have a delicate Sky-colour . This Colour may be also imitated by taking half a Dram of Aes ustum to eight Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , and putting the whole in a Crucible to bake in the Furnace as before . CHAP. CIII . To make a Paste for Sapphire-Colour . THE Sapphire is very much esteemed for its Beauty , which is a very clear Sky-colour , and pleasant to behold . There are some that are whitish like Diamonds , others very Blue , and some Violet-colour ; the Stone is soft , but easie to harden . To make this Paste , take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , four Ounces and an half of Minium , twenty six Grains of the Blue Smalts the Painters use ; the whole being well pulverized , put them in a Crucible , and cover and lute them well , then put them in the Furnace to Bake as long time as before prescribed ; and you 'll have a fine Violet-colour approaching blue . CHAP. CIV . Another Oriental Sapphire . THE Past for this Sapphire will be nearer the Oriental Colour than the former . Take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , six Ounces of Minium ; to which add two Scruples of Zaffer , prepared as in Chap. 17 , and six Grains of Manganese also prepared as by Chap. 18 , the whole reduced to fine Powder ; mix them well together , and put them in a Crucible , and cover and lute it well ; then put them in the Furnace to bake the same space of time as before shewn , and you 'll have an Oriental Sapphire of a very fine Violet-colour . CHAP. CV . Another deeper Oriental Sapphire . THIS Past for Sapphire , will be of a deeper Colour than the former , you must put to two Ounces of Natural Crystal , prepared as in Chap. 92 , five Ounces of Minium , forty two Grains of prepared Zaffer , and eight Grains of Manganese of Piedmont also prepared ; the whole reduced to an impalpable Powder , and mixed well together . Moreover , proceed as in Chap. 94 , observing well all Circumstances , and you 'll have a Sapphire deeper than the preceding , somewhat tending to a Violet-Colour , which you may Work , and Polish , and Set. CHAP. CVI. To make a Paste for an Oriental Granat . THE Granat is very like the Carbuncle , for both being exposed to the Sun , they exhibit the Colour of live burning Coals , being between Red and Yellow , which is the true Colour of Fire . There are several sorts of Granats , both Oriental and Occidental , some deeper , others less so ; but the Jewellers know how to make them appear , by setting them on Silver Foils . We will not trouble the Reader with all that might be said concerning them , several Authors having largely treated thereof , we shall content our selves with shewing here the way how to imitate them by our Art. Take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , and six Ounces of Minium , with sixteen Grains of Manganese of Piedmont , and two Grains of Zaffer , prepared as we have shewn in the first Book , the whole pulverized , and well mixed together , and put in a Crucible into the Furnace , with it's Cover well luted , there to Bake , with the same Precaution we heretofore have given ; and you 'll have a very fine Granat , ●as resplendent as the Oriental . CHAP. CVII . A deeper Oriental Granat . THIS Colour will be not only deeper , but also far fairer than the precedent . To make it , take two Ounces of Natural Crystal prepared , five Ounces and an half of Minium ; to which add fifteen Grains of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , having pulverized it , mix the whole well together : Moreover proceed as in Chap. 94. for Baking this Paste , only take notice you must here leave more empty space in the Crucible , because this Matter rises more than the others , wherein care must be taken . Then you 'll have a deeper Oriental Granat than the former , which you may polish , &c. CHAP. CVIII . Another fairer Granat . THE Paste for Granat will be yet much fairer than the Precedents , if you take to two Ounces of Natural Crystal calcined and prepared as in Chap. 92 , 6 Ounces of Vermillion or Minium , in fine Powder , thirty five Grains of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , and four Grains of prepared Zaffer , as in Book I. which being well pulveriz'd mix together in a Crucible , leaving a greater empty space than in the others , by reason the Matter rises more ; then lute the Cover well , let it dry , and put it in the Furnace to Bake , as we have shewn Chap. 94 , observing the same Circumstances we have noted on that Subject , and you 'll have a very fine Granat fairer than the rest . CHAP. CIX . Observations for Pasts and their Colours . WE might have inserted this Discourse in Chap. 91 , as being the first of this Book ; but we thought it better to place it here , where we will shew divers ways of making Pasts , no less fair than curious , and where it will be necessary to give some little Instruction to those who undertake to make them , as also concerning the degrees of the Colours that may be therein imitated . The making of these Pasts is the essential point of the Business ; because on it depends the beauty of our artificial Gems : But the baking also is not of less Consequence , forasmuch as without that you cannot Succeed . It is not Enough to well Regulate the Fire during the time we have Noted in Chap. 92. whilst the matter is to stand in the Furnace , but you must also take care that the Crucibles don't break before the matter is well baked and purified : For if the Crucible breaks and you are forced to pour out the matter into another Crucible , the whole Work will be spoiled and the matter full of Pustles and Blisters . You had much better let the Crucible Cool , if it be not quite broken ; then Lute it well , and put it in the Furnace again to make an end of baking . You must also take Notice not to break the Crucible to take out the matter before it be perfectly baked . The curious may avoid these inconveniences , if in room of ordinary Crucibles they make them of the same Earth that the Pots for making Glass are made of , which will resist the Fire longer than we have occasion here for baking , and bear a more violent Fire than we have occasion for . Those of Germany also will do very well for this business because they endure the Fire better than the ordinary ones . But I will yet abridge all these precautions , by shewing an easy way to prepare the common Crucibles , which I have seen tryed , and resist the Fire a long time . Take an ordinary Crucible or rather one of Germany : Heat it a little in the Fire , then dip it into Olive Oyl , and let it soak a little of it in . Then take Glass reduced to an impalpable Powder , and strow it all over the Crucible , both without and within , as thick as you can , then put it into a Furnace in a small heat , and then increase the Fire to a melting Heat ; then the Glass will Melt and Vitrifie so well with the Crucible , that it will endure the Fire far longer than is required for our Business . We will also further remark that the Colours we here shew for Pasts are proportional to the Doses we give them ; but those who would have them deeper or lighter , must regulate themselves accordingly : If they make small Stones for Rings , the Colour must be deeper by reason of their smallness : If they make greater , the Colour must be lighter , but deeper for Pendants than any other . The whole depends much on the Fancy of the Workman , who is to proportion the Doses of the Colouring to the Work he designs . In speaking of these Colours in this Chapter , our design is only to shew more easie ways to those who exercise themselves herein , for otherwise we have sufficiently discours'd of them in the precedent Chapter , as we shall continue to do in the following . We shall say nothing further here of calcined Copper , or Verdigrease , or Zaffer , or Manganese , having sufficiently done it before ; but only advertise the Curious , that there may be extracted from Gold a very fine Red , and one a little more obscure from Iron ; an excellent Green from Copper ; a Golden Colour from Lead ; Blue from Silver , but a much fairer from Granats of Bohemia ; which are low priz'd by reason of their smallness , but give a very fine Colour . The same may be done with Rubies , Sapphire , and other precious Stones , as Chymists well know . If I should treat of all those Colours in this Tract , it would make it half as big again as I design it , and would be too prolix for our present Purpose ; what we have shewn already , is sufficient to make very fine Works . CHAP. CX . To make Sulphur Saturni , to be used in Pasts for all Artificial Gems . ISAAC HOLLANDVS has so well shewn us the way to imitate the Colour of all Precious Stones , that I cannot pass by in silence this following Method of his extracted from his Works . As it is not common , nor his Book seen by every one , and that there may be some that cannot understand him , we thought the Reader might be glad to have it , since it is the most curious way that can be made use of for this Work. The way to make his Sulphur for it is this . Take Ceruss , or White-Lead , ground very small , put it into a great Glass Body , and pour thereon as much distill'd Vinegar as will rise a Palm above it ; and as the Vinegar will rise and swell very much at first pouring on , you must take care to pour it on gently , till all the fury and noise be gone . Then set this Body on a hot Furnace in Sand , there to evaporate the eighth part of it away . Then let it cool and decant off the remainder of the Vinegar , which will be well coloured and full of Salt , which keep in another Glass Vessel . Then pour fresh distill'd Vinegar on the remainder of the Ceruss ; set it again on the Furnace to evaporate as before , and decant off that Vinegar as the former . Reiterate this Process of putting fresh Vinegar on your Matter , and evaporating it , and decanting it off till it have no further Colour nor Sweetness , which commonly happens about the sixth time . Take all your coloured Vinegars , and carefully filter them off , then take one or more Glass Cucurbits , and evaporate all the Vinegars over a gentle Fire , and you 'll find remaining at bottom a Salt of Saturn of Lead , very White . Then take a Glass Matras , lute it well down to the middle of the Body , and put your Salt of Lead in it , and put it on a Sand Furnace over a gentle Fire , for the Space of twenty four Hours , covering it with Sand up to the Neck . Then take out your Salt , which ought to be as red as Cinnabar , and grind it fine on a Marble ; if it be Yellow , you must put it on the Fire again for twenty four Hours longer , and take care it don't melt , for then all is spoil'd . When your Salt of Lead is perfect , as we have shewn , you must put it again into a Glass Cucurbit , and pour distill'd Vinegar on it as before , and decant it off when it is enough coloured , and put fresh Vinegar on the remaining Salt , and continue this process till all the Salt be dissolved , and the Faeces or Dregs all separated . After that , put all these coloured Vinegars into Glass Vessels , and let them stand six Days to settle , then filter them carefully and separate all the Faeces . Then put all these filter'd Vinegars into a great Glass Body to evaporate as before , and you 'll find at the bottom a very white Salt of Lead , sweet as Sugar . This Salt being well dried , dissolve it afresh in common Water , and let it stand six Days , that all the Faeces may precipitate to the bottom . Then filter that Water , and evaporate it in a Glass Cucurbite over a gentle Fire , as we have said , and you 'll have at bottom a Salt more white than Snow , and as sweet as Sugar . Reiterate this Method of dissolving in fair Water ●iltering , and evaporating till three times ; then take your Saccharum Saturni , and put it in a Glass Body in a Sand Furnace over a temperate heat , where leave it for several Days without augmenting the Fire ; then it will become redder than Cinnabar , and give a Calx finer than Wheaten Flour . It is this Calx thus purified from all its Terrestreity , which is called Sulphur of Saturn . Now in making Pasts for Emerald , Sapphire , Granat , Topaz , Chrysolite , Blue and other Colours ; you must employ it instead of Minium , in the same Doses we have shewn in the precedent Chapter of this fifth Book . Observing all we have noted in the Subject of Baking , and proceeding as in Chap. 94. Then you 'll have Stones of different Colours , far fairer than the Natural ones , and which can scarcely be distinguished from them . The Pasts made with this Sulphur , will not have that Grease and Yellowness which others have , and will not be so apt to spot by the Breath : Upon this account the Curious will have no cause to repent of the trouble of making this Sulphur , tho' the Work be very laborious . They also know that all fine Works require very pure Matters , and that they cannot have that purity without the great time and care of those who undertake them . I may also here say , that this Work well carried on , is more precious than it seems to be , except to those who are acquainted with it . For the sweetness this Lead has acquired , by the Preparation we have shewn , is a true sign of its Purity , that it is fit to make a Medicine very homogeneous to Nature . I don't say that this Preparation alone , we have here shewn , is sufficient for so elevated a Mystery as that whereof we speak ; but I cannot also conceal that it is the chief part of the Work , especially if you observe some little Circumstances which Isaac Hollandus has omitted to mention , whether he was ignorant of them , or thought them not necessary to his Preparation , I can't tell . The Learned will easily penetrate into this Mystery , and others that have a true desire to know it , will find Subject to exercise their Wits on , in embracing so serious a Study to penetrate into the depths of it . CHAP. CXI . The Way to make very hard Pasts with Sulphur of Saturn , and to give them all the Colours of Precious Stones . THIS Paste is a Consequent of the precedent Operation , because we employ therein the same Sulphur of Saturn , we just now mentioned ; and that which chiefly causes its Beauty , is that all the Ingredients we use in it are perfectly purified . To do this , take ten Pound of Natural Crystal prepared , with six Pound of Salt extracted from Polverine of Rochetta , purified , pounded , and well searced , as we have shewn in Chap. 7 , whereunto add two Pound of Sulphur of Saturn chymically prepared , as in the preceding Chapter ; then mix these three Powders well together , and put them into an Earthen glazed Pan , and cast on them a little common fair Water to reduce these Powders into a Lump something hard . Afterwards divide them into several Parcels of about three Ounces each , making a hole in the middle the better to dry them at the Sun ; being well dry'd , put them into an Earthen Pot well luted , then calcine them in a Potters Furnace , then pound and grind them well on a Marble , and searce them through a fine Sieve . This being done , put this Powder into a Glass Furnace , there to melt and purifie for three Days ; then cast the Matter into the Water , as we have elsewhere shewn ; and after you have dried it , put it again into the Pot in the same Oven , there to melt and repurifie for fifteen Days , that it may be without spot , and that it becomes of the colour of Precious Stones . This Crystalline Matter may be tinged of several Colours , viz. Emerald by means of Copper thrice calcined ; Topaz by means of prepared Zaffer ; and so of others whereof we shall not treat here , having largely done it elsewhere . To succeed , you must put into the Furnace as many Pots as you design to make different Colours , add to each as much Chrystalline Matter as you please , and regulate according to the weight of the tinging Materials which you add to them , and proportionate them to those we have described in the precedent Chapters of this Book . This Paste will have finer Colours than the true Natural Stones , and approach near to their hardness ; particularly that of the Emerald , which the Curious will find by Experience . CHAP. CXII . The Way to make Saturnus ( called ) Glorificatus . THIS is a Preparation we hold in no less esteem for Pasts for Gems , than that of Isaac Hollandus , and whereof we have spoken in Chap. 110 , they have some likeness , yet this last is more easie to make , and more short , and has no less Virtue . Take a good Litharge , or rather good Ceruss of Venice , what quantity you please . That which you choose , grind into a subtile Powder , in a great Glass Cucurbite , whereunto pour good distill'd Vinegar , as much as shall swim on the top of the Matter a Hand high ▪ Then put this Vessel on a soft Ash-Fire , and when the Vinegar is well colour'd and impregnated with Salt of Saturn , decant it off into another Vessel ; then continue to put new Vinegar on your Matter , which stir well with a Stick , to facilitate the Solution of the Salt ; and do it so often , that your Vinegar shall have extracted all the Tincture from the Salt , and that colour it no more . Then take all your coloured Vinegar , rectifie it four times on Tartar calcined to Whiteness , then filter it carefully , and put it in a Glass Cucurbite , on a Sand or Ash-Fire , where gently evaporate it till it be just skin'd over . Then put the Vessel into a cold place , having taken care to cover it , for fear of any foulness tumbling into it ; and in a little time you 'll find your Matter in little Stones , Pure , Chrystalline , and Fusible , which you must take out of your Vessel with a Skimmer full of Holes . Then put your Vessel on the same Fire to evaporate the remaining Vinegar till it be just skin'd over , and then set it in a cold place to Crystallize as before . When you have taken out all the Crystals , dry them well , and reduce them into a subtile Powder , and keep them in a Vessel well stopped , taking care to make at least ten Pounds . Thus you have Saturnus Glorificatus . CHAP. CXIII . Another Way of making Paste for Precious Stones , with Saturnus Glorificatus . THERE are some who use transparent Flints calcined , to add to Saturnus Glorificatus , and make Paste for Artificial Gems ; but as we esteem Natural Chrystal prepared much more proper for that Work , we should employ it before calcined Flints . Take therefore of Natural Chrystal prepared ten Pounds , of Saturnus Glorificatus ten Pounds , the whole reduced to fine Powder , which mix well together ; then put it in a Pot in a Glass-house Furnace , there to be melted and purified three Days : Then cast it into a great Wooden Vessel full of cold Water , then dry it , and put it in the Furnace in the same Pot , the better to purifie . When this Chrystalline Matter is well melted , and clear , take out the Pot ; and when it is cool , pound it to an impalpable Powder on a Marble , then keep it in a Glass Vessel well stopped , for fear of Dust falling in ; and that Matter will serve for a Basis or Stuff to make all sorts of Artificial Gems of . We need not here repeat the Way of making them of this Past , because we have shewn it before in several others ; but for sake of the Curious who are never weary of Learning , we will do it ; besides that there are some who may take pleasure in reading it , as we do in writing it ; particularly we will treat of some Species of Stones we have , as yet , not at all mentioned . CHAP. CXIV . To make a very fair Carbuncle . THE Carbuncle is a very Precious Stone , whereof several Authors have written , but I don't know one that says he has seen it . They attribute to this Stone the Property of giving Light in the Dark , like a burning Coal , or a kindled Lamp. Ludovicus Verromannus reports that the King of Pegu , carried one about him of such a bigness , and so much Splendor , that those who saw that Prince when it was Dark , saw him shining as if encircled with the Sun ; but this Author , as well as the rest , says he never saw one . Pliny pretends there are several sorts of Carbuncles , some Male ones more hard and brighter , and other Females more languid . But this Author is so confused , and so little assured of it , that we cannot take his Testimony as Authentick . Yet among all those Species which he describes , those seem to approach nearest Carbuncles , which he calls Lithizontes and Sandastri . The first discovers strongly its splendour at the Fire or Sun ; being in the Shade it appears of a Purplish Colour ; being exposed in the open and clear Day , it sparkles as it were at the Sun-beams , and hides as it were bright Stars within it . The second is curious by reason of Golden Sparkles appearing and glittering within like Stars , which are always seen across it within side , but never near the Surface , imitating the Hyades by their number and Disposition and Order . This Author says lastly , that the Chaldaeans held this last Stone in great Veneration , and used it in all their Ceremonies . As for me I am apt to think that the Carbuncle , is that Stone the Ancients have related to give Light by Night like a flaming Fire , and by Day like a twinkling Star , which is now no more to be found as we have hinted in the first Chapter , and that their Carbuncle is the Stone only known to the Adepti , the Matter whereof is so pure and Spiritual , that Evil Spirits dare not look on it , much less come near it . Whether the Carbuncle be a precious Stone found in the Bowels of the Earth or not , we can imitate the Properties these Authors give it by help of our Art. And we will shew you two Ways of doing it in this Chapter . For the first take ten Ounces of Matter prepared with Saturnus Glorificatus , and Natural Crystal , reduced to impalpable Powder , as we have shewn in the preceding Chapter , whereunto add half an Ounce of Crocus Martis , in fine Powder prepared as in Cha● . 27. After having well mixed these Powders together , put them into a good Crucible , which cover and lute well , then put it into a Glass-house Fire for three Days , by putting it nearer and nearer the strength of the Fire by degrees . Then take out your Crucible , and put the Matter into a Marble Mortar , then pound and grind it very small , with its weight of Sa● Gemmae , and put it into another Crucible , which cover and lute as before . Being dry , put it into the same Glass-house Furnace , approaching it to the Fire little by little , and letting it stand twenty Hours in good Fusion . Then take it out , and put it again into the Furnace to bake again , as you do Glass , where leave it twelve Hours , that it may cool gently . Your Crucible being cold , take it out of the Furnace to bake again , then break it , and you 'll find in it the Matter tinged of a very fine Carbuncle Colour , which you may cut of what Form and Greatness you please , and then cut and polish them at the Wheel , and they will be perfect . There is a certain Slight , which I shall not mention here , which several Artists may know , whereby these Carbuncles may be made to undergo all Trials . It is a Point which will deserve the Study of all those who are ignorant of it ; to discover it to every one , would be a Profanation of the Secrets of Art , and would make the Ignorant as knowing in one Moment , as those who have employed all their Lives in Searches after the profoundest Knowledge . CHAP. CXV . Another Carbuncle more noble and fairer , called , Carbunculus nocte illuminans . THERE is a second way of making a Carbuncle , called , Carbunculus nocte illuminans , which is far more resplendent and fairer than the former . Those who have written that it shone in the Night , and made the Possessors of it always very lucky , only spoke by way of allusion to the Philosophers Stone , to which alone that vertue can be attributed ; that is , the Stone and Carbuncle which is not to be found , that is , except in the Hands of the Adepti , who alone can make and possess it . We may here boldly say , That the Carbunculus nocte illuminans , is not a Stone any where formed by Nature , but made by Art ; for Nature cannot purifie the Matters she furnishes us with , and this Stone cannot be made of them , except when they are purified in the utmost perfection , which Art alone can do . Thus this Master-piece of Work , this Carbuncle , this Phoenix , or this Stone so famous among the Philosophers , is far more precious than any Nature can form , since by means of it , you may in two Hours time make simple Crystals as valuable as any Stones Nature spends so many Ages in bringing to perfection . If there are any Carbuncles in the World , or Precious Stones that have their Beauty , we are perswaded that they must be the products of Art rather than Nature , and that they are only made by that pure and incomparable Matter of the Philosophers , exalted in colour and virtue to the highest degree : We are perswaded by all the Authors we have read , that there is no such Natural Stone ; so that there is only the precious Elixir of the Adepti , whereof a Stone of the Qualities given to the Carbuncle can be formed , which far surpasses in Beauty , Rubies , Granats , Jacynths , &c. But now we come to the way of imitating this second Carbuncle , or rather the Beauty which Authors attribute to it , not with the Elixir of the Adepti , whereof we know nothing but the vertues , but with the ordinary Matters known to all the Students in this Art. Take ten Ounces of Matter prepared with Natural Crystal , and Saturnus Glorificatus , and reduced to an impalpable Powder ; add to it an Ounce of Gold calcined , as we shall shew hereafter ; then mix the whole well together , and put it in a good Crucible , which must not be above half full , cover it and lute it well , let it dry , then put it into a Glass-house Furnace for three Days , by bringing it little by little nearer to the strongest Fire , as we have said before After three Days take out your Crucible , and put the Matter into a Marble Mortar , which pound to an impalpable Powder , to which add its weight of Sal Gem also in fine Powder , which mix well together , and searce through a fine Sieve , the better to incorporate . Put this Powder into a new Crucible , which also fill but half way , which cover , lute , and dry as before : Then put it in the same Glass-house Furnace , bringing it nearer little by little , where let it stand ten Hours . After which take your Crucible out of the Furnace , and put it into that where they set their Glasses to anneal , whence take it out ten or twelve Hours after , and having broken it , you 'll find the Matter tinged of a Carbuncle-colour , the most lively and resplendent that can be made by this Art , whereof you may make what Stones or Works you please . We have promised the Calcination of Gold , which may be performed several ways , but as fine Works cannot be made without the most pure Matters , we will pretermit the more common ones , to shew you the following , which is very fine and proper for this Art. Dissolve an Ounce of Gold in three Ounces of Aqua Regalis ; then add to it four Ounces of common Mercury purified , and pass'd through Wash-Leather , which will precipitate your Gold to the bottom of the Matras joyning it self to it . Then your Aqua Regalis will grow clear , which when it is , and seems to have no more Gold in it , decant it off , then wash your Matter with warm Water to dulcifie it , and take off all the Saltness . Add to this Matter , being dry'd , its weight of Flour of Brimstone , then pound the whole well together , put them in a Crucible , to which fit another on the top , which must be bored on the bottom , with a hole big enough to put a Quill through , which lute well together , and dry them . Then put them in a round Fire , which you must give them by degrees for four Hours , the Crucible being the last Hour wholly covered over with Coals , which let kindle and cool again . Then open the Crucible , and you 'll find your Gold calcined , which amalgamate with four Ounces of fresh Mercury ; to which add five Ounces more of Flour of Brimstone , pounding them well together as before , then put the whole in your Crucibles , which lute and give them the same round Fire as before , which reiterate a third time , the better to calcine and open your Gold ; then put it into a glazed Earthen Pan , pretty deep , and pour on it good Spirit of Wine that may swim two Inches above , then put Fire to it , and when it is burnt , you 'll have a very fine Gold , in an impalpable Calx , well opened , which edulcorate with warm Water distill'd , and dry it gently . There is yet another way to calcine Gold more perfectly , by means of which you may make a good Ceruss , and afterwards a perfect Vitriol or Salt , whereof the Principles may be separated , and you may perform Wonders with them in Medicine and Metallick Chymistry ; but that Calcination would be too long to describe here , besides it is foreign to our Business , the Gold of that being too much opened . CHAP. CXVI . To make Oriental Rubies . THE true Ruby , which is a precious Stone , diaphanous and very radiant , ought to have the colour of Blood , and Scarlet , and clear Lacca , and shew about the edges of its Fire , a little Azure-colour . This Stone is found in the Isle of Ceilen , and in the River of Pegu , in a Rocky Matter of a Rosiecolour , which is the Matrix wherein it is generated and nourished ; and if that Rocky Matter be transparent , it yields the Balass Ruby , whereof we will treat in the following Chapter . Sometimes there are found such fine and large Rubies , that some have mistook them for Carbuncles . If any Ruby ever merited that Name , it was that of Queen Elizabeth of Austria , Dowager of Charles IX , which after her Death she left to the Emperor Rodolphus II , her Brother . It had been purchased long before for sixty thousand Ducats , which was then a very considerable Sum. Queen Mary de Medicis had also one of an inestimable Value , and Bigness , but I cannot learn what the Purchase was , or what became of it . To imitate this fine Colour , take four Ounces of our Matter prepared with Natural Crystal , and Saturnus Glorificatus , two Ounces of Crocus Martis prepared as in Chap. 25 , one Ounce of Verdigrease , two Ounces of Mercury calcin'd ad rubedinem , and two Ounces of Sal-Gem , the whole reduced to fine Powder , well mixed together , put into a Crucible covered and luted and set in a Glass-house Furnace for three Days , then take it out and put it in the Furnace where Glasses are set to Anneal , there to cool by degrees for twelve Hours . Then break your Crucible , and you 'll find your Matter tinged of a fine Ruby-colour , which you may divide , cut , and polish , as we have said before . We could shew a way of imitating Rubies with only Orpiment , which are very fine , but so brittle , that we thought it better to say nothing of it , rather than give occasion for an Expence that would turn to no Profit . CHAP. CXVII . To make Balass Ruby . THIS Precious Stone is of the Nature of a Ruby , since it is found in the same Matter as that . It s very bright colour resembles a Vermillion Rose and Crimson , being mixt of a Natural Red and of a Sky-colour : We will now shew the way to imitate it . Take six Ounces of Saturnus Glorificatus , mixed with Natural Crystal , as in Chap. 113 , half an Ounce of Crocus Martis , half an Ounce of Mercury calcin'd ad Rubedinem , and two Drams of Sal Gem , the whole reduc'd to an impalpable Powder , and mixed well together . Then put it in a Crucible covered close and luted , and so into a Glass-house Furnace for three Days , proceeding moreover as in the preceding Chapter , and you 'll have a very fine Matter , the colour of Balass Ruby . CHAP. CXVIII . To make Oriental Sapphire . WE will not repeat here the Nature or Colour of the Sapphire , having done it before : But we will add , that from the true Sapphire , may be extracted the three Principles , which are of infinite vertue in Medicine , whether united , or separate . To imitate this Precious Stone , with our Matter prepared with Saturnus Glorificatus , and Natural Crystal , take ten Ounces , add two Drams of the Calx of Gold , mix these Powders well together , put them in a Crucible covered with another , let them dry , then put them in a Glass-house Furnace for three Days . Moreover do all we have ordered in Chap. 116 , and that Mass will be of a very fair Oriental Sapphirecolour , which cut and polish at the Wheel . CHAP. CXIX . The Way to make an Oriental Emerald . THE Chapters wherein we have shewn how to imitate this Precious Stone , contain also its Nature and Colours ; and all we design to say here , our Intent being not to enlarge on all the Properties of Precious Stones , but only to shew the Means of imitating them , as we shall go on to do . To make this Oriental Emerald , take ten Ounces of our Matter prepared , of Saturnus Glorificatus , and Natural Crystal , half an Ounce of prepared Verdigrease , half a Dram of Foretto of Spain also prepared , as in Chap. 20 , the whole reduced into fine Powder , and well mixed together , and put it into a Crucible covered with another , lute it and dry it ; then set it in a Glass-house Furnace for three Days , and after in the Annealing Furnace twelve Hours . After which break the Crucible , and you 'll find the Matter tinged of a very fine Oriental Colour , which cut and polish as before . CHAP. CXX . The Way to make Turcois . WE have shewn the way to give a Turcois-colour to Glass , in Chap. 50 , but we have not yet spoken of its Colour or Nature , which obliges us to do it in this Chapter . The Name of Turcois , which this Precious Stone bears , comes from the place where it is found , viz. in Turky , altho' this Stone also comes from Persia and the East-Indies , where it is found in abundance , the Colour whereof approaches nearer to Blue than Green , which also distinguishes them from those that come out of the West , which are more Green and Whitish . They call the first by the Name of the Stone of the Old Rock , and the other by that of the New. The Turcois is the finest and noblest of all Opaque Precious Stones : Its colour is composed of Green , White and Blue , and imitates that of Verdigrease . They attribute great Properties to this Stone , such as bringing good or evil Luck to People , and to denote things to come to them , either by their breaking or changing Colour , which we omit discoursing of , to shew the manner of imitating them . Take ten Ounces of our Matter prepared , of Natural Crystal , and Saturnus Glorificatus ; half an Ounce of purified Verdigrease , and one Ounce of prepared Zaffer , the whole in fine Powder ; which mix well together in a Crucible covered with another , well luted and dried , which afterwards put into a Glass-house Furnace , where leave it for three Hours , then twelve Hours in the Annealing Furnace , that it may cool gently . Then take out your Crucible and break it , and take out the Matter , and cut and polish it , and you 'll have Turcois colour'd Stones , like those of the Old Rock . CHAP. CXXI . To make Oriental Topaz . IT will be needless here to repeat the Quality of the Topaz , since we have done it already in this Book : So we shall content our selves to shew the manner of imitating it , with our Paste composed of Natural Crystal , and Saturnus Glorificatus , whereof take ten Ounces , of very good Orpiment one Ounce reduced to fine Powder . After having mixed them well together , put them into a Crucible covered with another , which lute and dry well , then put it into a Glass-house Furnace for three Hours , and then let it cool gently , in the Annealing Furnace . Having taken your Matter out of the Crucible , you may cut and polish it as you please , and you 'll have a very fine Oriental Topaz . CHAP. CXXII . The Way to make Chrysolite . WE have also describ'd the Nature and Properties of the Chrysolite in this Book , as well as of the Topaz and other Gems , wherefore we will only shew the way here to imitate its Colour . Take ten Ounces of our Powder of Natural Crystal , and Saturnus Glorificatus , to which add one Ounce of Crocus Martis prepared , the whole reduced to fine Powder , well mixed , and put into a Crucible covered and luted , as we have said : Observing moreover what we have remarked for the Baking , and you 'll have a fine Chrysolite-colour , which will be of the Native Green. CHAP. CXXIII . Another Way of making all sorts of Precious Stones much harder , to turn Iargons of Avernia into Diamonds , to make Diamonds of Alanson , and harden them , to make white and fine Sapphires as hard as true Diamonds , &c. HERE we give another way of making Precious Stones , different from those we have given before , which will be much harder , and consequently approach nearer the Nature of fine ones , because we employ no Saturn therein , which always makes Stones softer and heavier , what Preparation soever you use of it . We shall only make use of Natural Crystal , and some Materials added to it , to give it the Colours of all sorts of Precious Stones . We also use in the Composition of the Materials of these Gems , fine and pure Salt of Tartar prepared , as in Chap. 93 , which ought to open our Crystal , and make it the better imbibe the Colour of the Tinctures which we give it , which will make the Stones appear more fine and shining . To prepare our Crystal , you must first calcine it , as we have shewn in Chap. 92 ; that is , by heating it red hot in a Crucible , and quenching it often in cold Water , changing the Water each time . But instead of grinding it to an impalpable Powder upon a Marble , as we have shewn in the same Chapter , you must pound it in a Brass Mortar with a Pestle of the same , and not use Iron no more than Marble , then searce the Crystal through a fine Sieve ; and this is the Basis of all our following Gems : We should have desired to have put down all our Preparations in one Chapter , since there are only the Doses and the Colours to be changed , the more to abridge this Work ; but the fear such a Mixture should breed confusion , obliges us to continue our Work as we have begun it , which is to make a Chapter of each sort of Stone , and of the difference of their Colours . After that , we will give the true manner of turning Jargons of Avernia into Diamonds , to make Diamonds of Alanson , to harden them , and make them exceeding Sparkling ; to give hardness to white and fine Sapphires ; so that it will be difficult to distinguish them from true Diamonds . Finally we may chance to add something further , for the sake of the Curious . CHAP. CXXIV . The Way to make a fair Emerald . WE will abridge as much as possible all the Processes of these Chapters , that we may not trouble the Reader with dull Repetitions . The change of Materials for this Work making great differences in it , we could not explain in one Chapter , all the different Ways of making one and the same Stone , because such a Mixture would occasion confusion . To make a fine Emerald of our Crystal : Take two Ounces of it , and add to it forty eight Grains of Crocus Martis , and two Ounces and forty eight Grains of pure Salt of Tartar , prepared as in Chap. 93 , the whole reduced into fine Powder in a Brass Mortar , which put into a Crucible covered with another , and luted well together ; then put it into the Glass-house Fire , there to bake twenty four Hours , and then in the Annealing Furnace for twelve Hours , that the Matter may cool little by little , which then take out of the Crucible , cut and polish , and you 'll have a perfect Emerald . CHAP. CXXV . The Way to make a Violet - Sapphire . WE shall shew several ways of making Sapphires of our Crystal of different Colours . To make this , take one Ounce of our Powder of Crystal , one Dram of Salt of Vitriol , and nine Drams of fine Salt of Tartar , the whole in fine Powder . Then proceed further as we have shewn in the preceding Chapter ; and you 'll have a Sapphire of a very fine Violet-colour . CHAP. CXXVI . Another Violet - Sapphire of a deeper Colour . THIS Sapphire will be very fine , but of a very deep Colour , and if any Person desire it to be lighter , he may easily make it so , by diminishing one fourth part of the tinging Ingredients which we add to Crystal . Take to make this , two Ounces of our Powder of Crystal , two Ounces , five Drams , and twenty four Grains of Verdigrease , thirty two Grains of Azure , and two Drams of Sublimate , the whole in very fine Powder . As to the baking of it observe what we have said in Chap. 124. CHAP. CXXVII . Another very fine Blue - Sapphire . THE Blue Colour of Sapphire , is no less agreeable than the Violet , and it is the Male of its Kind . To make it , take one Ounce of our Crystal in Powder , add to it a Dram of Salt of Vitriol , three Grains of Verdigrease , one Grain of Azure , and one Ounce , one Dram , four Grains of our fine Salt of Tartar , the whole in fine Powder ; put it into a Crucible covered and luted , to be baked and purified , as we have heretofore shewn , and you 'll have a very fine Blue - Sapphire , &c. CHAP. CXXVIII . Another fine Sapphire . THE Colours of these Sapphires being different , by the Dose and mixture of the Ingredients , we will shew each in a Chapter by it self . Take two Ounces of our Powder of Crystal , two Ounces of our fine Salt of Tartar , five Drams , twenty four Grains of Verdigrease , and thirty two Grains of Arure , the whole reduced to impalpable Powder , which you must set to bake and purifie in a covered Crucible in a Glass-house Furnace , aswe have said before , and you 'll have a very fine Sapphire . CHAP. CXXIX . Another Admirable Blue . TO arrive to this fine Colour , take one Ounce of our Powder of Crystal , one Dram , fifty six Grains of our fine Salt of Tartar , the whole reduced to a fine Powder , put it into a Crucible covered and luted , which bake and purifie twenty four Hours in a Glass-house Furnace , then set it to cool gently twelve Hours in the Annealing Furnace . Then you 'll have an admirable Blue , which you may cut and polish , &c. CHAP. CXXX . The Way to make Beryl , or Egmarine . THIS Beryl-colour will be very fine Sky-colour , if you take one Ounce of our Powder of Crystal , one Ounce of our fine Salt of Tartar , and six Ounces of Salt of Vitriol , the whole reduced to fine Powder in a Brass Mortar , and searced through a fine Sieve ; farther proceeding as in Chap. 124. CHAP. CXXXI . Another deeper Egmarine . THIS deeper Colour we give Beryl , is no less fine than the first . Take nine Drams , forty eight Grains of our Powder of Crystal , three Drams , twenty four Grains of Verdigrease , and one Ounce , five Drams , twenty four Grains of our fine Salt of Tartar , the whole reduced into fine Powder in a Brass Mortar , and then baked , as we have shewn in the preceding Chapter . CHAP. CXXXII . To make a fair Jacynth . IT is scarce possible to make Iacynth , without Lead in its composition , wherefore you must put upon an Ounce of our Powder of Crystal , two Ounces and an half of Minium , with twenty four Grains of Verdigrease , two Drams of Sublimate , and five or six Leaves of Silver ; the whole reduc'd to fine Powder in a Brass Mortar , and searced through a fine Sieve , mix them well together , and put them in a Crucible covered with another , and well luted , then bake and purifie it in a Glass-house Furnace for twelve Hours . Then take it off the Fire , then pound it again in a Brass Mortar to a fine Powder , sifting it through a fine Sieve . Then put it in a new Crucible , which cover and lute well , which set again in the Glass-house Furnace for twenty four Hours , and twelve more in the Annealing Furnace . The Crucible being cold , take out the Matter which will be of a fine Iacynth-colour , which cut and polish . CHAP. CXXXIII . Another fairer Jacynth-Colour . IF this Iacynth be fairer , it is also more brittle than the other , because it has more Lead in it . To make it , take an Ounce of our Crystal in Powder , three Ounces of Minium , and forty five to forty six Grains of Verdigrease . Mix well these Matters together , after having pounded them well in a Brass Mortar , and searced them through a fine Sieve . Then put them into a Crucible covered and luted in a Glass-house Furnace , where let it stand twelve Hours . Then take out the Matter , which pound and sift well ; then put that Powder into another Crucible covered and luted , which put into the same Glass-house Furnace for twenty four Hours , and the Matter will be well baked . Then take out the Crucible , to put it in the Annealing Furnace ; and twelve Hours afterwards take your Matter out of the Crucible , which will be of a fine Iacynth-colour , and may be Wrought . CHAP. CXXXIV . Another Oriental Iacynth-Colour . THIS Colour will be of a very fine reddish Yellow , such as is the true Oriental Iacynth : To make it , take one Ounce of our Crystal in Powder , three Ounces of Minium , one Ounce of Arsnick prepared as for the Topaz , and one Ounce of Vitriol calcined ad rubedinem . The whole reduced to a fine Powder in a Brass Mortar , proceeding moreover as in the preceding Chapter . CHAP. CXXXV . The Way of making a true and very fine PeridorColour . THE Peridor , whereof we have as yet made no mention , is a sort of a clear Topaz , of a Gold-colour Light , but which is notwithstanding beautiful . To imitate it well , take two Ounces of our Natural Crystal in Powder , six Ounces of Minium , an Ounce of our fine Salt of Tartar , and eight Grains of Verdigrease ; the whole reduced to impalpable Powder , pounded in a Mortar , and searced through a fine Sieve . You must observe the same Circumstances for baking this Stone , as for the Iacynth , by reason of the Minium that enters into the one and the other , and you 'll have a very fine Peridor . CHAP. CXXXVI . Another Colour of Peridor . THIS Peridor ought to be harder and more fixed than the precedent , because there is no Minium in it , but it will not be so Vivacious . Take one Ounce of our Natural Crystal in Powder , a Dram of Salt of Vitriol , two Drams of Vitriol calcined ad rubedinem , four Grains of Verdigrease , and of our fine Salt of Tartar , as much as equals the whole in weight , i. e. one Ounce , three Drams , and four Grains . All these Matters being reduc'd into fine Powder in a Brass Mortar , mix them well together , then put them into a Crucible covered with another , and well luted , twelve Hours after take your Crucible and break it to take out the Matter , which cut and polish at the Wheel , then let it be Wrought by a good Workman . We will not speak here of other sorts of Gems , which may be imitated by this same way , adding the Doses of their Tinctures . CHAP. CXXXVII . Of Iargons of Avernia , and the Way to make those Red which are of a Gridelin-Colour . WE have promised to treat of the Jargons of Auvergne , which are little Stones commonly found in that Country , and several other places of France : They are red and shining like Iacynth ; which has gain'd them the Name of false Iacynths , because they much imitate that Precious Stone . There are found , notwithstanding , many of these small Stones , which are not of a red Colour , but of a kind of Gridelin . You may give these last a Red Tincture , with as much ease as you can take it away from the former to convert them into Diamonds , as we will shew in the following Chapter . To give a Red Colour to Jargons that are of a Gridelin , you must take equal parts of purified Sal-Armoniac , and of Tartar calcined to Whiteness , as we have otherwise shewn : Mix these Matters well in fine Powder , then stratifie your Jargons in a Crucible S. S. S. beginning and ending with the Powders . Then put the Crucible in a good Coal-Fire , but not hot enough for the Stones to melt , but only to grow red hot , that they may be the better penetrated by the Tincture the Materials will give it , then let it cool , and by this Method they 'll take as fine and shining a Red Tincture , as the true and finest Natural Jargons of this colour have . CHAP. CXXXVIII . The Way of Extracting a Tincture of Iargons d'Auvergne , and to make very fair and hard Diamonds thereof . THOSE Stones may be made white and hard like the true Diamonds , by taking away their Tincture , which is no contemptible Secret. There have been made Rose-Diamonds of them so fine and curious , that the best Goldsmiths have been mistaken in them , and thought them true Diamonds . You must boil your Jargons in a Balneum of Mutton-Suet , wherein they will lose all their Red Colour and become White . Then take equal parts of Emery of Spain , Rock-Crystal , Pumice-Stone , and Sulphurous Trepoly , the whole reduced into fine Powder , and searced through a fine Sieve , make a Paste of it with Aqua Vitae , wherewith cement your Jargons in a great Crucible S. S. S. then cover it with another , and lute them well , then set it in a Furnace over a gentle Fire for half an Hour , then augment your Fire till it be hot enough for Fusion , wherein leave the whole for fourteen Hours , then let the Fire go out , and the Crucible cool of its self ; wherein , after you have broke it , you 'll find your Stones of a very fine Diamond Colour , hard , shining , and sparkling like the true ones , which you may polish and work up as the Goldsmiths . This Sulphurous Trepoly , which enters into the Composition of this Paste , being not commonly known , we will shew the way of making it , that we may leave nothing imperfect , which might be any Obstruction to the Proceedings of the Curious . Take equal parts of Trepoly , of crude Antimony and common Sulphur , and grind them to a fine Powder on a Porphyry Stone , and make them into a Paste with Vinegar , which being dry will easily crumble . This is the Sulphurous Trepoly which we make use of . Some Persons in making the same Process of taking away the colour from Jargons , and giving them the hardness and whiteness of Diamonds , have made use of Barly-meol , wherewith they make a Paste with distill'd Vinegar impregnated with Lead , wherewith they stratifie their Stones , or Jargons , in a Crucible , covered with another , and well luted , which they afterwards put in a gradual , round , or Wheel Fire , for six Hours . But this way they could not give them the true Diamond-colour . Wherefore I advise those who would try this Experiment , to follow our first Process , which has several times succeeded . There are moreover some who stratifie their Stones with pounded Coal , which they put in a Crucible covered and luted , which they set on the Fire six Hours , so that the Crucible be always red hot . I don't approve of this way , because the Coals may dry the Humour of the Stone , and calcine it . CHAP. CXXXIX . The Way to make Diamonds . THE Quality and Colour of the Diamond being so well known , we shall not enlarge upon them in this Chapter , but only shew the way to counterfeit them , make them endure the Fire , and harden them . Take of good Natural Crystal , calcined and reduced to subtile Powder , what Quantity you please ; fill a Pot with it , and set it in a Glass-house Furnace twelve Hours to be melted and purified : Then drop the melted Matter into cold Water , then dry it , and reduce it again to Powder ; add to that Powder its weight of our fine Salt of Tartar , of Chap. 93. Mix these two Powders well , and make little Pills of them with common Water . Then wipe these Pills , and put them into an Earthen Pot on a strong Fire , there to grow red hot for twelve Hours space without melting . Then put them into a Pot in a Glass-house Furnace , where leave them two Days , to be well melted and purified , then put the Matter twelve Hours in the Annealing Furnace to cool little by little . Then break the Crucible , and you 'll have a fine Material for Diamonds , which cut and polish at the Wheel . CHAP. CXL . Another Way of making the Diamond of Alanson . HERE follows a way of making Diamonds of Alanson , which is not quite so fine as the precedent , but has , notwithstanding , several Advantages which attend it ; besides it is more easie , since there only needs an ordinary Fire to succeed in it . Take an Earthen glazed Pot , set it on a little Furnace , put in it Filings of Steel , with some Vine-Ashes at discretion , wherein place by one another Crystals cut and polished ; then pour common Water gently on it , which warm and boil during the space of twelve Hours , taking care to add boiling Water fresh into the Vessel , as the Water in it consumes by boiling , and take care it boil continually . Then see if your Crystals have acquired the colour and hardness you expected : If not , continue the Fire some Hours longer , and they will be like the true Diamonds of Alanson ; taking care to repolish them again at the Wheel , to give them colour and brightness . CHAP. CXLI . The Way to give the true Colour and Hardness of a Diamond , to Crystals and Diamonds of Alanson . THERE is nothing in Nature which Art cannot imitate , and oftentimes those things which seem most difficult , prove to be most easie when managed with Judgment ; or when he that undertakes to do them has experimented any thing of the like Nature before , and knows the Nature , and Properties , and Powers of his Subject . Although the Imperfect Metals be immature , or unripe , they contain , notwithstanding , a great deal of fixed and volatile Gold , which may be easily separated , or attracted out by means of Art. Imperfect Metals may be very much meliorated by Fire , by a proportionable and agreeable coction . There are also Crystals and Precious Stones , which have no Natural hardness , which may be given them by Art , having all the Natural Dispositions thereunto required , since they have the same Principle as the most fine , and that they only want a little Sulphur , which hinder'd their thorough coction . Thus this Defect may be obviated in Precious Stones , as well as Metals , by giving them a due coction , and so changing them for the better . We will begin to give the most simple way of attaining it , before we shew those that are more exalted . You may give the colour and hardness of Diamonds to Crystals and Diamonds of Alanson , by taking good Dutch Trepoly and making a Paste of it with Water out of the Smiths Forge , wherein you must wrap up the quantity you design of Crystals , or Diamonds of Alanson cut and polished ; then set it in a Crucible covered and luted on a gradual Fire , where let it stand till the Crucible become red hot . A little time after take it out , and take out the Stones , then polish them again at the Wheel to give them their colour . To set them in Works , take Indian Paper , with Leaves of Tin , like those you put behind Looking-glasses , then let them be set by some good Goldsmith , and they can scarce be distinguished from fine one● , except by very nice Discerners . CHAP. CXLII . Another Way to harden Crystals and Diamonds of Alanson . CRYSTALS also acquire hardness in the Paste we are now going to describe , because their Humidity exhales , and they become more fixt . Take Barly-Meal well sifted , with Petroleum , or Rock-Oyl ; then cut that Paste in the middle , and put all your Stones in order , so that they may not touch one another . Then cover your Stones with the other half of the Paste , then put it in a Crucible covered with another , and luted well together , and let it dry . Then set this Crucible in a gradual Wheel-Fire from five to six Hours , a small Fire the two first Hours , which en●rease from two to two Hours , till the end of the six ; then let the whole cool of it self . Then break your Crucibles , and you 'll find your Stones very fine , shining , and sparkling like fine Diamonds , which repolish at the Wheel , and set by a skilful Workman . CHAP. CXLIII . A Way to harden Crystals and Diamonds of Alanson , and to make them sparkle as much as Natural Oriental Diamonds . ALTHOUGH this be an important Secret , and ill People may commit Cheats by it , yet I will here give it , for the sake of the Curious , who only seek for their own Satisfaction . Take one Pound of Load-stone , a Pound of Quick-Lime , and half a Pound of common Sulphur , the whole reduced to powder , and well mixed . With this powder cement your Crystals and Diamonds of Alanson well cut , in a Crucible covered and luted well : Being dry , set it in a Glass-house Furnace three Days , in a place where the Matters may be continually red hot without Fusion , if you have not a Furnace ready at hand for that purpose ; and take care not to take out the Crucible all at once , but let it cool gently , otherwise the Stones might break . Having broken the Crucible , you 'll find your Stones very fine , and shining , and which will resemble Diamonds of the Old Rock , which repolish at the Wheel to give it colour , then work it ; and they can scarce be distinguished from fine ones . CHAP. CXLIV . The Way to turn White Sapphire into true Diamond . THE White Sapphire being fine and fixed , is only imperfect , by reason of its wanting colour and hardness , which may be remedied by means of Art , and be made to surpass Nature , because she on●y would have made it a perfect Sapphire , but Art can ●urn it into a true Diamond . Only Fire can cause this Effect , in changing its Natural colour , and giving it that of a Diamond . Thus take very fine Sand , wash it in several Waters ●o clean it , till the Water become clear , and then dry it . Of this Sand fill a Crucible half full , then ●ut in your Sapphire , and fill it up with the same Sand. Then cover your Crucible with a cover of the same Earth , or with another Crucible ; lute the whole with a good lute , as we have heretofore shewn , lay it on an Inch thick , and let it dry in the shade . Being dry , set it in a Glass-house Furnace , approaching it nearer the Fire by degrees , and leaving it twelve Hours in the same degree of heat . Then withdraw it little by little for the space of six Hours , and let it cool gently . The Crucible being cold , break it , and you 'll find your Sapphire within , which will have all the Qualities of a fine Diamond ; that is , its shining and hardness . Repolish it at the Wheel , and work it . CHAP. CXLV . Another Way of turning the White Sapphire into a true Diamond . HERE follows another noble Method of converting the Sapphire into a Diamond , which will be easier to those who have not the opportunity of a Glass-house Furnace , for it may be done with a Wind Furnace , in twelve Hours time . The Materials we are going to shew , which are used in this Operation , will at first seem very expensive ; but if you consider it diminishes not , but you find it all again , you 'll easily see , that the only Expence is in the Fire . You must therefore begin , by well wrapping your White Sapphire , in a thin Iron Plate , that it may be easily managed . Then take fine Gold , purified by Antimony , to the highest , put it in a Crucible in a Wind-Furnace , melt it , and when it has a good fine Gloss , put the Sapphire , covered with the Iron-Plate , into the Bath , so that it may float on the Gold on every side ; then give it a strong Fire for twelve Hours , so that the Gold may be all the while in Fusion . Take out your Sapphire with a little pair of Tongues , shaking out the Gold that may chance to stick in the Leaf-Iron ; then let it cool by the Fire gently , for fear it should break . Being cold , take away the Plate or Leaf of Iron , and you 'll have your Sapphire of an admirable . Beauty , it having acquired by that coction all the Qualities and Perfections of the Natural Diamond . Polish it at the Wheel , and Work it . CHAP. CXLVI . Another way to turn the White Sapphire into a true Diamond . THIS Way will be found , by several , to be more easie and better , because it does not oblige to such an Expence in Gold , so that People cannot purchase it . This is the Reason we shew it here , tho' others have spoke of it , and among the rest Ioh. Bapt. de Porta , who has writ of this Art. Take Filings of Iron or Steel , put them in a Crucible , then put in your White Sapphire , so that it may be wholly covered with the Filings : Set the Crucible in the Furnace , and give it a good Fire , that the Filings may be red hot without melting . After it has been some time in this Fire , take it out with a little pair of Iron-Tongues , to see if it be of the colour of Diamond ; if not , put it into the Filings again , and reiterate this till it be perfect . You may do the same thing with that filing of Steel , and an equal part of White Enamel in Powder . Having well mixed them together , put them in a Crucible , and put your Sapphire in the middle of them ; after having first pasted them , with your Powder of Enamel wetted with Spittle , and well dried it at the Fire . When your Matter is red , and it has remained some time in that condition , take out the Sapphire with your Tongs , to see if it have taken the colour of the Diamond : If it has not , put it in again as before , and continue to do this till it be perfect . Then polish it and work it . This is all we design'd to say concerning the Make and Perfections of Gems , tho' there are other ways of doing them , and several other curious things might be said on this Subject ; but that would require a large Volume , which perhaps we may do in the next Edition , if we find the Curious take any Satisfaction in this . The End of the Fifth BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK VI. CHAP. CXLVII . Wherein proper Rules and Matter for all sorts of Enamel are prescribed , with Directions for qualifying the Fire , in order to succeed well . How to make Goldsmiths Enamel of several Colours for Gold. A neat Preparation of the Magnese . A Spirit of Saturn , a fixt Sulphur , and a mild Vitriol of Venus , of most sovereign Vertue and Vse . THIS most agreeable way of enriching Gold by Enamel , which proceeds from the beauful Variety of Colours which may be apply'd , being an Art no less painful than necessary for Ornament . We proceed to lay down such Methods in this Book , as shall equally answer the Benefits of the Publick , and satisfaction of the more Curious . For should we omit this our Intention , the Work would be deficient , and this Art of Glass deprived of one of its most excellent and principal Beauties ; therefore we propose in the first place , to give direction for the Choice of Matter to be used , and thence shew the Preparations for all sorts , and how to make and suit the Colours most convenient on Enamel . The Method not only used by the Goldsmiths , but by such as form Pourtraitures with it of all sorts , as Man , Beasts , Fowl , and other Curiosities , very naturally , by a just disposure of the Colours , is most admirable ; to effect which no more is required than a lighted Taper , and a hollow Pipe of Metal for that purpose , to blow the Blaze to the Matter , and make it malleable and soft , and thence the several Figures are drawn or impressed thereon . And this may be so far improv'd and heightned , as to admit of Performances rather to be thought the Essay of a Divine than Human Artist . Witness that notable Piece of Chariot drawn by two Oxen , of which Cardan takes notice in the fifty second Chapter of his tenth Book , which was so completely done in Little , that the whole might be covered with the Wing of a Fly. The Ship rigg'd and Man arm'd which Howel says he saw . Those little Statues of Men , with several other Curiosities of Figure Vormicus also assures of . Not to omit the Church of St. Mark at Venice , where the Mosaick-Work is plentifully interlaced with History of all Sorts , distinguishable by the Variety of Colours , and Gildings , and all consisting of several different Subjects . In short , what Account Agricola has left us of these Matters , in his twelfth Book , gives us no less cause to admire this Art than he had , when he saw such notable Pieces of which he makes mention , and which he assures us was deservedly very great . The use of Enamel is very ancient , however that of working on Metal is more modern ; and for the great Perfection to which it is arrived , we are obliged to this present Age , as we shall further shew in the Seventh Book , where we will also endeavour to discover further , and make greater Improvements therein . CHAP. CXLVIII . To prepare the Matter for Enamel . NOW we proceed to shew the Ingredients by which the principal Matter for Enamel is prepared , before the Colours can be applied , of which we shall give Directions in the following Chapters . Take Lead in Piggs thirty pound , Plate-Tin of Cornwall , thirty three pounds ; mix and calcine them as directed for Lead in Chap. LXXXI . precisely observing the Directions there laid down . This done , fearce the Calx , and put it all into a glazed Earthen Pot , fill'd with Water , put it over a fire , and let it boil a little ; then take it off , and pour the Water gently into another Vessel , which will carry along with it the more subtile Calx . Repeat this until no more of the Calx can be subtiliz'd ; which you may discover by the Pureness of the Water in pouring it out of one Vessel into the other . After this calcine the Remains of what is in the first Pot , as before , and thus continue to calcine and subtilizetill you can get no more of the subtile Calx . Lastly , put the Waters out of all your Receivers into larger , and set it on a slow Fire to evaporate . The Fire must be very gentle for this Reason , that the Calx do not founder or fall to the bottom , but continue more fine and subtile , than when it was first calcin'd . Your Calx being thus prepared , take thereof about fifty pound , and as much Fritt of white Tarso beaten and searced , as directed Chap. VI. To these add eight Ounces of Salt of Tartar , finely searced and prepared as in Chap. XV. Mix all these Powders very well together in a Pot , and let it stand in the Glass-house Furnace or Oven about ten hours to digest and purifie . Then take them out , and reducing them to an impalpable Powder , keep it in a close dry place for use . Thus must your Matter for Enamel be prepared to receive the Colours , but of that more hereafter . CHAP. CXLIX . To make Enamel of a Milk-white Colour . THIS Colour of all others is the purest ; 't is used for the Ornaments of Virginity , the Emblem of Innocence , as also the Symbol of Candour and Chastity . Nay more , we may even from it form a pretty and impressive Idea of the Brightness and Excellency of Faith ; and 't is what has ever been esteemed and revered by all Nations . We have already shew'd how to tinge Glass of this Colour , in Chap. LXX . of the Third Book , and now we will shew how to perform the like on Enamel with no less Beauty , and very easily ; thus : Take six pound of our prepared Powder , in the former Chapter , and forty eight Grains of Magnese of Piedmont , prepared as in Chap. XVIII . put them will together into one of your Furnace-Pots to melt and purifie over a very swift Fire , which will be done in a little time . The Matter being thus melted , take it out of the Pot , and throw it into very fair Water , and being afterwards dryed , put it again into the Pot to melt ; do thus with it thrice , changing the Water . When you have thus purified it , if you find it justly white , 't is good ; but if it be greenish , add a little more Magnese , and 't will become white as Milk , and fit Enamel for Gold , or other Metal . Take it off the Fire , and make it up into Cakes , and keep them for use . CHAP. CL. A Turcoise-blue Enamel . THIS Colour of the Turcois , or Turkey-stone , is very fine for Enamel , but withal very difficult to make well , and requires a great deal of Experience . Now 't is sufficiently known , that Practice will at length make the most uneasie Beginners Masters of their Trade , therefore we must not be discouraged if we fail in our first Tryals , because by continuing to repeat them , we shall at length be sure to perform well : 'T is always supposed you understand your Undertaking , and are sufficiently qualified to distinguish when you are in the right or wrong , or you can never hope to succeed . For this cause we ought not to stand dozing on every Unsuccess , for Nature , which never fails , will still be ready to inform us , provided we have Judgment enough to determine her Precepts . Though we have taken occasion from the Turcois , to make this Digression here , it may nevertheless be a convenient enough Consideration in Cases of a sublimer Nature , even in all the Undertakings of Man. Since we are so naturally apt to be impatient and disturbed if we can't effect those Matters in ( as it were ) a moment of Time , which Nature it self takes a whole Age to perform : And this is what mostly arrests the Accomplishments of our greatest Designs , and imposes on us a seeming Impossibility in the most easie things : Thus Obscurity interposes in the brightest Essays of the Sun , and we can't enjoy one day , though never so serene and fair , that is not more or less over-shadowed with Clouds . Thus far I have made my Attempt on this Thought , which I hope the Learned will freely pardon , because I have discoursed nothing but Truth , and what they already are much more familiar with , and satisfied of . But now for our Enamel , which to make of this Turcois 〈◊〉 you must put of our prepared Powder , Chap. CXL●●●● . six pound , into a white glazed Pot to melt and purifie it ; then cast it into Water , and when dry put it again into the Pot , and being melted over again , add to it at four times , this Composition , Scales of Copper thrice calcin'd , as in Chap. XXXIV . three Ounces of prepared Zaffer , eighty six Grains of 〈◊〉 , prepared as in Book I. forty eight Grains , all these mixt and reduced into a very fine Powder , stir the Matter very well each time with your Iron Hook , that the Powders may incorporate , and for Reasons by us given elsewhere before . Thus when your Matter is fully and well tinged , take the Approbation of a Goldsmith on some of it , as to the Colour , that you may have the more assurance before you proceed to empty your Pot. Your own Experience must shew you how to proportion the Ingredients for tinging the Matter more or less . If you perceive that the Tinging-powders are too predominant , add the more principal prepared Powder ; if it be too faint , add the greater quantity of the Tinging-powders : And thus do to improve or lessen the Colour until it be compleat or to Satisfaction . CHAP. CLI . To make a very fine blue Enamel . FEW Persons but are much taken with this Colour , as being the most sightly agreeable of all others , both from the esteem of its natural Beauty , which makes it eminent above the rest of Colours , as it has resemblance to that of the Heavenly Arch , and is taken for the Symbol of Generosity . You may make Enamel of this Colour with four pound of our principal prepared Powder in Chapter CXLVIII . two Ounces of prepared Zaffer , forty eight Grains of Copper thrice calcined , mentioned in the precedent Chapter ; these reduc'd to a mixt impalpable Powder , must be put into a white glazed Pot ; when the Metal is well melted , cast it into Water , and when 't is dry return it to the Pot ; after that let it stand upon the Fire until it be well digested and incorporate : Then take it off , and you have a very fine Enamel for Goldsmiths , which make into Cakes , and keep for use , as before . CHAP. CLII. Another blue Enamel . THis Enamel is altogether as gay as the former , only the Colour is not the same , for which reason we prescribe it here , which else would be unnecessary . To make it , take Principle Powder of Chap. 148. four pound , Plates of Copper calcined , as in Chap. 30. two Ounces , prepared Zaffer , as in Chap. 17. forty eight Grains , mix and reduce 'em to an impalpable Powder , put this into your white glazed Pot , and having melted the Metals until they incorporate , cast it into Water , whence being dry , return it to your Pot , and let it remain therein until it purifie ; when the Colour is well mixt and even so as to satisfie you , take it off , and Cake it as usual . CHAP. CLIII . To make a pretty Green Enamel . THE Gaiety of the Spring being conceived by this Colour , renders it exceeding pleasant to the Eye ; 't is an Idea of Nature revived , a Triumph over its Death , and the Symbole of its Victory . It may be very perfectly imitated if you put four Pound of the Principal Powder in your White glazed Pot , and let it melt and purifie ten or twelve Hours in the Furnace , afterwards cast it into Water , dry it and put it again into the Pot , and let it be fully refined ; then take Scales of Copper thrice calcined as in Chap. 34. two Ounces , Scales of Iron at the Smith's Forge on the Anvil-Block , forty eight Grains , mix and reduce them to an impalpable Powder , and throw it at three several times and Portions into your Pot of Principal Matter , stirring the Metal very well that it may be equally tinged by the mixture of the Colours ; if it be to your Fancy , and of a pleasant colour , let it stand a while in the Fire , until it be throughly incorporated ; thus take it off , and you 'll have a delicate Green Enamel very proper for all sort of Goldsmiths Work. CHAP. CLIV. Another Green Enamel . THE colour of this following , is something different from the former , but no less excellent : Take six Pound of Principal Powder , two Ounces of Feretto of Spain , prepared as in Chap. 23. forty eight Grains of Crocus Martis , prepared with Vinegar according to direction in Chap. 25. make these into an impalpable Powder , and mix 'em well , and put them into your White glazed Pot ; let it remain in the Furnace to melt and refine the Matter ; cast it after this into Water , and again into your Pot , having dryed it before , until it refine very well ; when 't is melted , observe whether the colour be satisfactory , and let it stand some hours longer to refine , and when 't is taken off , you 'll have a very fine Green Enamel for Goldsmiths . If the colour be too faint , add more tinging Powder proportionably enough to perfect it . CHAP. CLV . Another Green Enamel . THERE is another way to make Green Enamel after this manner : Put into a White glazed Earthen Pot , four Pounds of Principal Powder , and let it refine in the Furnace a little while , cast the Metal afterwards into Water , and ( being dryed ) again into the Pot ; then add at three equal Portions , this Powder compounded of Scales of Copper thrice calcined two Ounces , Crocus Martis prepared with Vinegar , forty eight Grains , these well mixt and powdered together , stirring the Metal with the Iron Hook , to incorporate it , let it remain until it be well refined on the Fire , and when 't is well and perfectly colour'd to satisfaction , take it off , and keep it for use . CHAP. CLVI . The Way to make ▪ Black Enamel . THO this Colour be mournful , and representing the Image of Death and Darkness , yet 't is the Symbole of Constancy , Prudence , and Resolution ; the Life of Silence and Secresie , and , in short , of all things which are lasting . 'T is most necessary in this Art , and can least of all be spared , because it has a peculiar Beauty which sets it off among the more splendid and sparkling Pieces ; you may make a very fair Velvet-colour with 4 Pound of the Principal Powder in Chap. 148. two Ounces of prepared Zaffer , and two Ounces of Manganese of Piedmont prepared as directed before ; mix and pulverize them altogether very well , and put them into a glazed Earthen Pot in the Furnace for some Hours ; the Pot must be more than ordinary large , because the Metal will rise very much : When 't is purified , cast it into Water and dry it , and return it into the pot to be refined over again , which will be in a little time ; then see whether the Colour be to your Fancy , and accordingly as you find it , put in more or less of the former Ingredients , and having thus perfected it , take it off and cake it ; this Enamel will be a good Velvet-black for Goldsmiths . CHAP. CLVII . Another Black Enamel . THIS second sort is distinct from the other by the difference of the Quantities and the tinging Ingredients . Take six pound of Principal Powder , two Ounces of Zaffer prepared according to Chap. 17. two Ounces of Crocus Martis , prepared with Vinegar as in Chap. 25. two Ounces of Feretto of Spain assigned in Chap. 23. pound and mix them very well together , making an impalpable powder , and put it into your glazed pot in the Furnace to melt and purifie , when ●t is well digested cast it into Water , dry it , and put ●t again into the pot , where let it remain a while to ●efine ; when 't is for your purpose take it off and cake ●t as usual , and you 'll have a very good and most con●enient Enamel for the Goldsmiths to set in Colours , ●nd Enamel with . CHAP. CLVIII . Another Black Enamel . HERE is a third Way of making the Velvet-black Enamel much fairer and of a finer gloss , sur●assing the former . To make which , you must take four pound of ●rincipal Powder , four Ounces of red Ta●tar , two Ounces of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , reduce these to very fine powder , and put them into a glazed pot bigger than ordinary , because the Metal will rise ; let it melt and digest in the Furnace , and cast it into Water , and ( after it is dry ) again into the pot , there to remain until it melt and refine anew ; when you find the Colour sufficient for your use , make it up into Cakes , and keep it for the Goldsmiths . CHAP. CLIX. To make Purple-coloured Enamel . PURPLE is a Colour highly in request with all Grave Philosophers , as if it did express the End of their Expectation , the Fulness of their Delight and Desire ; it was so mightily esteemed by the Ancients , that among the Romans the Emperors , the Princes , the Renowned Chiefs , and other Magistrates of that Puissant Empire only made use thereof : And the Lacedemonians , who looked upon themselves to be the most Ancient People on Earth , cloathed themselves with it , that they might be the more eminently distinguished , so great an Affection they bore to this Noble Colour : The Emperors of Greece had so much value and regard for Purple , that they sought out the choicest and most exquisite to have the young Princes of the Blood Born in , intimating by this a Glorious Omen of their Generosity , the Colour truly implying a perfect Symbole of Heroick Vertue , and by which their Illustrious Parentage , and Royal Descent from Kings and Princes , was most eminently shewn . The Art of Dying in this Rich and Noble Colour was formerly so very considerable among the Ancients , that such as practised it in the City of Tyre , were ex●mp●● ( as well as the Nobility or Members of the Government ) from all manner of Taxes and Contrib●●ions ; which Priviledges and Advantage have a very near resemblance to those which our Art of Glass have received ; and this costly Colour is equally estimable in both ; and besides , the Employment of this latter admits only of Gentlemen , by whom alone ●uch Priviledges are enjoyed without derogation from their Nobility , as we have shewn in Chap. 3. The grand Prerogatives of these two Gentile Arts , are Arguments which may serve easily to convince us that they have nothing in the practice of them either Mean or Vulgar , but have in them always something of Elevation and Sublimity beyond all other Occupations : And 't is observable , that such as wrought in the first , enjoy'd the Priviledges of Nobility , and that such of the Nobility as Exercise themselves in the latter , may do it without prejudice to their Birth . Now to make Enamel of a Purple-colour , you must take four pound of Principal Powder , as prepared in Chap. 148. add to this two Ounces of Manganese of Piedmont , prepared as we shall direct in Chap. 164. put these into a White glazed Earthen pot , allowing it large enough to bear with the Ebullitions and raising of the Metal : When it 's throughly melted , cast it into Water , dry it , and put it again into the pot to refine ; then consider whether it be well enough coloured , and accordingly make it up into Cakes , and keep it for use as before . CHAP. CLX . Another Purple Enamel . WE will give you another Way to make Enamel of this Colour , no less delicate than the former , for all manner of Goldsmiths Work. Take six pound of our Principal Powder , three Ounces of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , six Ounces of thrice calcined Scales of Copper , as we have before prescribed , reduce all these to an impalpable Powder , and let them dissolve and refine in the White glazed pot in your Furnace ; afterwards cast the Metal into Water , dry it well , and return it into the pot to refine over again ; examine the Colour , if it be right , take it off and cake it up for use as before . CHAP. CLXI . To make Enamel of Violet-colour . THIS Colour as it is the nearest to it , succeeds the Purple , and is a mixture of Red and Blue , 't is worn by the Fathers of the Church Militant , for their proper Livery , as being altogether Heavenly , and by which the Character which they bear is best signified . To make it , take six pound of Principal Powder , as in Chap. 148. two Ounces of Manganese of Piedmont prepared , and forty eight Grains of thrice calcined Scales of Copper , make 'em all into a very fine powder , and being well mixt put them together into your White glazed Earthen Pot in the Furnace , let it melt and digest , then cast it into Water , and dry it , put it again into the Pot , and let it refine very well ; try its Colour , and if 't is agreeable , take it and cake it , and you 'll have a very fine Violet-colour'd Enamel , proper for all manner of Goldsmiths Work of that sort . CHAP. CLXII . The Way to make Yellow Enamel . YELLOW is the Colour of Gold , and may therefore deserve all its Commendations , which are so extraordinary great , that they require a whole Volume to contain 'em ; but we 'll only satisfie our selves to intimate , that it bears the likeness of the first and more perfect Body , which rouls under the Heavenly Arch : And can there be any other so great Comparison ? 'T is likewise the Symbole of true Nobility , and of all excellent Causes . You may make this rich Colour with six pound of Principal Powder , three Ounces of Tartar , seventy two Grains of prepared Manganese , the whole reduced to an impalpable Powder , well mixt and put into a glazed Earthen pot large enough to dispense with the Ebullition and raising up of the Metal ; let it stand in your Glass-house Furnace to melt and incorporate ; after cast it into Water , dry it , and leave it in the pot again to refine very well ; then try the Colour , and if it be sufficient , make it up into Cakes as before directed , and you 'll have a very taking Yellow Enamel for all sorts of Metal but Gold , which by its resemblance it would only dull and spoil the Beauty , unless it were placed among other Colours , as the Goldsmiths already are very well acquainted withal . CHAP. CLXIII . The Way to make a Crystal-Ground for our Red Enamel . THE Red requires a Chrystal more lasting than any of the former , therefore we will give you a Composition here sufficient for that purpose . Take twenty four Pound of Salt of Polverine , Rochetta , or Soda prepared as directed in Chap. 5. and six pound of Frit , as in Chap. 6. these mixt and finely powder'd , must be steept in Water to bring the Mass into a Body like Paste ; and then make it up into small thin Cakes , lay them on Tiles in a Lime-kiln , or Potters-Furnace for six Hours to calcine , or near the Glass-house Furnace Vault , or on the Upper Vault , taking special care that they don't melt , let them remain there for three or four Days , or until they be very well calcined . This done resolve them into an impalpable powder , adding thereto four pound of Calx of Lead and Tin prepared and calcined according to directions in Chap. 148. and Chap. 81. four pound of White calcined Tartar , prescribed in Chap. 5. and elsewhere . These being all mixt and very finely pulverized , put them them into your glazed pot at the Glass-house Furnace to melt and refine ; thence throw the Metal into Water , and again ( when dry ) into the pot to melt ; cast it a second time into the Water , and dry it , let it melt and refine over-again in the pot for some Hours , and 't will be fit for use . Consider always the Lead which is among the other Ingredients , and be very careful that you let none of it remain in the pot when you throw the Matter out into the Water , for it will be apt to precipitate to the bottom , and this for several Reasons elsewhere given , too tedious and needless to be here repeated . CHAP. CLXIV . An Excellent Preparation of Fusible Manganese to be used in making of our Red Enamel . WE have already given sufficient direction to prepare Manganese of Piedmont , in Chap. 18. for tinging these Matters , of which we have already discours'd , but for Red and Rose-colour Enamel , there are some more exquisite Ingredients and Preparations required , which we think proper to give account of here , before we speak of the Enamel it self . Any other than Manganese of Piedmont , will not serve your turn , for that only is fit for our use to contribute to the Fairness and Life of the Colour ; take therefore equal Quantities of this Manganese and Salt-petre , as much as you please , and let them reverberate and calcine in an Earthen pot in your Furnace twenty four Hours ; take it off and wash it well in warm Water to separate the Salt-petre , dry it well , and the Mass will be of a red Colour : To this add an equal quantity of Sal-Armoniack , grind these on a Marble with distilled Vinegar , as Painters do their Colours ; dry it , and reduce it to Powder , putting it afterwards into a strong Matrass or Bolt-head of Glass , big-belly'd and long-neck'd , there to sublimate about twelve Hours ; break your Matrass , mix all the volatile and fixed parts together , adding the same quantity of Sal-Armoniack , as there are Flowers , and take care to weigh them before Composition ; grind , pulverize , and sublime as before , repeating this until your Manganese remain fusible in the bottom of the Matras , and this is that which you must preserve to tinge Crystal with , and make it ruddy and diaphanous , or transparent as a Ruby . CHAP. CLXV . The Way to make a Fixt Sulphur , to be used in Compositions for Enamel . THIS Fixt Sulphur serves for several uses in Chymistry , and very convenient for obliging young Artists . Now , tho' it be not so unavoidably necessary for making Red Enamel , yet we will not omit it here , because it contributes to our prescribing two sorts of ways for it , as well as to satisfie the more curious Goldsmiths . Put Flowers of Sulphur , as much as you please , into a Glass Cucurbite luted at bottom , pouring thereto Oyl-Olive as much as will drown the Matter by two Inches , set the Cucurbite on a violent Sand-Furnace , for a full Hour , then take it off , and pour in strong Vinegar , and the Sulphur will soon precipitate , and the Oyl ascend on the Surface of the Vinegar , decant this from the Sulphur into another Vessel , and put in more fresh Oyl as before , do thus thrice , and you 'll have at length a fixt Sulphur to make use of for Enamel . CHAP. CLXVI . Another fixt Incombustible Sulphur . THERE is yet another way for fixation of Sulphur for the same use , and several Chymical Operations , wherein it has very great Vertue . Make strong Lye of Quick-Lime and harsh Oak-Ashes , put therein Flowers of Sulphur until the liquid Surface be four Inches upmost ; boil it for a considerable while over the Fire , this will cleanse and purge the Sulphur from its Unctuosity and Corruption , and qualifie it for your purpose ; separate the Lye from the Sulphur , and drying it , you 'll have it white , fixt , and incombustible , exceeding proper for the Goldsmiths to make use of on Gold. We cou'd prescribe several ways more to make Sulphur fixt and fusible , but these two already given are sufficient for our purpose ; we reserve them therefore for some other place to be discovered among Matters more excellent , and of greater Curiosity , for the Advantage of such Persons who Study the improvement and profounder parts of Chimistry . CHAP. CLXVII . To Extract Spirit of Saturn , an Excellent Ingredient for Enamel and Glass-work . WE think fit to propose all the Preparations proper for making a Red Enamel , before we shew the way to make it , because the Ingredients to be used must first be provided , or we can't proceed regularly to our Business . Among the rest , this Spirit of Saturn is not to be laid aside , which tho considered here as useful only in Enamel and Glass-work , may have other Vertues familiar to the Learned ; but for our Business 't is such as does very nobly heighten and much improve the Matter for our Work , and for any other not immediately relating to us here , we pass over in silence . Reduce good Litharge , as much as you please , to an impalpable powder , and set it in a glazed Earthen Vessel over a still Fire ; add to this good distilled Vinegar , till four Inches above it , mix 'em well together , and then let them settle until the Vinegar become Milk-coloured , which will be in a little time ; decant this Vinegar off gently , and put on fresh , continuing to do thus until it admits of no more colouring ; then put all the Milk-coloured Vinegar into a glazed Earthen Vessel , and let it stand until the Lead precipitate to the bottom ; from whence pour of the clear Vinegar , which will be at top , and that Milk-coulour'd Sediment which remains , is what we call Spirit of Saturn , tho improperly , and that which we 'll make use of for the Enamel and Glass . If it do not precipitate well to your liking , and that the Vinegar at top be not very clear , cast among it some cold Water ; if that won't do , and that your Vinegar still continues muddy , set all the Water and Vinegar together over a gentle Fire to evaporate , and thus you 'll have the more Spirituous part of your Vinegar a Sediment in the bottom of the Vessel , which is exceeding useful for Glass-work ; keep it together with the rest of the Saturn for use . This Noble Preparation which we call Spirit of Saturn , does indeed contain it , but you must have skill to extract it thereout ; to say that 't is all Spirit of Saturn is untrue , for 't is that wherein the Spirit is contained , and from whence it may be more easily and better separated , than from the Mass of Lead , I propose this first step towards extracting it as such , whereby the Curious may succeed with small trouble . CHAP. CLXVIII . The Way to make Enamel of a Blood-colour Red. SINCE we have given a small Elogy to every other Colour , 't is unjust for us not to continue the like on this , which is a true Symbole of Blood , by which the Glory of the Martyrs , who with so much Generosity and Courage shed theirs for the Faith of Christ , may be represented as well as of those many Brave and Heroick Persons , who have interposed for the Preservation and Support of Church and State , 't is therefore an Illustrious Badge of Eminent Courage . Thus Alexander , Hannibal , Scipio , and very many other Great and Noble Princes , chose this Colour for their Livery , and for their Shields . To stain Enamel of this Colour , take ten pound of common Frit , mentioned in Chap. 12. add thereto six pound of Glass of Saturn , prepared as in Chap. 82. the whole made into a very fine powder , must be put into a glazed Earthen pot at the Glass-house Furnace , to melt , boil and refine ; after this cast thereon powder of thrice calcined Copper , as in Chap. 34. at discretion , stirring it all about that they may incorporate together with powder of red Tartar , until the Mass become red as Blood , observing whether the Colour be too pale , and if so , continue to put in more of these Powders of Copper and Tartar , until it be perfectly stained ; and thus you 'll have a delicate deep Sanguine Enamel fit for all manner of Work you can desire to apply it . CHAP. CLXIX . Another Blood-colour Enamel . THIS Enamel will be very beautiful , and may serve instead of the Rose-colour Enamel hereafter prescribed . To make it , put ten pound of Frit for Crystal , Chap. 6. and six pound of Glass of Saturn before mentioned , into one of the Glass-house Furnace pots , let it melt and purge well ; after this cast it into Water , dry it , and return it into the pot ; when 't is well melted again , throw in at several times , five or six Ounces of powder of thrice calcin'd Copper , stirring the whole with the Iron Crook to mix and incorporate them well together , and also a like quantity of powder of red Tartar , still stirring it ; this being well boil'd and refined , observe whether the Colour be perfect , if not , add equal parts of the Powders of Copper and Tartar , according to your Judgment , as much as you find necessary , to bring it to a perfection ; let it remain to boil and purifie , trying it again and again , until you find it compleatly coloured . CHAP. CLXX . Another Red Enamel of a very Splendid Ruby-colour . THE Beauty of this Enamel is very surprising , and of as lively a Lustre as the Ruby it self , which it communicates to all the Work wherein 't is used . For this fine Effect we must have recourse to the fusible Manganese in Chap. 164. add twenty Ounces thereof to each pound of Crystal ground , mentioned Chap. 163. let the whole be well purified , then try the Colour , and according as you find it , add the greater or lesser quantity of Manganese , or Crystal ground respectively , until it be brought to its just degree of perfection , as a Ruby , and which ought to be very admirable . CHAP. CLXXI. Another Ballas-Ruby-colour Enamel . THE same Manganese must be had to make this fine Colour ; put ten Pound of Crystal ground , ●n Chap. 163. in a glazed pot to melt and purge at the Glass-house Furnace ; throw the Matter into Water , dry and melt over again ; do thus thrice , and when the Mass is afterwards well melted , tinge it with the fusible Manganese as before , and 't will become Purple-colour'd . Add to it at eight times impalpable Powder of Alom to bring it to a Red. Be very careful that the Alom do not blacken it , but rather make it Yellowish , and the Manganese dissipating 't will become Red , and so make the Colour most perfect and just of a fine Ballas-Ruby . CHAP. CLXXII . Another Enamel of a Rose-colour for Gold. NOTHING is fairer and of greater Gaiety than this , for all Work where it may be used , and therefore we 'll give you several ways for its Preparation . Take ten Pound of Crystal ground , in Chap. 163 ▪ melt it at the Glass-house Furnace in a glazed Pot ; add to it at four times five Ounces of red calcined Copper , as in Chap. 33. stirring the Metal every time , then put into it Crocus Martis , Chap. 26. and Manganese as before prepared ; then let it alone to cleanse for six Hours , and if the Colour is not true , put in by little and little more Crocus Martis , until it come to your liking , and be of a fine Rose-colour . CHAP. CLXXIII . Another very fine Rose-colour . AMONG our Rose-colour Enamels this seems the finest ; to make which , take four Pound of Crystal ground , of Chap. 163. let it melt in a glazed Pot at the Glass-house Furnace , cast it afterwards into Water , and melting it over again , add by little and little an Ounce and half of Calx , prepared as in Chap. 148. stirring the Metal every time to incorporate , then let it alone for a little while , until you perceive it of an Ash-colour ; when it comes to that forbear putting in any more Calx , lest you make it too white ; then refine the Mass , and after add to it Minium two Ounces , purge , refine , and throw it out into Water , and putting it into the Pot , let it stand to melt and purifie over again about eight Hours , then put in an Ounce and half of red thrice calcin'd Copper , and as much crude white Tartar , with a Dram of Blood-stone , and the like quantity of fixt Sulphur , in Chap. 165. these pulverized very fine and mixt together , stir the Metal and incorporate them very well together ; afterwards see if the Colour answers your expectation ; if it be too deep , add a little more Manganese to weaken it , if it be too pale , improve it with some more of the last Composition of Copper , Tartar , Blood-stone and Sulphur , until it be to purpose : And thus you have an Enamel of an exceeding fair Rose-colour . CHAP. CLXXIV . Another Rose-colour Enamel . PRACTICE has already experienc'd so many ways to bring this fine Enamel to the most advanced Improvements , that 't is impossible to expect any greater ; and for such as wou'd make it , they may proceed boldly thus . Set six Pound of Crystal ground , as in Chap. 163. in a glazed Pot at the Glass-house Furnace to melt and cleanse ; then cast into it at four several times intermitting , four Ounces of Calx , as prepared of Lead and Tin , in Chap. 148. stir the Matter very well at each time until it incorporate , then let it all purge for a while , and cast it Ladle-full by Ladle-full into Water , and again put all into the Pot to melt and refine anew ; after this add to it an Ounce and half of red Copper pulverized and calcined , as in Chap. 33. which will tinge the whole of a deep Colour , but cast it in at three Intervals , and stir it very well to incorporate ; two Hours after , add to it at thrice , an Ounce and half of Crocus Martis , given in Chap. 24. mix it well as before , and let it remain to refine about three Hours , then throw on it six Ounces of Tartar calcined , as in Chap. 57. Chimney-Soot vitrified one Ounce , Crocus Martis again one Ounce and half pulverized , and all well mixt at four several Intermissions , and Quantities , stirring the Metal always with the Iron-Crook , lest it swell or boil over : After this let it repose and purifie about three Hours , stir it again and try the Colour , if it be red as Blood it 's right , if not , add at discretion , a little more of each of these Powders of Tartar , Soot , and Crocus Martis , until the Colour be full and true , and so let it stand for a whole Hour , and try it again ; if you find it perfect , proceed no further , but keep it for use , 't is very proper to apply to Gold for Enamel . CHAP. CLXXV . Another Splendid Enamel of a Carbuncle-colour . NOT to particularize any farther on the Carbuncle , which we have sufficiently enough discoursed of already , we will shew how to imitate the Colour ascribed to it with Enamel , and which will be of a wonderful fine Beauty , as has been often experimented . Now the whole Secret of this Operation consists in calcining the Gold perfectly , and bringing it to an absolute and just fineness , which must create this precious Colour . Take very pure Gold , and for the better assurance refine it your self , and dissolve an Ounce of it in three Ounces of Aqua Regalis , as directed in Chap. 55. let the Solution distil over a gentle Fire until the Gold precipitates , and thus repeat an Exhalation and Cohobation six times , and the last time take out the Gold , powder and put it into a Crucible covered and luted , on a Reverberatory to calcine ; let it remain until it become of a very excellent and Scarlet Red , which will not be without a considerable allowance of many Hours . This done , take of our Crystal ground , and melt a quantity of it in a glazed Pot at the Furnace of the Glass-house , and being well purged , throw in a twentieth part of the Powder of Gold , in proportion as the quantity of Metal , stirring the whole very well , let it alone for some time , then try it , and according as you find the Colour , put in more Powder until you bring it to a true transparent Carbuncle-colour . We have given another way to calcine Gold in Chap. 115. no less sufficient than this , together with a way to make a fine Carbuncle , and this rare Colour may as well be given to the Stone as the Enamel by the Directions for preparing the Gold in either Chapter , the Curious may choose which they will , they being equally sufficient . CHAP. CLXXVI . The Way to calcine Copper for making Vitriol of Venus , without Corrosive . WE promised in Chap. 45. to shew this fine Essay , which is certainly the Noblest Preparation can be made of Copper , so the Learned may take notice of it : If the Caput Mortuum of Vitriol has many excellent Vertues for tinging of Glass , this Vitriol it self , or rather Spirit , must have far greater and more extraordinary in Matters of a more sublime Nature : A famous Philosopher , very eminently recommendable and Judicous , was never weary of dwelling on the Praise of this hidden Treasure , and extolling its Vertues to the highest . Tho this Vertue be known to many of the Learned , yet we may boldly say , 't is unknown to very many indifferently so , who as soon as they have run over the Writings of some Sage Virtuoso , pretend to be acquainted with all the Secrets of Nature , and which they undertake to disclose and unravel as soon as they can force 'em to any sense comformable to their weak Capacity , tho never so different from the Author's meaning , to which they are altogether Strangers , and this gives us Authority enough to condemn them for truly ignorant . Nature is veiled , and her Vertues not so plainly disclosed to all the World , she has those secret Recluses for them as can be opened by no other than her own Key , which can't be match'd , and therefore not to be found in the Hands of every Man ; besides that , one must be lead by the same Genius as he that forged it , before one can truly find and distinguish it , and we may assure our selves that none but the Wise are in possession of this rare and precious Treasure . The greatest of those who have writ on this Art , have always held this Key as the last Secret ; all the profound Arguments they have alledged , and Pains they have been at to screen those obscure Avenues , were designed to make them inaccessible to the Base and Unworthy , and preserve these All-Divine Secrets from being prophaned by the Hands of such as wou'd abuse them . This Sacred Mystery does not only consist ( as many fansie ) in the making of Gold and Silver , which is Ambitiously suggested by the meer Avarice of the major part of all Mankind , but is indeed the meanest Excellency thereof ; for Health , which it contains , is beyond all the Treasure in the World ; besides , the Knowledge it affords us of an Omnipotency in the true God , and of all the other Most Holy Mysteries of Religion , wherein it gives an opportunity to make a perfect Discovery : Are not those much more sublime and eminent Vertues which lead us to a Blessed Eternity ? Whereas on the contrary , all the Transitory Wealth on Earth has nothing in it but Imposture , and serves only to precipitate us into the Bottomless-Pit . We 'll leave this lofty Subject to be discoursed on by the Learned , and go on to the calcining of Copper , which is the first Preparation to be made in making the Vitriol of Venus without Corrosive , which is known to very few , and whereof we have already given an Elogy . Take thin Leaves of red Copper , and put them into Crucibles , stratifying 'em lay upon lay with Powder of common Sulphur , filling your Crucibles until all the Copper Leaves be put in , as in Chap. 22. then cover well and lute the Crucibles , let the lute dry , and put them into the Furnace of Chap. 52. continuing a good Charcoal-Fire for two Hours ; afterwards let them stand and cool , then take off the Crucibles , and you 'll find your Copper calcin'd and blackish , inclining to a deep Purple Powder ; searce it , and to each Pound add six Ounces of Powder of Sulphur , mix and put them into a round flat-bottom Earthen Pot , strong enough to bear the Fire , lay upon the Furnace a strong Earthen-Dish , fill it with very live Coals , and place your Pot thereon with the Copper ; when the Pot grows hot , and the Sulphur takes Fire , stirring it with your long Iron Crook , lest it should stick to the Pot , or become concrete , continue thus till the Sulphur be all consumed and smoaks no more ; take the Pot hot off the Fire , and empty the Copper out with an Iron-Ladle ; pound it well in a Brass Mortar , and searce it all finely , and you 'll have a blackish Powder , reiterate this Calcination thrice , with the like proportion of Sulphur as before , and the third time let it remain until the Copper become Red and Yellow ; then take it off , and pound it in a Brass-Mortar , and searce it finely , pounding what remains over again , untill all be searced , and you 'll have a very well coloured Calx of Copper , most effectual and proper for extracting this fair Vitriol of Copper , whereof we will give the Preparation in the next Chapter . CHAP. CLXXVII . To make Vitriol of Venus without Corrosive . THOSE who make Vitriol of Venus , have not all one and the same method , most of them dissolve the Copper in distilled Vinegar , Spirit of Nitre , or some other Corrosive , for our part Water alone is the Dissolvent , or rather Agent to extract the Tincture , as we shall shew . Take Glass Cucurbits as many as will serve your turn , to contain all your Calx of Copper , and put six Pound of fair running Water to a Pound of Calx , into each Cucurbite ; place them on a moderate Sand-Furnace for four Hours , to evaporate until one third of the Water go off ; let the Furnace cool , and afterwards decant the remainder of the Water into other Glass Vessels , and dry the Sediment in a Crucible on the Furnace ; let this Water settle for two Days , and then you 'll find in the bottom of the Vessel small Grains of Copper of a blackish Colour ; you must filtrate , or strain the Water , and preserve all the Grains together , to add to the former Sediment , having first well dried them , and keep the Water . Take all these Sediments , and to each Pound add six Ounces of Powder of Sulphur as before , putting it into your flat-bottom'd Earthen Pot to calcine as in the former Chapter ; take care to stir it well as long as the Sulphur fumes , and it stands over the Fire , else it will stick to the Pot and not calcine ; take it off and powder it immediately in a Brass-Mortar , searce the Powder , and you 'll find it black ; mix this again with Sulphur proportionably six Ounces to a Pound , and put it to calcine anew , stirring it very well as before directed ; let it stand a while on the Fire to alter the Matter from a Russet to a Yellow ; then take it off and pound it instantly in a Brass-Mortar before it cool , and then searce it all finely over . Put a Pound of this Powder with six Pound of Water , into each Cucurbit , and these Cucurbits on a slow Sand-Furnace , where let it stand four Hours to the consumption of one third of your Water , which decant into other Vessels ; let it settle two Days , then filtrate these Waters , and pour them among the former , gathering the Sediments that remain in the bottom , and mix them with these in the Cucurbits . Dry the remaining Sediments as before , and repeat the calcination anew with the same proportionable quantity of Sulphur ; then extract the Tincture , filtrate and mix the filtrated and tinged Waters with the former , exactly observing the Order already taught , and continue to do thus six times , so will the Copper remaining in the bottom of your Vessels , become as it were a soft impure Earth deprived of all its blueness , which throw away as fit for nothing , for all the Vertue of the Copper is contained in the Waters ; put these all carefully together to extract from them this precious Vitriol of Venus , as hereafter directed . CHAP. CLXXVIII . The Way to extract a fair Vitriol of Venus from our our Coloured Waters . OF all the Preparations to be taught for this rare Work , this is the most easie and vulgar , there being no more required , than to evaporate and crystalize the Matter ; but as we are to leave nothing in the Dark , we resolve to explain every circumstance thereof for the benefit of our Readers , and such as wou'd know it . We have said you must mix together all your coloured Waters , now we will tell you what must be done with them ; you must have a low Glass-Cucurbit that will hold two * Paris Pints , or more , which put into a moderate Ash or Sand-Furnace ; put therein three Pound of the Tincture to evaporate gently , and put the rest into Glass-Bottles set round your Furnace , so that they may be heated , and ready to fill the Cucurbit as fast as the Exhalation consumes its Tincture , which may be done with a Glass Ladle , or the Bottles themselves , lest the Waters being cold might cause the Cucurbit to burst , and so all would be lost . Reduce ten Pound of this by evaporation to two and half , or three at most , which will be a very high Tincture , pour it into two or three glazed Earthen Vessels , and place them all Night in a moist cold place , and you 'll find the Vitriol at bottom , and sticking to the sides of the Vessels , like little long Icicles , which will have the true colour of Oriental Emeralds , pour all the remaining Waters into the Cucurbit , and dry the Vitriol that it may not stick , preserving it in a close Vessel . Place your Cucurbit again on the Furnace to evaporate anew at the consumption of half the Waters , and crystalize the strong Tincture as before . Thus whilst any Water remains evaporate and crystalize until all be consumed , to the end that none of this may be lost , whose Vertues are infinitely useful , not only in the Art of Glass , and the Metallick , but in Physick too , for the curing of many Chronick Distempers , which we pass over in silence , as foreign to our Subject , and continue to prescribe the rest of this rare Work , to conceal nothing from the Curious , but give them entire satisfaction . CHAP. CLXXIX . The Method of drawing the Spirit of the Vitriol of Venus , which has a wonderful Blue , and how to separate the Caput Mortuum for tinging of Glass . THE Caput Mortuum of Vitriol of Venus , which we prescribe to tinge Glass of a Sea-green , and whereof we discoursed in Chap. 45. has ingaged us to give this most excellent and hidden Secret of Nature , which the Philosophers have never explained but by ambiguous Riddles , and veiled Parables to conceal the Knowledge thereof from the Vulgar . We confess , 't is not without some regret we condescend to it in this Ungrateful Age , wherein very few deserve to be instructed , or truly admire , and so perfectly love the Mysteries of Sage Philosophy , as to imitate the Vertue and Charity of its devoted Professors ; 't is however in consideration , and for the sake of this small number of Votaries that we have explained and delivered many excellent things in this Book , which we might ( but out of regard to such ) have laid aside ( as foreign to the Art of Glass ) but our desire to please them has promoted the opening these intricate Paths , and leaving them in a condition to be enlarged by our small Discovery under the serious Speculations , and smart issues of their own Wit. Now to finish our precious Essay , you must take a Pound of this Vitriol into a Glass Retort strongly luted , as directed in Chap. 52. the lute being dry , set the Retort in a Sand-Furnace , fitting to it a very large Receiver , as directed for Aqua fortis in that Chapter ; this done , kindle the Fire , and continue it gen●e for four Hours to prevent a too excessive heat , ●hich would drive out the Spirits impetuously , and 〈◊〉 burst the Receiver , whereof great care must be ●●ken not to spoil all : As soon as the Spirits ascend like ●hite Clouds , improve your Fire by degrees , until ●ey disperse and your Receiver clears again and ●ols , and all the Spirit comes together : Then let ●e Fire go out of it self , and after twenty four ●ours , unlute the Joynts , take away your Receiver , ●d put the Liquor it contains into Glass-Bottles stopt ●ry close with Glass Stopples to prevent Air , which ●hey could draw , would disperse it all by Exhala●n . This choice Liquor has that Noble Blue which ●ords us wonderful Tinctures , and other inestima●● Operations , as well as such surprizing Effects in ●ysick , as cannot be equalled . The strength of this rich Liquor may be known 〈◊〉 its very penetrating acid smell , and if we were 〈◊〉 afraid to prophane so sublime a Mystery which ●rsons much more Sage and Considerate than we , ●e kept so secret : We would enlarge more on its ●●ellent Qualities , and disperse those Obscurities , ●● we should look upon our selves unworthy of the ●ht we have been able to acquire in this most im●●●tant Matter , if we abandoned those Treasures to 〈◊〉 ravage of the whole Earth , which ought only to 〈◊〉 possest by the Sacred , Wise , and Studious Mem●●s of the Hermetick Science and Philosophy . But to return to our Caput Mortuum of this preci Vitriol , which has occasioned us to give its Pre●ation , and is what we make use of for this fine ●ter-colour , or Egmarine on Glass , you 'll find it ●he Retort , out of which the white Spirit was di●ed , whereof we have discoursed already ; to get ●ou must break the Retort , then reduce it to Pow● with a mixture of Zaffer , as directed in Chap. 45. and so tinge your Crystal of an admirable Sea-green-colour . We were mistaken in Chap. 45. in saying that the Caput Mortuum must be exposed to the Air before you do pound it with the Zaffer , for that is not altogether incumbent in tinging of Glass , tho this exposing of it cannot but add something to the lustre , for it draws thereby with a certain Magnetick Property , the occult Spirit of the Air , and so from a Black , of which it was before , becomes of a pale Blue-colour , and partly assumes what it lost by Distillation and Extraction of the Spirits , so you may save a great deal of time and pains by this Preparation , to your no small Advantage , in expediting the Matter . Such as shall comprehend the Vertues of those things we have shewn in the four last Capters , ought to be secret , for many will read these things , and not apprehend , or only Laugh at them , whether it be that the Divine Power , for Reasons best known to himself , will not let them discern , or that they confide in a false Presumption on their own Knowledge , as beyond all other Mens . God has nevertheless not confined to one only Wit , the whole Knowledge , or all the sublime Excellencies of Nature , but on the contrary , to declare his great and unbounded Charity , permits it to be communicated to many for his greater Manifestation and Glory ; yet he reserves those more important Secrets to be revealed to his Faithful Servants , that such as would be acquainted with the same Mysteries , may apply to this Father of Light , who alone can inspire them with sufficiency enough for penetrating into these which they could never do without his Assistance . Now the true Method thereof is obvious to all the World , a Holy and Regular Life opens the Passage , and continual Study and Application guides us through ; but we must add to these an upright Intention of making good use hereof , that we may not wander ; a Love for our Neighbour conformable to the Will of God , to bring us to a safe Port , an extended Charity to the Poor , to lay open for us the Gate of Heaven ; and in a Word , an unlimited and immense Love for this Omnipotent Creator , Eternal , and Incomprehensible , to Hand us to his very Throne : This is the prevailing Attractive , which all the Judicious Philosophers made use of to draw down this Divine Intelligence , and which I most heartily wish to all that would imitate them . The End of the Sixth BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK VII . Containing the Way to Enamel in all Sorts of Colours on Gold and other Metals : The Order of the Fire and Furnace : The Preparation of Colours for Pourtraying with Enamel , and how to do it . CHAP. CLXXX . THO this Undertaking depends not altogether on our Art of Glass , being no more than an Application of Matters delivered in the Sixth Book ; however we resolve to lay down this Manner of Enameling and Pourtraying on Metals , to bring this our Work to an higher perfection . The Ancient Works of Enamel on Metals , were only of Black and White , with some few Tinges of Carnation , or Flesh-colour , as may be seen in the Limoge Enamel ; in Francis the First 's Time it became more improv'd , and they made use of Lights and Shadows ▪ but the Enamel on Gold was of no better Stuff than that on Copper , and all the Works of it on Gold , Silver , and Copper , were of Transparent Matter ; such as wrought it on thick , couched each Colour by it self , as is done now a Days in Enameling some particular Pieces of Relief , and not otherwise . Since then they have found out the way of Enameling with opaque , and thick stuff , and the Art of compounding the Colours , is much more improveing and handsomer than that of the Ancients , as is visible in all our Modern Works ; but we must without all Exception , own the fair Works upon Gold , representing Pourtraitures , and entire Histories , so neatly , and to the Life , and coveted as much as Picture done in Oyl , over which it has the advantage of Natural Lustre and Varnish , which is never tarnished , to be the Invention of this latter Age , and the Improvements we owe to the Study of the French therein . All sorts of Enamel are not to be promiscuously employed on all sorts of Metal ; Gold which perfectly bears with as well all the Opaque as Transparent , cannot agree with clear Purple , its Yellow mightily changing the Colour thereof , and produces but a very ill Fancy ; on the other side , this Purple is very fine on Silver ; so the Egmarine , the Azure , and Green all other Colours , as well clear as Opaque , disagreeing therewith , and Copper suits with every thick Enamel , but cannot endure the Limpid , unless prepared for it beforehand , as shall be directed in due place . Observe that good Enamel must be hard and lasting , such as is soft being full of Lead , and subject to change Colour , easily becoming sullied and foul ; of the clear Enamel some is harder , some softer ; the hardest is always best , however even of them there is choice ; some lose colour in the Fire , some are more or less lively and sparkling , but if you employ constantly such as we have prescribed in our Sixth Book , you 'll never be exposed to those Inconveniencies ; for the Ingredients being perfectly cleansed , will endure all degrees of Fire , any change of Colour or Quality not ensuing . CHAP. CLXXXI . Of the Furnace for Enameling and Pourtraying . THE Enameling of Metals , as well as the colouring of the Stuff , cannot be effected without Fire , and is wholly different in this point from Painting with the usual Colours in Oyl , which may be dried in the Air only , without other help . It would be very hard to believe the Fire would not spoil the mixture of the Colours , if our daily experience which we made , did not vouch the contrary ; however care must be taken not to let the Work have too much time , but draw it out as soon as you find it polisht . The Fire must be Reverberatory , or rather of Suppression , and never to be under the Stuff ; 't is the same as is used for cleansing of Metals , whether in Mints or Goldsmiths Shops , which is very familiar to all the World. You must have a Furnace round or square , either of Iron or Earth , it 's no great matter , how ( or whether of these ) it is , which must be hollow in the middle , to contain the Work with a good Charcoal-Fire all about , and over it , to make it melt the better ; and you must have it so as to be able to take your Stuff out , and put it in again , as occasion requires : You may , for better conveniency , make use of a Goldsmith's Muffle ; 't is a small Arch made of Crucible Earth , in the shape of half a Crucible , cut length-wise , and they place it on the Area or Floor of the Furnace , the Opening of it lying just against the Mouth of the Furnace , to put in and draw out the Work easily ; and for more conveniency they place a small Grate over it , which must not touch it , for fear of breaking it ; and on this Grate make a good Fire , and so round about the Muffle , to heat the hollow very well , under which they put the Work to be Enamel'd and Painted ; and the Essays , or Trials they have a mind to make on a little IronShovel , to draw the easier out ; but for making Essays of Ingredients for Enamel , it must be a little Blade of White Enamel , which ought to be provided purposely for that use . CHAP. CLXXXII . The Way to Enamel Gold. WE have already said , that Gold , Silver , and Red Copper may be Enamel'd ; now to make true Work , you must use only pure Gold , because Silver makes White Enamel appear Yellow , and Copper rises in Scales , and makes Vapours ; for tho all Enamel sticks to it , yet it is but very imperfectly , and may be easily divided and peeled off again ; besides , the Colours are so wretched on it , and lose much of their Charm and Lustre by the Impurity of that Metal . Therefore , if you would have good Work , let Gold only be your Subject , and of the purest , if you employ clear Enamel , because on impure Gold they grow dull , and become imperfect , that is to say , there appears with this a certain obscure and Cloudy Vapour in the Enamel , which deadens and takes away the Life of its Colour . The Gold Plate ought to be rising , and when it is forged very even , the Goldsmiths apply white Enamel over and under it , tho it is to be wrought but on one side , but this is necessary for two Reasons : First , Because the Work is neater and fairer for it : And again , Because if it were only Enamel'd on one side , the Fire would swell it , and so make it rise , and that in Bubbles ; because it is always as it were tormented , especially when the Pieces are great , and the Enamel carelesly laid on ; this makes it produce Blisterings , which disfigure the Work ; the French Chymists call such Vegoter , but their Goldsmiths Petits Ocuillets : This disfiguring of the Work , you may avoid , by laying Enamel on both sides of the Plate of Gold , and thicker over than under , this will keep it equal and even on both sides , the first lay of White Enamel remaining / smooth in this condition , serves for a Field to place all your other Colours on as we will further discourse of in the Art of Pourtraying . Oyl of Spike is used for dissolving thick and opaque Enamel before it can be applied ; for the Transparent you need use nothing but fair Water , as we shall shew in Chap. 185. and then 't is couched flat and bordered with the Metal , and sometimes we don't border at all , the Field being all Enamel , but this is troublesome , because the Limpid Enamels as they melt , often mix , and so confound the Colours which constantly happens when the Pieces 〈◊〉 small . Red Enamels are not so , unless by chance , and come generally Yellowish out of the Fire ; assoon as 't is applied to the Gold , it alters the Colour ; one may soon bring it to a perfect Red Enamel , by turning it at the Mouth of your Furnace , when you are taking it out from the Fire ; and then it is that the Workmen say they make it Red , and give it its compleat Colour . Gold , as we have already said , admits of all sorts of Enamel , clear or opaque , bright Purple excepted , which is altered by the Yellow-colour of the Gold , and does not take so good effect there , as on Silver , on which it ought still to be used . The Way of working every sort of Enamel , is alike ; not to make any useless Repetitions , we will satisfie our selves only to advise you to employ all those Enamels prescribed in the Sixth Book , which have every illustrating and convenient Property to be wished for in this Work. CHAP. CLXXXIII . To Enamel on Silver . WE have already taken notice in our former Chapter , that Silver agrees not with all sorts of Enamel , as Gold. We repeat it here again to prevent the use of any but such as serve to produce perfect and agreeable Effects . You are to make least use of White Enamel on Silver , because there it becomes Yellowish , and unpleasing , but nothing can suit better with it , than bright Purple , Green , Blue , and Egmarine , because the Whiteness of the Silver is then clearly eminent , and gives its just splendour . The Work and manner of Enameling on Silver , is no way different from that of Gold , in forging the Plates evenly to prepare 'em for the Enamel , you may make use of White on the under side , since the Enamel there serves only to qualifie the Risings and Disturbings of the Metal in the Furnace , which would cause unevenness , or disagreements in the surface , and prevent its becoming just and handsome . We need not repeat again that way of placing the Enamel on your Plates of Gold or Silver , and so to put them into your little reverberatory Furnace spoken of in Chap. 181. to melt , and as soon as polished to be taken from the Fire . CHAP. CLXXXIV . To Enamel on Copper . THO we have before touched upon the way of Enameling on Copper , yet lest the Reader should too slightly apprehend it , as not in order , or a distinct Chapter , therefore we are obliged to enter it here to avoid Imperfection . The less use is made of this Metal in this Work the better , for the Enamel never sticks to it perfectly , but is easily scaled , divided , and broke off , which never happens to Gold ; besides , the Copper is so impure , that its Fumes destroy the Beauty of the Enamel so much in the Furnace , that they quite lose their Charm and Splendour by the Malignity of those Vapours . Tho the Copper receives easily all thick or dark Enamels , it can't be brought so well to endure the clear and limpid ; now if you would make use of these last , you must first lay a lay of Green , or Black , and thereon a Leaf of Silver to receive the Enamel suitable for that Metal mentioned in the former Chapter ; so that in the main 't is much better to make use of Silver for the Transparent Enamels , since the Copper is so apt to foul , and the charge in either much the same . In Enameling on Copper , you must take a Plate of red Copper forged smooth , and even applying your Enamel of what Colour you desire above and under the Plate as before ; then put this into the reverberatory Furnace , and when it receives its polishing , draw it out . CHAP. CLXXXV . To prepare the Enamel for the Metals . BEFORE you apply your Enamel on the Metal , you must give it this little Preparation , which is the easiest , and best approv'd on by the Goldsmith ; we will instance it in White Enamel , because that is more generally made use of than any other . Take White Enamel of the Sixth Book , Chap. 149. pulverize it very fine , pour on it a little Aqua fortis , and let it afterwards purifie and refine in a small Glass Cucurbit . Wash it afterwards often in Fair-Water , dry and keep it in a close Vessel for use . To make use of it , first pound a quantity thereof in a Stone Mortar , wetting it with a little Water , and so spread it on the Plates , and into the Furnace with it as before . Thus do with all your clear and transparent Enamels , and you 'll have all your things in a readiness to go on with your Work as you think convenient . CHAP. CLXXXVI . To prepare the Colours for Painting on Enamel . NOTHING can be more splendid than the Paint on Enamel , and for this use must be chosen the liveliest and most Noble Colours , and such as will easily vitrifie and melt . All these assigned throughout the Sixth Book , are as equally sufficient for this , as for Enameling ; if you grind them first on your Marble with the best Oyl of Spike , or mix'em together with the other Ingredients for that purpose , as we shall give a fuller account in the next Chapter , and of all the Matters to be used with calcined Enamels , which serve to make up the Paint for Enamel mixing them well together as Painters do on their Pallets : When you want some Colours of Enamel , you may with Blue and Yellow make a good fair Green ; a Blue and Red mixt , will produce a fine Violet ; a Red and White creates a Rose-colour ; a Black and White forms a gallant Gray , and so of others . Every Workman has his own Secret , and peculiar way of Working , but most of them make use of Rocaille for varnishing their Colours , which has an ill effect , because of too much Lead , which is not perfectly purged off ; this lessens the Life and Splendour , and it always continues as it were tarnished , cloudy , and dull . But our Enamel being well refined , will produce Work so fine and agreeable , that 't is not possible to find any thing so illustrious and accomplisht ; and such as for their one private diversion , would work herein , and have not the conveniency of a Glass-house , may easily be furnished , by proceeding to make one according to the directions already given . Notwithstanding the sufficiency of our Enamel for affording all sorts of Colours and Tinges in painting on Enamel , we will yet prescribe other means for this , no way inferiour thereto , to answer the Advantage and Curiosity of those who Work at this Excellent Art. CHAP. CLXXXVII . To make White for Painting on Enamel . THE best Workmen , for the most part , use the White Enamel ground , which they can manage with address enough to heighten and illustrate their Lights , which is necessary to be done to all their Colours , as in Miniature : But as it is difficult to preserve the Ground justly for improving those other Colours , and ordering the Compositions ( all one as in Carnation ) you must take of our Crystal ground prepared with Tin and Lead purged and refined as in Chap. 158. or rather of our Milk-colour Enamel in Chap. 159. which is the fairest can be made ; cleanse it with Aqua fortis , wash , dry , and grind it afterwards with Oyl of Spike . Or you may prepare another White Ground without Lead , thus : Take very pure Tin calcined , as in the Chapter aforesaid , and let it vitrifie in a Glass-house Pot , with eight times as much Crystal Frit , as we have directed the Preparation in Chap. 6 , pulverize these very fine , and proceed precisely according to Prescription for Purification , &c. in Chap. 158. CHAP. CLXXXVIII . To make a Black for painting on Enamel . THO the Black Enamels prescribed in Chap. 156. and those succeeding it may serve to Paint on Enamel with this Colour , without any other Preparation than grinding it with Oyl of Spike ; yet we will add here another Black no less excellent and fine , arising from equal parts of Black-Enamel , and Peregrine well calcined , mix and reduce them to an impalpable Powder , and then apply Oyl of Spike , and you 'll have a Colour which will take with great facility on the Enamel . CHAP. CLXXXIX . A Yellow for Paint on Enamel . WE will only make use of our Enamel , prepared in Chap. 162. mixt and purified with Aqua fortis , and after washed in clean Water , as in Chap. 185. dry and grind this Powder with Oyl of Spike on your Marble , and 't is fit for use . With this Yellow and a Blue , as we have already hinted , may be made a fair Green ; but those Enamels described in Chap. 153. and the succeeding , are so just and fine , that 't is needless to use any other for that purpose ; this Preparation for the Yellow here laid down is sufficient also for it , without any further trouble . CHAP. CXC . A Blue to paint on Enamel . THE Enamels of this Colour assigned in Chap. 151. and 152. are the Noblest can be used in this Work , purifie them with Aqua fortis , and grind them with Oyl of Spike , as before directed for the other Colours . You may because it is vetrified , make another fine enough Blue thus . Take Painters Enamel prepared , add to this ( put into a Glass-Bottle ) best rectified Aqua-Vitae , enough to drown the Stuff by four Inches , stop it well , and set it in the Sun-shine for five or six Days , shaking the Bottle well three or four times a Day , that the purer Enamel may dissolve , and the grosser fall to the bottom ; take the Enamel out of your Bottle , and steep the Faces , letting them precipitate as useless ; then evaporate your Aqua-Vitae , and dry your Azure , which will be a very fine well cleansed Matter for all sorts of this Work ; grind it after on your Marble . This Enamel so prepared , is most proper for Painting , and far beyond the Vltra Marine , so much made use of . We shall in the Tenth Book prescribe some other excellent Methods to make Blues very fine , with a Receipt for Vltra Marine , and several other Colours in favour of those who affect that Noble Art of Limning . CHAP. CXCI. A Red Paint for Enamel . THere can nothing exceed the Perfection of our Enamels of this Colour , taught in eight several Chapters of the Sixth Book ; the like may be said of our Blood-colour , Rubies , Rose and Carbuncle , which is the most exalted Ingredient for Enameling Metal , or making Paint on Enamel ; and those who practise this fine Art , use no other than that of the Glass-house , or such as they make accordingly . Now this Red Enamel is prepared as the other Colours with Aqua-fortis to purifie it , wash'd , dry'd , and ground with Oyl of Spike for your use . There is yet another tolerable Red , which they Paint with on Enamel , in which is employed calcined Gold ; but this would be much more improved , if instead of their Rocaille they made use of our Matter made of Crystal and Saturnus Glorificatus in Chap. 113. or of our principal prepared Powder prescribed all along the Sixth Book , for these are exceeding well purified , whereas the Rocaille has too great a Surcharge of Lead , the Impurity whereof always renders the Work defective . See here their way of calcining Gold , which is not near so fine as that we have given Chap. 115. and as there are an hundred several ways , so every Man makes use of his own as most excellent , and thinks it better than another's . One takes an Ounce of fine Gold in very thin Plates , these dissolved in eight Ounces of Aqua-fortis , and regulated with Sal-Armoniack , or old strong Salt , in a small Glass Matrass , this is put into a Glass-Cucurbit , wherein was already pour'd eight Paris Pints of Spring-Water , and six Ounces of Mercury , the Cucurbit is placed on a still Fire , and after four and twenty Hours the Gold descends to the bottom in a light Land-red Powder , then the Water is poured off leisurely into an earthen glazed Receiver , or Pan , and the Powder gathered and dryed by a moderate heat , and with a Shamois Skin they separate the Mercury from the Gold , and grind this Powder with twice its weight of Flowers of Sulphur together , and then put all into a Crucible over a small Fire , where the Sulphur will communicate it self with the rest , and then evaporating they find the Powder somewhat ruddy , which ground with Rocaille , is what they make use of on the Enamel . We own this Calcination to be tolerable as to the Gold , but as for mixing the Calx with the Rocaille , without melting them together to incorporate is disputable : We believe that in grinding them together with Oyl of Spike , they may in some sort incorporate as other Colours , but can never so perfectly unite ; besides , the Crystal Matter does not so well receive the Colour of the Gold this way , as if it were done by fusion . Others make Red inclining to Vermilion , which they use in Painting after this manner . Take Vitriol calcined in two Crucibles well luted together , and set for an Hour over a flow Fire ; then purge it with Aqua-fortis , wash it in fair Water , and grind it with Oyl of Spike as before , and so make use of it for Enamel . All Red Enamel which is good , ought to be hard , and not easily consumed in the Fire ; for that which is otherwise , contains much Lead , and soon becomes dull and sullied , and is not of so lasting a substance , which the Workmen ought to be cautious of . To finish the Preparation of Enamel , and before the manner of painting 'em is prescribed , take notice , that all the Colours before mentioned , which are not pure Enamel , ought to be incorporated with a Crystalline Matter , such as we prescribed in Chap. 148. to the end they may vitrifie the better , which else they 'll not easily do , the most Workmen make use of their Rocaille , whether to avoid the trouble of making ( or that they are ignorant how to prepare ) a better Matter ; and this has obliged us to give several ways very good and true for their purpose to make fine and perfect Work by . CHAP. CXCII . The Way to Paint on Enamel . THIS Art is revered by all Nations , 't is so fine and so excellent , that the first and Noblest Persons of the World practise in it , as we have said elsewhere : It is certain that the Art of painting on Enamel is modern , but no less estimable for that , since its effects are so wonderfully beautiful , so infinitely lasting , of so Natural a Gloss , and their Splendour never to be defaced . If it were possible to make large Works of Enamel , as is done in Picture , they would be inestimable because of their Lustre , and so far surpass what Antiquity has had such great respect for , and which these latter Ages still caress with extraordinary esteem . This way of painting on Enamel , seems much more difficult than Limning ; Practice however convinces us , that they are equally easie , and we can with as little trouble represent any History on Enamel , as in Limning ; the difference lies only in preparing the Colours , which is not done the same way ; for we dry and varnish our Enamel-paint by Fire , whereas that in Limning is done by the Air. To paint on Enamel , you must have a Plate of Gold enamel'd with White , on which delineate and pourtray your Design . This done , draw it over again in dark Red : The Piece being perfectly done off , and the Lines compleat to the Subject , set the Tablet , or Piece in the Muffle , on a reverberatory Fire , to settle as before directed . Your Tablet being taken out , apply the Colours in a just order as in Limning , with this difference only , that here you make your White Ground serve for filling , where that Colour is required to set off the heightnings and lustre of the Lights as is done in Miniature ; and because it mightily contributes to the heightening thereof in the other Colours as to improving their Lights , we have given a most excellent Receipt in Chap. 187. which very excellently serves upon this occasion . When the Piece is thus finished , put it again into the Furnace to fix the Colours , and as soon as you perceive it varnish or polish , draw it out least the Colours mix and spoil each other . You may take out the Work again , and revise it as often as you please , only putting it still into the Furnace until it receives its just Gloss , &c. This way of renewing and revising the Tables , is done in Limning with Oyl ; and the Painters observe that the Pieces must not be handled until they are well dry'd in the Air , so those in Enamel must be let alone until they receive their perfection from the Fire . This is all to be observed in Painting on Enamel ; it remains only for us to shew how to prepare your dark Red for tracing the Design ; you may have it thus . Take the Caput Mortuum which remains in the Retort , after the Aqua-fortis is made of your Vitriol and Nitre , grind it with Oyl of Spike , and so you have the dark Red ready for your use ; or you may make it with Crocus Martis , ground with Oyl of Spike . The End of the Seventh BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK VIII . Containing the Way to make China , or fine Earthen Ware ; how to Enamel , Paint , and Gild them . CHAP. CXCIII . POrcelaine , Fayence , China , or fine Earthen-Ware , is enamel'd with our White Stuff , which we have already prescribed for Metals ; and its Painting the same , and of such Colours as we have proposed for Enamels in the foregoing Book , and this obliges us to discourse thereof in this our eight Book . The Custom of enameling on Ware , is of greater Antiquity than that on Metals , for in the time of Porcenna , who generously undertook the Restauration of Tarquin to the Roman Government in the Consulate of Valer. Publicola and Horat. Pulvilius Ann. Mund. 3444 , five hundred and four Years before the coming of Jesus Christ , or thereabouts , the practice of enameling on Were was used in the Estates of that Prince ; and what gives us very good reason to believe this is the Name Porcelaine , which has an Affinity to Porcenna , tho altered by the corruption of Time , so it is also called fayence from Fayence in the Dutchy of Vrbin , where in the Time of Michael Ange , and Raphael Vrbain , this Art was practised . And as the Secrets of Nature are daily more and more discovered , so has time employed the Invention of Man to improve this , and make it more excellent , not only condescending to enameling , but proceeding also to Painting and pourtraying thereon several Curiosities , to which at length is added the Ornaments of Gilding . These Pieces of Ware are of a very general use over all the World , as for Ornaments over Chimney-pieces , on Cabinets and Tables , or Boards . The choicest come in us from China , and next to those are done at St. Clowd and Rouen ; but there are very good made in Holland , at 〈◊〉 in Italy , and several other places in France . The painting and enameling on these , is what we are properly obliged to take notice of in our Art ; however we shall slightly touch upon the Composition and Molding the Ware , and for this we will prescribe fine and delicate Methods sufficient enough to answer the Satisfaction of such as employ themselves in this Art , and of those Persons whose Curiosity leads them to enquire after things , whereof they are not already informed . CHAP. CXCIV . The Furnace for making of China , MUST be large , with an Opening proportioned to the Vessel you are to place therein ; of these there are several sorts , but the most commodious must be made as follows . You may shape this Furnace round or square , but the square is best , because of the Opening ; it must be made of good Brick and such Stuff as can mostly endure the Fire , of what bigness you please , with three Divisions ; the lowest for the Ashes must be a Foot high , that the Air may be communicated through its Opening to the Fire ; the middle Story is for the Fire , and must be underlaid with a very good Grate to separate it from the under Story , with an Opening for the Fuel , and be vaulted above about a Foot in heighth : According to the Size of your Furnace this Vault must be made like that of an Oven , and have an Hole in the middle of the same shape as the Furnace , round or square , and proportioned to its bigness , through which the Flame may transmit it self to the uppermost Story , where the Vessels are put to bake in ; this last Story is to be at least two Foot high , and its Opening fourteen or fifteen Inches , to put and draw the Vessels easily in and out ; the top must be vaulted too with such a round or square hole , and over that a Funnel , for the conveniency of the Flame and Smoak which it draws out . All the Opening , especially the two uppermost , must be of strong Brick , or Crucible Earth , or rather of Iron , well luted within side , which must shut and open easily , and be very exact and sit , that the Fire may not suck in any cold Air , which might break the Vessels . This Furnace will serve also for many other uses , as to Melt , Reverberate , Calcine , Cement , and several sorts of Works in the Laboratory of Chimistry ; because in it all the degrees of Fire may be found by the help of the lower Opening , and the Funnel of the Chimney . You may else for Baking your China , make use of the Furnace hereafter described in Chap. 202. where we discourse of Painting on Glass , putting thereinto your Vessel of Crucible-Earth for Baking the Ware in , and then cover'd over with a vaulted Coverlid , with a hole at top to let out the Flame and Smoak of the Reverberatory Fire ; for this reason there will be no occasion in this sort of Furnace for any other Opening , because the Baking Vessels with your Ware , are put in a top before the Coverlid is laid on , and so the Fire circulates about it , and it becomes very Red , whereby the China-Ware is Baked , as is done in Baking of Pipes . CHAP. CXCV. To make your Stuff for China-Ware . THE Composition for this must be very fine , because of the Ware , and not such as is used for ordinary Vessels , we will therefore prescribe the Manner of making it , to prevent the unsuccessful Attempts of such as may be ignorant . For this you must take of Shells of every sort which are White and Transparent , grind them well on a Marble , then searce and reduce them to an impalpable Powder . To make your Paste of this Powder , first dissolve an Ounce of very white Gum-Arabick in a Pail of Water ; when 't is well dissolved and mixt with the Water , dissolve therein about a quarter as much Quick-lime as your Powder weighs , then stir and mix it very well , and afterwards put in the Powder and stir all together , and knead it as they do Mortar ; of this Stuff form your Vessels according to the different sorts you desire , let them half dry , or more , in the Air , before you polish them with your smooth Instrument of Copper , or Iron for that purpose , and so leave 'em until they dry throughly : Being very well smoothed and dried , glaze them over with your White Enamel , prepared as we 'll direct in the next Chapter , and so set them in the Furnace to Bake and finish , where having kept them a convenient time , let the Fire go out of its self : When the Furnace is cold , take 'em out and paint them and put them in again to Bake a second time , observing what directions we have already given concerning these Matters , and when the Fire is gone out , and the Furnace cold , you have the Ware in perfection ready to take out for use . You may make your China-Ware also of pure Earth ; let it not be red tho , but White or Gray ; you may try the sufficiency of it after 't is prepared , by Baking some beforehand , and when it comes out of the Furnace sound and uncracked , 't is good and fit for your purpose . The Preparation consists in drying it well , and reducing it to a very fine Powder ; then put it into fair Water , wherein has been already dissolved a little Gum-Arabick ; but most of those that make it , employ only Water without Gum ; after this you may make your Dishes , set 'em to dry , Polish , Dry , Glaze , Bake , Paint , and finish them as before ; all which , those who work at them know better than I can express it . CHAP. CXCVI. How to Enamel the China . FOR this take of our Milk-white Enamel Chap. 149. grind it very fine , as Painters do their Colours ; put the Powder afterwards into a Glass-Cucurbit , pouring some Aqua-fortis thereon ; let it digest a little to cleanse off its Impurities , and become fine and transparent ; then pour off the Aqua-fortis , washing the Powder in Water over and over again , grind it afterwards with a little Gum-Water on your Marble , and so glaze the Vessels with it within and without , dry them in the Air , and Bake them as before in the Furnace . Or you may heat the Vessels to a Redness in the Furnace , and melt the Enamel ; when it is in a perfect Fusion , dip the smaller Vessels therein , and pour of it on the larger , for they will take no more on them than will serve them , set them by turns in the Furnace , stopping it very well to avoid the Air : Bake , cool your Furnace , and finish them as before , then take out the Dishes , Paint and Bake them over again , observing all our former Directions . CHAP. CXCVII . To paint the China . THIS is done as the Enamel discoursed of in Chap. 192. but much more easily , the Figures being only just dasht over in comparison to them ; however you must grind your Colours with Oyl of Spike on the Marble , as we have said already , and so paint on the Dishes Story , Landscape , or any other Fancy , but you must never expect to have them thereon so compleat and handsome , as those painted on the enamel'd Plates , because the former are finisht standing , and so enlarge in length or breadth , whereas the other are done on flats , and lying ; besides the Dishes are for the most part round , and not so easily painted ; for if they cou'd be as neatly done as the Enamel , they would be excessive dear . CHAP. CXCVIII. To Gild China . YOU must first grind some Shade-Earth on a Marble , with Linseed-Oyl , prepared as shall be shewn in Chap. 200. with which trace out your Figures , which must be two whole Days a drying ; after this apply very thin Leaf-Gold , and with a sharp Graver , shape the Figures , and then put the Dishes in an Oven , as soon as the Batch of Bread is drawn out , let the Heat be no greater than one's Hand may endure , else the Vessels would crack ; leave them in it for two or three Hours or more , if the Oven be not too hot ; you may else make use of our own Furnace , by giving it the same moderate degree of heat , as experienced Persons are well acquainted with . CHAP. CXCIX . Another Way . THIS is much more handsome and lively , besides that it cannot be effaced ; you may with it gild Vessels entirely , or border , or give them any lustre you think convenient for Ornament , and it will look as well as fine Gold. You must first wet over the Places you would gild with Gum-Water lightly , then apply your Leaves , and so let them dry , this is enough for plain Gilding ; but if you would have it carved , or figured , you must make use of a Steel-Graver , and afterwards bath the Gold with Water , wherein Borax has been dissolved , powdering it in the mean time with Crystaline Powder , or Milk-white Enamel reduced to a very fine Powder ; then set the Dish on a Reverberatory Fire to melt and be polisht ; thus you 'll have as fine a piece of Ware as can be . CHAP. CC. The Way to prepare Linseed-Oyl for Gilding of China . IT is but just we should discharge our Promise of prescribing this Preparation . Take a Paris Pint of Linseed-Oyl in an Earthen Pot which will hold about two Paris Pints , put this on a Fire , and when it begins to boil throw in twice the bigness of a small Egg of Gum-Arabick pulverized , stir all well until it be dissolved , then put in an Onion of an ordinary size , and the like weight of Garlick cut small ; when the Oyl boils well , and swells up by the force of the good Fire which must be underneath , pour it out into another such Pot , and so in and out of each Pot to the other until all be very well mixed ; then put it on the Fire again , adding half an Egg-shell of Powder of Mastick , and stir it very well ; as soon as it boils again , it will foam and have a great Froth which must be scummed off , and then take it off the Fire and brew the Ingredients together with the two Pots as before , continue to do thus with it , or stir it on the Fire until it rise no more . This done , take a very dry Toast of White Bead to take off the Grease ( the Oyl still boiling ) and when you put in the Toast , you must at the same time put in some Pin-Dust ; stir all well together and let it stand for twenty four Hours afterwards ; strain the Oyl through a Linen-cloth , in which is some very fine Sand , the better to filtrate it , and take off the Grease , and so you 'll have it pure and clear , which Bottle up for your Use. Or you may ( both ways being good enough ) first mix with the Oyl two Ounces of Gold Litharge pulverized , adding the Gum-Arabick as soon as it begins to boil , and to purifie it let it filter through a Linen-cloth full of Sand , while it 's hot , into a Glass-Bottle , wherein is already half an Ounce of fine Camphire Powder , shaking the Bottle very well until the Oyl be cold ; afterwards lay it in the Sun for fifteen Days , and it will be entirely purged , and the longer 't is kept will be the better . This is all we have to say at present about China-Ware , until we have further enlarged our Knowledge in the Matter , which we have not much study'd , because we did not intend to treat of it ; however we afterwards thought it incumbent on us so to discourse thereof as an Art dependant on ours ; and we hope the Reader will take this in good part , until we may give him something more at large . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK IX . Shewing the Method of Drawing all sorts of Story , or Figure , on Glass , in Paint , Gilding , Marbling , &c. CHAP. CCI. THE Art of Painting has been still so Noble and Excellent , that all those great Persons , who have practised it , were always distinguisht among the most eminent of their Age ; those celebrated Pieces we have of it in our Days , to the Ornament and Admiration of all Europe , has setled so great a Veneration for their Memory , as will eternize it to Posterity . The Dorians , Corinthians , Ionians , and Romans , were the People that paid the most esteem to this Noble Art , for which they conceived so great Opinion and Delight , that they lookt upon the famous Painters of their Time as Demi-Gods , and ranged them among the first and most Learned Men in the World. The Ancients did not only pay a Deference and Honour to the Nobility and Illustrious Birth of Great Men , but to their Worth and Vertue too : Hence the Athenians erected a Statue in Memory of Aesop , who was but a poor Slave : Would they have done it if this eminently Ingenious Fellow had not possessed so many excellent Parts ? No , 't was not for the sake of his Picture which was too deformed and ugly to please or Charm 'em , but to convince Posterity how the way to Glory is not shut up from the meanest Persons . Can there be any thing more taking , or compleat , than the Natural Imitations which issue from Painting ? Has Nature any thing more considerably admirable ? Do we not see her display'd in the Pourtraits of those Excellent Masters , who with so much Art and Delicacy have exprest all whatever she has produced in this sublunary inferiour Orb , so that 't is not possible to see them without admiring , or to admire them without Astonishment . What wonderful Fancies too have they drawn from the Superiour and Heavenly ! They have so lively shewn the Rising and Setting Sun , Night and Day , the Face of Heaven sometimes Calm and Serene , and again darkned with Clouds , the Thunder Showers , Storms and Seas raging , with all their Wrecks , and in the Microcosm , or little World of Man , they have exprest his Joy , Sadness , Smiles , Tears , Pleasure , Dissatisfaction , Life and Death ; in short , all the Alterations which Creatures are liable to , whereof the enumeration would be very tedious . This fine Art , as well as that of Glass , does not lessen the quality of its Practitioners , the contrary whereof happens in all other Arts ; for Princes , and many of our Monarchs , have granted the Privilege of Nobility to several Masters thereof , to intimate to Posterity the extraordinary Esteem they had for them , upon the Excellency of those Incomparable Pieces which their Pencils had produced . Though painting on Glass be very ancient , 't is yet much more modern than that of Painting on Wood , or Cloath , as being of no longer standing than this Art of Glass-work : The first who painted on Glass , did it only in Distemper ; that is , in Colours mixt with Glue , but this not abiding the Injury of Time , they invented the way of doing it with Fire-Proof Colours , which are incorporated with the Glass , by Baking and Melting them together ; and as soon as this Secret was discovered , every Body took delight to practice the Draught of Figures , and entire Histories thereon for Ornaments , whereof we have still some remaining Pieces on old Church Glass ; but those Figures before the Year 1500 , had not half the sufficiency of Base , or Relief , as is required in Painting . Those who would fain Work in handsome and lively Colours , made use of Glass-Frit , tinged in the Glass-house , as well for Carnation as Drapery , whereon they drew the first Lines of the Visage , and other Parts of the Body in Black , and so Shadowed 'em with Strokes and Dashes . But Painting having since received an Improvement in France , those Works became more perfect , and in so short a time with such advantage of making fair and most exquisite Pieces , as are even at this Day the Admiration of the Learned , of which , all the Honour must be ascribed to the French , who were the first Discoverers of this great Perfection in the Art. We might easily assign several ways of this Painting among the Ancients , but since they are out of Practice , and the latter Methods much more excellent , we shall satisfie our selves in prescribing only such as may suffice , and gratifie the Curiosity of those who love this Art. And not only the Method of Painting , but also how to prepare the Colours , to bake and finish 'em in the Furnace ; of this we 'll give a short Description in the next Chapter ; that Secret of ordering the Fire , which is the Life and principal Agent of all the Works , with that of Gilding , Marbling , &c. as will be shewn in the Sequel of this Book . The most part of Ingredients useful for this Service of Painting , will also tinge the Glass well enough , and we will make use of those mentioned elsewhere , to avoid useless Repetitions on the Subject . CHAP. CCII. A Furnace for Painting the Glass , and Setling the Colours . WE have mentioned this Furnace in Chap. 194. but did not take notice of its Form , or Appurtenances , because the Business which obliges us to speak of it there , is very different from this . In this uppermost Division must be put the aforesaid Stove of good Fire-proof Crucible Earth , the Bottom an Inch and half thick , and from thence up to the Brim ten Inches full ; it must be square as the Furnace , and have two Inches room from on all sides , that the Fire may flame round about it to Bake the Work , and therefore placed exactly in the middle of the Furnace ; there must be also in the Fire-part of this Stove , an Opening just against , and of the same Size and Form as that of the Furnace , for the conveniency of putting the Ware in and out . Take this Method of distinguishing the Furnace in all its parts , and to lay down a clearer description thereof , observe , The Letter A is the Ash-hole for the Ashes that fall from above through the Iron-Grate ; and note , That the wider the Opening is , the more violent will the Fire be . The Letter B is the Fire-place . The Letters C are three Square Iron-Bars to support the Pan for the Ware. The Letter D is the Opening of the Furnace and Pan , through which the Ware must be conveyed in and out . The Letter E is the Earthen Pan , wherein all the Painted-Ware must be Baked . The Letters F are two half Lids of Potters Earth for covering the whole Furnace above : As soon as the Stove is full of Ware , they must be well closed and luted together , to prevent the Air coming in any where but by the four square holes at both ends of the Lid , and the two Semicircles in the middle , which make a round Hole for a Chimney ; when the two half Lids are closed , those five Holes are for letting out the Smoak and Flame of the Furnace . CHAP. CCIII . To make White-Ground for Painting on Glass . NOW to pursue our Work , we will begin with the Preparation of all the Colours to be used in Painting Glass ; for before we proceed to prescribe the Rules , how to work the Materials must first be considered . The White is compounded of several Ingredients : The first are small White River Peble-Stones heated red over a Fire , in an Iron-Ladle , and thrown afterwards into an Earthen-Dish full of cold Water to calcine them , and this must be repeated several times , until they be prepared ; afterwards being dried , pound them with a Stone , or Glass-Pestle in a Stone-Morter , and so grind them upon a Marble to an impalpable Powder ; then mix a fourth part of Nitre with it , and calcine them in a Crucible ; then pound and grind them again , and calcine them a third time over a smaller Fire than your former , and so take them off for Use. This done , when you would Paint with it , add equal parts in weight of Gip , a sort of Talc found among Plaster-mold baked on the Coals to a Whiteness , and reducible to Powder , and Rocaille , whereof we have already spoken , grind them all three very well together in a hollow Plate of Copper , with Gum-Arabick Water ; thus have you your White in good condition to Paint withal . CHAP. CCIV. To prepare Black for painting on Glass . AS this Colour cannot be omitted in any sort of Painting , so in this ; the manner of using it is much the same , and the Preparation easie . You must grind Scales of Iron from the Smith's Anvil-Block , for three Hours on the shallow Copper-Bason , or Plate ; add to this one third of the same weight of Rocaille , with a little Calx of Copper , to hinder the Iron from turning Red in the Fire ; grind it to as impalpable a Powder as you can bring it to , and so keep it in a close Vessel for use . CHAP. CCV . To prepare a Yellow Paint for Glass . THIS Colour requires a more costly Preparation than the precedent , because it cannot be well done without a tenth part of prepared Silver , as we shall shew hereafter . Take fine Silver in Plates from the Copple , stratifie 'em in a Crucible , with Powder of Sulphur , or Nitre , the first and last Lay being of the Powder , and so calcine them in a Furnace ; this done , cast it out , as soon as all the Sulphur is consumed , into an Earthen-Bason of Water , and afterwards pound it in your Stone-Mortar until 't is fit for the Marble , and so grind it with some of its Water wherein it was cooled , for six Hours ; then add nine times its weight of Red-Oaker , and grind them together for a full Hour , and 't is done and fit for Painting on Glass . CHAP. CCVI. To make a Blue for painting Glass . THE whole Secret of this Preparation , depends on the calcining the Ingredients , and goodness of the Crucible : Take two Ounces of Zaffer , two Ounces of Minium , and eight Ounces of very fine White Sand ; put all these into a Bell-metal Mortar , and pound them very well , and so into a Crucible covered and luted over a quick Fire for an Hour ; then draw off the Crucible , and pound them again as before : This done , add a fourth of its weight in Salt-peter powdered , and having mixed all very well together , return them into a Crucible covered and luted , which place again in the Furnace for two Hours at least , continuing such another Fire as the former : The Crucible being off and cool'd a second time , grind the Mass as before , and so put it into a Crucible again , with a sixth part of Salt-petre , and let it remain on the Fire for three Hours ; then take off the Crucible , and immediately with an Iron-Spatula red hot , take out the Matter lest it should stick , being very clammy and hard to be emptied . 'T is convenient to have strong Crucibles for this Calcination , because it remains so considerable a while in the Fire , and they must be luted with an extraordinary lute ; you may use that we have given directions for in Chap. 109. adding Powder of Borax , to the Powder of Glass vitrified , which helps the Fusion of the Glass , which we have omitted there ; but the greatest stress lies in Baking the Crucible afterwards in a small Fire , to cement the Pores , and make the Earth compact as Glass , which would be very much furthered , if you threw on it a considerable quantity of Salt as it comes out of the Fire , this would glaze it , and capacitate it for retaining the Spirits in the Fire . CHAP. CCVII. To make Red Colour for Glass Paint . THIS requires as much caution as the Blue : You must take Scales of Iron , and Litharge of Silver , of each a Dram , Feretto of Spain half a Dram , Rocaille three Drams and half ; grind all these for half an Hour on a shallow Copper-Plate , in the mean time pound three Drams of Blood-Stone in an Iron-Mortar , and add it to the rest ; then pound a Dram of Gum-Arabick in that Mortar to an impalpable Powder , to take off the remains of your Blood-stone , and so add it to the rest , grinding them still continually , lest the Blood-stone be spoiled . The best manner of grinding these is to pour Water by little and little on the Ingredients as you grind them , neither wetting them too much , nor too little , but just as much as will keep a good Temper as for Painting : Afterwards put all into a foot Glass , and so drop on it through a small hollow Cane of Wood , or with your Finger , as much Water as will bring it to the consistence of an Eggs-Yolk buttered , or a little more , then cover the Glass to preserve it from Dust , and so let it stand three Days to settle . After this , decant the clearest and purest of the Colours that rise at top , into another Glass , without disturbing the Sediment ; and two Days after it has settled anew , pour off again the purest of the Colours as before . This done , set it in the Body of a broken Matrass , or Bolt-head , over a gentle flow Fire , to dry easily , and so keep it for use . When you have occasion for it , take a little fair Water in a Glass , and with it moisten as much Colour as you think convenient , that will be excellent for Carnation ; as for the Faeces , which are very thick , dry 'em too , and you may moisten these in like manner with Water for Drapery , Timber-colour , and such other as you think convenient . CHAP. CCVIII . To make a Purple-colour for painting of Glass . THE Preparation of this Purple-colour , is exactly like that of the Blue , for this Reason we need not use any tedious Repetitions : You must take an Ounce of Zaffer , and an Ounce of very pure and clean Perigeux , two Ounces of Minium , eight Ounces of very fine white Sand , pound all these in a Bell-metal Mortar , and reduce it to an impalpable Powder ; put it afterwards into a good Crucible well covered and luted , in the Furnace ; keep a very good Fire to it for an Hour , then draw it out , and as soon as it is cold , pound the Mass over again in the same Mortar ; to this add a fourth part of its weight of Nitre , mix them together , and put them into the Crucible , and so proceed as directed in Chap. 206. until you have a fine Purple-colour . CHAP. CCIX. To make a Green Paint for Glass . THE Change of the Ingredients makes this Colour , but the Method for incorporating them is the same as the former : Take two Ounces of Aes ustum , of Chap. 35. to this add two Ounces of Minium , and eight Ounces of very fine white Sand , pound these together in a Metal Mortar to an impalpable Powder , and put it afterwards in a Crucible luted and covered into a Wind-Furnace , giving it a good Fire for an Hour ; after this draw it off , and let it cool , then pound it again , adding a fourth part its weight of Nitre in Powder , grind and mix them well together , putting them afterwards into the Crucible , luted and covered , in the Furnace , for two Hours , and so forth as in Chap. 206. Thus you 'll have a very fine Green. CHAP. CCX . Of other Colours in general for Painting on Glass . WE have directed how to make the first MasterColours for Painting on Glass ; now we proceed to shew what other depends on them without enlarging on these Preparations . The Red in Chap. 207 , serve for Carnation , but there ought to be one part of Feretto of Spain , as in Chap. 21. in the Composition , and another of Rocaille , of which we will give the Preparation in the next Chapter ; grind these on your Copper Plate , imbibing the Powder with Gum'd Water , until it be made fit for use . The Red Faeces there also mentioned will serve in Drapery , and to describe Timber-work , Trunks of Trees , Hair , Brick , and such other things ; you must take an Ounce of Feretto of Spain in Chap. 21. as in the former Composition , an Ounce of Iron-Scales , two Ounces of Rocaille , grind them well together upon the Copper-Plate , moistening them with Gum-Water , till they be brought to the proper consistence , neither too thick nor too thin , so you 'll have a Red inclining to a dark Yellow , very fit for use . There be several more made use of in this , as well as in other Painting , but are compounded of the principal Colours , as we have intimated in our Discourse of Colours for Painting on Enamel , in Chap. 186. CHAP. CCXI. The Way to make Rocaille . ALL Haberdashers of Small-Ware , sell this Rocaille , which are Green and Yellow Grains , whereof they make Beads , and sell them to the Country People ; much also of these Trangums are exported to the Indies , to Africa , and the adjacent places , where the Inhabitants wear 'em about their Necks , and on their Scarfs , Bracelets and Wastbelts . It is used also in Painting on Enamel and Glass , veryfrequently , though ill qualified and full of impure Lead . We have already taken notice of this before , and tho to avoid this they make choice of the most clear and transparent Rocaille , and such as is least charged with Colour , yet still 't is very far from being sufficient ; 't is true , it contains less Lead , however even that which still remains is likewise impure , and not at all purified . We have directed such as work in Enamel , and we cannot avoid it also here to advise you instead of Rocaille , to make use of our Crystalline Matter made with Saturnus Glorificatus , Chap. 112. or such other-like Ingredients , as we have prescribed , which are perfectly cleansed ; however to please every Body , we will give a Preparation of this Rocaille , and how to compound it , which is very easily done : Thus , To make the Yellow Grains , you must take a Pound of fine white Sand , three Pound of Minium , mix and pound them together very well in a Mortar , and put the whole into a strong Crucible covered and luted , dry the lute , and put it afterwards into the Glass-house , or Wind-Furnace , where the Fire is violent , to reduce this Matter into Glass , as that of Saturn , made in Chap. 82. having thus finished the Rocaille , make it up into Grains , or any other Shape you please . The Way of making the Green , is quite contrary to that of the Yellow : Put three Pound of fine white Sand to every Pound of Minium , and it will be very compact . This Stu●● will alter its Colour , and become a pale Red in melting ; and these are the Compositions and way of making this Rocaille , which most Workmen use : Thus you see there can be no preparing it without Lead , which makes it so full of Impurity . CHAP. CCXII. The Way to Paint on Glass . THE Painting on Glass is of such fine Effect , as becomes the Admiration of the Learned in all Noble Arts : Nothing can be more wonderful to the Sight ; besides , its continuance , and resisting all the Efforts of every Season , and badness of Weather , for several Ages , tho this last Excellency was unknown to the first Practitioners , and reserved for this latter Age , however the Honour is due to them , since they made the first Secrets and Discoveries in this Art , and 't is much easier to improve , than form a new Invention . If Glass were malleable , and discharged of its Natural Frangibility , nothing could equal the Paint thereon ; 't is not to be tarnished , but always maintains its primitive Beauty and Splendour , without any obstruction to the Transition of Light ; and there may as fine Fancy be done on it , as on Limning , there would certainly be nothing on Earth so rich or precious as Glass , whether Painted , or Tinged , if it had this principal Perfection of Malleability , which many Learned Men have studied for , and daily find ; but such is the Corruption of this Sinful Covetous Age , that those Wise Seniors of this Art , do rather chuse to pass for Ignoramus's , than run the Risque of Perpetual Confinement , by exposing so fine and delicate a Secret , which would incur the Envy of the Great : and this they take care wisely to avoid . We have already taken notice that such as formerly Painted on Glass , were both Painters and Glass-makers , and that such Gentlemen as were of them , received neither lessening in Birth nor Quality , as in case of other Arts , for this Prejudice is exempted in the Art of Glass , and our Kings have that Esteem for the Curious therein , that they have granted them such ample Privileges . Now to proceed to the Manner of Painting on Glass , which is the Subject of this Chapter , wherein are several Particulars to be considered , which we will endeavour to distinguish as well as possible . First choose such Glass as is usually called Glass of Lorrain , tho there be such and as good made at Nevers ; for this sort of Glass receives the Colours better than any other , because 't is best compact and able to resist the Fire ; 't is very easily known ; 't is not altogether White , but of a Whitish Yellow . But to proceed . You must have the Original you Paint by , ready drawn and proportioned , on strong Cap-Paper , in all its Colours and Perfection ; for your better advantage in Pattern , lay it on a Table , and so choose your Pieces of Glass to be Painted , and take care to fit them so to each other , as they may joyn easily afterwards without any prejudice to the Draught from displacing them , and so confounding the Figures and Pourtraits , or from the Lead which must joyn them afterwards , by obscuring any parts of the painting ; then mark out each piece on the Tablet , by No. 1 , 2 , 3. for better distinction , and so trace them over with the Black given in Chap. 204. with a Pencil , as we shall further shew ; do this very exactly , neither too slightly nor too thick , and so let it stand two Days to dry , before you paint it . Then having all your Colours in readiness , so as directed in the foregoing Chapters , fill your Pieces off with Colours , for which use the Nib of the Pencil , especially in Carnation , where you must be very exact ; you must also be very Circumspect and Expeditions , and take a great deal of care not to blot or blur the Tracings , and chose rather to paint on the other side of the Glass . All the Colours , except Yellow , may be applied on the same side , and that you must do on the contrary side , because it is apt to mingle with the other Colours , and if near the Blue , will compose a Green ; so that for want of such precaution the whole Work may be spoil'd ; if the Yellow transmit it self perfectly through the Quarre , it is as well as if it had been done on the same side ; and take notice by the Way , that the other Colours have not so ready a Transition , because they consist of a Grosser Body . The Yellow ought to be very equally and justly laid on in a greater or lesser quantity , as you 'd have your Shadows ; observe this too in the rest , especially to lay them on as quick as possible , as we have already said , particularly the Azure , Green , and Purple require the most exactness of any . Now to set off and heighten the Lights , in piling a Beard , describing Hair in Drapery , or otherwise , use the Handle , or But-end of the Pencil , a small pointed Stick , or Quill , wherewith take off the Colours in those places you would Enlighten , which is easily done . Such Works as are done in Grisaille you must paint after this manner : Trace your Piece with Black , and let it dry for two Days entirely , do it over very lightly and equally with a Wash so thin laid on , as not to efface the first Lines , and let it dry for two Days ; after this run it over again with the same Wash where you find it convenient to give a second Tinge , and let it dry two Days longer : Then to give it the Lights ; and convenient Heightnings , take the sharp But-end of your Pencil , or pointed Stick , or Pen , as before , and take off the Colour of the first Wash , in the most necessary places , and so your Work will be finished . To make this Wash is easie : Take a small Pewter Cup , or other Vessel , and put therein a quantity of black colouring , then dissolve Gum-Arabick powdered in its weight of Wine , and throw this on the Black in the Pewter-dish , or Saucer , that it may be very clear , and not easily dry'd , and that you may have your Wash for painting Glass in Grisaille , or Gray . CHAP. CCXIII. How to order your Glass in the Furnace after Painting , and to manage the Fire . AFTER your Glass is fully painted , and the Draughts perfectly finished , the difficulty will be to Bake the pieces , so as to give it a consistency with the Glass , by penetration , which may be thus done . You must work with the Furnace mentioned in Chap. 202. and its Stove of good Crucible Earth , to contain all the Work , which must be stratified on this manner . Take good Quick-lime well digested , searced , and finely pulverized ; and for the better security let it digest thrice in a Potter's Furnace , and so powder and searce it ; then make a very even lay thereof , about half an Inch thick , on the bottom of your Stove , and then a lay of pieces of broken Glass , and afterwards another lay of Powder , and so another of Glass , then another of Powder ; the reason of making this Stratification of powder and old Glass , is to prevent any injury from the violence of the Fire , which will be very smart under the Stove ; this done upon the third Bed of powder , lay a lay of painted Glass , and so continue S.S.S. each lay of powder and Glass being equally or evenly made , untill all the pieces of paint are put in , or the Stove full , and upon the last lay of Glass lay the uppermost of powder somewhat thicker than the former ; then cover the Furnace with its Shrowds of Earth , joyning and luting them well together , all round with the best lute , so that it may admit of no respiration , but through the fire holes , or the Opening of the Furnace , whilst you draw out the proofs or Tryals you make , as we have hinted elsewhere . Your Furnace being thus ordered , and the lute dry'd very well , begin to heat it gently with some Charcoal on the outside of the Furnace , at the en●rance , and so by degrees , and very leisurely improving it , lest the Glass should be broken , or the paint spoil'd ; continue thus for two Hours , then thrust the Fire in further , and let it remain there for an Hour , putting it in by little and little under the Stove , where leave it for two Hours longer , then increase the Fire by degrees for two Hours , and so continue to apply Fuel until the Furnace be full of Charcoal , and you perceive the Flame convey its self through every hole of the Cover ; keep it thus very violent for three or four hours , shutting the Door of the Furnace ; you must be very cautious and circumspect , during the whole Work , from the first two hours that the Fire remains at the Entrance . Observe from time to time to draw forth your Tryals , or pieces of proof in your Stove , to see if the Colours be melted and the Yellow qualified , you may perceive how the Work goes on by the sparkling of the Iron-bars under the Stove . As soon as you find your Colours almost done , improve the Fire with some very small Billets of dry Wood , they must be very little for ease in putting them in , and to prevent Smoaking , and to make the Flame environ and reverberate over and round about the Stove , which must be continued until you have finished , this will be in twelve or fourteen hours ; then let the Fire go out and the Work cool of its self , and so take it out , and 't will be finished . CHAP. CCXIV. Another Way to Paint on Glass . THO the former way be very fine and lasting as can be , yet we will here shew another more easie , and altogether as effectual . Take very White Glass , varnish it very thin on one side with a White Varnish , then having before made choice of some fine Impress , or Cut , on Paper , just fit for the piece of Glass you design to paint its Fancy on , dip it in Water , and letting it soak and dry a little , clap the Picture-side thereof to the Varnish-side of the Glass , as exactly , plain , and evenly as possible , and so let it dry throughly ; afterwards moisten the Paper on the Blank-side , and with a blunt Graver draw off and trace the Lines of the Picture , which will afterward remain perfect and distinctly on the Varnish-side of your Glass Quarre . This Draught is for the Model you must paint your Fillings in , and observe that the Tracings and Strokes of the Picture are to serve you in Shadowing , which cannot be rejected without disadvantage to your piece . The manner of painting on Glass , is quite contrary to that of Limning , or Painting on Cloath , or Wood ; for in this the paint being but on one side , is plainly visible on the other ; here the Settings off are first done , then the compound Colours just run over , and so continuing until perfected ; whereas on Linen , &c. the Settings-off , or Heightnings , are the last strokes , and their Ground-colour , or first , is that which we end withal , and make our last lay with in all pieces done on Glass . We do not shew the Way to make up the Colours , nor how to mix and finish the Artificial ones , for that relates immediately to the Art of Painting , of which several pieces are extant , and not to this Art of Glass ; and these noted herein are the same as in the other Art of Painting on Cloath , and not very uneasily prepared . You must also paint on Glass , just as in Miniature , with Water-Colours , laying your Picture underneath it , as before , and this will shew finer than if done in Oyl ; besides , the Colours dry in a moment . Your pieces being thus done in Oyl , or Water-colour , may receive a very additional and improving Beauty , by over-laying all the Colours , except the Ground , with Leaf-Silver , which will appear very glorious and lively on such as are transparent ; to wit , Lakes , Verditers , &c. CHAP. CCXV . The Manner of Gilding on Glass . WE promised to shew this Way of Gilding on Glass after we had done with Painting , and this we will discharge here . Take any Glass you please , and moistening it over where you design to gild , with Gum-Water , apply your Leaf-Gold , and so let it dry ; cover the Glass over with any piece of hollow Glass , and set it on an Iron-Plate at the Mouth of the Furnace to heat gently , and when 't is well heated , move it in further , and in a very little time it will be red hot ; then withdraw it , and let it cool slowly at the Furnace Mouth . Thus if you have laid your Gold well on at first , you 'll find it so well communicated to the Glass , that 't is impossible for any Tryal to endamage the Gilding . And after this method you may do with Globes , and give them a wonderful Beauty , which no Dust , nor injury of Time can alter . CHAP. CCXVI . Another Way to Gild Glass . THIS second Way is altogether as fine as the other ; besides , the Gilding is better coated , and less exposed to Injury . Take a Glass and moisten it every where , you design to Gild , with Gum-Water , and lay on your Leaf-Gold , letting it dry ; this done , run the Gold over with Water wherein Borax has been dissolved , and so dust it with impalpable powder of Glass ; set it afterwards by degrees into your Furnace , until it become red hot , and the powder on the Gilding be melted and run ; then draw it out leisurely , letting it cool at the Mouth of the Furnace , and you 'll have your Glass very finely Gilded , so that nothing in Nature can spoil it , unless it be broken . Or you may Gild on Glass with Linseed-Oyl , &c. as in Chap. 198. after the same manner as on China , but the Ways we have just now given , are so fine , that we look upon them to be more excellent ; such as would make a choice may work by Directions in this present Chapter . CHAP. CCXVII . To imitate Precious-Stones in Colours , on Globes , or other Vessels of White Glass . THIS Way of tinging is different from what we have already given ; and because we would not willingly leave out any thing that may serve the Curious , we will give the Method in this Chapter . You may thus tinge any Vessel of White Glass either Globular , or Concave , with Mouth-Glue , letting it soak in Water for two Days , and so boil it afterwards until it be all melted , and let it cool ● little . Pour it Milk-warm into your Globe , or other Vessel , shaking it therein to wet it all over , and so pou● it out again : Then your Colours being all ready i● Powders , first blow in the Vermillion through 〈◊〉 hollow Pipe , so as to represent Clouds or Wavings in like manner blow in the Blue-Enamel , Scales of Copper , Orpiment , and Lake , all in fine powder ; these Colours will stick in Undulations , because the Glew is moist ; you may do thus with any other Colours : This done , take Plaister well pulverized , and put a good quantity thereof into the Vessel , and shake it well all over before ( and until ) the Glew be quite dry , and it will stick all round , then shake out what remains loose , and you 'll have the outside finely party-colour'd and Marbled , &c. When these Colours are well dried , they will stick so to the inside , that they will never come off , but remain always fine ; set these Globes on Stands where they may be for Ornament , and the pleasure of those who shall see and consider their Admirable Beauty . The End of the Ninth BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK X. Shewing how to Extract the Essential Tincture of all Herbs , or Flowers , as Yellow , Red , Green , Blue , Violet , Purple-colour'd , &c. With their respective Lakes : To make Ultra-marine , German-Blue , &c. as well for the Art of Glass , as Painting . CHAP. CCXVIII . NOT to omit any thing which at all concerns the Art of Glass , we thought convenient in this Tenth Book , to give the Publick a Method of Extracting all manner of Essential Tinctures from Herbs , as well as Flowers ; a Work not only necessary for Painting , but the Art of Glass too : We shall also give Directions to make Lake of several Colours , Vltra-marine of Lapis-Lazuli , with German-Blue , &c. The manner we prescribe for making these Colours , does equally qualifie them for tinging Glass , Stones , Enamel , and for Paint on Enamel and Glass-work , and all this so prepared , as not to press on the Diversions , or pall the Pleasure of the several Artists , or other curious Persons , who employ themselves that way for Recreation . What can be more admirable , than the Products , and Liberality of Nature , in bestowing such excellent Enamel on Flowers and Plants , as contribute to furnish Painting with such fine and lively Colours , which the Industry of Mankind can extract , and so well adapt to the Conveniency of Art , as to produce Effects , finer , and more beautiful than any other whatsoever . The use of Flowers and Plants , is not wholly confined to this Noble Art , but they are also proper for Dying , and have much more excellent success in Physick , where their Vertues are infinite , &c. No Product in Nature is useless , but the very meanest has its necessary Properties ; and those which seem the most abject and venomous , ( even the greatest Poisons ) have admirable Effects in Medicines , when duly prepared ; and this the Professors of Physick are not unacquainted withal , tho' very many pretend to those Studies , whose Endeavours are far short of handing them through the secret Excellencies thereof . CHAP. CCXIX. How to Extract Lake from Broom-Flowers . WE will give several ways of making Lakes of several Colours : The first with a Lixivium , or Lee , made of Soda of the Glass-house , and fresh Quick-lime , which must be pretty strong , in which put your Broom-Flowers , over a small Fire , until all the Tincture be drawn from them , the Flowers become White , and the Lee receive the Yellow Colour : Then take out the Flowers , and put the Lixivium into a glazed Earthen Vessel to boil , adding thereto as much Roch-Allom , as it can well dissolve ; then take it off , and put it into a large Vessel , mixing it with fair Water , so the Yellow will separate and descend to the bottom , let it rest there a little , and afterwards decant the Water off gently , and so put in more fresh to it again and again , until the Water has drawn off all the Salt and Allom from the Lixivium , and it become clear : Thus the Colour will be very well cleansed of the Salt and Allom , and remain exceeding fine and bright , spread it on pieces of White Linen , and let it dry in the Shade on new-baked Tiles , and you 'll have a most admirable Yellow-Lake for Painting . CHAP. CCXX . To Extract the Tincture of Poppies , Iris ( or Flower-de-luce ) Red-Roses , Violets , and all sorts of GreenHerbs , for making Lake of their Colour . TO avoid unnecessary Repetitions , we have thought fit to bring all these under one Chapter , because the Method for extracting their Colours is the same in one as in t'other , and done with the former Lixivium of Soda and Quick-Lime . You must steep and boil each sort of Flowers , or Herbs by themselves in the Lixivium , giving it time to draw off the Colour entirely , which you 'll soon perceive when the Faeces , or Flowers grow white , and the Lixivium deepened with the Tincture ; then pour off the Lixivium gently into your Earthen glazed Vessels , and set them over a Fire , putting in as soon as they begin to boil as much Roch-Allom , as they can well dissolve , and so take them off . After this pour all together into a large Earthen Vessel glazed , and pour into it fair Water , to make the Colour precipitate ; let it stand and settle , then pour off the Water , and put in fresh ; and thus continue to change the Water until it pour off as clear as you put it in , and taste flat , or insipid , so as you may conclude all the Soda , Salt of Alom , and Lime , are drawn off : Thus you 'll have at the bottom , a very fine Tincture to make a pure and delicate Lake withal , of the same Colour as your Flowers , or Herbs that were used ; spread it on pieces of Linen , dry them in the Shade on new-baked Tiles as before . After the same manner you may draw any other Lake , from whatsoever colour'd Herb , or Flower you please . CHAP. CCXXI . Another Way to Extract the Tincture of Yellow Flowers , of Field-Poppies , Irises , ordinary and deep coloured Violets , Carnation , and Red-Rose , BorrageFlowers , Red-Coleworts , Flags , &c. Together with the Verditers of Mallows , Burnet , and other Herbs . WE shall not give the same in this as in the foregoing Chapter , that Preparation is common to all those in the Title thereof , and so is this to these . To avoid Prolixity and Repetitions , You must have the Flowers , or Herbs newly gathered , fresh enough to stain a Card with their Juice pressed thereon , else they 'll not serve your turn ; put these into a Glass Cucurbit with a pretty large Mouth ; pour in among them good Strong-Waters to drown them by four Inches , joyn a Recipient to it , and lute the Joints very well , letting them dry ; this done , place the Alembick on a Sand ▪ Furnace , keeping a very gentle . Fire under it , giving the Matter time to digest , increasing it by very little and little , and so the Strong-waters will rise on the Leaves , and draw off the Colour , then improve your Fire to distil your tinged Strong-waters , into the Recipient , out of which you must take and put them into another Alembick , luting well the Jointures , and let it distil in Balneo , or over a very slow Ash-Fire , and the Strong-water will distil off in their own Colour , without any Tincture , and may be kept for the like occasion again : The Essence you 'll have at the bottom of the Cucurbit , let it dry gently : Thus you may have Lakes from all manner of Herbs and Flowers whatsoever . CHAP. CCXXII . To make a Scarlet-colour'd Lake . THE Design of this Chapter , is only to order the first Preparation for obtaining our Scarlet-colour , whereof we will make a very delicate Lake . Take Shearings of White Woollen-Drapery , let them be fine as possible , steep them a whole Day in cold Water , press them afterwards very well to take off all the Greasiness , and Allume it thus . Put four Ounces of Roch-Allom , and two Ounces of Crude Tartar in Powders , into a small Kettle , pouring thereon two Quarts of Water ; when this begins to boil , put to them one pound of the Shearings , and so let it boil a full Half-hour ; afterwards take it off and cool it for six Hours ; take out the Shearings and wash them in clean Water , leave 'em to steep about two Hours ; press them after this , and dry them , keeping them for the use we shall prescribe in the next Chapter . CHAP. CCXXIII. To Extract Scarlet-colour from Kerm-Berries , for making a Fine Lake . THE Name of Kermes is purely Arabick , for in that Country these Berries grow on a small Tree , or Shrub , and from that their Native Soil , were transplanted into Spain , Portugal , Provence , and Languedoc , where they now are plentiful ; several would perswade us , that 't is a sort of Oak , called in Latin , Coccigera , but the Leaves which are prickled like those on Holly , only smaller , shews us the contrary . These Grains , or Berries , have several other uses than in Painting , being of excellent Vertue in Physick : Of them the Apothecaries make their Syrop called Alkermes , and from the remainder of them which is left behind in the Strainer , they draw a substance for the Dyers , which is used in colouring of Stuffs . Several ways may be given to extract the Tincture of these Grains for making Lake ; we 'll only insist on two , the first is indifferent long , but very excellent , and produces a Tincture whereby i● made a most admirable fine Lake . The way of making the Lake in France , is very modern , and 't is but of late they have had this Secret in Paris , which was brought from Venice ; now since few are familiar with it we are willing to publish this , that many may know how to Wor● therein . Take four Quarts of clear Water , and four Pound of Wheaten-Bran , two Drams of Oriental Piraster , and as much Foenugrec , set all in a Kettle over a Fire , till the Water be Milk-warm ; keep your Hand in it until you can bear the heat no longer ; then take it off , cover it with a Cloath , that the heat may continue the longer , let it repose for twenty four Hours , then run off the Lixivium , and keep it for the following purpose . Get a clean Earthen-Pot , and put therein three Quarts of fair Water to half the Lixivium ; order a Fire , and let this boil thereon , which when it begins to do , put in an Ounce of the Grains pounded impalpably in a Brass-Mortar , and searced ; then pound a little crude Tartar , to take off the remaining parts of the Grains on the bottom and sides of your Mortar , and so put it in with the Grains ; when the Water begins to boil again , take it off in an instant , and set it to cool . This done , and the Water cold , take the Shearings prepared in the former Chapter , and let them stain therein about half an Hour : Afterwards squeeze it into another Pot by expression ; and after you have thus drawn off all the Tincture , put the Shearings into the last Pot , stirring them about very well with a small Stick ; that they may stain the sooner , boil all for about half an Hour over a small Fire , else the Tincture will become black , then take the Shearings out , and put them well tinged into a Vessel of cold Water ; about half an Hour after pour off the Water gently , and so put fresh on again , then press and spread them to dry in a clean place , where no Dust can come at them . This done make the following Lixivium . Put on a Hempen-cloath doubled , Vine-stalk-Ashes , or Ashe ; of Willow , or some other lighter Wood ; pour thereon , by degrees , cold Water , letting it strain through into a Vessel set underneath ; pour it again on the Ashes , and when it is all run through , set it to settle for twenty four Hours , that the Ashes which it carried off , may fall to the bottom ; this done , pour the Lixivium by degrees , into another Vessel , rejecting the Sediment , put your Shearings into this , having warmed it : When it begins to be cold , let it boil over a gentle Fire , and it will become red ; take a little of the Shearings , press them well , and if it remains without colour , take off the Kettle immediately , for the Lixivium has extracted it entirely , spread a Linen-cloath o'er a Free-stone Bowl , set the Shearings therein , and pour on the Lixivium by little and little to strain and yield the Tincture , then squeeze the Cloath and the Shearings therein , to press out all the Colour that remained in them , throw away the Cloath , wash the Shearings clean and keep them for the like use another time . Then put twelve Ounces of Roch-Allom well powdered , into a Glass Body full of cold Water , letting it dissolve quite ; when this is perfectly done , spread a Linen-cloath over two Staves , and set underneath a large Free-stone Vessel , put all the Allom-Water into the Bottle of Tincture , and strain it afterwards through this Cloath ; the Lixivium will go through it clear , and leave the Colour behind , but if it shou'd not be coloured , 't is only straining it through again , and you 'll have done . Now to get the Tincture , you must mix all that remains on the Cloath , and gather it together , spreading it afterwards over new-made Tiles ( which have not yet been allowed time to moisten ) on the pieces of Linen , then mold them into Troches to dry suddenly , without moulding , which wou'd spoil them ; therefore you must take great care that the Tiles be not at all moist , and if so , to change them , that it may dry the sooner , and thus you 'll have a Lake of admirable colour for Painting ; you must lessen , or improve the Colour as you find , by a greater or lesser quantity of Roch-Allom . CHAP. CCXXIV. A readier way to Extract the Tincture of Kerm-Berries . THO the Menstruum given in the last Chapter , made with Shearings of Cloath , be a very good one for this purpose , yet the following is a more easie and as effectual . Take Strong-waters of the first Run , or Distilling , and put it into a long-neckt Glass Body ; dissolve therein a Pound of Roch-Allom , adding an Ounce of Kerm-Berries , finely powder'd and searced ; let it digest well , shaking the Matrass from time to time , and the Strong-waters will draw to them all the Tincture of the Kermes , and be very sinely coloured ; then let all settle four Days , and afterwards pour it gently into a glazed Earthen-Vessel . Dissolve four Ounces of Roch-Allom in running Water , and pour this into the Strong-Waters , or Tincture of Kermes , to cause a separation ; filter it through a Linen-cloath , and the Strong-Waters will fall through White , leaving the Tincture behind ; if they be any thing coloured , strain them again and again until they be clear : Take up the Lake , or Colour , with a clean Wooden-Spoon , and make it into Troches , drying them as directed in the former Chapter : Thus you may have a quantity of this Colour , or Lake , as fine and good as the former . CHAP. CCXXV. To make Lake , or Tincture of Brazile . THE Brazile which Dyers make use of , is meant here ; take of the finest which comes from Fernambouck , that being the best . The way of extracting this Tincture is the same as the former from Kermes , and may be effected two ways , either with the first prescribed Menstruum , or the Strong-Waters , observe only not to put as much Allom to each Ounce of Brazile , as to the Berries , for that Tincture is deeper than this from Brazile , and consequently requires more Stuff ; use therefore as much here as you find reasonable , for Experience will give you the best instruction . Take notice too that when you do it by the first Menstruum , there is a greater quantity required of Brazile than was prescribed of Kermes-Berries , to each Pound of Shearings ; in every thing else follow the former Directions , and you 'll have a fine Colour , or Lake , less chargeable , and altogether as good as the Tincture of Kermes , for Painting . CHAP. CCXXVI . To Extract Tincture of Madder for Lake . MAdder is the Root of a Plant common enough ▪ but generally comes from Holland and Zealand , and used by Dyers ; if good , 't is red ; 't is finer than Brazile , and before you use it , must be finely powdered to give the better colour . You may use either of the former Menstruums of Shearings , or Strong-Waters , ordering your Quantities , as directed for the Brazile , if you follow the Preparation given in Chap. 223. you 'll have a fine colour from this Root , which make into Troches , drying them as before , this will be a perfect Lake , and very fine for use . CHAP. CCXXVII . How to make Ultra-marine , of Lapis-Lazuli . THIS Rich and Noble Blue drawn from an Azure-Stone , commonly called Lapis-Lazuli ; 't is 〈◊〉 Opaque-Stone , of a fine Sky-colour , or Turkish-●lue , or like the Blue-Flowers which grow in Corn●●lds , 't is embellished with small Streaks and Spar●es of Gold-colour ; the best is that which is fixt , ●●at is , can endure Fire without altering colour , ●nd comes from Persia and the greater I dies ; it is ●●so supposed it may be had from Africk , as well as ●sia , but questionless , there does not come that ●enty thence as from the other places . There is also found in Germany , and Hungary , a kind of Lapis-Lazuli , but not fixt , tho as hard as the former ; they call it Lesurstein , and its colour Asurbleau ; but its colour changes in some time , and becomes Greenish ; 't is used however by Painters . The sixt Lapis-Lazuli has great Vertues in Physick , and much more excellent ones than are ascribed to it by most Persons , who indeed are ignorant of them , and so are many of the Learned too ; but we 'll pass these over here , and reserve them for another time in some other place . This hint however may serve to advise the Curious to pry into the Matter , and possibly discover its further Excellencies and Vertue . 'T is called Vltra-marine , because brought to us from beyond Sea ; or rather , because the first tha● ever came into France , was out of the Kingdom o● Cyprus , a Maritime Country ; for so are those Countries called , which border on the Sea-Coasts . Before you proceed to Extract your Vltra-marine take some account of the Manner , to know whethe● the Stone be good , for unless it is singularly so , you'●● lose your labour : Put pieces thereof on live Coal● and blow them continually for an Hour , if they r●tain their first hardness and colour afterwards , yo● may conclude them good , but if they crumble b●tween your Fingers , they are naught : It may 〈◊〉 tried otherwise in an Iron-Ladle put into a Furna●● with some of the Stone to heat , and so quench it● strong Vinegar ; if the Colour remains still uncha●●ged and splendid , you may assure your self ' ● good . When you have made this Tryal , calcine 〈◊〉 which to do the easier , break the stone to piec● as small Hazel-Nuts , wash them afterwards in wa●● Water , and set them in a Crucible , on a Win● Furnace , or into an Iron-Ladle to re-unite ; th● cast them into a glazed Earthen Vessel of distilled Vinegar to quench them in , do thus seven times , to prepare them by Calcination for Powdering , and to prevent their sticking to the Mortar . Thus calcined , dry 'em well , and so powder them in a Stone-Mortar well cover'd , and accordingly searce it with the same caution , as Perfumers do their most delicate and finest Powders , lest the best should go off , and dispel its self in the Air : And thus preserve this precious Powder with all imaginable care . CHAP. CCXXVIII . To make a Liquid for Moistning and Grinding the Powder withal , &c. T IS impossible to give all the Preparations for the Lapis-Lazuli in one Chapter , they are too ●edious for that purpose , and can't be so confined without Confusion ; this we intimate to justifie our ●ivision thereof into several Chapters . For moistening and grinding your aforesaid Pow●er of the Stone , take a Pound and half of running ●ater , and put this into a new Earthen-Pot , add 〈◊〉 it an Egg-shell full of raw Honey , boil it until it ●ave no more Scum ; take the Pot off , and keep this ●ydromel , or Liquid for use in Bottles , as we shall ●ve occasion for hereafter . This done , take four Scruples of the best Gum●ragon , grind it on your Marble , with some of the ●ydromel , and then put it into a Glass ; add thereto 〈◊〉 much Hydromel as you find convenient , to bring it 〈◊〉 a Violet-colour , so cover it , and preserve it for 〈◊〉 : This Liquid is good for your Powder of Lapis-Lazuli ; if the Colour be too Violet , add the less hereof , if otherwise the more , as your Judgment , or Experience shall direct . Put half a Pound of Powder at a time into a small Porphyry , or Marble Vessel , the larger the Mortar the worse , for you 'll lose more , and be longer a grinding ; pour leisurely by little and little thereon , some of your Violet Liquid , grind these together for a full Hour , still wetting it ; you may use three or four Ounces of Liquid to the half Pound of Powder , and you 'll have it very good ; you must take care of grinding it too long , for then it will lose its colour . When 't is thus ground , dry it on a Marble or Flat-stone , where the Sun does not come at all , cover it well to preserve it from Dust ; when 't is dry , 't will Powder easily between your Fingers , if it be rightly done ; if so , let it alone on the Marble , but if it be clammy , or stick , take it off , for it has still some unctuosity of the Honey in it , which must be cleansed away by a Cement . Your Lapis being thus dry , wash it well before you put it to the Cement , for which you must use a glazed Earthen Bason round above like a Barber 's , and well glazed within , put your Lapis therein , and pour thereon some of the mild Lixivium in the next Chapter , as much as will rise above the Surface four Inches ; wash the Lapis very well with your Hands , and then let it settle , and 't will precipitate : The Liquid being clear'd again , decant it into a large Copper , or Earthen-Vessel , then let the Lapis dry in a Shade in the same Vessel 't was washed in , and spread it afterwards on the flat Marble , or Porphyry , and there let it lie until quite dry : Thus 't is prepared for mixing with the Cement , of which we will give the Preparation in Chap. 231. and those next succeeding it . CHAP. CCXXIX . To prepare a mild and a strong Lixivium for the Lapis-Lazuli . WE have promised to give this Preparation here , and the manner of making hereof , which we will shew , together with another stronger , to wash the Lapis withal , when 't is mixt with the Cement , as hereafter directed . To make these Lixiviums , take ten handfuls of Vine-stalk-Ashes well searced ; put this into a large Vessel that will hold thirty Pound of Water , with a Faucet at bottom ; press the Ashes very well , and put to them twenty Pound of warm Water ; when 't is sunk to the bottom , open the Faucet , so as it may only drop into an Earthen-Vessel ; when 't is all come out , stop the hole , and strain this Lixivium through a Felt Strainer , and so keep it in a Glass , or glazed Pot well covered : This is the strong Lixivium . Again , pour in on the same Ashes , the like quantity of warm Water , and do as before , so you 'll have an indifferent strong Lixivium , which keep as the former . Do this a third time , and you 'll have the mild Lixivium mentioned in the preceding Chapter . These three are very useful both for moistening , and to draw the Powder of Lapis-Lazuli from the Cement ; wherewith it must be mixed , as we shall shew in the succeeding Chapters , which Separation being sometimes hard to perform , we are obliged to have recourse to these Varieties of Lixiviums stronger , or weaker , as we find them convenient for the purpose . You may yet make another Lixivium to take away the greasiness of the Cement , thus : Boil Calx of Tartar , as much as you please , in clean Water , for about a quarter of an Hour , and keep it for use as the former . This is excellent for washing the Lapis-Lazuli with ; it strengthens and improves the colour thereof , is good for the Itch , Scurvey , &c. and to take away the Witherings in the Fair Sex. CHAP. CCXXX . The Form of the Glasses for preserving the Liquids in , which are employed on the Lapis-Lazuli . THERE always remains some of your colour in the Waters , or Lixiviums , wherein the L●●●s-Lazuli is prepared throughout all the Process ; you must therefore have a very large Vessel of Bra●● , or Earthen-Ware , glazed and polished very well at bottom , wherein must be three Holes ; one in the middle of the side , the next a little lower , and the last about two Inches from the bottem ; stop these Holes without-side very close to prevent leakage . Then pour all your Waters into this ; tho you then perceive no colour at all , yet after ten Days you 'll have it at bottom , whither it will descend gently ; and to get it , you must go artificially to work , first opening the first Cock , or Hole , and let out the Water above that , before you open the other two ; and thus you may get the colour without muddying , or losing any by the Waters , which mix with the rest . CHAP. CCXXXI . To make strong Cement to mix with Lapis-Lazuli , to separate the finer and better Stuff from the other . ONE cannot so easily part the finer Lapis-Lazuli from its grosser parts , without making use of this Cement to unbind the parts : Take four Ounces of very pure and clear Venice-Turpentine ; six Ounces of Rosin of the Pine , six Ounces of Grecian-Pitch , three Ounces of very good Mastick , three Ounces of fresh Wax , an Ounce and half of Linseed-Oyl cleansed , as shall be directed in Chap. 233. Put the Turpentine into a new glazed Earthen-Pot , very clean , to dissolve over a slow Charcoal-Fire , and continue stirring it with a Wooden-Spatula , throw into this by degrees , the Rosin of the Pine , in small pieces , and stir it still very well ; thus put in successively the Pitch , the Mastick in Powder , and last of all the Wax sliced small , stirring all continually about to mix and incorporate : Take great care of your Fire , least the Cement should blaze , or burn , all the Ingredients being hot of themselves , and combustible : Having well incorporated them , pour in the Linseed-Oyl , stirring it as before , and so let it boil gently for a Quarter of an Hour . To try whether the Cement be enough , drop some of it off the Spatula into a Vessel of cold Water ; if it spread 't is not enough ; but if it do not , 't is sufficiently boil'd ; so take it off . Or else you may wet your Fingers , and take a drop thereof , roul and draw it out in length ; if it snaps and breaks of it self , 't is a sign that 't is enough ; take it off and pour it boiling hot into an Hypocrass-Bag steeped before in hot Water ; take care to let it go all through into a Vessel of cold Water ; and for the better security , squeeze it along from top to bottom with two flat Sticks , that none may remain in your Bag ; afterwards work it well with your Hands , till all the Water be drained from it , and because being hot it may stick to your Fingers , you may anoint them with some of the Linseed-Oyl . The Cement being thus prepared , keep it in a Vessel of cold Water , shifting your Water every Day , or every second Day , and by this Method you may keep it for ten Years . CHAP. CCXXXII . To make a weaker Cement for separating the Colours of Lapis-Lazuli . THIS second Cement , which is the softer and milder , ought to be first employed on the Powder of Lapis-Lazuli ; it draws the colour much quicker and better than the strong Cement , which ought not to be used till after the milder , the whole Secret of separating the Colours , consisting in using the Cements , for without a due care hereof , it cannot be done perfect . To make this Cement , you must take four Ounces of very pure Turpentine , four Ounces of Rosin of Pine , six Ounces of Grecian-Pitch , one Ounce of fresh Wax , six Drams of Linseed-Oyl purified , mix and incorporate them successively as before ; observe only that this is sooner done than the former , because 't is weaker , and will give the colour soonest , therefore you must manage accordingly . CHAP. CCXXXIII . To purifie Linseed-Oyl . THE use we have for Linseed-Oyl in our Cement , obliges us to give this Preparation , and way of purifying it , as we promised , whereby 't is made more fit for our purpose . Take good and clear Linseed-Oyl , of the colour of Saffron , and put it into a Glass , shaped like an Oxe-horn , with an Hole at bottom to let out the Water , which you must mix with the Oyl , letting them settle until the Oyl rises all upmost ; then open the Hole , and let the Water out , and the Oyl remain behind ; then shake the Oyl again , with more fresh Water , let it settle , and the Water run out , as before ; do thus eight or ten times , till the Water comes out as clear as it went in , and so the Oyl will be pure and fit for your use ; keep it well stopt in a Glass-Bottle . If you can't get Linseed-Oyl , you may use Oyl of Bitter-Almonds , without purifying , for it needs none ; but take notice , the Linseed-Oyl is best of any , tho cheaper than t'other . CHAP. CCXXXIV . How to incorporate the Powder of Lapis-Lazuli with the strong , or weaker Cement . WE have given in Chap. 228. the way to prepare the Powder for mixing with the Cement , to extract the Colours ; we now come to shew how to mix it with the Cement , in order to extract the Vltra-marine from them for Painting . Take a Pound of the Powder , and the like quantity of Cement assigned in Chap. 231. observing always to take the first that was workt with the Hands ; cut the Cement small , and the pieces being a little wet , put them into a glazed Earthen-Pot , over a Fire of red-hot Ashes , to melt , and take care it does not boil ; if it should , you must prevent the the damage which it might cause , by putting in some Linseed-Oyl . The Cement being thus melted , anoint all your Spatula over , from the Handle downwards , with the same Oyl , and so put in the Powder by very little quantities , and taking a great deal of time , that they may the better incorporate ; and be sure to stir it all the while very well with the Spatula , so as to make it all alike , until it become like an Oyntment , or Salve ; then off with the Pot , and throw the Stuff boiling hot into an Earthen-Bason of cold Water , and at that very instant take off all that sticks to the sides of the Pot ; when 't is cold enough to be handled , if it appears well coloured , 't is a sign you have work'd it well : This done , rub your Hand with Linseed-Oyl , and work it as they do a Paste of Bread , or Dough , for one Hour , that it may be throughly compact . The longer you work it , the better and easier the colour may be drawn ; afterwards make it up like a Loaf , or Brick , and set it in an Earthen-Dish to dry , pouring thereon some fresh Water ; let it steep for fifteen Days , the longer the better for extracting the Vltra-marine . CHAP. CCXXXV . To Extract the Ultra-marine . NOW we come to take out the Vltra-marine , from its Confinement to make it appear Triumphant , and in its full Glory . Take therefore the Loaf of Cement and Powder , washing it in the same Water extraordinary well with your Hands ; weigh it to know the quantity of Oyl it requires , and put it into an Earthen-Bowl , or Dish , very smoothly glazed , rubbing first the Bottom with your Linseed-Oyl ; then pour in Water scarce warmed , until it arise two Inches above the Matter ; let it stand in this condition a full quarter of an Hour ( or less in the Spring-time ; ) pour this Water afterwards into the Vessel mentioned Chap. 230. adding more warm Water to your Matter , and so 't will soften : Continue thus whilst there remains any Tincture thereon ; by this means all the substance that is good for any thing , will be separated from the Cement , which cannot be done otherwise . Whilst it is imbibed in the warm Water , you must move and roul it gently round with two Sticks , or Spatula's of Box , or any other well polished Wood rounded at the ends smooth like a Wallnut ; let them be about an Ell long , and an Inch thick . Whenever you perceive the Matter stick to the bottom of your Dish , rub your Hands with Linseed-Oyl , and stir it about leisurely so as to colour the Water , which you must put along with the former , in the mean time holding up the Matter with your Staves , lest it should stick to the Vessel . Take notice that a little steeping at first will tinge the Water very much , and when the Cement is just yielding its colour , it will discover certain Bluish Streaks on the Water , like the Sun-Rays , and then you must strain this Water out among the other , through a Scarce , that the grosser part of the Cement may remain ; afterwards pour in by little and little the fresh warm Water , stirring the Cement easily , that it may not dilate too much , and give its colour all at once . After you have thus stir'd it about five or six times , close and amass it anew , by which means you 'll see how much 't is diminished , and what quantity of colour it has given . If the Lapis be good and right , you 'll find it will the first Steepings yield about four or five Ounces of Vltra-marine , which keep apart by its self as the best and finest colour , tho it appear grosser than the others of this sort , by reason of the Gold-coloured Veins , which are peculiarly therein . For the second , whereof you 'll have three or four Ounces , you must follow the Processes aforementioned , this indeed will be finer than the other , but not so good a Colour ; keep it also by it self . Draw off a third , and this will be still siner than the former , but paler and more bright coloured . You must still pursue the same Directions to extract it , letting your Water be but half luke-warm , and take care to manage the Cement dextrously with the Spatula's , and so preserve the Colour apart . You may extract a fourth Colour after this rate , but the Water must be hotter , and you must press the Cement very well with the Spatula's to squeeze out the Colour , and if meer Water will not do , make use of the mild Lixivium of Chap. 229. this last Colour will be Grayish , or Ash-colour'd , and of no great value , and therefore not at all to be mixt with any of the rest . Observe here that you can't take up less than eight Hours full , to extract the Colours , nor than ten or twelve to allow the Water for setling , and if you perceive the Colour does not come out free enough with the warm Water , add a third part of our mild Lixivium , and if that does not do , use all Lixivium , but let it be cold , and when that fails too of effecting it sufficiently , you must make a Lixivium of Vine-stalk Ashes , and this being strained , let it boil for half a quarter of an Hour , until it be sharp enough to bite your Tongue ; and then let it settle and grow clear ; this is your last shift for extracting your Colour , and with this heated , wash your Cement very well , and set it aside : The whole design of all this trouble , is only to serve for obtaining the greater quantity of Vltra-marine , and this consists in the goodness of the Lapis Lazuli and the Cement , which the Circumspection and care taken in all their Preparations must advance . CHAP. CCXXXVI . The Method of cleansing the Ultra-marine when 't is separated from the Cement . AFTER you have extracted all your Colours out of the Cement , and the Water quite setled and separated from them , pour on some of the mild Lixivium before prescribed , and so wash them with your Hands ( but don't rub it between them ) thus you 'll take away all the Grease of the Cement ; afterwards wash it three or four times in fair Water , and let the Waters settle well before you put them into their proper Vessels . You may else another way purge the Vltra-marine , thus . Take the Yolks of Pullets-Eggs , that have been fed only with Corn , and not with Greens , prick these with a Pin , and so moisten the Colours , kneading the Mass with your Hands , and washing it afterwards with your mild Lixivium , until the Lixivium falls off clear again . This done , wash them three or four times over with fair Water , letting the Waters settle well before you put them into their Vessels . This last way of purifying the Vltra-marine , is mighty effectual ; but here is another help to be used with it , which is a very great Secret , and performed thus : After the Colours are quite washed according to former direction , as well as possible , you must cast therein by little and little , a Bull's-Gall , rubbing it by degrees with your Hands ; so wash them often in clear Water , and you 'll have the Colour in full perfection . CHAP. CCXXXVII . To strain off the Ultra-marine already Washt and Purified . IT is necessary to strain off the Vltra-marine , and the rest of the Colours , that if any Grease , or Unctuosity of the Cement remain , it may be taken quite away , for these Colours require a Perfect and Extraordinary Purification . For this Purpose , take a fine Searce , and pour thereon the last Waters , with which you washed the Vltra-marine , and so strain them afterwards through another fine Searce , and a third time through Red Quintain , or Crape ; but you must observe when you strain them , to let them stand till you perceive them limpid and clear , and so soak off the Water dextrously with a Spunge , and be sure not to strain them promiscuously all together . This being done to all the Waters , let your Colours settle in their proper Vessels , and dry in the Shade ; when dry , put them into little Leather-Bags ; tie these close , rubbing and pressing them with your Hands ; this will make them very subtile , and when the Bags are opened , they 'll shew much fairer than before . CHAP. CCXXXVIII . To Correct the Colours just before prepared . FEW Persons , unless such as are very curious of their Work , make any use hereof , because of the time it takes up , tho it would turn very much to their account ; for one Ounce of this Colour corrected , will go farther than three that are not . If you would make your Colours just before prepared , much finer and effectual than they are , mix them again with a strong Cement , and let them remain therein for three Days ; afterwards proceed according to the last directions , to separate them again ; reiterate this over again , and you 'll have them exceeding good , and tho they diminish somewhat in weight , yet that Loss will be repayed considerably in the Beauty and Value . CHAP. CCXXXIX . Another Way to make Ultra-marine , and draw off the Colours with more Expedition . THIS Method of making Vltra-marine , is much more ready than the former ; and Experience will shew whether the Colour be a gainer or loser thereby . Take a Pound of Lapis Lazuli , calcine it in a Crucible , and quench it afterwards in Vinegar , so let it dry , and then reduce it to a very fine Powder ; grind it on a Porphyry , with fair Water , and so set it in a glazed Earthen Vessel in the Shade , until it be dry ; if you find it coagulated all in a Mass , you must Powder it again . This done , make a Cement of three Ounces of Grecian-Pitch , four Ounces of Rosin of the Pine , three Ounces of Mastick , three Ounces of Frankincense , two Ounces of Oyl-Olive ; set these over a slow Fire in a small Earthen Pot , into which pour first the Oyl , and when that 's hot , put in the Rosin , then the Pitch , then the Incense , and last of all the Mastick , stirring them continually with the Wooden Spatula , and let them boil a little . Having made the Cement , get another Earthen Vessel , and put thereinto the Lapis Lazuli , and pour on it the Cement hot , stirring the whole together with the Spatula very leisurely , until they perfectly incorporate ; let this stand a whole Day , and when you would draw off the Colours , pour thereon boiling Water , stirring it very smartly . When it begins to cool , pour it out , and so put in more hot Water ; do thus till the Water begins to draw off the Colour , and so continue until it be quite extracted ; you may distinguish the Waters , and so set them apart , and obtain the Variety of Colour , as in the former way . If your Colour seems to be clammy , or nasty , you may correct it thus . Add thereto Tartar dissolved in Water , as much as will drown it , and let it repose for one Day at least , so wash it in warm Water , and you will by that means have it very correct , and well purified . CHAP. CCXL . Another Way to make Ultra-marine . GRANTING the two former ways to be sufficient , we will however here give a third , which we believe may as well be pleasing to those who are not satisfied with the other ; as to such Persons as have a Curiosity for these sorts of Work ; and thus we propose to proceed . Not to discourse of the Ways to try the goodness of the Lapis Lazuli , which we have mentioned sufficiently already , you must break it into gross pieces , as small as Nuts , then set these in a Crucible into the Furnace , till they redden with heat , and so cast them into cold Water ; do thus six or seven times , and so reduce them to impalpable Powder in a Porphyry-Mortar well covered over , lest the Powder which is very subtile , should disperse away into the Air , and then searce it with a fine Searce also covered . After this , take of Rosin of Pines , ordinary black Pitch , Mastick , fresh Wax , and Turpentine , of each three Ounces , of Incense , and Linseed-Oyl , each one Ounce , melt all together in an Earthen Vessel , stirring them very well , that they may mix ; this Stuff being well incorporated , cast it into Water , and keep it for use . To each Pound of Lapis Lazuli , add ten Ounces thereof , and set them to dissolve in a Pot over a small Fire , first melting the Cement , and then casting on the Lapis Lazuli by little and little , observing such an order in this , and continually stirring the Mass with a Stick , that they may mix insensibly together ; afterwards cast the Mass into an Earthen Vessel of cold Water , and anointing your Hands with Linseed-Oyl , mould it up into a number of Cakes , or Rolls , which leave in cold Water for five Days , shifting the Water every other Day . This done , put them into a large and very clean glazed Earthen Vessel , pouring on them some clean hot Water ; when that cools , pour in more hot , and do thus till the Pastils soften with the heat of the Water : This done , put them into hot Water , and let them be until it receive a Bluish colour ; strain this Water to reserve the grosser pieces , and so put it into another glazed Earthen Vessel very clean , adding more to the Pastils , which strain through a fine Searce afterwards among the former ; continue this until all the Colour be extracted , and no more remain behind . Your Water must be only warm , otherwise it will occasion a Blackness in the Colour , which is to be taken care of , and imports very much . All your coloured Waters being in the Vessel , you may cleanse them of any Unctuosity , by reposing them for twenty four Hours , in which time the Co●our will stick to the bottom ; then you may pour off ●he Water gently into another Vessel , and it will carry off the Grease along with it ; strain it afterwards into the Vessel where the Colour is again , through a fine Searce , and all the Grease and Nasti●ess will be left behind ; do thus thrice , stirring the Colour very well every time you return the Water ●o it , that the Filth and Grease may ascend from it , ●nd it will always stay in straining on the Searce be●ind the Water . This done , let the Colour precipitate entirely , ●nd so pour off all the Water very leisurely , for fear ●f disturbing it ; dry this Colour , and you 'll have ●elicate Vltra-marine . If you would imitate this Colour at little charge , make use of our Blue-Enamel , after the same manner , and instead of the Lapis Lazuli , observing without exception , the like Regimen and Prescription just now delivered in every respect , and by this means you 'll have a very pretty agreeable Colour to Paint with , and for tinging of Glass . Many other Ways might be given here for making Vltra-marine , besides these we have already laid down , but because the principal part of the Preparation is in every one the same ; we look upon these as sufficient , and that it would be but needless to repeat any more . That the Lapis Lazuli may be made by Art as fine and good as the Natural , which is gotten from the Mines , we allow , and should freely assign the Method for it , if there were a scarcity thereof in France , but since we have of it in abundance , 't is much better to employ the time in working the usual way , than spend it unprofitably by taking a more tedious Method . CHAP. CCXLI. To make German-Blue . NOTWITHSTANDING we have in the preceding Chapter shewn how to imitate very nearly the Vltra-marine Blue , with ordinary Enamel , whereof we have given the Preparation in Chap. 190. yet we will shew too the Way to make German-Blue by Art , which is a Colour very fine and convenient to Paint withal . Take four Ounces of Mercury , or Quick-silver , si● Ounces of Flower of Sulphur , and a Pound of Sal-Armoniack ; pound these very well in a Stone-Mortar , till all the Mercury be quite suppress'd , and no longer precipitable , then put the Mass into a Glass Body , the bottom luted up to the middle ; set this on a very slow Ash-Fire , let it stand uncovered until all the moisture be exhaled , then head it very close , and so improve the heat by degrees , until you bring the Mass to a Sublimation ; and thus you 'll have a very fine and delicate Azure , or German-Blue , which reduce to very soft Powder on a Marble , or Porphiry , keeping it afterwards for uses in Painting . The End of the Tenth BOOK . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK XI . Wherein the Manner of imitating all sorts of Pearl is shewn , and done so effectually , as to give them an equal Splendour and Beauty with those which are Naturally produced in the Sea. CHAP. CCXLII. ALL the Ancients who have treated of the several Sorts , and Properties of Precious Stones , have at the same time discoursed of Pearls , because they claim a place among the first and best of Jewels , in respect of their Value , as well as their Beauty , and the fixt Quality which they contain , they having been at all times sought after , for the Ornament and Pleasure of Ladies , as they are at this Day ; for these Reasons we thought it convenient to give them a Place among our Works , that ( from our Experience ) the Curious might be informed how to make such Ar●ificially as fine and splendid , as those which Nature forms in the Depth of the Ocean . We avow that the Production of Pearls , is very different from that of Precious-Stones , because the latter proceeds from the Earth , and the former quite contrary , from the Shell-Creatures which are shrouded in the Bottom of the Sea ; these receive their Nourishment from the same Liquld Substance which crntributes to the Growth of the Shells , and this Slimy Substance is resolved from the Watry Humour of the Creature , by three several Processes . The first dries it by degrees , the next brings it to an hardness , and last of all , 't is at certain times emplyed by the Animal , for the Increase of its Shell , and the place where this is effected in the inmost inveloped recesses thereof . Now the first Principle of these , and all other Precious Stones , descends from Above , to wit , the Universal Seed , which alone can give Birth and Increase to all the Tenants of this vast Universe ; and these Precious Stones , as well as the Metals , are nourished in the Womb of the Earth , so the living Creatures bear each other the Foetus within its Parent , &c. The Oriental Pearls are generated in the Fish , which contains them with the Mother as the Occidental , or Western in our Oysters , but the Beauty of these two , is very different , the Oriental being of a Silver White , and exceeding splendid to the Occidental ; the best of these latter seldom arriving to any higher than the Colour of Milk. We will not here take notice of the particular Places of the East , where they are found , but only inform you , That the best and most beautiful ▪ come from the PersianGulf , about the Isle of Ormus Bassora : They are found in Europe , not only in the Sea , but in Rivers , and Fresh Water ; we have them from Scotland , Silesia , Bohemia , Frisia , Lorrain , &c. in all which Places they are found very fine , only those of Frisia , are very small . 'T is thought the Fish wherein the Pearl is generated , becoming Sickly and Weak , and not able to dispose of the Slimy Moisture for the Growth of its Shell , it remains in the Body thereof , and is dried : Hence the Birth of the Pearl , and so by a continual supply of the like Substance still coating it a-new , it becomes large , just as the Stone in the Bladder of Man , and other Creatures , engenders , and is fed by a Clammy Humour , which cannot be emitted by Urine , but remains behind , and so hardens and becomes a Stone : After the like manner the Bezoar Stone is bred in the Indian Goats of the Kingdom of Golcondea , and in the Galls of Wild-Boars in India , and the Hedgehogs of Malacca ; so several other Stones , to which they give the Name of Bezoar , are found in the Galls of Beeves , Deer , Goats , and other Animals in France , and elsewhere , all which have great Vertues in Physick . How great and effectual those Pearls are in Physical Matters , and what Successes they reach there , is not to our Purpose ; we only intend to shew the way of imitating their Beauty by Art so finely , and with such exactness of Lustre , as not to leave it in the power of any to distinguish them easily from the true and Natural ones , they being made of the very finest sort of Paste that can be , and the same Stuff as the true ones . Poverty and Pride are two inseparable Companions among our French ; such Ladies as make use of pure Pearl , are those that can afford it , and the little Creatures that cannot reach the Price , but would however appear gay , are obliged to have recourse to the Counterfeit , and content themselves with Imitation only of Nature : 'T is some Years since the Use of these latter was introduced in France , which now , not only the Puny Ladies , but those of Birth and Quality do wear ; this proceeded all from that Fashion which insensibly reached still at the larger Pearls , which these Ladies coveted for Ornament ; and because they could not be furnished enough with true , they made use of the Artificial ; whence the Common Sort of Persons receiv'd the Advantage to vie with Persons of the First Rank and Quality ; which they don't fail to do , without Consideration of either Estate , or Condition , but only to conform with the Mode . The Counterfeit Pearls , which are usually made , are just the Colour of the Pastes , and of no Continuance but for the present ; they are done with a Composition of Brittle Glass and Wax a little melted ; and for Colouring , they use prepared Mercury , Mouth-Glue , or any other Drug , to give them a Brightness , which soon Peels off , and Scales away , especially in the Heat of Summer : The Way which we will give , is not only very good and solid , but exceeding fine , being effected with Seed Pearl ; we grant these Pastes to be much dearer than the former , but consider their Fineness , and that they 'll last for ever ; we shall also shew how to make the Counterfeits finer and harder ; and we are persuaded , that the Preparation of those we shall assign , will appear so easie , and yet produce such fine Imitations , as shall be very satisfactory . CHAP. CCXLIII . To imitate fine Oriental Pearl . THE Difference between those which are at present wore by the Ladies , and such as we shall prescribe , as to the Goodness , Hardness , and Fineness of the Stuff , we have already endeavoured to clear . But before we proceed any further , take these remaining Parts of the Furnace in Chap. 52. The Letter O , is the Balneum Mariae . P , The Vessel for containing the Sand , or Ash-Fire . Q , The Eyes , or Holes of the Furnace . R , Their Cover , which when they are set on , draw in the Air , and increase the Heat for Fusion ; the others are Crucibles . We did also intend to give the Description of another Furnace at the close of the Fifth Book , as well for the Service of the Matters in that , as the Sixth Book : You may , however take it along with you here . A , is the Ash-hole ; you may add to it an Hovel , for sucking in the Air , which must be luted to it very firmly . B , is the Inside where the Ashes fall into ; this ought to be lofty for drawing the Air. C , is the Grate , and must be of very strong Iron Bars . D , is the Opening through which the Crucibles and Fuel is put in , this ought to be of well tempered Iron , and luted within side with very good Lute , at least three Inches thick . E , is the Chamber where the Works are Baked . F , is the Coverlid of the Furnace , which is to be Vaulted firm , and made of the same Earth . G , is the Chimney , over which you may set several Iron Plates one above t'other , for drawing the Air. H , is the Hovel , or shelving place of Iron for the Ash-Hole . I , are Funnels for the Chimney Plates , and the Hovel . K , is a Crucible . If this Furnace be made five or six Inches thick , it will bear all degrees of heat , and serve very conveniently for Private Persons , by making it of a suitable largeness instead of the Glass-house Furnace : When you make your Fire of Wood , there will be no occasion for the Hovel of the Ash-hole . But to go on with our Pearl . You must take two Pound of thrice distilled Vinegar , one Pound of Venice Turpentine , mix them together , and so put the Mass into a Glass Cucurbit ; fit to it the Head and Receiver , luting the Joynts ; let them dry , and so set it on a Sand-Furnace to distil the Vinegar ; keep a gentle heat , lest the Stuff swell up . Afterwards put the Vinegar into another Glass-Cucurbit , wherein you must hang a quantity at discretion , of Seed Pearl , strung on a Thread of Silver or Gold , done about with a piece of very thin Silk ; these must hang in the middle of the Body , so as not to touch the Vinegar : This done , head your Cucurbit with a Blind Head , and lute it very well ; set it in a moderate B. Mariae well closed , there to remain for a Fortnight ; the heat of the B. will elevate the Fumes of your Vinegar , and they 'll continually circulate about the Pearl , and so soften and bring them to the Consistence of a Paste , which being once performed , take 'em off and mould them up in what Form you please , round , long , or Peaalike , and as big as you think fit ; do this with Moulds of fine Plate gilded within ; you must not touch the Paste at all with your Hands , but altogether Work it with a Plate Spatula , which will fill the Moulds , then bore them through with a Porkers Bristle , or Gold-Wire , and so let them dry a little ; then Thread them again with Gold-Wire , and set them in a closed Glass , which lay in the Sun , to dry them to a hardness ; set them afterwards in a Glass Matrass , in a Stream of Running Water , leaving it there for twenty Days ; and about that time they assume their first solidity and hardness . To give them Transparency and Splendour , you must prepare some Mercury-Water , after the Rate we shall prescribe in the next Chapter . When you have taken them out of the last Matrass , wherein they were for twenty Days , as the Running Water ▪ hang them in a Vessel of Glass where the Mercury-Water is , and so they 'll moisten , swell , and assume their Oriental Beauty : This done , shift them out of this Water into a Matrass closed Hermetically , for fear that any Water should be admitted into it , and so down with it into a Well , leaving it there for eight whole Days ; then draw it up , open the Matrass ▪ and you 'll have them as fine and good as any Oriental Pearls whatsoever . This Method is a little long , but withal 't is effectual and sure ; however 't is not thus the Philosophers , or Virtuosi Work , for they have another Way , much shorter , having regard only to one Spirit ; nor have I Experience enough in their Matters , to make a Discovery thereof ; and if I had , it cou'd not be done without disobliging them irreconcilably ; therefore take what I have delivered on this Important Subject , in good part ; and be assured , that if you were acquainted with that Secret which they so closely reserve , there could be nothing done more by it as to Goodness and Beauty in this Work , than by our prescribed Method , which is very estimable , and more precious than you 'll imagine , whereof I can assign you no better , or other Argument , than Experience , to convince you . CHAP. CCXLIV . To make Mercury-Water for giving Transparency and Splendour to the Pearls . HAVING promised this Secret of making Mercury-Water to compleat the Transparency , and Natural Lustre of your Pearls , which is a Matter so highly valuable , that a very considerable Sum has been offered in our Presence , for the Discovery thereof , to a certain Person ; yet we are free , that Experience should have its due course of informing the Ignorant , and shall , for our part , generously acquit our Engagement . You must take Plate Tin of Cornwall calcined , let the Calx be very fine and pure , amalgamate one Ounce thereof , with two Ounces of prepared Mercury well purified ; wash the Amalgama with Water , until the Water remains clear and insipid ; then drying the Amalgama throughly , put it into a Matrass over a Furnace , keeping such a degree of heat as is required for Sublimation ; when the Matter is well Sublimated , take off the Matrass and let it cool , and so take out the Sublimate ; to which add one Ounce of Venice Sublimate and grind them well together on a Marble , so put them into another Matrass , close it very well , and set it topsy-turvy in a Pail of Water , and the whole Mass will resolve its self in a little time , all into Mercury-Water : This done , filter it into a Glass Receiver , and set it on a gentle Ash-Fire to coagulate , and it will be brought to a Crystalline Mass ; take it 〈◊〉 , and with a Glass Pestle and Mortar pound it very well to a very fine Powder , which searce through a fine Searce , and put it into a well stopt Matrass in B. Mariae , letting it remain till it resolve again into Water ; and this last shall be the Mercury-Water which you must preserve to employ on your Pearl . CHAP. CCXLV . Another Way to make these Pearls . THIS is an easier way than the former , for by Baking them , ( as we shall shew ) you very much shorten the time which the Preparation would else take up ; however you must not expect them so Delicate and Natural as the first , the Cause whereof is easie enough conceived ; for these Pearl having enlarged themselves in the Water , as we already noted , 't is reasonable to believe the hardning them afterwards in the Cold , will be of a much more Natural Effect , than if done with heat . Take very fair Oriental Seed Pearl for this purpose , and reduce it to impalpable Powder on a Marble , to dissolve afterwards in Mercury-Water , or clarified Juice of Lemons ; if this be not effected quick enough , set it in a Cucurbit over warm Ashes , and be very careful to take the Cream ( which in a little time will appear at top ) immediately off , so withdraw the Dissolution from the Fire , and let it settle a little ; this done , pour it gently into another Glass Body , and keep it a-part , you 'll have the Pearl in a Paste at the bottom , with which fill your gilded Plate Moulds , made to what bigness , or form you think fit , pressing the Paste with the Silver Spatula , and so shut them up four and twenty Hours ; after you must take and bore them through with a Porker's Bristle , close up the Moulds , and leave them in the Oven in a Paste of Barly Dough , which being half Baked draw out and open , taking away all the Pearl , and steep them in the Dissolution just before directed to be kept a-part , putting them in and out several times ; so close them in their Moulds and Bake them again with the like Paste as before , only let this last be almost burnt up before you draw it out ; thus you 'll have the Pearl well baked and hardned . This done , draw it out , open all the Moulds , take away the Pearls and string them on one or more Gold or Silver Threads ; steep them in Mercury-Water , given in the former Chapter , for about a Fortnight ; after this dry them by the Sun in a well closed Glass Body , so you 'll have very fine and splendid Pearl . CHAP. CCXLVI . Another Way . THO this be a more common way than the preceding , we will not omit it , because every one may have his choice to take that Method which best suits with his Apprehension , or Conveniency . You must , as in the former , take very fair Oriental Seed Pearl ground to an impalpable Powder ▪ and dissolve it in Allom-Water , then rack off that Water , and wash the Paste of Pearl which remains at bottom , first with some distilled Waters , then i● Bean-Water , and set it in B. Mariae , or Horse-dung , to digest for a Fortnight ; afterwards take out your Vessel , and the Matter being come to the Consistence of a Paste , mould up the Paste in the gilt SilverMoulds , as before directed , bore them with a Bristle , string them on Gold or Silver Thread , and hang them in a very well closed Limbeck of Glass to prevent the Air from coming in to spoil them . Thus dried lap them one by one in Leaves of Silver , and split open a Barble , as if you were to Fry him , and so close them all up in his Body , make a Paste of Barly-Meal , and Bake him in it , as you would a Batch of Bread , and no more , afterwards draw it out , and let them dry . To give a Transparency and Splendour to these Pearls ; if you don't care for using our Mercury-Water , instead thereof , take the Herb Grati● squeezed in Water , put into this Water six Ounces of Seed Pearl , one Ounce of Salt-peter , an Ounce of Roch-Allom , an Ounce of Litharge of Silver ; the whole being dissolved , take your dried Pearls , heat them first , and then cool them in this Dissolution ; thus do for about six times at least , heating and cooling them at this rate therein . If your Pearl should happen to fail of coming to a sufficient hardness , you may correct and make them exceeding hard by Baking them a second time after this manner . Take two Ounces of Calamy , or Lapis Calaminaris , in impalpable Powder ; add to this two Ounces of Oyl of Vitriol , and two Ounces of the Water of White Eggs ; put all these into a Retort , lute thereto a Receiver , and let them distil , you 'll have from them a very fair Water , with which , and some very fine Barly-Meal , make a Paste , Coffin your Pearls in this , and Bake them in an Oven as before , they 'll thus become exceeding hard , and recover their Natural Transparency . There are many other Ways very good to make Pearl with Oyls , which add to the Growth and Largeness of the Seed Pearl , as much as you will have them , but all these Preparations being very tedious , and our Book large enough already , we are of Opinion , 't is best to let them alone for the present ; besides , we have said enough to hand the Intelligent Readers to those Secrets discoursed off , and taught them herein , reserving the more enlarged and fuller Instructions for the first Edition we make hereof in two Volumes . CHAP. CCXLVII. How to blanch fine Pearl . THE Beauty of Pearl consists entirely in the Brightness of their White Colour , such as are Spotted , or of a dark Yellow , being the least estimable ; you may however restore these last to a true Luster and Whiteness , by letting them soak and cleanse first in Bran-Water , then in Milk-warm Water , and last of all steep them twenty four Hours in the Mercury-Water assigned Chap. 244. This done , string and hang them in a well closed Glass Body , to dry in the Sun , as before . The Bran-Water is made by boiling two good Handfuls of Wheaten-Bran in a Quart of Water , until the Water has drawn all the Strength thereof to it ; and thus you are to use it afterwards for cleansing the Pearl ; you must string and lay them all together in a glazed Earthen Pan , and pour thereon one third of this Water , when they have soaked , until the Water be tolerably cooled , that you may endure the heat , rub them with your Hands gently to cleanse them the better ; continue so until the water be cold , throw out this cold water , and pour on another third part of the Bran-water still boiling , and so use it as the former , throwing it away when cold , and then pouring on the remainder of the water , proceeding still after the former manner ; after this , just heat some fair water , and pour it on them , to refresh and take away the Remains of the Bran ; shift this water , pouring on more fresh warm water ; do thus thrice without handling them , then lay them on a Sheet of very clean white Paper , to dry in a Shade , and last of all steep them in your Mercury-water , to bring them to Perfection . CHAP. CCXLVIII . Another Way to Blanch and Cleanse fine Pearl . THERE are several other easie ways to cleanse and whiten the Pearl , which may serve on indifferent occasions , and for ordinary uses . Pound Alabaster to impalpable Powder , and rub the Pearl with it very gently , this will cleanse them , or you may let them remain in this Powder twenty four Hours afterwards , they be still much the better for it . VVhite Coral has also the same Effect as the Alabaster , using it after the like manner . Tartar calcined white , and divested of all its moisture , as we have shewn elsewhere , is very good for the same use . Clary , or Old Salt dissolved , filter'd , coagulated , well dried and ground , is as effectual as any of the former things , for cleansing and blanching of Pearl , by rubbing them therewith a considerable time ; you may afterwards lay them up in some Millet ground large , and it will contribute to them a Natural Brightness . There are several other ways to cleanse and whi●en Pearl , but those we have here proposed , are suf●icient . CHAP. CCXLIX . To make Counterfeit Pearl , very like the Natural . THIS Receipt for making Counterfeit Pearl has a much more fine and solid effect than any now a-days in use . Take Chalk well purified , and separated from its grossness and Sand , make Paste thereof , and so mould it up like Pearl in a Mould for that purpose ; pierce these through with a Bristle , and let them afterwards dry before the Sun , or for more dispatch in an Oven , till they receive a just hardness ; then string them on a very fine Thread of Silver , colour them over lightly with Bole-Armoniack , diluted in water of VVhites of Eggs , then drench them with a Pencil and Fair water , and so apply Leaf-Silver all over , and let them dry ; this done , burnish them with a VVolf's Tooth , till they shine very finely . To give them the true Colour of Pearl , make a Glue of Parchment , or rather Vellom Shavings ; thus Wash the Shavings in warm Water very well , and boil them after in a new Pot to a thickness , and strain this Glew . When you use this Glue , you must warm it on ● flat Vessel , then dip the string of Pearl therein , so as not to fill the interval Inches between each Pearl but that every one may be done all over equally ; a●ter this let them dry ; if you observe any Baulk , 〈◊〉 Defect on them , you may dip them in a second time● thus they 'll assume a finer and more transparen● Whiteness , and will have a certain Darkness within and Lustre on the outside , which compleats and ●rings them to the Natural Beauty of real fine Pearl . You may after this manner do with Transparent Beads of Alabaster , and very white Mouth-Glew , and it will add very much to their Beauty ; but Leaf Silver does certainly contribute most of any thing else whatever to their Splendour . OF THE ART OF GLASS . BOOK XII . To make Crystal Looking-glass : How to Grind , Polish , Diamond-Cut , and Silver them : To Make Glass and Metal Mirrours , &c. CHAP. CCL . THIS is the Twelfth and last Book of our Art of Glass , which should have indeed succeeded the First ; but we waited some Memoirs on the Subject , nor we have not yet found them ; this made us put it off , and place it here : Besides , there is such a Coherency of Matters , in the Order of the Second Book , as we could not possibly dispose of any other way , without breaking their due Course , and the Affinity and Connection they have with each other , which the Reader may easily perceive ; but what matter is it where we place this , so that it may be found among our Works ; and we deliver nothing therein , but what we have been familiar withal . That of Looking-glasses is undoubtedly the finest and more admirable part of Glass-Work ; 't is the most perfect Master-piece of all the Art. We presume the Order we have given in placing it here , will be approved of , since 't is the Subject of the last Book , and the Twelfth , which is a perfect Number , and comprehends all other in Sacred Philosophy . Twelve , the Number of Grace and Perfection , has been highly esteemed at all times for those Wonderful Properties ascribed to it ; 't is very much celebrated in Holy Writ , and the Divine Plato has used it with the same Deference in his Works , if the Account which those , who were intimate with this Famous Number Twelve , have left of it , were not Foreign to our Design , we could give the Curious such extraordinary Relations , as would create a Mighty Respect in them for the same . We already noted in the First Chapter , that 't is about Two Hundred Years since the Invention of Looking-glasses , and also how they were found out : Before these the Ladies made use of Steel , or Copper , or well polished Marble Mirrours , these have been in use for many Ages : We can by the help of History , look back on them as far as the Time of Ozias King of Iuda , which was about the Fourth or Fifth Olympiad ; and as many Years before the Building of Rome ; Seven Hundred and sixty four Years after this , our Christian Aera commenced . Now tho' the Tyrians were very conversant in Glass-work , yet they had not the Knowledge of making Looking-glass . Among all the Excellencies of the Art , none comes near this , nothing can be finer , or admit of greater Admiration , than to see that all the Actions of the Beholder , are so justly and lively represented in these Glasses , that he has an opportunity of discovering what is to be valued on him , and correcting what 's amiss ; these Truths are too apparent for any to disprove ; for the Experience of them are at this Day to be made as easily by the Meanest as the Greatest Persons . We shall discourse but very briefly of the Metal for making these Glasses ; for 't is the same Crystal we have prescribed throughout the First Book , but we will enlarge on this Matter a little , for the conveniency of making the Mirrours of Metal , &c. whereof we 'll shew how to compound the Stuff , and the way of working them . CHAP. CCLI . The Way to make Looking-glass . ALL those who employ themselves in the Art o● Glass , do it always without derogating from their Quality , as we have noted in Chap. 3. which our Kings have always taken care to maintain . The Undertakers of the Royal Glass-Manufacture in France , when they obtained their Grants of Priviledges , did at the same time require , That al● Persons of Quality , who should associate in the Manufacture , might do it without lessening their Quality ; to which his Majesty agreed with Exemptio● from their Taille , and several other Privileges , a● Quartering of Soldiers , &c. for all such , their Substitutes , Servants , and Domesticks . The first Grant of Priviledges to this Manufacture , bears Date in October 1665. in Favour of Nicholas du Noyer , for Twenty Years , which was renewed by Letters Patent of the last of December 1683. for Thirty Years to Peter Bagneux . The second Privilege for the Manufacture Royal of Large Glass , was granted Decemb. 14.1688 . to Abraham T' Hevart , for Thirty Years , with the saving Privilege of Nobility as the former : These having setled at St. Gobin , near La Fere , did by Letters Patent of February 1693. obtain Exemption from the Tailles , ( or Subsidy on the Third Estate , which is a constant Tax ) and other Impositions , as well for themselves , as their Deputies and Servants . And to avoid all Contest , these two Manufactures were united by Order of the Council of State , April 19. 1695. and Confirmed May 1. following , under the Name of Francis Plaistrier . Now for making these Glasses , the same Crystal assigned throughout Book 1. is sufficient ; the Difference is only instead of Working it as you do there , to cast it flat and not blow , as in Chap. 3. to which we refer the Reader . The Manner of Casting the Metal , did not commence with the Invention of Looking-glass ; for the Workmen at first , used to take a piece of Metal very large , clipt and done on the Marble into Quarries as big as they 'd have them ; these they set afterwards on a Pallet of Iron in the Furnace , till they were in a Fusion , and so spread and united ; hence they took and put them into another little Furnace for that purpose , S. S. S. with fine searced Ashes to Bake ; this done , they raised the Fire by degrees , and so let it go out again , and drew off the Glasses , working them after our manner in the next Chapter . Thus too they wrought their little Round Glasses , or Mirrours , first shaping them out of a long piece of Metal , by Circumvolution , and afterwards clipping them as the former , so finished them in the Furnaces , and made them fit for Polishing . Since that time having attempted to make them very large , they fell upon the Way of Casting the Glass like other Metal on Sand Beds , such as the Founders use ; and to perform it the better , they have a Roller of Metal to run over the Surface of the Glass Metal for enlarging the Plate , and to smooth and compact it withal . For such as would make them very large indeed , as are wrought at Muran near Venice , and in our Royal Manufacturers , they had a much better , and easier Method than doing them on Sand , viz. in large Tables of well polished Copper , whereon they cast the Metal , but these not having strength enough to abide the Heat , we have since made use of Iron , which will sufficiently perform the Effect . These Tables whereon the Glasses are at first sight Cast to their proper Largeness , must have their bottom sunk as low as you intend the Thickness of your Glass-Plate , and have a Conveniency to push it out , as soon as ever 't is prepared thereon . Some make use of Marble ones with Covers , over which they have a Plate , or Runner of Metal , to slide and press it on the Glass Metal , that the Glass Plate may be the more compact and even . Thus are large Glasses made , which are no less surprizing than pretty , and 't is a very considerable Improvement they are brought to at this Day , of making them so extraordinary large for Mirrours : One would admire to what Perfection the Wit of Man may arrive at , and is capable of bearing from the advantage of Serious Application and Study in profound Matters . CHAP. CCLII . To Grind , Polish , and Cut the Looking-Glass . AFTER you have it from the Furnace , you must lay it on Sand , in a convenient place to strengthen , else it will break in Working it ; then grind it on very fine Sand and Water . This time 't is that the Workmen give it the first Fashioning ; then they do it over again with Powder of Emery instead of the Sand , and so give ●t a second Improvement ; when they have done it enough with these two , they do it a third time with Tripoly instead of Emery , this Polishes the Glass perfectly ; others give these Glasses a fourth Process with Calx of Tin , to bring them to a very extraordinary Lustre and Polish . The Diamond-Cut is done by Grinding the Cry●tal on Drift Sand and Water , as much as you think ●onvenient . These are the several Methods for finishing the ●ooking-glass all to the Silvering , which must be disposed thereon , as in the next Chapter before it ●as the Quality of a Mirrour . CHAP. CCLIII . To File , or Silver the Looking-Glass . THE Glass is not perfected , till it be Silvered ; for without that , it is impossible it should distinctly shew the opposite Objects ; 't is the Filing or Silvering therefore which gives it its just Perfection . For this you must have a firm well smooth'd Table , much greater than the Glass , whereon spread one or more Sheets of very fine Tin , let them be as thin as Paper , and so prepared , as not to have any Rumple , Furrow , or Spot , else the Glass will be spoil'd : Over these Sheets spread good Mercury quite covering them with it ; when the Mercury has soaked in well , place the Glass thereon , and it will stick to them ; then turn it , and spread Sheets o● Paper on the Filing ; press it gently , smoothing an● stroaking it with your Hands , to take off the Superfluous Mercury ; then dry it in the Sun , or by a sof● Fire , and it will become perfect . But because 't is not so easie to file the Large Glasses as the small , you must have recourse to a Table for the purpose , with a Diamond-Cut rising Border , to keep the Sides of the Glass firm , whereon yo● must lay it , with the Backside , ( which is to be filed ) upwards ; then lay on the Sheeted Tin very smooth and closely ; over these the Mercury , to dissolve them● then with the Sheets of Paper cover all , and 〈◊〉 smooth , and run it over with your Hands to take away the Surplus of the Mercury , and so dry it 〈◊〉 before . The rest of the Work depends on the Framing them , and giving the suitable Ornaments accordingly . CHAP. CCLIV . How to make Spherical Concaves , and Convex Glasses , commonly called Burning Mirrours . BEFORE we discourse of the Metal Mirrours , we will shew how to do such of Glass : The Use of these Glasses is to unite the Sun-Beams , and so kindle a Flambeau , Wood , or any other Combustible Matter . By them Metals also may be dissolved in a little time as easily as in a Crucible on a Furnace , or at a Forge . The Whole Mystery of making them , is to have the Moulds of a Round Shape , otherwise they have but a very weak Effect on the Sun Beams ; the Moulds must be so exactly made , as neither side shall differ from the other . To make the Concave Glass , you must have the Mould Convex , and the Convexity thereof must be made by a Sphere , according as you have it greater or less ; and 't is from this Sphere the Convexity of the Mirrour must be taken : As for instance , Take a Sphere of what bigness you please , divide it equally , and also one of the Hemispheres in three equal parts , by Planes parallel to the great Circle , the Convex , Segment shall then be the sixth part of the whole Sphere , and the Measure of your Mirrour : To do this you may have recourse to the Works of Archimedes , Iohn Baptista Porta , Kircher , and many other Authors . If you would make the Mirrour a Convex Glass , you must have the Moulds Concave , and these you may do two ways , thus : Take the two Concave Sides of the Mould , and closing them together equally , as the Founders do their Frames , pour in through the Mouth of the Mould your Crystal Metal , letting it fill the Mould , and afterwards cool . Another way is , to take two Concave Mirrours , and joyning their Faces , solder them well all about , only leaving a small Orifice , through which you may fill it with some Aqua Vitae , and so stop the Hole , and frame them with Wood , or Metal : This sort of Mirrour , has a more ready Influence on the Sun Beams then any other ; we 'll say something of the Effect thereof when we come to speak of the Metal Mirrours , but upon the whole Matter you must have these Glasses all very well polished . These Burning Glasses may be made Parabolick , or Spheroidal , and such have still a better Effect than the Spherick : You must proceed in Moulding them as with the former ; you must observe a just proportion in doing them ; for when they are too much raised , they are hindered by their Deepness from having a good Effect ; and upon this depends the Whole Nicity of the Art. CHAP. CCLV. How to make Metal Mirrours , Concave Sphericks , or Parabolicks , usually called , Steel Burning Mirrours . THE Authors cited in the former Chapter are very useful to be consulted on this occasion to demonstrate the Method , Use , and Excellency of these Mirrours ; for which reason we shall say but little on that Subject . The Moulds for them are prepared as in the former Chapter , whether Concave , or Convex , and for such as are flat , they may be cast on Sand. The Metal of these Mirrours is called Steel , because it is of a very hard and bright Composure and Temper , and the harder the Metal , the better the Mirrour , and the easier to polish ; the Whiteness of it is very convenient for giving the Quality of Burning , and not only for that , but several other Uses ; if it be too Red , or Black , it alters the true Distance and Colour of its opposite Objects ; you must therefore make them of this following Composition . Take three Pounds of Copper , one Pound of fine Tin , half an Ounce of White Arsenick , an Ounce of Tartar : First , melt the Copper , then put the Tin in immerged in the Copper , else it will fume away in the Melting , and leave the Copper behind ; these two being well melted together , cast in the Arsenick , and Tartar : After this let all melt for two or three Hours , and so Mould it . Some Persons dose with the former weight of Copper and Tin , half a Pound of White Arsenick ; ●thers instead of Arsenick , put in a quarter of a Pound of Antimony . Here is another way to compound this Stuff of the following Ingredients ; and after that another Composition much more excellent than either . Take a Pound of well refined Copper , melt it , then add three Pounds of fine Tin ; as soon as these are well melted , add six Ounces of Red Tartar calcined , one Ounce of Salt-petre , two Drams of Allom , and two Ounces of Arsenick , let these melt for three or four Hours , that the Salts may evaporate , and the Stuff will be fit for moulding ; this Stuff is more solid and hard than the former , and much better to make the flat Mirrours for Looking . You shall be shewn how to polish them in the next Chapter . We having promised to assign a much more excellent Stuff for Concaves than the former ones , will give it here ; because of the hardness and compactness thereof , it is more capable of polishing , and consequently much better than the rest . Take Plates of Copper one Pound , mince 'em that they may be put into a Crucible , imbibing them with Oyl of Tartar ; then powder a quarter of ● Pound of White Arsenick , and put these S. S. S. as we have shewn the Method elsewhere , until you fill the Crucible ; pour on them afterwards Linseed-Oyl to cover the Arsenick and the Copper ; head and lute you● Crucible , and when the lute is dry set it on a Sand-Furnace , letting the Sand arise no higher than the Head ; heat the Furnace very gently till it arrive a● a just degree , and the Oyl begins to evaporate ; 〈◊〉 this time the Oyl will prepare the Copper for retaining the Arsenick , which must enter the Copper as easily as Oyl does Leather ; set it again on fresh Sand , and increase the heat of the Furnace , giving i● the same degree as before , until the Oyl evaporate● and boyl up ; then take off the Crucible , let it cool and break it , you 'll find your Copper of several Colours , and would be much better , if instead of Arsenick , you made use of Orpiment . Take of this Copper one part , of Latten two parts , melt the Latten on a smart Fire , and so put in the Copper ; when they are well melted , cast the Metal Drop by Drop into a glazed Earthen Vessel full of Water , over which lay a Bush , or Broom for the Stuff to go through ; thus you 'll have a Metal not to be touched with a File , nor Brittle , as good as any Steel for all uses whatsoever . Take of this hard Metal three parts , and best Tin of Cornwall , which has no Lead in 't , one part ; melt the Metal before you put in the Tin ; after these are well incorporated , you may fill your Moulds , &c. This is the best of all our Compositions for making of all sorts of these Metal Mirrours ; 't is white , hard , not Brittle , and very easily polished exceeding fine . CHAP. CCLVI. To Polish the Steel Mirrours . WHATSOEVER Exactness you use in Moulding these , they do never receive their true Shape and Perfection , until they are Polished and Burnished ; in doing which , least you should spoil , or endamage them , you must Work away the Outside at the Wheel , with the Sand-stone , which the Pewterers and Brasiers make use of , and then apply the Handle , and Polish them sufficiently by rubbing with Water . This done , take it off this Wheel , and put it on the Second , where rub it with Emery prepared , that it may be finely polished , so as the Scars may be scarce perceptible . Do this in an Oblique Line . Then take it off this , and set it on such another ; rub it with Blood-stone prepared , and afterwards use Calx of Tin , working it for a long time , until it have its due Burnish and Perfection , still doing it in the same Obliquity . You must keep these Mirrours from the Moistness of the Air , and Steams ; or if they should happen to be endamaged by any such , you may restore them by rubbing on them a piece of Deer , or Goats Skin , humouring the Oblique Line ; you must not use any Woollen , or Linen Stuff , for they spoil these Mirrours . These Mirrours may be also polished with Lead Artificially melted , with Emery and Water , for the First Process ; and very fine Emery and Lead for the Second ; and in the Last , with Blood-stone and Tin Dross ; these make a finer Burnish than the former ; for the Mirrour is highly polished by the Tin-Dross . This is all we resolve to give account of on these sort of Mirrours , for attracting and uniting the Sun Beams . There are many other , as Cylinders , Pyramids , whereof we forbear to discourse , since the Authors which have writ of them , have done it with much more sufficiency than we pretend to . They ascribe the first Invention of Burning Mirrours to Prometheus , when he stole the Fire from Heaven to carry to the Earth . Archimedes made very happy use of them in defence of his Country , when he burnt the Fleet of Marcellus before Syracuse , by placing his Burning Glass on the highest Turret in the City , whence proceeded such a mighty Conflagration , as destroy'd that vast Flota in spight of Neptune and the Waters . Proclus too , a Brave and Famous Mathematician , burnt the Fleet of Vitelian , that came to Besiege Constantinople ; which he preserved by this Industry . Many other Fine and Admirable Relations might be given of the Effects of these Mirrours , but they are too tedious : We shall therefore here put an end to this Chapter , and consequently the whole Book , desiring the Reader to receive all in good part , and excuse the lesser Faults of Impression and Phrase , since we can assure him the Doses are justly prescribed , and the Preparations exact which we have assigned . The End of the Twelfth Book . AN APPENDIX Shewing how to Make GLASS-EYES Very Natural . THIS Secret is fine , and never was made publick before : The Eyes may be done so curiously , that the Nicest Examination can scarce discover them to be Artificial . You must have a lighted Lamp , and a long hollow piece of Crystal , as thick as the middle of a Pipes Shank ; the Bore must be pretty wide , and the Pipe about four Inches in length ; let the Mouthend be like that of a Trumpet , and the other widened and turned outwards like the Breech ; this may be done by heating one end in the Flame of your Lamp , and whilst it is hot , turn it so with a pair of Nippers . Hold this Pipe in your left hand ( having before put a little Cotten into it , about an Inch or less from the Mouth , to hinder your Breath from being too violently blown on the Work ; ) let it be between your two Fore-fingers and Thumb ( as you 'd make a Pen ; ) heat the Wide end in the Flame red hot , and so wind long Thread White Enamel about the grossness of a Bugle ; your Threads must be red hot too , and solid , then they 'll easily joyn the Crystal Pipe ; make by this Serpentine Winding a Convex of such Diameter , as when blown out will answer that of the Eye you would imitate . This done , keep the Work in the Flame till red hot , and so blow it out into an Orbicular Form , of a just largeness ; then heating a-new the top , pinch with your Nippers a small Hole , and so turn it with the end of them round , of the bigness your Eye must be within the White , in this Hole wind pure Thread-Crystal as small as fine Packthread , till you fill it up , taking away the Superfluity ( if any ) with your Nippers ; heat it in the Flame , blowing gently often ; by this the Crystal will work Convexly , to give you the full shape of your Eye . Upon this Crystal ( heating it again ) you must wind Crystal Thread small almost as Horse-hair , and coloured as the Eye you 'd imitate ; cover it once over , and as soon as the Center fills , cut off the Thread with your Nippers , that no Surplus remain : You must hold it often in the Flame , still gently blowing to keep it in a true order . AB , is the Cristal Pipe A , the Mouth C , where the Cotten must be B , the widened end of the Pipe BD , the glass eye a makeing E , the forme of the Eye shewing how the small coloured threads must be laid on piece , about the thickness of a Goose-Quill , and so heating and blowing as before , bring it to its due Form. Then hold the Side thereof in the Flame , and with a Thread of White Enamel , not quite so hot , you may as it were cut out the Shape of your Eye , as you 'd have it , Oblique , or otherwise ; then border it with the said Thread , holding the Edges in the Flame , to become smooth and even . Now if you find too much Enamel in any part of the Border , you may take it off with another Thread of the same Enamel , not altogether heated so much as that you 'd diminish , which must be held in the Flame accordingly : Then proceed to Cutting or Filing ; and last of all , Anneal it in a small Pan of ●●als , and you have finished . FINIS . THE INDEX . BOOK I. Chap. 1. THE Rise , Antiquity , and Vse of Glass . Pag. 1 Chap. 2. The manner of Building Eurnaces for making Glass . p. 19 Chap. 3. The way of making Glass , and the Privileges of Gentlemen who make it . p. 25 Instruments for the Work. p. 31 Chap. 4. The Places where Polverine , Rochetta , and Soda are found . p. 33 The Vertues of Kali Salt in Curing the Stone , Vlcers , &c. p. 37 Chap. 5. To Extract Salt of Polverine , Rochetta , and Soda . ibid. To Calcine Tartar. 41 Chap. 6. To make Frit for Crystal . 42 A pretty Dissolution of Glass by Cold. ibid. Chap. 7. To Extract Salt from Polver . of the Levant . p. 46 Chap. 8. Observations for a Gold Colour in Crystal . p. 48 Chap. 9. To Extract Salt from Fern. ibid. Chap. 10. To make Salt of several Vegetables . p. 50 Salt for Manuring . p. 52 Chap. 11. To make fine Crystal of Salt of Lime . p. 54 Chap. 12. To make ordinary Frit . p. 55 Chap. 13. To make very fine Crystal . p. 57 The Vertues of Sandever . p. 58 Chap. 14. To make common Glass White & Crystaline . p. 59 Chap. 15. To purifie Salt of Tartar. 60 Chap. 16. General Remarks for all Colours . p. 61 Chap. 17. To prepare Zaffer . p. 62 Chap. 18. To prepare Manganese . p. 64 The Philosophers Magnesia . p. 65 Chap. 19. Feretto of Spain the Mineral . p. 67 Chap. 20. How to make Feretto of Spain . p. 68 Chap. 21. Another extraordinary way to make Feretto of Spain . p. 69 Chap. 22. Another way to make it of Copper only . p. 70 Chap. 23. A Second way to make it of Copper only . p. 71 Chap. 24. To make Crocus Martis . ibid. Chap. 25. Another way to make it . p. 73 Chap. 26. To make it with Aqua-fortis . p. 74 Chap. 27. To make it with Aqua Regalis . ibid. Chap. 28. Another way . p. 75 Chap. 29. The best way to make Crocus Martis . p. 76 Chap. 30. To Calcine small Copper Plates . ibid. Chap. 31. Another way . p. 78 Chap. 32. To Calcine it to a Red Powder . p. 79 Chap. 33. To make thrice Calcined Copper . ibid. Chap. 34. Another way . p. 80 Chap. 35. To make Aes ustum . p. 81 Chap. 36. Another better way . ibid. Chap. 37. The way to make Crocus Martis . p. 83 Chap. 38. Another way . p. 84 Chap. 39. Another easie way . p. 85 Chap. 40. The first Egmarine Colour for Glass . ibid. Chap. 41. Another Bluer Sea-green . p. 87 Chap. 42. Another with Crystal . ibid. Chap. 43. A fine Egmarine . p. 88 Chap. 44. Another . p. 89 Chap. 45. Another finer than the rest . p. 90 Chap. 46. To make Emerald Colour in Glass . ibid. Chap. 47. Another finer . p. 91 Chap. 48. Another wonderful Green. p. 92 Chap. 49. Another Oriental Emerald . p. 93 Chap. 50. To give Glass a Turcoise-Blue . p. 94 BOOK II. Chap. 51. THe Design and Contents of this Book . p. 96 Chap. 52. To make Aqua-fortis . p. 98 To make strong Lute . p. 101 A Furnace for several Vses . p. 112 Chap. 53. To purifie Vitriol for making the Aqua-fortis stronger . p. 104 Chap. 54. To make Aqua Regalis . p. 105 Chap. 55. Another far stronger , called Water of the two Champions . p. 106 Chap. 56. Another more easie way . p. 108 Another with Spirit of Salt. ibid. The Sovereign Menstruum of the Philosophers . p. 109 Chap. 57. To Calcine Tartar. ibid. Chap. 58. To make fair Chalcedony . p. 110 Chap. 59. A Second sort . p. 113 Chap. 60. A third and last way . p. 116 Mercury purified . ibid. Silver Calcined . ibid. Common Salt purified . p. 117 Sal-Armoniack purified . ibid. BOOK III. Chap. 61. THe Design and Contents of this Book . p. 121 Chap. 62. A Gold Yellow in Glass . p. 122 Chap. 63. A Granat Colour . p. 123 Chap. 64. An Amethist Colour . p. 124 Chap. 65. A Sapphire Colour . p. 125 Chap. 66. A finer . ibid. Chap. 67. A Velvet-Black Colour . p. 126 Chap. 68. Another fairer . ibid. Chap. 69. Another yet much fairer . p. 127 Chap. 70. A Milk-white colour . ibid. Chap. 71. Another fairer . p. 128 Chap. 72. The Colour of Lapis Lazuli in Glass . ibid. Chap. 73. A Marble Colour . p. 129 Chap. 74. A Peach Colour . p. 130 Chap. 75. A deep Red. ibid. Chap. 76. Rock-Crystal calcined . p. 131 Chap. 77. To make Pearl Colour in Crystal . p. 132 Chap. 78. To Tinge Natural Crystal of a Viper Colour . p. 133 Chap. 79. To make in Natural Crystal , the Colours of the Ruby , Topaz , Opal , Heliotrope , &c. p. 134 BOOK IV. Chap. 80. THe Design and Contents of this Book . p. 136 The Philosophers Lac Virginis . p. 137 Chap. 81. To calcine Lead . p. 138 Chap. 82. To make Glass of Lead . p. 139 Chap. 83. To Work this Glass . p. 140 Chap. 84. To give it a fine Emerald colour . p. 141 Chap. 85. To give it a fairer . p. 142 Chap. 86. To give it a Topaz colour . ibid. Chap. 87. To give it an Egmarine . p. 143 Chap. 88. To give it a Granat . p. 144 Chap. 89. To give it a Sapphire . ibid. Chap. 90. To give it a Gold colour . p. 145 BOOK V. Chap. 91. THe Design and Contents of this Book . p. 147 The Original of Precious Stones , and Metals . p. 148 Chap. 92. To prepare Rock Crystal . p. 150 Chap. 93. To make fine and pure Salt of Tartar. p. 152 The Philosophers Salt of Tartar. p. 153 Chap. 94. Paste for Oriental Emerald . ibid. Chap. 95. Another deeper . p. 155 Chap. 96. Another fairer . p. 156 Chap. 97. Another fairer . ibid. Chap. 98. Another very fair . p. 157 Chap. 99. Paste for Oriental Topaz . ibid. Chap. 100. Another fine Topaz . p. 158 Chap. 101. An Oriental Crysolite . p. 159 Chap. 102. A Sky-colour Paste for Beryl , called Aqua-Marina . ibid. Chap. 103. A Paste for Sapphire . p. 160 Chap. 104. Another Oriental Sapphire . p. 161 Chap. 105. Another deeper . ibid. Chap. 106. Paste for Oriental Granat . p. 162 Chap. 107. Another of a deeper colour . p. 163 Chap. 108. Another fairer . ibid. Chap. 109. Observations for Pastes and their colours . p. 164 To prepare the Crucibles . p. 165 Chap. 110. To make Sulphur Saturni to be used in Paste for Gems . p. 166 Observations on the Sweetness of Sal Saturni . p. 169 Chap. 111. To make very hard Pastes with Sulphur Saturni , and to give them all the colour of Precious Stones . ibid. Chap. 112. Saturnus Glorificatus , how to make it . p. 171 Chap. 113. To make Paste for Precious Stones of Saturnus Glorificatus . p. 172 Chap. 114. To make a very fair Carbuncle . p. 173 The Opinions of several Authors concerning the Carbuncle . ibid. The Sentiments of our Author . p. 174 Chap. 115. Another more Noble , called Carbunculus nocte Illuminans . p. 175 The Author's Opinion thereof . p. 176 A fine way to Calcine Gold. p. 177 Chap. 116. To make Oriental Ruby . p. 178 Very fine Rubies of Queen Elizabeth of Austria , and Mary de Medicis . p. 179 Chap. 117. To make Balass Ruby . p. 180 Chap. 118. To make Oriental Sapphire . ibid. Chap. 119. To make Oriental Emerald . p. 181 Chap. 120. To make Turcoise . p. 182 Chap. 121. To make Oriental Topaz . p. 183 Chap. 122. To make Crysolite . ibid. Chap. 123. Another way of making all sorts of Precious Stones much harder . p. 184 Chap. 124. To make a fair Emerald . p. 185 Chap. 125. To make a Violet Sapphire . p. 186 Chap. 126. Another Violet Sapphire of a deeper colour . ibid. Chap. 127. Another very fine Blue Sapphire . p. 187 Chap. 128. Another fine Sapphire . ibid. Chap. 129. Another admirable Blue . p. 188 Chap. 130. To make Beryl , or Egmarine . ibid. Chap. 131. A deeper Egmarine . p. 189 Chap. 132. To make a fair Jacynth . ibid. Chap. 133. Another fairer Jacynth . p. 190 Chap. 134. Another Oriental Jacynth . ibid. Chap. 135. To make a very fine Powder . p. 191 Chap. 136. Another Powder . ibid. Chap. 137. Iargons of Auvergne , how to make those Red , that are of a Gridelin colour . p. 192 Chap. 138. To Extract the Tincture of the Iargons , and therewith to make a fine and very hard Diamond . p. 193 How to prepare a Sulphurous Tripoly . p. 194 Chap. 139. To make a Diamond . p. 195 Chap. 140. To make Diamond of Alanson . p. 196 Chap. 141. To give the Natural Colour and Hardness of true Diamonds to Crystal , and Diamond of Alanson . ib. Chap. 142. Another Way . p. 198 Chap. 143. Another way to harden them , and make them sparkle as much as fine Natural Diamond . ibid. Chap. 144. To turn White Sapphire into a true Diamond . p. 199 Chap. 145. Another way . p. 200 Chap. 146. Another way . p. 201 BOOK VI. Chap. 147. THE Design and Contents of this Book . p. 203 Chap. 148. To prepare the principal Stuff for Enamel . p. 205 Chap. 149. Milk-white Enamel . p. 206 Chap. 150. Turcoise colour Enamel . p. 207 Chap. 151. A very fine Blue Enamel . p. 209 Chap. 152. Another . ibid. Chap. 153. A very fine Green Enamel . p. 210 Chap. 154. Another . p. 211 Chap. 155. Another . ibid. Chap. 156. A Black Enamel . p. 212 Chap. 157. Another . p. 213 Chap. 158. Another . ibid. Chap. 159. A Purple colour'd Enamel . 214 Observations by the Author , on the Nobleness of this Colour . ibid. Chap. 160. Another Purple Enamel . p. 216 Chap. 161. A Violet colour Enamel . ibid. Chap. 162. A Yellow Enamel . p. 217 Chap. 163. To make Crystal-Ground for Red Enam . p. 218 Chap. 164. A fine Preparat . of fusible Manganese . p. 219 Chap. 165. To make a fixt Sulphur . p. 220 Chap. 166. Another fixt and incombustible Sulphur . p. 221 Chap. 167. To Extract Spirit of Saturn . ibid. Chap. 168. A Blood-red Enamel . p. 223 Chap. 169. Another . p. 224 Chap. 170. A Sparkling Ruby-red Enamel . p. 225 Chap. 171. A Balass-Ruby colour Enamel . ibid. Chap. 172. A Rose colour Enamel . p. 226 Chap. 173. Another very fine Rose colour Enamel . ibid. Chap. 174. Another Rose colour Enamel . p. 227 Chap. 175. A Splendid Carbuncle-colour Enamel . p. 228 To Calcine Gold. p. 229 Chap. 176. To Calcine Copper for making Vitriol of Venus without Corrosives . p. 230 The Author's Report of the Excellency and Vertues of this Vitriol and its Spirit . p. 231 Chap. 177. To make Vitriol of Venus without Corrosives . p. 232 Chap. 178. To Extract this fine Vitriol . p. 234 Chap. 179. To draw off the White Spirit from the Vitriol . p. 236 To separate the Cap. Mort. for tinging of Glass . p. 237 To restore it to a Blue colour , by the Air. p. 238 BOOK VII . Chap. 180. THE Design and Contents of this Book . p. 240 Chap. 181. The Furnace for Enameling and Pourtraying withal . p. 242 Chap. 182. To Enamel on Gold. p. 243 Chap. 183. To Enamel on Silver . p. 245 Chap. 184. To Enamel on Copper . p. 246 Chap. 185. To prepare the Enamel for applying it on the Metals . p. 247 Chap. 186. To prepare the Colours for pourtraying on Enamel . p. 248 Chap. 187. The White . p. 249 Chap. 188. The Black. p. 250 Chap. 189. The Yellow . ibid. Chap. 190. The Blue . p. 351 A very fine Preparation of the Blue . ibid. Chap. 191. The Red. p. 252 Gold Calcin'd , and how . ibid. A Vermilion Red. p. 253 Chap. 192. To Pourtray on Enamel . p. 254 BOOK VIII . Chap. 193. THe Design and Cont. of this Book . p. 357 Chap. 194. The Furnace for baking and finishing the China-Ware in . p. 259 Chap. 195. A fine Composition of Mold for China-Ware . p. 260 Pure Earth for China-Ware . p. 261 Chap. 196. To Enamel China . p. 262 Chap. 197. To Paint China . p. 263 Chap. 198. To Gild China . ibid. Chap. 199. Another finer Way . p. 264 Chap. 200. To prepare Linseed-Oyl for Gilding on China . p. 265 BOOK IX . Chap. 201. THe Design and Cont. of this Book . p. 267 Chap. 202. A Furnace for finishing the Painted Glass . p. 270 Chap. 203. A White for Painting on Glass . p. 272 Chap. 204. A Black. p. 373 Chap. 205. A Yellow . ibid. Chap. 206. A Blue . p. 174 To prepare the Crucibles . ibid. Chap. 207. A Red. p. 175 Chap. 208. A Purple . p. 176 Chap. 209. A Green. p. 177 Chap. 210. Of other Colours in general . p. 227 Chap. 211. To make Rocaille . p. 278 Chap. 212. To Paint on Glass . p. 280 The Privileges granted to such as Work therein , &c. ib. Chap. 213. The Order of Baking the Glass in the Furnace , after it is painted . p. 283 Chap. 214. Another way to paint on Glass . p. 285. Chap. 215. To gild on Glass . p. 287 Chap. 216. Another way . ibid. Chap. 217. To paint all sorts of Colours in Globes . p. 288 BOOK X. Chap. 218. THE Design and Contents of this Book . p. 290 Chap. 219. To Extract Yellow Lake from Broom-flowers p. 292 Chap. 220. To Extract the Essential Tincture of Poppy , Iris , Rose , Violet , and all manner of Green Herbs to make Lakes of the same Colours . p. 293 Chap. 221. Another Way to Extract the Tinctures fro● these and several other Flowers , Greens , &c. p. 29● Chap. 222. The first process in making Scarlet Lake . p. 29● Chap. 223. To Extract the Tincture of Kerm-Berries for Scarlet Lake . p. 29● Chap. 224. A readier way to Extract the Tincture 〈◊〉 Kerm-Berries . p. 29● Chap. 225. To make Lake , or Tincture of Brazile . p. 30● Chap. 226. To Extract Tincture of Madder for Lake . p. 30● Chap. 227. How to make Ultra-marine , of Lapis-L●●zuli . ibid. Chap. 228. To make a Liquid for Moistning and Grining the Powders withal . p. 30● Chap. 229. To prepare a mild and strong Lixivium for the Lapis-Lazuli . p. 305 Chap. 230. The Form of the Vessel for settling the Liquors in , which are employed on the Lapis-Lazuli . p. 306 Chap. 231. To make strong Cement to mix with Lapis-Lazuli , to separate the finer and better Stuff from the other . p. 307 Chap. 232. To make a weaker Cement for separating the Colours of the Lapis-Lazuli . p. 308 Chap. 233. To purifie Linseed-Oyl . p. 309 Chap. 234. To incorporate the Powder of Lapis-Lazuli with the strong , or weaker Cement . p. 310 Chap. 235. To Extract the Ultra-marine . p. 311 Chap. 236. The Method of cleansing the Ultra-marine , when 't is separated from the Cement . p. 314 Chap. 237. To strain off the Ultra-marine already Washt and Purified . p. 315 Chap. 238. To Correct the Colours just before prepared . p. 316 Chap. 239. Another Way to make Ultra-marine , and draw off the Colours with more Expedition . ibid. Chap. 240. Another Way to make Ultra-marine . p. 318 A Colour inclining to , or near the Ultra-marine ; and that the Lapis-Laz . may be Artificially made . p. 320 Chap. 241. To make German Blue . ibid. BOOK XI . Chap. 242. THE Design and Contents of this Book . p. 322 The Origine of Pearls , and how they are increased ; with the like account of the Bezoar-Stone . p. 324 Chap. 243. To imitate fine Oriental Pearl . p. 326 A further Description of Furnaces , &c. ibid. The Philosophick Pearl . p. 329 Chap. 244. To make Mercury-Water for giving Transparency and Lustre to the Pearl . ibid. Chap. 245. Another Way to make those Pearls . p. 330 Chap. 246. Another Way . p. 332 Chap. 247. How to Blanch fine Pearl . p. 334 Chap. 248. Other Ways to Blanch and Cleanse fine Pearl p. 33● Chap. 249. To make Counterfeit Pearl like Natural . p. 336 BOOK XII . Chap. 250. THE Design and Contents of this Book p. 33● The Original of Looking-Glass , with an accou● when Metal , and Marble Mirrors were in use . p. 3●● Chap. 251. To make Looking-glass . p. 34● The Privileges of the Royal Glass Manufactures . 〈◊〉 Of Round Mirrors . p. 34● Chap. 252. To Grind , Polish , and Diamond-Cut t● Glasses . p. 34● Chap. 253. To File , or Silver them . p. 34● Chap. 234. To make Concave , and Convex Burnin● Glasses . p. 34● Chap. 255. To make Metal , or Steel Burning Mi●rors , whether Concaves , Sphericks , or Parabolicks , p. 34● Chap. 256. To Polish the Steel Mirrors . p. 34● The Invention and Effects of Burning Mirrors . p. 35● An Appendix concerning Glass-Eyes . p. 35● FINIS . Notes, typically marginal, from the original text Notes for div A43083-e1810 * Without doubt the Author has an eye in this Expression to the Multiplication of Gold. * Adepti . * From the Latine Glastum , which is called Vitrum by Caesar in his Comment . lib. 5. † It naturally hath a Blueishness . * Such as Van Helmont's Alkabest . * Wheel-Fire . * Neri says of the Spirit of V.V. Notes for div A43083-e6560 * Neri says Lime . Notes for div A43083-e18250 * London Quarts .